Tcc300 Ansi User 1vac388793-Mb Enb

—
Digital Tapchanger Control

TCC300
User Manual
Document ID: 1VAC388793-MB
Issued: 2019-05-27
Revision: B
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Copyright
This document and parts thereof must not be reproduced or copied without written
permission from ABB, and the contents thereof must not be imparted to a third party, nor
used for any unauthorized purpose.
The software or hardware described in this document is furnished under a license and may
be used, copied, or disclosed only in accordance with the terms of such license.
Trademarks
ABB is a registered trademark of the ABB Group. All other brand or product names
mentioned in this document may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respective holders.
Warranty
Please inquire about the terms of warranty from your nearest ABB representative.
www.abb.com/mediumvoltage
www.abb.com/substationautomation
Disclaimer
The data, examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for the concept or
product description and are not to be deemed as a statement of guaranteed properties. All
persons responsible for applying the equipment addressed in this manual must satisfy
themselves that each intended application is suitable and acceptable, including that any
applicable safety or other operational requirements are complied with. In particular, any
risks in applications where a system failure and/or product failure would create a risk for
harm to property or persons (including but not limited to personal injuries or death) shall
be the sole responsibility of the person or entity applying the equipment, and those so
responsible are hereby requested to ensure that all measures are taken to exclude or
mitigate such risks.
This product has been designed to be connected and communicate data and information
via a network interface which should be connected to a secure network. It is the sole
responsibility of the person or entity responsible for network administration to ensure a
secure connection to the network and to take the necessary measures (such as, but not
limited to, installation of firewalls, application of authentication measures, encryption of
data, installation of anti virus programs, etc.) to protect the product and the network, its
system and interface included, against any kind of security breaches, unauthorized access,
interference, intrusion, leakage and/or theft of data or information. ABB is not liable for
any such damages and/or losses.
This document has been carefully checked by ABB but deviations cannot be completely
ruled out. In case any errors are detected, the reader is kindly requested to notify the
manufacturer. Other than under explicit contractual commitments, in no event shall ABB
be responsible or liable for any loss or damage resulting from the use of this manual or the
application of the equipment.
Conformity
This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on
the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC Directive 2004/108/EC) and concerning electrical equipment for use
within specified voltage limits (Low-voltage directive 2006/95/EC). This conformity is
the result of tests conducted by ABB in accordance with the product standards EN 50263
and EN 60255-26 for the EMC directive, and with the product standards EN 60255-1 and
EN 60255-27 for the low voltage directive. The product is designed in accordance with the
international standards of the IEC 60255 series and ANSI C37.90.
Table of contents
Table of contents
Section 1 Introduction..........................................................................17
This manual............................................................................................ 17
Intended audience.................................................................................. 17
Product documentation...........................................................................17
Document revision history................................................................. 17
Symbols and conventions.......................................................................18
Symbols.............................................................................................18
Document conventions...................................................................... 18
Section 2 TCC300 overview................................................................21

Overview.................................................................................................21
Adapter panel or surface mounting kit.................................................... 23
Accessories............................................................................................ 25
TCC600 Communications Software.................................................. 25
Optional communication ports........................................................... 25
M‑2025B(D) Current Loop Interface Modules................................... 25
Backup relay......................................................................................26
M‑2026 AC-DC control power backup supply................................... 26
M‑2027 control power backup supply for AC only............................. 26
B-0920 control power backup harness.............................................. 26
M-2948 tap position sensor............................................................... 27
Section 3 Operation.............................................................................29
Front panel controls and indicators.........................................................29
Display and push buttons.................................................................. 29
Status indicators................................................................................ 34
Operation (HMI/TCC600)........................................................................35
Message screens.............................................................................. 35
Access codes.....................................................................................38
Access levels.....................................................................................38
Smart flash SD card user access key code..................................39
HMI Level Access prompt.............................................................39
Oscillograph recorder........................................................................ 39
Triggering oscillograph recorder from TCC600............................ 39
Retrieving oscillograph record from TCC600............................... 40
Clearing oscillograph records from TCC600................................ 43
TCC300 1
User Manual
Table of contents
Clearing oscillograph records from the HMI................................. 44

Sequence of events recorder..................................................................45
Triggering sequence of events recorder from TCC600..................... 45
Retrieving sequence of events record from TCC600........................ 46
Viewing sequence of events from TCC600....................................... 47
Clearing sequence of events records from TCC600......................... 48
Data logging............................................................................................49
Retrieving data logging data..............................................................49
Clearing data log records from TCC600............................................ 52
Converting datalog files to CSV format............................................. 53
Clearing data log records from the HMI.............................................54
Active setpoint profile..............................................................................54
Setting active setpoint profile from TCC600...................................... 54
Metering and status................................................................................ 56
Accessing of monitoring screens from the HMI................................. 59
Accessing the metering screens from the HMI.............................61
Accessing the status screens from the HMI................................. 62
Accessing the tapchanger status screens from the HMI.............. 62
Accessing the alarm status screens from the HMI....................... 63
Accessing the input status screens from the HMI........................ 64
Accessing the output status screens from the HMI...................... 65
Accessing the metering and status screen from TCC600............ 66
Primary metering (single or three phase).......................................... 67
Remote voltage bias..........................................................................68
Secondary metering status................................................................68
Tap information..................................................................................69
Tapchanger status.............................................................................70
Aux input status................................................................................. 71
Input status........................................................................................ 72
Output status..................................................................................... 72
Alarm status.......................................................................................73
CBEMA events and counter status.........................................................76
Demand and energy metering................................................................ 76
Accessing the present demand screens from the HMI...................... 76
Setting the demand interval from the HMI......................................... 77
Accessing the demand history screens from the HMI....................... 77
Accessing the demand and energy metering from TCC600..............78
Demand history/energy metering...................................................... 80
Accessing the energy metering screens from the HMI...................... 81
2 TCC300
User Manual
Table of contents
Resetting individual demand history or energy metering values

from the HMI......................................................................................82
Resetting all demand history or energy metering parameter
values from the HMI...........................................................................82
MASTER RESET of all demand history and energy metering
parameter values from the HMI......................................................... 82
Real Time Voltage Plot........................................................................... 83
Accessing Real Time Voltage Plot from TCC600.............................. 83
Display all metering................................................................................ 84
Motor current profile................................................................................87
Accessing the motor current screensfrom the HMI........................... 87
Initializing motor current values from the HMI................................... 87
Accessing motor current profile screen, resetting training mode
and peak motor current from TCC600............................................... 88
Harmonic analysis.................................................................................. 89
Accessing the harmonics screens from the HMI............................... 89
Viewing individual voltage/current harmonics screens from the HMI 90
Accessing harmonic analysis screen from TCC600.......................... 90
Tap information.......................................................................................91
Accessing the tap information screens from the HMI........................ 91
Calibrating tap position from the HMI................................................ 92
Drag hands............................................................................................. 92
Resetting drag hands values from the HMI....................................... 92
Resetting drag hands values from TCC600...................................... 92
Resettable operation counter..................................................................93
Resetting operation counter from the HMI.........................................93
Resetting operation counter from TCC600........................................ 93
Tap statistics...........................................................................................93
Viewing specific tap statistics from the HMI...................................... 93
Clearing tap statistics from the HMI...................................................94
Viewing tap statistics from TCC600...................................................94
Smart flash SD card................................................................................95
Accessing the smart flash SD card screens from the HMI................ 95
SD card quick capture....................................................................... 95
Quick capture file naming convention...........................................96
Initiating a smart flash SD card quick capture................................... 96
Loading setpoints from a smart flash SD card...................................97
Saving setpoints to a smart flash SD card.........................................98
Saving control data record files to a smart flash SD card..................98
Clone save and load..........................................................................99
TCC300 3
User Manual
Table of contents
Saving clone to a smart flash SD card....................................... 100

Loading clone from a smart flash SD card................................. 101
Loading configuration files from a smart flash SD card................... 101
Saving configuration files to a smart flash SD card......................... 102
Updating firmware from smart flash SD card...................................103
Entering the smart flash SD card user access code........................103
Utility/Calibration...................................................................................105
Accessing utility/calibration screens from the HMI.......................... 105
Source voltage......................................................................................107
Changing source voltage input........................................................ 107
Watchdog and power resets................................................................. 107
Resetting watchdog and power counters........................................ 107
Reinitializing control setpoints due to checksum error.................... 108
About screens.......................................................................................108
Accessing the about screens from the HMI..................................... 108
Remote control..................................................................................... 109
Low current alarm/block........................................................................112
Clearing low current alarm/block from the HMI............................... 112
Clearing low current alarm/block from TCC600...............................112
Motor seal-in failure alarm/block...........................................................113
Resetting motor seal-in failure alarm block from the HMI................114
Resetting motor seal-in failure alarm/block from TCC600............... 115
Lockout alarms..................................................................................... 115
Clearing master/follower or delta VAr peer to peer lockout alarm
from the HMI....................................................................................115
Clearing master/follower lockout alarm from TCC600..................... 115
Clearing delta VAr peer to peer paralleling lockout/alarms from
TCC600........................................................................................... 117
Section 4 TCC600............................................................................. 121

Hardware requirements........................................................................ 121
Installing TCC600................................................................................. 121
Initial local communications using direct USB connection....................122
Using RS-485 communications............................................................ 126
Using fiber-optic communications.........................................................128
Using Ethernet communications........................................................... 130
Using bluetooth communications..........................................................132
Communications with multiple controls.................................................133
Cautions................................................................................................136
Operation overview...............................................................................137
4 TCC300
User Manual
Table of contents
File menu.........................................................................................139
Connect menu................................................................................. 141
Communication menu......................................................................144
Monitor menu...................................................................................151
Metering & Status....................................................................... 152
Motor Current Profile.................................................................. 161
Demand & Energy Metering....................................................... 162
Tap Statistics.............................................................................. 165
Real Time Voltage Chart............................................................ 166
Harmonic Analysis......................................................................166
Master/Follower Alarm Messages.............................................. 168
Display All Metering....................................................................169
Set Metering Colors....................................................................172
Setup menu..................................................................................... 174
Profile......................................................................................... 176
Tapchanger Type....................................................................... 176
Setpoints.....................................................................................178
Configuration.............................................................................. 184
Tap Settings............................................................................... 193
Alarms........................................................................................ 197
Wakeup Screens........................................................................ 199
Data Logging.............................................................................. 201
Harmonics Setup........................................................................ 203
Oscillograph................................................................................204
Sequence of Events................................................................... 209
CBEMA Events...........................................................................215
Display All Settings Command................................................... 216
Utility menu......................................................................................218
Remote Control.......................................................................... 219
Control Information..................................................................... 221
Change User Access Code........................................................ 221
Set Date & Time......................................................................... 223
Device Discovery........................................................................225
Multi Level Access Code............................................................ 226
SD Card Access Code................................................................227
IEC 61850...................................................................................227
DNP............................................................................................ 230
Peer to Peer Paralleling Configuration....................................... 237
Master/Follower Configuration....................................................237
Send Firmware Update...............................................................238
TCC300 5
User Manual
Table of contents
Convert Datalog File to CSV Format.......................................... 241

Convert Binary Soe File to .SOE Format....................................241
Windows menu................................................................................ 242
Help menu....................................................................................... 242
TapPlot analysis software.....................................................................243
Starting TapPlot...............................................................................252
Section 5 System setup.....................................................................255

General unit setup................................................................................ 255
User access codes.......................................................................... 255
Setting level 1 or level 2 user access codes from the HMI.........256
Setting level 1 or level 2 user access codes from TCC600........ 257
Setting multi level access codes from TCC600.......................... 258
User lines.........................................................................................260
Setting user lines from the HMI.................................................. 260
Setting user lines from TCC600................................................. 261
System clock....................................................................................261
Setting time/date and daylight savings from the HMI................. 262
Setting date/time and daylight savings from TCC600................ 263
Oscillograph setup................................................................................ 265
Setting up the oscillograph recorder................................................266
Sequence of events recorder................................................................268
Setting up the sequence of events recorder....................................270
Wakeup screens................................................................................... 274
Selecting wakeup screen parameters............................................. 275
Communication.....................................................................................276
Enabling communication access security and timeout from the HMI278
Enabling communication access security and setting timeout
from TCC600................................................................................... 278
Source address validation.................................................................... 279
Enabling source address validation from the HMI........................... 279
Enabling source address validation from TCC600.......................... 280
Feeder and substation addressing....................................................... 280
Setting substation address from the HMI........................................ 284
Setting feeder address from the HMI...............................................284
Setting communication addresses from TCC600............................ 285
Automatic mode blocking......................................................................286
Comm Block Auto............................................................................287
Setting Comm Block Auto from the HMI.....................................287
Setting Comm Block Auto at power off from TCC600................ 287
6 TCC300
User Manual
Table of contents
SCAMP initialize on power up......................................................... 288

Setting SCAMP initialize on power up from the HMI.................. 289
Setting SCAMP initialize on power up from TCC600................. 289
Optional Ethernet port...........................................................................290
Configuring Ethernet port from TCC600.......................................... 291
Configuring network time synchronization from TCC600................ 293
Configuring the control’s Ethernet port from the HMI for use on a
network that supports DHCP protocol ............................................ 295
Configuring the control’s Ethernet port from the HMI for use on a
network that does not support DHCP protocol ............................... 295
Setting the MODBUS and DNP ports from the HMI........................ 297
Setting the Ethernet keepalive time from the HMI........................... 297
RS-485/Fiber-optic port........................................................................ 298
Configuring RS-485/fiber-optic port from the HMI........................... 298
Configuring RS-485/fiber-optic port from TCC600.......................... 299
RS-232 port.......................................................................................... 300
Configuring RS-232 port from the HMI............................................ 300
Configuring RS-232 port from TCC600........................................... 301
Installation of modems..........................................................................302
Connecting the PC modem............................................................. 302
Initializing the PC modem from TCC600......................................... 302
Connecting the local modem to the control..................................... 303
Optional bluetooth.................................................................................305
Configuring bluetooth from the HMI.................................................307
Configuring bluetooth from TCC600................................................308
Setting up bluetooth MODE1 from TCC600.................................... 311
Resetting bluetooth module from the HMI....................................... 311
Resetting bluetooth module from TCC600...................................... 312
Resetting bluetooth passkey from the HMI......................................313
Resetting bluetooth passkey from TCC600..................................... 314
SCADA heartbeat................................................................................. 315
Setting SCADA HeartBeat option from TCC600............................. 321
Section 6 Configuration..................................................................... 323

Tapchanger type selections..................................................................323
Configuration........................................................................................ 326
User programmable alarm relay...................................................... 326
Setting programmable alarm relay inputs from TCC600............ 326
Setting programmable alarm relay inputs from the HMI............. 330
Programmable alarm relay mode............................................... 330
TCC300 7
User Manual
Table of contents
Op Count Signal Alarm....................................................................333

Setting Op Count Signal Alarm from the HMI.............................333
Setting Op Count Signal Alarm from TCC600............................ 333
Counters.......................................................................................... 335
Operation counter.......................................................................335
Setting the Operation Counter Configuration from the HMI........337
Setting Operation Counter X Mode Delay from the HMI............ 338
Setting Operation Counter X Mode Delay from the HMI............ 338
Configuring the Operation Counter from TCC600...................... 339
Resetting the Resettable Operation Counter from the HMI........341
Resetting the Resettable Operation Counter from TCC600....... 341
Presetting the Presettable Operation Counters from the HMI.... 343
Presetting the Presettable Operation Counters from TCC600... 343
Inputs and switch configuration....................................................... 345
Setting Input Selection 1 Operation Counter Input
Configuration to Switch Status from the HMI..............................345
Configuration to Switch Status from TCC600.............................346
Motor seal-in failure block................................................................348
Configuration to Motor Seal-In from the HMI..............................350
Configuration to Motor Seal-In from TCC600............................. 351
Setting Motor Seal-in Failure Alarm/Block from the HMI............ 352
Setting Motor Seal-in Failure Alarm/Block from TCC600........... 353
Input Selection 2 (Non-Sequential or SCADA Cutout)............... 354
Input Selection 3 (VR2 or Aux)................................................... 356
Auto/Manual switch type..................................................................358
Setting Auto/Man Switch Type from the HMI..............................358
Setting Auto/Manual Switch Type from TCC600........................ 359
Ratio multipliers............................................................................... 360
Voltage and current multipliers................................................... 360
Setting the Voltage and Current Multipliers from the HMI.......... 361
Setting the Voltage and Current Multipliers from TCC600......... 362
Primary power display..................................................................... 363
Setting Primary Power Display Selection from the HMI............. 363
Setting Primary Power Display Selection from TCC600.............364
Correction factors............................................................................ 365
VT ratio correction...................................................................... 365
Setting Load and/or Source VT Correction Factor from the HMI366
8 TCC300
User Manual
Table of contents
Setting Load and/or Source VT Correction Factors from

TCC600...................................................................................... 366
CT/VT phase shift.......................................................................368
Setting CT/Load and/or CT/Source Phase Shift Quantities
from the HMI...............................................................................369
Setting CT/Load and/or CT/Source Phase Shift Quantities
from TCC600.............................................................................. 369
Auxiliary current transformer............................................................371
Setting Auxiliary Current Transformer Units Display from the
HMI............................................................................................. 371
Setting Auxiliary Current Transformer Units Display from
TCC600...................................................................................... 372
Metering factors...............................................................................373
Secondary.................................................................................. 375
Primary....................................................................................... 375
Present demand......................................................................... 375
Energy metering......................................................................... 375
Demand history.......................................................................... 376
Frequency...................................................................................377
Load VT configuration..................................................................... 377
Setting Load VT Configuration from the HMI..............................377
Setting Load VT Configuration from TCC600.............................377
Output selection...............................................................................379
Output pulse............................................................................... 379
Setting Output Configuration from the HMI................................ 380
Setting Output Configuration from TCC600................................380
Motor current detection and monitoring...........................................382
Setting the Motor Current Detection Settings from the HMI....... 383
Setting the Motor Current Detection Settings from TCC600...... 384
Regulator type................................................................................. 385
Setting Regulator Type from the HMI......................................... 387
Setting Regulator Type from TCC600........................................ 387
Remote voltage bias........................................................................389
Enabling/Disabling Remote Voltage Bias from the HMI............. 391
Enabling/Disabling and Setting Remote Voltage Bias from
TCC600...................................................................................... 391
Run through neutral.........................................................................393
Enabling/Disabling and Setting Run Through Neutral from the
HMI............................................................................................. 394
Enabling/Disabling and Setting Run Through Neutral from
TCC600...................................................................................... 395
TCC300 9
User Manual
Table of contents
Fast voltage recovery...................................................................... 396

Enabling/Disabling and Setting Fast Voltage Recovery from
the HMI....................................................................................... 397
Enabling/Disabling and Setting Fast Voltage Recovery from
TCC600...................................................................................... 398
Parallel operation..................................................................................399
Circulating current and delta VAR methods.................................... 399
Circulating current/ΔVAR1..........................................................399
ΔVAR2 paralleling and ΔVAR2 paralleling + KeepTrack™.........404
ΔVAR2 connection..................................................................... 405
Selecting and Setting ΔVAR2 Paralleling Method from the HMI 409
Selecting and Setting ΔVAR2 Paralleling Method from TCC600409
Optional master/follower parallelling method...................................411
Grouping operation algorithm (GOA)..........................................412
Master/follower alarm messages................................................414
Lockout condition........................................................................414
Master/follower configuration tool...............................................415
Setting of masters and followers from TCC600..........................417
Setting of masters and followers from the HMI...........................422
Optional delta VAR peer to peer parallelling method...................... 429
Bus topology...............................................................................431
Grouping operation algorithm (GOA)..........................................434
Delta VAr peer to peer paralleling alarm messages................... 436
Lockouts..................................................................................... 437
Delta VAr peer to peer paralleling configuration tool.................. 438
Delta VAr peer to peer paralleling application............................ 441
Setting up Delta VAr Peer to Peer Paralleling Control from
TCC600...................................................................................... 441
Setting up Delta VAr Peer to Peer Paralleling Control from the
HMI............................................................................................. 443
Tap settings.......................................................................................... 445
Tap information................................................................................445
Load tapchanger (LTC) positive tap position knowledge............445
Contact KeepTrack™.................................................................. 446
Shaft Coupled KeepTrack™ tap position knowledge.................. 452
Resistor Divider KeepTrack™ tap position knowledge for LTCs.454
Motor Direct Drive KeepTrack™..................................................456
Selecting Tap Position Knowledge from the HMI....................... 459
Selecting Tap Position Knowledge from TCC600...................... 459
Contact KeepTrack™ 1N – Additional TCC600 settings screen. 461
10 TCC300
User Manual
Table of contents
Initializing Tap Position When Motor Direct Drive KeepTrack

"INTERNAL KEEPTRACK" is Active from the HMI.................... 463
Initializing Tap Position When Motor Direct Drive
KeepTrackTM "INTERNAL KEEPTRACK" is Active from
TCC600...................................................................................... 464
Initializing Tap Position When Regulate (Reg or XFMR)
External or Contact KeepTrackTM 1R1L/1N is Active from the
HMI............................................................................................. 465
Initializing Tap Position When Regulate (Reg or XFMR)
External or Contact KeepTrackTM 1R1L/1N is Active from
TCC600...................................................................................... 466
Setting Highest and Lowest Tap from the HMI...........................468
Setting Highest and Lowest Tap from TCC600.......................... 469
Intertap time delay........................................................................... 471
Setting the Intertap Delay from the HMI..................................... 472
Setting Intertap Time Delay from TCC600................................. 472
Tap limits......................................................................................... 474
Enabling/Disabling and Setting Tap Limits from the HMI........... 474
Enabling/Disabling and Setting Tap Limits from TCC600.......... 475
Data logging and harmonics................................................................. 476
Data logging.................................................................................... 476
Setting up Data Logging from the HMI....................................... 477
Setting up Data Logging from TCC600...................................... 478
Harmonics setup..............................................................................479
Setting the Active Harmonics Inputs to the Oscillograph and
Sequence of Events Recorders from the HMI............................ 479
Setting the Harmonic Voltage, Current Threshold and
Minimum Current Threshold Settings from the HMI................... 480
Setting the Harmonic Voltage and Current Threshold Delay
from the HMI...............................................................................481
Setting the Active Harmonics Inputs to the Oscillograph and
Sequence of Events Recorders from TCC600........................... 481
CBEMA configuration........................................................................... 483
CBEMA functionality........................................................................483
Setting up CBEMA from the HMI..................................................... 484
Setting up CBEMA from TCC600.................................................... 485
Section 7 Setpoints........................................................................... 489

Setpoint profiles.................................................................................... 489
Editing of setpoint profiles............................................................... 489
Selecting a setpoint profile for editing from the HMI...................490
TCC300 11
User Manual
Table of contents
Selecting a setpoint profile for editing from TCC600.................. 491

Naming setpoint profiles.................................................................. 491
Assigning a setpoint profile name from the HMI.........................491
Assigning a setpoint profile name from TCC600........................ 492
Regulation limits................................................................................... 493
Setting the Overvoltage Block Raise and Block Lower Limit from
the HMI............................................................................................ 496
Enabling or disabling Voltage Runup from the HMI.........................497
Setting the Voltage Runback and Runup Deadband from the HMI. 497
Setting the Current Block Limit from the HMI.................................. 498
Enabling or disabling the Low Current Block/Alarm from the HMI...498
Enabling or disabling the Low Current Block/Alarm from TCC600.. 499
Setting Limits Runback Runup from TCC600..................................501
Voltage reduction..................................................................................503
Setting Voltage Reduction Steps 1, 2 and 3 from the HMI.............. 504
Setting Voltage Reduction Steps 1, 2 and 3 from TCC600............. 504
Enabling or disabling Standard Voltage Reduction from the HMI... 506
Smart Voltage Reduction.................................................................507
Enabling or disabling and setting Smart Voltage Reduction
from the HMI...............................................................................507
Enabling or disabling and setting Standard or Smart Voltage
Reduction from TCC600.............................................................507
Save Voltage Reduction at power off.............................................. 509
Setting Save Voltage Reduction at Power Off from the HMI...... 509
Selecting Save Voltage Reduction at Power Off from TCC600..509
Setting Voltage Reduction Turnoff Timer from the HMI...................511
Setting Voltage Reduction Turnoff Timer from TCC600.................. 511
Line drop compensation....................................................................... 513
Selecting Line Drop Compensation Type and Settings from the HMI516
Setting Power Flow Forward and Power Flow Reverse LDC
Resistance (R) and Reactance (X) values from the HMI.................517
Setting Power Flow Forward and Power Flow Reverse LDC Z
values from the HMI.........................................................................518
Setting Line Drop Compensation from TCC600.............................. 519
Basic time delay....................................................................................521
Setting Basic Time Delay Timer Characteristic and Type from the
HMI.................................................................................................. 522
Setting Basic Time Delay Timer Characteristic and Type from
TCC600........................................................................................... 523
Reverse power operation......................................................................525
12 TCC300
User Manual
Table of contents
Setting Reverse Power Operation and Power Direction Bias

Mode from the HMI..........................................................................530
Setting Reverse Power Operation and Power Direction Bias
Mode from TCC600......................................................................... 531
Power flow settings...............................................................................533
Setting Bandcenter and Bandwidth from the HMI........................... 534
Setting Bandcenter and Bandwidth from TCC600...........................535
Setting the Definite or Inverse Delay from the HMI......................... 537
Setting the Definite or Inverse Delay from TCC600........................ 537
VAr bias................................................................................................ 539
Step VAr bias method......................................................................540
Enabling Step VAr Bias Method from the HMI........................... 541
Enabling Step VAr Bias Method from TCC600...........................542
Linear VAr bias method................................................................... 545
Enabling Linear VAr Bias Method from the HMI.........................546
Enabling Linear VAr Bias Method from TCC600........................ 547
Section 8 Installation......................................................................... 551

Installation.............................................................................................551
External connections............................................................................ 551
Non-sequential operation......................................................................561
Multi-step voltage reduction..................................................................561
LTC backup control...............................................................................562
Communication ports............................................................................562
Communication cables......................................................................... 565
Grounding............................................................................................. 566
Typical LTC connection........................................................................ 566
Typical regulator connection.................................................................568
Control power backup input connection................................................570
Installation of TCC600 Communications Software and
establishment of initial local communications....................................... 573
Section 9 Testing...............................................................................575
Set-up procedure.................................................................................. 575
Bench-testing........................................................................................576
Starting check-out procedure................................................................578
Performing operational test...................................................................580
Performing in-service test..................................................................... 580
Testing bias voltage..............................................................................581
Testing control front panel LEDs.......................................................... 582
Testing control inputs............................................................................583
TCC300 13
User Manual
Table of contents
Testing control outputs......................................................................... 584

Testing front panel push buttons.......................................................... 584
Delta VAr peer to peer paralleling checkout procedure........................ 585
Performing two transformer verification........................................... 585
Performing three transformer verification........................................ 588
Section 10 Appendix A HMI................................................................ 595

HMI menu flow......................................................................................595
HMI Screen Review.............................................................................. 603
Monitor.............................................................................................603
Metering......................................................................................603
Present Demand.........................................................................605
Demand History..........................................................................606
Energy Metering......................................................................... 607
Status......................................................................................... 608
Motor Current............................................................................. 610
Harmonics.................................................................................. 610
Tap Information.......................................................................... 611
Setpoints..........................................................................................613
Profile Settings........................................................................... 613
Common Settings....................................................................... 614
Power Flow Forward...................................................................615
Power Flow Reverse.................................................................. 616
Voltage Reduction...................................................................... 617
Limits.......................................................................................... 618
VAr Bias......................................................................................619
VAr Bias...........................................................................................619
VAr Bias (Step)...........................................................................619
VAr Bias (Linear)........................................................................ 620
Configuration................................................................................... 622
Tapchanger Type....................................................................... 622
Tap Settings............................................................................... 622
Paralleling...................................................................................625
Programmable Alarm..................................................................629
System Clock..............................................................................632
Input Selection............................................................................632
Mtr Current Profile...................................................................... 633
CBEMA Setup............................................................................ 633
Harmonics Setup........................................................................ 634
Data Logging.............................................................................. 635
14 TCC300
User Manual
Table of contents
Nameplate.................................................................................. 636
Run Through Neutral.................................................................. 639
Remote Voltage Bias..................................................................640
Communication................................................................................641
Comm Settings........................................................................... 641
Memory Card..............................................................................643
Ethernet...................................................................................... 645
HMI............................................................................................. 647
Bluetooth.................................................................................... 648
RS232.........................................................................................649
Utilities............................................................................................. 650
Calibration-Test.......................................................................... 650
About.......................................................................................... 653
Section 11 Appendix B Setpoint, Configuration and Communication

Record Forms....................................................................655
Setpoints...............................................................................................655
Configuration........................................................................................ 657
Tap settings.......................................................................................... 661
Alarms...................................................................................................663
Wakeup screens................................................................................... 663
Data logging..........................................................................................664
Harmonics setup...................................................................................664
Oscillograph setup................................................................................ 665
Sequence of events setup.................................................................... 666
CBEMA settings....................................................................................667
Comm settings......................................................................................668
Section 12 Appendix C DNP Configuration Editor.............................. 671

DNP Configuration Editor..................................................................... 671
Section 13 Appendix D IEC 61850 Configuration Editor..................... 681

IEC 61850 Configuration Editor............................................................ 681
Section 14 Appendix E Self-test error codes.......................................691

Self-test error codes............................................................................. 691
Section 15 Appendix F Remote Ethernet file update utility................. 695

Remote Ethernet file update (REFU) utility...........................................695
Remote Ethernet firmware update........................................................695
Remote Ethernet file update and cyber security...................................696
Updating Ethernet firmware remotely................................................... 697
TCC300 15
User Manual
Table of contents
Updating data file remotely................................................................... 700
Section 16 Glossary............................................................................ 705
16 TCC300
User Manual
1VAC388793-MB B Section 1
Introduction
Section 1 Introduction
1.1 This manual
The user manual contains product overview and instructions on how to install,
commission, configure and operate the device via HMI or TCC600 communications
software. The manual can be used as a technical reference by system engineers and
maintenance personnel during the testing, engineering, installation and commissioning
phases, and during normal service.
1.2 Intended audience
This manual addresses users, configuration engineers and installation and commissioning
personnel, who use technical data during engineering, installation and commissioning,
and in normal service.
1.3 Product documentation
1.3.1 Document revision history

Document revision/date History
A/2016-08-10 First release
B/2019-05-27 Content updated
Download the latest documents from the ABB Web site

http://www.abb.com.
TCC300 17
User Manual
Section 1 1VAC388793-MB B
Introduction
1.4 Symbols and conventions
1.4.1 Symbols
The electrical warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which could
result in electrical shock.
The warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which could result in
personal injury.
The caution icon indicates important information or warning related to the

concept discussed in the text. It might indicate the presence of a hazard
which could result in corruption of software or damage to equipment or
property.
The information icon alerts the reader of important facts and conditions.
The tip icon indicates advice on, for example, how to design your project
or how to use a certain function.
Although warning hazards are related to personal injury, it is necessary to understand that
under certain operational conditions, operation of damaged equipment may result in
degraded process performance leading to personal injury or death. Therefore, comply
fully with all warning and caution notices.
1.4.2 Document conventions

A particular convention may not be used in this manual.
• Abbreviations and acronyms are spelled out in the glossary. The glossary also
contains definitions of important terms.
• Menu paths are presented in bold.
Select Main menu/Settings.
• HMI messages are shown in Courier font.
To save the changes in nonvolatile memory, select Yes.
• Parameter names are shown in italics.
18 TCC300
User Manual
Introduction
The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting.
• Parameter values are indicated with quotation marks.
The corresponding parameter values are "Enabled" and "Disabled".
TCC300 19
User Manual
20
TCC300 overview
Section 2 TCC300 overview
2.1 Overview
The TCC300 Digital Tapchanger Control is a microprocessor-based transformer and step-

voltage regulator load tapchanger control.
The control is designed for initial OEM installation on new tapchangers or to replace a
particular manufacturer’s tapchanger control. The TCC300 is designed to mechanically
and electrically replace an old control, with mounting hardware to facilitate the
replacement.
TCC300 21
User Manual
TCC300 overview
Backup Power Real-Time

Power Input Supply Clock
VT
EPROM
Load Voltage
Bus I/O RAM

Source Voltage
Line Current Display

A/D
CT
I
Circulating N Watchdog Timer
Current P
U
CT T
S
Motor RAISE & LOWER
Current Outputs
CT Status
LEDs
Outputs
Alarm Outputs
Digital 9 9
Opto- Aux Contact
Inputs
Isolator Output
(9)
Digital Ethernet
Inputs Port (Optional)
Pushbuttons UTP or Fiber Optic
RS-485 Port
(Note 1)
Power Supply
Monitoring COM 1 OR
Circuits/Reset Fiber Optic Port
(Note 1)
USB Port RS-232 Port
COM 2
SD Card Optional Bluetooth

(Note 2)
GUID-F8B673A3-CE7F-4037-9A3F-3B2188F648F2 V1 EN
Figure 1: Functional Diagram
1. The RS-485 and Fiber Optic ports are standard on COM 1. However,
only one can be active at a time.
2. COM 2 is limited to either the standard RS-232 Port or the optional
Bluetooth® capability. Only one option can be active on COM 2 at a
time.
Interrogation of the control and setting changes are made using either the front panel
HMI, or through the communications ports (MODBUS® or DNP3.0 protocol) utilizing
TCC600 Communications Software. The HMI consists of a 20-character by 2‑line display
and seven push buttons. Two Access Codes are available to the user from the push buttons.
22 TCC300
User Manual
TCC300 overview
All setpoints are stored in nonvolatile memory which is unaffected by control voltage
disturbances.
Three Tapchanger operation counters are provided:
• Presettable Operations
• Counter Resettable Operations
• Counter Presettable Neutral Counter
Ten LEDs are used to indicate Tapchanger Band Status, timing for RAISE and LOWER,
REV PWR Reverse Power detection, CPU OK, ALARM, V/RED Voltage Reduction in
Effect, MANUAL, LOCAL, and TX/RX.
The alphanumeric display and six push button interface provides complete front panel
access to the scrolling menu program. The control applies to tapchangers with ±16 taps
and one neutral position.
A Voltage Reduction push button allows the user to locally apply up to three levels of
Voltage Reduction from the control front panel.
2.2 Adapter panel or surface mounting kit
An adapter panel or an M‑2050 or M‑2054 Surface Mounting Kit must be used with the
TCC300 Tapchanger Control. Each panel adapts TCC300 as a transformer and regulator
control replacement and provides the external connections necessary for operation via
terminal blocks on the rear of the adapter panel. Contact ABB for a list of adapter panels
that are currently available. See the application guides of the specific adapter panel for the
mounting details.
TCC300 23
User Manual
TCC300 overview
GUID-CA978827-90A0-413A-92B2-2BBF5AFCAAAD V1 EN
Figure 2: Typical Adapter Panel Mounting
The M‑2050 is an adapter kit which permits surface mounting of the control using two
right angle mounting brackets, four screws and a 24‑pin connector with six-foot pigtails
on each pin. The M‑2050 does not include features available on adapter panels. These
features include mechanical configurations and wiring connections for direct
replacement, CT shorting or front panel switches, fuses or test points. See the instruction
manual of the M-2050 for the mounting details.
The M‑2054 is an adapter kit which permits surface mounting of the control using two
right angle mounting brackets, four screws and a 24-pin connector with six-foot pigtails
on each pin. See the instruction manual of the M‑2054 for the mounting details and
additional information.
24 TCC300
User Manual
TCC300 overview
2.3 Accessories
2.3.1 TCC600 Communications Software

TCC600 is a Windows-based communications software program available for remote
control and metering of the TCC300 Tapchanger Control. It is designed to interface with
the microprocessor of the control through the standard USB Port (MODBUS®) and all
installed communication ports. The TCC600 software displays all pertinent operating
information. All operations that can be performed from the front panel user interface of the
control can be duplicated remotely, through TCC600.
• Changing setpoint values. This includes those values for normal tapchanger control
operation, as well as custom configuration to the site.
• Monitoring values. This includes measured and calculated values of real-time
operating parameters.
• Data logging. The control can internally store various parameters at selected
intervals. The TCC600 program can download this data into a spreadsheet and
display. Alternatively, the PC can be programmed to poll the control and obtain a pre-
selected list of parameters at selected intervals. Also , TCC600 includes a utility to
convert the downloaded Datalog files from the Smart Flash SD Card into a
spreadsheet readable format.
• Remote Control. The Remote Control feature allows the user to remotely raise or
lower one tap position as well as apply voltage reduction to the target control.
2.3.2 Optional communication ports

The TCC300 Digital Tapchanger Control can be equipped with optional Bluetooth®
capability (COM2). COM2 is located on the top rear of the unit. COM2 utilizes the DNP
3.0 and MODBUS protocols.
TCC300 can also be equipped with an optional Ethernet Port through a RJ-45 Jack (10/100
Base-T) or Fiber Optic through ST connectors (100 Base‑Fx). These ports support DNP
over TCP/IP and MODBUS over TCP/IP.
2.3.3 M‑2025B(D) Current Loop Interface Modules

The M‑2025B(D) are external self-contained interfaces designed to operate with the
tapchanger control for tap position by positive knowledge, for LTC transformer
applications. The modules connect to the current loop output of a tap position monitor
such as the 1250-series INCON Programmable Position Monitors. The tap position
monitor includes current loop outputs whose level corresponds linearly to any of a pre-
TCC300 25
User Manual
TCC300 overview
programmed number of tap positions depending on the tapchanger mechanism being

monitored. The modules accept current loop ranges of:
• 0 to 1 mA dc
• 0 to 2 mA dc
• -1 to +1 mA dc
• 4 to 20 mA dc
The Tap Information screen is provided in the tapchanger's Tap Settings Menu to select
whether the control uses the current loop method or the Motor Direct Drive KeepTrack™
method for tap position knowledge. The M‑2025B(D) Current Loop Interface module is
not used with the "KeepTrack™" method. The Motor Direct Drive KeepTrack method is
used with single-phase line regulators having a counter contact and a neutral contact. The
M‑2025B(D) module easily connects to the tapchanger control through a six-pin
connector located on the bottom of the control.
For parallel operation using the circulating current method, the following accessories are
needed: the M-0115A Parallel Balancing Module, the M-0127A AC Current Relay and
the M-0169A Auxiliary Current Transformer.
2.3.4 Backup relay

The M-0329B Backup Relay or the M‑5329 Multi phase Backup Relay are available to
provide protection against failure of the primary control.
2.3.5 M‑2026 AC-DC control power backup supply

The M‑2026 accepts either AC or DC input over a range of 21 to 32, 42 to 60 and 105 to
145 V. The unit will supply a regulated +12 Vdc at up to a 1.5 A output. The unit includes
a fused input, surge protection, and reverse polarity protection.
2.3.6 M‑2027 control power backup supply for AC only

The M‑2027 will accept an AC input over a range of 105 to 140 Vac at 50/60 Hz. The unit
will supply a +12 Vdc at up to 1.0 A output.
2.3.7 B-0920 control power backup harness

The B-0920 Control Power Backup Harness provides fused (3 A) power to TCC300 when
a M‑2026 or M-2027 Control Power Backup Supply is not used.
26 TCC300
User Manual
TCC300 overview
2.3.8 M-2948 tap position sensor

The M-2948 tap position sensor is a rotary shaft encoder that includes a built-in
microprocessor that provides stepped output signals in 9 or 10 degree increments. The
M-2948 is available with 0 to 297°, 306°, 315°, 330°, 340° and 350° rotation for ±16 taps
and 1, 2 or 3 neutral positions. The electrical output of the sensor is a 4-20 mA current loop
that converts easily to a voltage signal at the input of the M-2025B(D) with the addition
of a proper value shunt resistor. For a 4-20 mA Current Loop, 150 ohms is required on the
input of the M-2025B(D). The signal from the M-2025B(D) is then conditioned and sent
to TCC300 as an analog signal. The M-2948 Tap Position Sensor is available with either
a positive or negative slope. Negative slope (clockwise rotation) causes a decrease in Tap
Position. Positive slope (clockwise rotation) causes an increase in Tap Position. M-2948
Tap Position Sensor directly mechanically replaces the Selsyn-Type Tap Position Sensor.
TCC300 27
User Manual
28
Operation
Section 3 Operation
3.1 Front panel controls and indicators
3.1.1 Display and push buttons

The front-panel user interface consists of a Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) or Vacuum
Fluorescent (VFD) Display, directional (Hot Buttons), EXIT, ENT, and VR push buttons,
and the status indicators.
GUID-E779D376-1407-4644-A88C-59C8D03A45B1 V1 EN
Figure 3: Front Panel
The display normally displays the user lines and remains so until the UP, DOWN, LEFT,
RIGHT or ENT push button is depressed. Pressing any push button will display the
heading corresponding to the "Hot Button" label above the push button. The "Hot
Buttons" directly access the menu headers and can only be selected from either the user
lines or the cycling display.
TCC300 29
User Manual
Operation
UP, DOWN, LEFT and RIGHT push buttons

The directional push buttons have three functions.
• They are used to change screens and scroll through selections.

• They are used to enter new values by incrementing or decrementing the displayed
value. The new value is not stored until the ENT push button is pressed a second time.
• Activate the "Hot Button" feature for the corresponding labels above each push
button to jump to that screen.
HMI menu structure

The HMI menu structure (Appendix A) consists of three levels: Header, Sub-Header and
Data/Data Entry. From the header level the user can navigate to the adjacent headers with
the LEFT and RIGHT push buttons, go to the sub-header level by pressing ENT or DOWN
push button, or clear the screen by pressing the EXIT push button.
30 TCC300
User Manual
Operation
COMMUNICATION UTILITIES MONITOR SETPOINTS CONFIGURATION

CNFG UTIL COMM MNTR UTIL SETP MNTR CNFG SETP COMM
Status Motor Current Harmonics Tap Information Metering Present Demand Demand History Energy Metering
Watt Hours Fwd

Press ENT to view Peak RMS Curr Voltage % THD Tap Position/Cal Load Voltage Demand Interval Demand Interval Watt Hours Fwd E
E
Tapchanger Status x.x mA (x.x) T x.x % DISABLE xxx.x Volts xx Min xx Min x kWh
x kWh
Press ENT to view Avg RMS Curr Current % THD Drag Hands E Meter Out Voltage Demand Load Voltage Min Load Voltage E Lagging VAr Hours E
Alarm Status x.x mA (xx.x) T xx.x % L= 0 N R= 0 N xxx.x Volts xxx.x Volts x.x Volts x kVArh
Press ENT to view Profile Duration Press ENT to view Definite Timer Source Voltage Demand Pri. Current Max Load Voltage E Watt Hours Rev E
Input Status xxx.x ms(xxx.x) T Voltage Harmonics Raise xxs Lower xxs Disabled xxx.x Amps xxx.x Volts xx kWh
Press ENT to view Peak Motor Current E Press ENT to view Intertap Timer Load Current Demand Pri. Watts Max Pri.Current E Leading VAr Hours E
Output Status x.x mA Current Harmonic x % x.x mA LEAD/LAG x.xx MW xxx.x Amps xx kVArh
Operation Counter Circulating Current Demand Pri. VArs Max Primary Watts E Press ENT to reset
0 x.x mA LEAD/LAG x.xx MVArs x.xx MW Energy Metering
If DVAr enabled
Resettable Counter E DVar Current Demand Pri. VA Max Primary VArs E Press ENT to perform
0 x.x mA LEAD/LAG x.xx MVA x.xx MVAr Master Reset
Neutral Sw Counter Compensated Voltage Max Primary VA E

x xxx.x Volts x.xx MVA
Lower Counter Primary Voltage PF @ Max VA E

x x.xx kV x.xxx PF
Raise Counter Primary Src Voltage Press ENT to reset

x Disabled Demand History
Press ENT to view Primary Current Press ENT to perform

specific Tap Stats xxx.x Amps Master Reset
Press ENT to clear Primary Watts

Tap Statistics x.xx MW
RTN Success Counter Primary VArs

00000 x.xx MVArs
RTN Status Primary VA

DISABLED x.xx MVA
Count to RTN Active Power Factor

00000 x.xxx LEAD/LAG
Frequency
xx.x Hz
GUID-51E8890C-FA2F-4A04-99BE-424E46278EF8 V1 EN
Figure 4: Example of HMI Menu Structure, Header, Sub-Header and Data/Data Entry Menus
From the sub-header level, the user can navigate to the adjacent sub-headers with the
LEFT and RIGHT push buttons, return to the header level by pressing the EXIT or UP
push buttons, or enter the data/data entry level by pressing ENT or DOWN. Once in the
data/data entry screens, the user can navigate through the list with the UP and DOWN push
buttons. In this level the list wraps around. To exit the level, the user can press EXIT to
return to the corresponding sub-header, or use the LEFT and RIGHT push buttons to go
to the adjacent sub-header level. To enter data, reset parameters or access data screens,
press ENT.
TCC300 31
User Manual
Operation
ENT push button

The ENT push button is a hot button for the "Utility Menu". It is also used to perform the
following functions:
• Enter the "edit" mode of a screen

• Store a setpoint or condition in memory
• Enter the sub-header or data level
• Reset certain monitoring screens
EXIT push button

The EXIT push button is a hot button for a unit "wakeup", which starts cycling through a
series of user selectable metering and tap information screens. The user can move up and
down the automatic cycling using the UP and DOWN push buttons. Pressing EXIT will
stop the cycling on the displayed parameter. The screens for the wakeup sequence can be
enabled or disabled from the TCC600 Communications Software.
The EXIT push button is also used to perform the following functions:
• Exit a level to the next higher level

• Cancel data entry
• Clear the screen when at the header level
Data entry screens

Data entry screens are of three types:
• Alphanumeric
• List
• Bit Mask
For Alphanumeric Data, the LEFT and RIGHT push buttons advance the cursor to the
digit to be edited and the UP and DOWN push buttons change the value. For List Data, the
UP and DOWN push buttons change the data. For Bit Mask (i.e. Prog Alarm Function) the
LEFT and RIGHT push buttons move the cursor to the bit and the UP and DOWN push
buttons change the value. For all screens the ENT push button saves the value and EXIT
push button cancels the operation. A "C" indicates the user is in the edit mode.
Power up screens
Each time the control is powered up, it will briefly display a series of screens that include:
32 TCC300
User Manual
Operation
• User Lines
• Control Firmware Number
• Serial Number
• Date
• Time of Day
Screen blanking
The display automatically displays the user lines after exiting from any menu, or from any
screen after 15 minutes of unattended operation.
LCD screen contrast

The LCD screen contrast can be set/reset from the control front panel through the HMI
menu item or at any time. Pressing the Right and Left arrow push buttons at the same time
displays the LCD Contrast screen which cycles from dim to bright. Selecting ENT during
the cycle sets the displayed contrast to the value at the time ENT was pressed. The LCD
Screen Contrast adjustment menu item is located in the Communication/HMI menu.
"C" CHANGE prompt

This prompt, in the bottom right corner of a screen, is enabled by initially pressing Utility/
ENT. This prompt indicates that the user can change a setting using the UP or DOWN push
buttons to increment or decrement the settings. Values have factory preset increments,
such as 0.1 volt or 1 second. Press ENT the second time to execute the setting change.
"ENT" prompt
When the "E" prompt appears in the top right corner of the display window it indicates that
the value of the display will reset if the ENT push button is pressed.
LEFT and RIGHT prompt

Some setpoints screens include the Left and Right Arrows but do not move to the adjacent
sub-header, but instead go to a configuration screen.
Volt Red push button (Voltage Reduction)

The VR push button acts as a "hot" key to allow the user to change the Voltage Reduction
status from the front panel. It can only be accessed when the screen displays the user lines,
or a cycling message is being displayed on the front panel. The Voltage Reduction push
button allows the user to apply 3 Steps of Voltage Reduction.
TCC300 33
User Manual
Operation
3.1.2 Status indicators

RAISE LED
The Raise LED (yellow) illuminates when the voltage is below the lower band edge and
the timer has started timing for a tapchanger Raise operation.
LOWER LED
The Lower LED (yellow) illuminates that the voltage is above the upper band edge and the
timer has started timing for a tapchanger Lower operation.
REV PWR LED

The Reverse Power LED (red) will illuminate to indicate when the unit detects reverse
power flow.
OK LED
The OK LED (green) will remain illuminated whenever power is applied to the unit and
the control is functioning properly. The OK LED will also extinguish when a Motor Seal-
in Failure Block is in effect.
ALARM LED
The Alarm LED (red) will illuminate when any of the Programmable Alarm Functions set
the output relay to true.
V/RED LED
The Voltage Reduction LED (yellow) will flash corresponding to the level of Voltage
Reduction that has been invoked. This is true for any Voltage Reduction process whether
it came from an external contact, any Comm input or HMI.
• 1 Flash for Level 1 Voltage Reduction

• 2 Flashes for Level 2
• 3 Flashes for Level 3
MANUAL LED
The Manual LED (red) will illuminate when Auto operation of the control has been
blocked from any Com port. It will also illuminate when Manual Mode has been selected
using the Adapter Panel Auto/Manual Push button or Toggle switch.
LOCAL LED
The Local LED (yellow) will illuminate when all SCADA write capability to the control
is blocked.
34 TCC300
User Manual
Operation
COM1 TX/RX LEDs

The Transmit TX (red) and Receive RX LEDs (green) indicate that the control is
transmitting and/or receiving through COM1. Also, during the boot-up sequence the TX
and RX LEDs will cycle indicating that the memory test is in progress. If the memory test
is successful, then the TX and RX LEDs will be extinguished. If the memory test fails then
both TX and RX LEDs will illuminate.
Smart Flash SD Card Slot

The Smart Flash SD Card Slot allows the user to:
• Quick Capture
• Load and Save Setpoints
• Save Datalog files (in COMTRADE format)
• Save Sequence of Events files
• Save Oscillograph records (in COMTRADE format)
• Clone Save and Load
• Load and Save DNP files
• Update Firmware
• Save Wakeup Screen parameters
• Save All Metering parameters
• Utilize the SD Card as an Access Code Key
• Save/Load IEC 61850 CID Files (when IEC 61850 is purchased)
3.2 Operation (HMI/TCC600)
3.2.1 Message screens

Default Message Screen
When the TCC300 is energized and unattended, the User Logo lines are displayed.
Local Voltage Reduction Screen

If Local Voltage Reduction is active, the display will cycle the appropriate Voltage
Reduction Screen. When Local Voltage Reduction is terminated, then the display will
return to the User Lines.
Op Count Signal Alarm Screen

The Op Count Signal Alarm will initiate a cycling display as long as the alarm is active.
TCC300 35
User Manual
Operation
Oscillograph Record Triggered Screen

If the "ENABLE OSC Message" feature is enabled (default setting is Enabled) and the
Oscillograph has been triggered, a cycling display indicating that there is an oscillograph
record available for download will be displayed. The screen will be displayed until the
oscillograph record is cleared or the "ENABLE OSC Message" is disabled. However, if
the Oscillograph file is not cleared, re-enabling this feature will restart the cycling.
The "Oscillograph Record Triggered" cycling display can be enabled from the TCC600
Communications Software by navigating to the "Front Panel Message" (Setup/
Oscillograph/Front Panel Message) dialog screen and selecting "Enable". It can also be
enabled from the HMI by navigating to the "Communication HMI" menu.
GUID-AD7616A3-48B4-470D-B84F-0A0543ADD728 V1 EN
Figure 5: Oscillograph Message Dialog Screen
Wakeup Message Screens

If the "Wake/EXIT" pushbutton is selected, then control will respond as follows:
• When the User Lines are being displayed press "WAKE/EXIT" to initiate a stepped
display of the selected Wakeup parameters for a period of 15 minutes.
• If no Wakeup screens are selected, then no parameters will be displayed and the User
Lines will blink for a moment.
The Adapter Panel Drag Hand Reset only resets the Tap Position Drag
Hands.
• During the stepped parameter display, pressing ENT on any Demand Metering value
will reset ALL Demand Metering Drag Hand values. This is also true for ALL Energy
Metering Drag Hand values.
• The Wakeup stepped display can be stopped on the displayed parameter by selecting
EXIT. Select EXIT again to terminate the stepped parameter display and return to the
User Lines. The Wakeup screen values can be browsed by utilizing the Up and Down
36 TCC300
User Manual
Operation
arrow pushbuttons. In this mode, if the ENT pushbutton is pressed while on a Demand
or Energy Metering value, it will only reset that individual Drag Hand value.
• While in the Wakeup screen menu, when a Smart Flash SD Card is present in the
control, an additional Smart Flash SD Card menu item will be displayed. All Wakeup
screen parameters can be saved to the Smart Flash SD Card in *.csv format by
performing the following steps.
To save Wakeup screen parameters to a Smart Flash SD Card proceed as follows:
1. Verify that a (FAT) formatted Smart Flash SD Card is inserted into the Smart Flash
SD Card slot.
2. Press "WAKE/EXIT" to initiate the Wakeup screen cycling display.
3. When the "Save Wake Data to SD Press ENT to begin" screen is displayed, press the
ENT pushbutton. The control will display the following:
Enter file name
TCC300MT
4. Utilizing the Up/Down and Left/Right arrow pushbuttons enter the desired "File
Name".
5. Press the ENT pushbutton, the control will display the following sequence of screens.
Saving CSV...
"File Name"
Save Wake Data to SD
Press ENT to begin
Alarms
If enabled the following alarms will be displayed on the HMI when the alarm condition is
active and set in the Programmable Alarm Relay:
• Communication Block
• Block Raise (Tap)
• Block Lower (Tap)
• Block Raise (Voltage)
• Block Lower (Voltage)
• Voltage Reduction
• Max VAr Bias Duration–Lag
• Max VAr Bias Duration–Lead
• Individual Tap Wear
• LDC/LDZ
• Line Current Limit
• Reverse Power Flow
• Abnormal Tap Position
• Backup Fail (If Backup Power purchased)
• Op Count Signal
• Tap Changer Failure
TCC300 37
User Manual
Operation
The Alarm Activity feature can be accessed from the Utility/Calibration/Test HMI menu
to display all currently active alarms.
The following alarms will also be displayed on the HMI when their features are enabled:
• Motor Seal-in Failure

• ΔVAR®2 Over Current Limit
• Low Current Block
• Master/Follower Lockout
3.2.2 Access codes

To prevent unauthorized access to the control functions, there are provisions in the
software for assigning a Level 1 and/or Level 2 Access Code (up to six characters). A fixed
factory assigned Level 3 Access Code is required for changing calibration factors. When
Level 1 or Level 2 Access Codes are active, then an additional 30 Level Access Codes (up
to 15 characters) can be enabled as either Level 1 or Level 2. The Access Codes can be set
in the Communication/HMI Menu or from TCC600.
Level Access protection will be automatically reinstated when either of the following
conditions are met:
• No HMI menu activity for a period of 15 minutes

• The user exits to the top of the HMI menu for a period of greater than 10 seconds
3.2.3 Access levels

General access to read setpoints, to monitor status, to reset drag hand parameters and the
resettable operations counter do not require an Access Code.
The Level 1 Access Code, if set, is required to make setpoint changes. If the Level 1
Access Code is set to all zeros, this request for an Access Code will not be seen and
changes can be made without an Access Code. The default Level 1 Access Code is
000000.
The Level 2 Access Code, if set, is required to make changes to the configuration,
communication, and utilities. If the Level 2 Access Code is set to all zeros, this request for
an Access Code will not be seen and changes can be made without an Access Code. The
default Level 2 Access Code is 222222.
The Level 3 Access Code is required to make changes to calibration settings on the
control. Contact ABB Customer Service for TCC300 Level 3 Access Codes.
38 TCC300
User Manual
Operation
3.2.3.1 Smart flash SD card user access key code
If a Smart Flash SD Card inserted into the control has a valid Access Level 1 or Access
Level 2 code written to it, the control will accept the code and not prompt for an Access
Code.
3.2.3.2 HMI Level Access prompt
When Level Access is active, to change any settings which require a Level Access Code,
the control will display an "Enter Level 1 (2 or 3) Access" prompt as applicable. Enter a
valid Level Access Code as described below:
1. When prompted, press the ENT pushbutton to enter the "Change" mode.
2. If Level Access is active, the applicable Level Access prompt will be displayed.
When entering the Level Access Code the display will automatically
advance the cursor to the next digit when input is momentarily
paused.
3. Enter a valid Level Access Code, then press the ENT pushbutton.
If a valid Level Access Code was entered, the display will briefly flash a
confirmation screen and then display the applicable change prompt screen.
4. If the control briefly displays an "Access Denied" screen, re-enter a valid code.
3.2.4 Oscillograph recorder
3.2.4.1 Triggering oscillograph recorder from TCC600
The Oscillograph Recorder can be manually triggered by the user from TCC600.
1. Start TCC600, then establish communications with the target control.

2. Select Setup/Oscillograph/Triggerfrom the TCC600 toolbar. TCC600 will display
an Oscillograph Trigger confirmation dialog screen.
TCC300 39
User Manual
Operation
GUID-A84DA2DF-C40F-4830-B67D-2A7681A2E2B3 V1 EN
Figure 6: Manual Oscillograph Trigger Confirmation Dialog Screen
3. Select Yes. TCC600 will display an "Oscillograph was triggered successfully"

confirmation screen.
GUID-2682C15F-EB3A-49BA-B557-78BE734B0A94 V1 EN
Figure 7: Oscillograph Recorder Successfully Triggered Confirmation Dialog

Screen
The control will display an "Oscillograph Record Triggered" cycling message

indicating that an oscillograph record is available for download. This screen
message will continue until the oscillograph record is cleared.
4. Select OK. TCC600 will return to the Main screen.
3.2.4.2 Retrieving oscillograph record from TCC600
Oscillograph data must be retrieved from the control in a Comtrade file (*.cfg) in order to
be viewed. TCC600® can be utilized to view the file contents.
1. Start TCC600®, then establish communications with the target control.

2. Select Setup/Oscillograph/Retrieve from the TCC600 toolbar. TCC600 will
display a "Retrieve Oscillograph Record" dialog screen.
40 TCC300
User Manual
Operation
GUID-D8C914BE-C38E-407B-B8DC-67571D3A9FDC V1 EN
Figure 8: Retrieve Oscillograph Record Dialog Screen
3. Select the desired oscillograph record, then select Retrieve. TCC600 will display a
Retrieve Oscillograph Record "Save As" dialog screen.
TCC300 41
User Manual
Operation
GUID-CB9AF680-1903-49FC-A8A3-69ABE85B87DB V1 EN
Figure 9: Retrieve Oscillograph Record (Save As) Dialog Screen
4. Select a folder to save the file to and the desired file name, then select Save, TCC600
will momentarily display an Initialization status screen, then a Retrieving
Oscillograph Record status screen.
GUID-8CCC4444-67AF-400F-8AB8-0761C995C278 V1 EN
Figure 10: Initialize Oscillograph Record Download Screen
42 TCC300
User Manual
Operation
GUID-4D87CE06-8380-46FB-9EEC-A5F3946EA744 V1 EN
Figure 11: Retrieving Oscillograph Record Status Screen
When the oscillog raph record has been downloaded, TCC600 will display a
confirmation screen. Also, the cycling display on the control will not stop until the
oscillograph records are cleared.
GUID-C5F5554A-984C-47A7-B06F-F6F9C1265559 V1 EN
Figure 12: Oscillograph Data Records Were Retrieved Confirmation Screen
5. Select OK. TCC600 will return to the Retrieve Oscillograph Record screen.
6. Select any additional records to retrieve or select Cancel to return to the Main
screen.
3.2.4.3 Clearing oscillograph records from TCC600

2. Select Setup/Oscillograph/Clear from the TCC600 toolbar. TCC600 will display
a Clear Oscillograph Record confirmation screen.
TCC300 43
User Manual
Operation
GUID-259E0DB0-623F-4218-83D9-98C4F0BA0DCD V1 EN
Figure 13: Clear Oscillograph Record Confirmation Screen
3. Select Yes. TCC600 will display a confirmation dialog screen.
GUID-3C7C33A6-2BCE-4BED-AA42-EE3A90D65A7D V1 EN
Figure 14: Clear Oscillograph Record Confirmation Screen
4. Select OK. TCC600 will return to the Main screen. The cycling display will be
stopped.
3.2.4.4 Clearing oscillograph records from the HMI
1. Press the Right Arrow (COMM Hot Button) to wake the unit. The menu will advance
to either "COMMUNICATION" or "Memory Card" (when a Smart Flash SD
CARD is present).
2. If the "Communication" menu is displayed, then press the Down Arrow pushbutton
once. The unit will display the "Comm Settings" menu. From the "Comm Settings"
or "Memory Card" menu, press the Right or Left Arrow pushbutton as necessary
until "HMI" is displayed.
3. Press the Down arrow as necessary until the following is displayed.
Clear OSC Records
Ready Press ENTER
4. Press the ENT pushbutton. If prompted, enter a valid Level 2 Access Code. The
following will be displayed:
Confirm press ENTER
Cancel press EXIT.
5. Press the ENT pushbutton. The following will be displayed:
44 TCC300
User Manual
Operation
Records Cleared!
Any key to continue
3.3 Sequence of events recorder
3.3.1 Triggering sequence of events recorder from TCC600

The Sequence of Events Recorder can be manually triggered by the user from TCC600®.

2. Select Setup/Sequence of Events/Trigger from the TCC600 toolbar. TCC600 will
display a Sequence of Events Trigger confirmation dialog screen.
GUID-13375ED9-CADC-44DD-90B1-BF97EAE7E445 V1 EN
Figure 15: Sequence of Events Trigger Confirmation Dialog Screen
3. Select Yes. TCC600 will display a "Sequence of Events was triggered successfully"
GUID-5E49E7A0-9B47-48BA-992F-BBE76C0D0E16 V1 EN
Figure 16: Sequence of Events Recorder Successfully Triggered

Confirmation Dialog Screen
TCC300 45
User Manual
Operation
3.3.2 Retrieving sequence of events record from TCC600

TCC600 can be utilized to view the file contents.

2. Select Setup/Sequence of Events/Retrieve from the TCC600 toolbar. TCC600 will
display a Retrieve Sequence of Events Record "Save As" dialog screen.
GUID-C6644544-0558-4839-8C73-3C1B1A6D4A87 V1 EN
Figure 17: Retrieve Sequence of Events Record (Save As) Dialog Screen
3. Select a folder to save the file to and the desired file name, then select Save. TCC600
will momentarily display an Initialization status screen, then a "Retrieving Sequence
of Events Record" status screen.
GUID-1210166A-138D-4B46-A014-0FBBCD94F34F V1 EN
Figure 18: Initialize Sequence of Events Record Download Screen
46 TCC300
User Manual
Operation
GUID-74226A84-ECAA-41ED-88EA-AFB74B28F941 V1 EN
Figure 19: Retrieving Sequence of Events Record Status Screen
When the Sequence of Events record has been downloaded TCC600 will display a
GUID-EF95C116-53DA-4F4A-9AB5-5A838D84646C V1 EN
Figure 20: Sequence of Events Records Retrieved Successfully Confirmation

Screen
4. Select OK. TCC600 will display "View Sequence of Events Record" dialog screen.
3.3.3 Viewing sequence of events from TCC600

2. Select Setup/Sequence of Events/View from the TCC600 toolbar. TCC600 will
display a "View Sequence of Events Record" dialog screen.
3. Select the desired Sequence of Events record to display the captured parameters.
• Trigger Status
• The "Trigger Status" section of the View Sequence of Events Dialog
Screen displays the current trigger status at the instant the Sequence of
Events Recorder was triggered. Sequence of Events is monitored at a
fixed period of 1 cycle.
• Pickup/Dropout
• The "Pickup and Dropout" sections of the View Sequence of Events
Dialog Screen indicate which signal caused the Sequence of Events
recorder to trigger. These sections also include all the signals that
changed at the instant that the Sequence of Events Recorder triggered
TCC300 47
User Manual
Operation
GUID-BAF63489-005D-4884-A8EA-A4F80902F00C V1 EN
Figure 21: View Sequence of Events Dialog Screen
3.3.4 Clearing sequence of events records from TCC600

2. Select Setup/Sequence of Events/Clear from the TCC600 toolbar. TCC600 will
display a Clear Sequence of Events Record confirmation screen.
GUID-D0BD2C44-414D-48FC-B223-D19162B126C4 V1 EN
Figure 22: Clear Sequence of Events Record Confirmation Screen
3. Select Yes. TCC600 will display a "Clear" status screen, then a Sequence of Events
records cleared successfully confirmation screen.
48 TCC300
User Manual
Operation
GUID-52B11353-9ED1-4B18-A436-C26DDD179C78 V1 EN
Figure 23: Clear Status Screen
GUID-A3490575-9074-4A22-B2B4-7AC33A821985 V1 EN
Figure 24: Sequence of Events Records Cleared Successfully Confirmation

Screen
3.4 Data logging
3.4.1 Retrieving data logging data
When Load Voltage, Compensated Voltage, Source Voltage and Load

Current are selected, the data to be retrieved will consist of the average,
minimum and maximum values over the sampling period.

2. Select Setup/Data Logging/Retrieve from the TCC600 toolbar. TCC600 will
display a Data Log Download dialog screen.
TCC300 49
User Manual
Operation
GUID-C05B6A4F-FD6A-492E-8F52-FDC5D31F6722 V1 EN
Figure 25: Data Log Download Dialog Screen
Load Voltage, Compensated Voltage, Load Current and Source

Voltage are the average value during the data logging interval.
3. From the "Data to be retrieved" section of the Data Log Download screen select the
desired parameters to be retrieved.
4. From the "Data Log Download Range" section of the Data Log Download screen
select the "Start Date", "Start Time", "End Date" and "End Time" or select "Set
'Download Range' to start from last retrieval".
5. Select "Download". TCC600® will display a "Setpoints Successfully written to the
control" confirmation screen and then display a "Save As" dialog screen.
50 TCC300
User Manual
Operation
GUID-F30E8D82-95A5-4460-AAEE-BBCD9FAD3FEB V1 EN
Figure 26: Setpoints Successfully Written To Control Confirmation Screen
GUID-5B0AFFE7-4B47-4C4E-91B2-80D6C79984A9 V1 EN
Figure 27: Data Log Download (Save As) Dialog Screen
6. Select a folder to save the file to and the desired file name, then select Save. TCC600
will display a Transferring Data Log status screen.
TCC300 51
User Manual
Operation
GUID-C59B238F-F57B-48D8-A220-6EB36CAA96F9 V1 EN
Figure 28: Transferring Data Log Status Screen
When the Data Log do wnload is complete TCC600 will display a confirmation
screen.
GUID-0E1289DA-D2D1-419A-9D4F-3075609993C5 V1 EN
Figure 29: Data Log Records Retrieved Successfully Confirmation Screen
3.4.2 Clearing data log records from TCC600

2. Select Setup/Data Log/Clear from the TCC600 toolbar. TCC600 will display a
Clear Data Log Record confirmation screen.
52 TCC300
User Manual
Operation
GUID-7260435D-1254-411D-8F7B-1244DC569FF9 V1 EN
Figure 30: Clear Data Log Record Confirmation Screen
3. Select OK. TCC600 will display a "Clear" status screen and then a "All of the data
logging records were cleared" confirmation screen.
GUID-50F2A7FE-064F-4F62-BA64-D5B777A28761 V1 EN
Figure 31: Clear Data Log Record Status Screen
GUID-CDA922E6-C42B-493F-A6F2-C4245909E332 V1 EN
Figure 32: Data Log Records Cleared Successfully Confirmation Screen
3.4.3 Converting datalog files to CSV format
This utility converts "*.CFG" datalog files to "*.CSV" files for viewing in Excel.
Selecting this utility from the TCC600® utility drop down menu opens an "Open" file
TCC300 53
User Manual
Operation
dialog screen. Selecting the target CFG file and then selecting "Open" converts the file and
saves the resulting CSV file in the target file directory.
3.4.4 Clearing data log records from the HMI
1. Press the Down Arrow (CNFG Hot Button) pushbutton to awaken the unit. The
menu will advance to "CONFIGURATION".
2. Press the Down Arrow pushbutton once. The unit will display the following:
Tapchanger Type
3. Press the Right or Left arrow pushbutton, as necessary, to navigate to the "Data
Logging" menu.
4. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as necessary, until the "Press ENT to clear Data
Log Records" screen is displayed.
Press ENT to confirm clearing Data Log
6. Press the ENT pushbutton, the following sequence of screens will be displayed.
Erasing Data Log records...
Data Log records have been cleared.
3.5 Active setpoint profile
3.5.1 Setting active setpoint profile from TCC600

2. Select Setup/Profile/Set Active Profile from the TCC600 toolbar.
54 TCC300
User Manual
Operation
GUID-FAF18F03-9BCC-481F-B917-3F0E6973F93B V1 EN
Figure 33: Selecting Set Active Profile
The control will immediately respond to the new Active Setpoint

Profile settings.
3. Select the desired profile to activate. The Active Profile will be indicated in the menu
dropdown and the TCC600 Lower Information Bar.
The Active Profile can also be selected from the Lower Information Bar.
GUID-499496F7-6A0F-4C26-92B9-DAF0E7A8EFEA V1 EN
Figure 34: Set Active Profile from TCC600 Information Bar
TCC300 55
User Manual
Operation
3.6 Metering and status
Metering
The control has the capability of displaying measured and calculated secondary quantities
and calculated primary quantities.
Secondary
The display will show local voltage, source voltage, compensated voltage, line frequency,
and load current in secondary quantities along with load power factor. The voltage is
displayed on a 120 V base and the current is displayed on a 200 mA base.
The local voltage displayed will not match the voltage measured at the test
terminals on the adapter panel if a sensing VT ratio correction other than
0.0 V has been entered.
Primary
In order to use the calculated primary quantities feature, the user must enter the following
data in the Configuration Menu:
• Select line-to-line or line-to-ground VT configuration.

• Select single-phase quantities based on measured inputs, or three-phase quantities
based on measured inputs and assume a balanced system.
• Select primary voltage and current multipliers needed to calculate primary quantities.
Present Demand
The Present Demand metering capability provided in the control follows the concept of a
lagged demand meter. The demand time interval is selected by the user as 5, 10, 15, 30 or
60 minutes. This is the time it takes for a thermal meter to indicate 90% of a change in load.
Energy Metering
The Energy Metering function of the control displays the following measured values:
• Total Lagging VAr Hours (KVArh, MVArh or GVArh)

• Total Leading VAr Hours (KVArh, MVArh or GVArh)
• Total Reverse Watt Hours (KWh, MWh or GWh)
• Total Forward Watt Hours (KWh, MWh or GWh)
The measured values are retained in non-volatile memory. A real time clock is utilized to
record a date/time stamp for each quantity to indicate when the period of measurement
was initiated.
56 TCC300
User Manual
Operation
When a Energy Metering screen is selected, the screen cycles continuously to indicate the
total value, date and time the measurement was initiated. The E indicates that the
measured value can be reset by pushing ENT.
Demand History
Demand History quantities are the maximum and minimum values for the period since the
last reset command. These are retained in non-volatile memory. A real-time clock allows
the recording of a date/time stamp with each Demand History quantity. The following are
available for drag-hand use:
• Min/Max tap position (when Tap Position is enabled)

• Min Load voltage (120 V base)
• Max Load voltage (120 V base)
• Max Primary current
• Max Primary watts, kW or MW
• Max Primary VAr, kVAr or MVAr
• Max Primary VA, kVA or MVA
• Power Factor at max VA
Where primary quantities are used, values displayed are single-phase or three-phase as
defined in the Pri Pwr Display Screen of the Configuration Menu.
When the TCC300 Tapchanger Control is used with a ABB adapter panel,
the panel’s drag hands reset button only resets the mechanical drag hands
of the regulator or LTC transformer. The button does not reset the tap drag
hands information stored in the control. The maximum and minimum tap
position of the control should always be reset when the mechanical drag
hands are reset.
The values retained in memory are time-tagged quantities that are calculated using the
demand period selected (5, 10, 15, 30 or 60 minutes). For voltage, values are the average
of samples taken over a period of 32 seconds which avoids undue retention of momentary
voltage transients. The load power factor retained is the value at the time of max VA.
When selected, three screens for each parameter cycle continuously and indicate the
value, date and time of each parameter. The E indicates that the drag-hand can be reset by
pushing ENT.
The control is equipped with a real-time, 24‑hour clock which is used with the drag-hand
feature to record date/time stamp information on quantities saved in memory. The power
source for the clock is maintained for at least 24 hours during a system power outage by
a charged capacitor (no battery). If the power outage lasts longer than 24 hours, check the
clock and reset if necessary.
TCC300 57
User Manual
Operation
Frequency
The control provides for real-time metering of the line frequency. If the control is a 60 Hz
model, the operating frequency is 55 to 65 Hz; if the control is a 50 Hz model, the operating
frequency is 45 to 55 Hz.
Primary
Current Main CT Transmission/ Theoretical
Distribution Line Load Center
IPRI
Bypass
Arrestor IL VT
0.2 A
VS Nominal VLOC VCOMP
Load Current
VPRI
Primary
Source Voltage 120 V Compensated
Voltage Nominal Voltage
NOTE: The VT and CT are usually integral to the regulator.

S L SL
Indicates calculated quantities
Regulator
GUID-A89B422C-1E9B-4D1B-88FD-E533FF66A54F V1 EN
Figure 35: Secondary Quantity Metering and Primary Quantity Calculations for
Regulator Applications
58 TCC300
User Manual
Operation
Primary
IPRI
Auxiliary VT
CT
Primary
IL VLOC
Voltage VCOMP
0.2 A VPRI
Nominal
High Low Load Current 120 V Compensated
Voltage Voltage
Nominal Voltage
NOTE: The figure shows a Line-to-Ground VT and a

single-phase CT. The system can also accommodate a
Line-to-Line VT and a Phase-to-Phase connected CT.
Transformer
GUID-A3C2F09C-5B01-4938-AA65-3C56CF85FD08 V1 EN
Transformer Applications
3.6.1 Accessing of monitoring screens from the HMI

The Monitor menu provides the user with the capability to view the Metering, Status, Tap
Information, Present Demand, Demand History, Energy Metering, Harmonics and Motor
Current elements of the monitoring screens (Single or Three Phase). The steps necessary
to access, view, and where applicable, perform parameter specific operations for each
monitoring category are described herein.
TCC300 59
User Manual
Operation
Table 1: HMI categories/parameters for monitoring

Category Parameter
Metering Load Voltage
Meter Out Voltage
Source Voltage
Load Current
Circulating/DVAr Current
Compensated Voltage
Primary Voltage
Primary Src Voltage
Primary Current
Primary Watts
Primary VArs
Primary VA
Power Factor
Frequency
Status Tapchanger Status
Alarm Status
Input Status
Output Status
Tap Information (E) Indicates Tap Information parameters that can be
reset to zero or set to a value.
Tap Position/Cal
Drag Hands (E)
Definite Timer
Intertap Timer
Operation Counter
Resettable Counter (E)
Neutral Sw Counter
Lower Counter
Raise Counter
Specific Tap Statistics
Clear Tap Statistics
RTN Counter
RTN Status
Count to RTN Active
Present Demand Demand Interval
Demand Load Voltage
Demand Primary Current
Demand Primary Watts
Demand Primary VArs
Demand Primary VA
Demand History (E) Indicates Demand History parameters that can
be reset to zero.
Demand Interval
Min Load Voltage (E)
Max Load Voltage (E)
Max Primary Current (E)
Max Primary Watts (E)
Max Primary VArs (E)
Max Primary VA (E)
PF @ Max VA (E)
Table continues on next page
60 TCC300
User Manual
Operation
Category Parameter
Energy Metering (E) Indicates Energy Metering parameters that can
be reset to zero.
Watt Hours Fwd (E)
Lagging VAr Hours (E)
Watt Hours Rev (E)
Leading VAr Hours (E)
Harmonics Voltage % THD
Current % THD
View Voltage Harmonics
View Current Harmonics
Motor Current (E) Indicates Motor Current parameters that can be
reset to zero.
Peak RMS Curr
Avg RMS Curr
Profile Duration
Peak Motor Current (E)
3.6.1.1 Accessing the metering screens from the HMI
1. Press the Left Arrow (MNTR Hot Button) pushbutton to awaken the unit. The menu
will advance to "MONITOR".
Metering
3. Pressing the Down arrow pushbutton will display the first metering parameter (Load
Voltage). Pressing the Down arrow pushbutton will advance to the following
Metering parameters:
• Load Voltage
• Meter Out Voltage
• Source Voltage
• Load Current
• Circulating Current or D VAr Current
• Compensated Voltage
• Primary Voltage
• Primary Source Voltage
• Primary Current
• Primary Watts
• Primary VArs
• Primary VA
• Power Factor
• Frequency
TCC300 61
User Manual
Operation
3.6.1.2 Accessing the status screens from the HMI
Metering
3. Press the Right or Left arrow pushbutton as necessary to navigate to the "Status"
screen.
4. Press the Down arrow pushbutton once. The menu will advance to the first status
element (Tapchanger Status) of the Status groups.
The status groups can be accessed by continuing to press the Down pushbutton within the
Status menu and then pressing ENT to view.
The Status screens consist of four individual status groups that include:
• Tapchanger Status
• Alarm Status
• Input Status
• Output Status
3.6.1.3 Accessing the tapchanger status screens from the HMI
1. Navigate to the "Tapchanger Status" screen.

Press ENT to view Tapchanger Status
2. Press the ENT pushbutton. The control will display a summary of the Tapchanger
Status parameters.
• TAP = Tap Position [1]
• BDS = Band Status
• PWR = Power Direction
• BLK = Blocks In Effect
• VRD = Voltage Reduction
3. To cycle through each element of the "Tapchanger Status" display press the Down
arrow pushbutton.
[1] In order to verify Neutral Tap Position, when the tap position is "0", but no neutral input is detected, the Tap Position screen will display "- - -"
instead of "0".
62 TCC300
User Manual
Operation
Table 2: Tapchanger status parameters

Parameter Values
Tap Position The range of displayed values for Tap Position (TAP)
are 16L–0–16R.
Band Status The range of displayed values for Band Status (BDS)
are HIGH, LOW and In Band.
Power Direction The range of displayed values for Power Direction
(PWR) are Forward and Reverse.
Blocks in Effect The range of displayed values for Blocks in Effect
(BLK) from left to right are:
Position 1
LL – Block Line Limit
DL – Delta VAr Overcurrent Limit Block
Position 2
FL – Force Lower Block
BR – Volt Block Raise
BL – Volt Block Lower
Position 3
TR – Tap Raise Block
TL – Tap Lower Block
Position 4
NS – Non Sequential Block
SR – Seal - in Failure Raise Block
SL – Seal - in Failure Lower Block
IB – Low Current Block
Position 5
CB – Comm Block
Position 6
RP – Reverse Power Block
Position 7
SC – SCADA Cutout Local
Voltage Reduction The range of displayed values for Voltage reduction
(VRD) are on and off. Press the Exit pushbutton to
return to the "Tapchanger Status" screen.
3.6.1.4 Accessing the alarm status screens from the HMI
1. Navigate to the "Alarm Status" screen.

2. Press the ENT pushbutton. The control will display a summary of the Alarm Status
parameters.
Alarm Status Display Key
• – = Disabled/Condition Not Met
• 1 = ALARM, ENABLED/Condition Met
• 0 = ENABLED/Condition Not Met
• X = Disabled/Condition Met
3. To cycle through each element of the Alarm Status display, press the Down arrow
pushbutton. The control will display a detailed status screen.
TCC300 63
User Manual
Operation
Table 3: Alarm status parameters

Parameter Value
A Block Raise Tap disabled/not met
B Block Lower Tap disabled/not met
C Block Raise Volt ENABLED/not met
D Block Lower Volt ENABLED/not met
E Voltage Reduction disabled/not met
F Power Direction disabled/not met
G Current Limit disabled/not met
H Comm Block disabled/not met
I LDC/LDZ disabled/not met
J Abnormal Tap disabled/not met
K VAr Bias Lag disabled/not met
L VAr Bias Lead disabled/not met
M Backup Fail (If purchased) disabled/not met
N/M1) DVar2 Over Curr (If purchased) disabled/not met
O/N1)/M2) Seal-in Failure disabled/not met
P/O1)/N2) Low Current Blk disabled/not met
Q/P1)/O2) RTN Fail disabled/not met
R/Q1)/P2) Ind Tap Wear disabled/not met
S/R1)/Q2) Op Count Signal disabled/not met
T/S1)/R2) Tap Changer Fail disabled/not met
1) These parameters will decrement by 1 letter if Backup Power (M) is not purchased.
2) These parameters will decrement by 2 letters if Backup Power (M) and DVAr2 (N) are not purchased.
The range of displayed values for each Alarm element are, disabled/not met,
ENABLED/not met, COND MET/disabled and ALARM (Enabled/condition
exists).
4. Press the Exit pushbutton to return to the "Alarm Status" screen.
3.6.1.5 Accessing the input status screens from the HMI
1. Navigate to the "Input Status" screen.

2. Press the ENT pushbutton. The control will display a summary of the Input Status
parameters.
Input Status Parameter Key:
64 TCC300
User Manual
Operation
• C = Counter Contact
• NS = Non-Sequential Input
• VR = Voltage Reduction 1, Voltage Reduction 2
• TC = Tap Connection
• KT = Keeptrack Lower, Keeptrack Raise
• N = Neutral Tap Position
• MS = Motor Seal-In
Input Status Display Key:
• 1 = On
• 0 = Off
For VR:
• - - = No Voltage Reduction Steps
• 1 - = Voltage Reduction Step 1 in effect - -
• - 2 = Voltage ReductionStep 2 in effect
• 1 2 = Voltage Reduction Step 3 in effect
For KT:
• - - = No Raise or Lower inputs active
• R - = Raise Input detected - - -
• L = Lower Input detected
• RL = Motor po wer is not connected or circuit failure
3. To cycle through each element of the "Input Status" display press the Down arrow
3.6.1.6 Accessing the output status screens from the HMI
1. Navigate to the "Output Status" screen.

2. Press the ENT pushbutton. The control will display a summary of the Output Status
parameters.
Output Status Parameter Key
• RAISE = Raise Output Contact
• LOWER = Lower Output Contact
• ALARM = Alarm Output Contact
Output Status Display Key:
• 1 = On
• 0 = Off
3. To cycle through each element of the "Output Status" display press the Down arrow
TCC300 65
User Manual
Operation
3.6.1.7 Accessing the metering and status screen from TCC600
The Metering & Status Screen, when connected to a control, displays parameter values
consistent with the capabilities of the communication system.
To access the Metering and Status screen from the TCC600® Main Menu, select Monitor/
Metering & Status, or the menu bar Metering & Status hot button. TCC600 will display
the Metering & Status screen.
The Metering Status display colors and text can be set in the Monitor/Set Metering Colors
dialog screen.
When changing Metering and Status screen colors you must exit the
Metering and Status screen for the color change to take affect.
GUID-888AA5FD-BED2-4426-B796-0EE4CF589E60 V1 EN
Figure 37: Metering and Status Screen
66 TCC300
User Manual
Operation
7620 V Primary V
x 64.5 x 63.5
Load V
Control V Not used for Normalized 120.0 V
for Settings Settings Voltage
x 1.0127
Resultant 1.5 V PT Correction x 1.0127
Multiplier Factor Multiplier
118.5 V Meter Out Meter Out Load V 118.5 V
Regulator PT Output or Cabinet Ratio

if Ratio Transformer Transformer
GUID-89E8504F-0281-48EF-A167-F66D473E095E V1 EN
Figure 38: Meter Out Voltage Calculation
3.6.2 Primary metering (single or three phase)

Voltage
Displays the calculated primary voltage based on the user-selected voltage multiplier, VT
corrections, and measured secondary voltage.
Source Voltage
Displays the calculated primary source voltage based on the user selected source voltage
multiplier, source VT corrections and source secondary voltage.
Current
Displays the calculated primary current based on the user-selected current multiplier, and
measured secondary current.
Watts
Displays the calculated primary quantity based on the user-selected voltage and current
multipliers; VT configuration (line-to-ground or line-to-line), singlephase or three-phase,
and measured secondary voltage and current.
VAr
multipliers, VT configuration (line-to-ground or line-to-line), singlephase or three-phase,
TCC300 67
User Manual
Operation
VA
multipliers, VT configuration (line-to-ground or line-to-line), singlephase or three-phase,
3.6.3 Remote voltage bias

Voltage
Displays the Remote Voltage value provided to the control utilizing either DNP 3.0,
MODBUS or IEC 61850 protocols. If a voltage value is present the control is utilizing the
Remote Voltage Bias Voltage to control.
3.6.4 Secondary metering status

Load Voltage
Displays the real-time measured value of voltage at the Tapchanger and includes any
corrections made using the user-selected VT correction voltage.
Meter Out Voltage

Displays the measured voltage at the terminals of the TCC300 without any software
modifications. Used as the base for normalizing voltage.
Source Voltage
Displays the real-time calculated/measured source voltage and includes any corrections
made using the user-selected VT correction voltage.
Compensated Voltage
Displays the calculated voltage at the "load center".
Normalizing Voltage
Displays the result of the Normalizing Multiplier (0.80 to 1.20) times the Meter Out
Voltage.
Load Current
Displays the real-time measured value of current.
Power Factor
Displays the real-time calculated value of power factor.
68 TCC300
User Manual
Operation
Frequency
Displays the real-time measured frequency value.
Circulating Current
Displays a representable value of circulating current, if the control is used with the ABB
M-0115A Parallel Balancing Module, or it's equivalent.
3.6.5 Tap information

Tap Position
Displays the tap position of the tapchanger when any method of KeepTrack™ is used.
Recognizes tapchanges commanded via manual, automatic or external (SCADA) means.
In order to verify Neutral Tap Position, when the tap position is "0", but no
neutral input is detected, "- - - " will be displayed instead of "0".
Drag Hands
Displays the tap position Drag Hands values for each direction.
Timer (Raise/Lower)
Displays the integrated out-of-band time for a voltage excursion outside the upper/lower
band limit up to the value of the time delay setpoint.
Intertap Timer
In the sequential mode of operation, displays the integrated out-of-band time for a voltage
excursion and the subsequent tapchange. Adjustable from 0 to 60 seconds, in 1 second
increments, with a factory setting of 0 seconds.
Operation Counter
Records the number of raise and lower operations. The operation counter will increment
based on the counter configuration, as set by the user. This counter is not resettable.
The counter accommodates 999,999 operation counts and the number of counts stored in
memory is not affected by a loss of supply power. Total operation count is displayed in the
Status Menu. This counter cannot be reset, but can be preset to any value up to 999,999 in
the Configuration menu.
TCC300 69
User Manual
Operation
Resettable Operations Counter

The user resets this counter to zero by pressing ENT while viewing the resettable
operation counter screen within the Status Menu. No password is required to reset the
resettable operations counter.
The counter will only increment with a connection to the counter input.
Neutral Counter
Records the number of times the Neutral Input is energized.
The counter accommodates 999,999 operation counts and the number of counts stored in
memory is not affected by a loss of supply power. Total operation count is displayed in the
Status Menu. This counter cannot be reset, but can be preset to any value up to 999,999 in
the Configuration menu.
RTN Status
Displays the "Run Through Neutral" feature status (Enabled or Disabled).
Count To RTN Active

Displays the number of counter operations since the operations between runs setting was
set, or since the feature was enabled. The counter will reset to zero if the feature is enabled
and successfully runs through neutral.
RTN Success Counter

The RTN Counter will increment after each successful operation of the Run Through
Neutral feature.
3.6.6 Tapchanger status

Operation Mode
Indicates the operational mode of the control (Auto, Manual or Off).
Block Status
Indicates blocks that are active. Blocks that can be active include:
• Selftest
• Comm Block
• Line Limit
• Reverse Power
• Over Voltage Runback
70 TCC300
User Manual
Operation
• Block Raise (Tap)

• Block Lower (Tap)
• Block Raise (Voltage)
• Block Lower (Voltage)
• SCAMP Switch
• Front Panel Switch
• Non-Sequential Block
• Seal-in Failure Raise Block
• Seal-in Failure Lower Block
• Low Current
Band Status
Indicates one of three conditions: High, when voltage is out of band high, Low when
voltage is out of band low, or OK when voltage is within band.
VAr Bias Effect

Indicates one of three conditions when enabled. If the control has determined that the
absolute reactive power is >¾ of the Max Cap Bank Setting and the inverse timer has
timed out, then the control will increase the effective bandcenter by 1 Volt depending on
the direction of the reactive power and will either indicate "Bandcenter Raise" for negative
reactive power or "Bandcenter Lower" for positive reactive power. If the absolute power
is <¾ of the Max Cap Bank Setting then the display will indicate "None".
Power Direction
Indicates one of two power directions: Forward (forward power condition) or Reverse
(reverse power condition).
Voltage Reduction
VR Off indicates voltage reduction is not active, blocked either by non-sequential input,
reverse power condition, or by communicated command. VR Step 1, 2, and 3 indicate that
voltage reduction is in effect for the stated step value. VR Step 1, 2, and 3 indicate that
voltage reduction has been implemented from the control front panel for the stated step
value.
HMI Active Mode

Indicates that HMI menu at the control is active. Turns off after 15 minutes of inactivity.
3.6.7 Aux input status

Indicates (red) when the Auxiliary Input is active.
TCC300 71
User Manual
Operation
3.6.8 Input status

Neutral Tap
Indicates neutral position contact input is closed.
Counter
Indicates operation counter contact input is closed.
Non-Sequential
Indicates Non‑sequential contact input is closed. Tapchanger control blocks raise or lower
operation on a sustained closed contact.
Motor Seal-In
Indicates when motor power is applied.
Voltage Reduction 1
Indicates Step 1 Voltage Reduction contact output is closed.
Voltage Reduction 2
Indicates Step 2 Voltage Reduction contact output is closed.
SCADA Cutout
Indicates SCADA (switch) input is closed. Tapchanger control blocks remote Raise or
Lower operation.
3.6.9 Output status

Raise
Indicates when a Tap Raise output is active. Limited by tap Block Raise setpoint and tap
position limit settings.
Lower
Indicates when a Tap Lower output is active. Limited by tap Block Lower setpoint and tap
Programmable Alarm
Indicates when a Programmable Alarm condition is true.
Motor Seal-In
Indicates when a Motor Seal-In Output is active.
72 TCC300
User Manual
Operation
3.6.10 Alarm status

There are three available states designated by color for each of the Alarm Status elements:
• Gray with Dark Gray Text – Alarm disabled.

• Gray with Black Text – Alarm enable and condition not met.
• RED – Alarm enabled and condition exists.
Comm Block
The control has had its automatic operation blocked via communications and is now in
manual operation mode and the alarm output is on due to this condition.
Block Raise (Tap)

The tap position equals or exceeds the block raise tap limit setting and the alarm output is
on due to this condition.
Block Lower (Tap)

The tap position equals or exceeds the block lower tap limit setting and the alarm output
is on due to this condition.
Block Raise (Voltage)

The tap position equals or exceeds the block raise voltage limit setting and the alarm
output is on due to this condition.
Block Lower (Voltage)

The tap position equals or exceeds the block lower voltage limit setting and the alarm
DVAr2 Load Current Limit

DVAr2 Load Current is exceeding the respective maximum current limit setting and the
alarm output is on due to this condition.
Mtr. Seal-In Failure

Indicates that motor current has not been detected for a period 15 seconds after a Raise or
Lower command has been executed. This event must occur two consecutive times for this
alarm to occur.
Backup Pwr Failure

Indicates the absence of Backup Power circuiting when Backup Power option has been
detected.
TCC300 73
User Manual
Operation
Low Current Block

When enabled the control determines if Load Current following a tapchange is less than
4 mA, coincident with Tap Delta Voltage being less than 4 Vac. When these conditions
exist the control will initiate an alarm and block regulation.
Individual Tap Wear

The number of operations on any single tap exceeds the Individual Tap Wear Alarm
setting.
Tap Changer Failure

When the Operation Counter Configuration is set to "Cam Follower" and this alarm has
been enabled, indicates the counter contact input has detected a Tap Changer Failure
condition.
A Cam Follower contact is a cam driven contact which is normally closed when the
Tapchanger is at rest, and opens and closes once during each tap operation in either
direction. If this contact does not open and close within 30 seconds after the control issues
a Raise or Lower in either local automatic or remote manual operational modes, this alarm
will activate. This alarm can be reset either by the Cam Follower contact operating
correctly during a subsequent Raise or Lower operation, or if reset by the user.
LDC/LDZ
Any value other than zero has been set for LDC/ LDZ.
Line Current Limit

The line current is exceeding the respective maximum current limit setting and the alarm
Reverse Power
Reverse power is present at the control and the alarm output is on due to this condition.
Abnormal Tap Position

Abnormal Tap Position is indicated when the alarm is enabled, KeepTrack™ is enabled
and the neutral input is detected but the present tap position at that instant is neither at
minus one nor plus one. The Abnormal Tap Position Alarm will also be activated when the
Motor Seal-in Failure detection feature has detected a Motor Seal-in Failure.
Voltage Reduction
Any level of voltage reduction is active.
74 TCC300
User Manual
Operation
VAr Bias Lead or Lag

Indicates when the VAr Bias effect (Lead or Lag) has exceeded the time limit imposed by
the Max VAr Bias Duration Setting.
Master/Follower Lockout
There are two types of lockout conditions, Master lockout and Follower lockout. Any
lockout of the paralleling mode will set the Master/Follower Lockout Alarm. When a
lockout condition exists, the control issuing the lockout will stop any further GOOSE
publishing and will stop load voltage regulation. Also, the alarm can be configured as a
DNP event, or as a report in case of IEC 61850. The lockout state will be displayed on the
control front panel display and in the Master/Follower Configuration Tool.
Master/Follower Alarm messages can be observed for the connected

control from the TCC600® Monitor/Master/ Follower Alarm messages
menu item.
Master Lockout
• Follower Detection Lockout - When the control powers up in Master Mode, the
control will wait for approximately 65 seconds to allow all the GOOSE messages
from all the Followers in the network to reach the Master. Once all GOOSE messages
have been received, the Master will start its normal algorithm. If within the initial 65
second period the Master does not receive all the GOOSE messages it expected, it will
enter the Master lockout state.
• Follower Timer Lockout - The Tap Position Response Timer will start after the
Master has published its new tap position message after it has performed a successful
tap operation. If it doesn’t receive the tap position messages from all the participating
Followers in the network before the timer expires, then a Master Lockout is issued.
• Tap Difference Lockout - If the Tap position difference between any Follower and the
Master is greater than or equal to the Tap Difference setting, the Master will enter the
lockout state.
• Follower Comm. Loss Lockout - If any follower does not send a valid retransmitted
GOOSE message within a 65 second internal keepalive time, then a lockout is issued,
signaling a broken communication link.
Follower Lockout
• Master Comm. Loss Lockout - When the Follower does not receive a valid
retransmitted GOOSE message from the Master, within a 65 second internal
keepalive time, and if the previous Master GOOSE message indicates that the breaker
TCC300 75
User Manual
Operation
statuses were closed, then a Follower Lockout is issued. This provides an indication
that a broken communication occurred.
• Follower Comm. Loss Lockout - If any follower does not send a valid retransmitted
GOOSE message within a 65 second internal keepalive time, then a lockout is issued,
signaling a broken communication link.
• Tap Difference Lockout - If the Tap Position Difference between the Follower and
the Master is greater than or equal to the Tap Difference setting, the Follower will
enter the lockout state.
RTN Fail to Operate

The RTN Fail alarm will actuate when the "Maximum RTN operations before Alarms"
setting has been exceeded.
Op Count Signal
The total number of operations has exceeded the Operations Counter Alarm Limit setting.
3.7 CBEMA events and counter status
When the Load Voltage is sagging or swelling greater than the pickup setting, then a
pickup status will be set after a minimum duration, in addition to incrementing a counter.
Up to 4 CBEMA events can be set and enabled allowing the control to trigger a Sequence
of Events record when each event occurs. Also, the control will report both the time and
duration of each event via DNP. These 4 settings allow the control to be set to record
violations of the ITIC curves (formerly known as CBEMA curves).
3.8 Demand and energy metering
3.8.1 Accessing the present demand screens from the HMI
Metering
3. Press the Right or Left arrow pushbutton, as necessary, to navigate to the "Present
Demand" screen.
4. Pressing the Down arrow pushbutton once will advance the menu to the first element
(Demand Interval) of the "Present Demand" screens.
Demand Interval
76 TCC300
User Manual
Operation
15 Min
5. Press the Down arrow pushbutton to access the remaining Present Demand
parameter screens.
• Demand Load Voltage
• Demand Primary Current
• Demand Primary Watts
• Demand Primary VArs
• Demand Primary VA
3.8.2 Setting the demand interval from the HMI
The Demand Interval can be set from either the "Present Demand" menu
or the "Demand History" menu.
1. Navigate to the desired "Demand Interval" screen (Present Demand or Demand

History), then press the ENT pushbutton.
If prompted, enter a valid Level 2 Access Code.
2. Utilizing either the Up or Down arrow pushbuttons, select between 5, 10, 15, 30 or
60 minute interval settings, then press the ENT pushbutton.
The display will return to the "Demand Interval" screen and display the new interval.
3.8.3 Accessing the demand history screens from the HMI
Metering
3. Press the Right or Left arrow pushbutton, as necessary, to navigate to the "Demand
History" screen.
4. Press the Down arrow pushbutton once. The menu will advance to the first element
(Demand Interval) of the "Demand History" screens.
Demand Interval
15 Min
Demand Interval is also included in the "Present Demand" menu.

The Demand Interval can be set from either menu.
The remaining "Demand History" screens are accessed by navigating within the
"Demand History" menu. When accessed, the individual screen's bottom line
display will cycle between the Demand History parameter value and the
TCC300 77
User Manual
Operation
corresponding Date and Time Stamp for that value. "Demand History" screens that
include an "E" on the right side of the top display line can be reset individually or all
at one time.
5. Press the Down arrow pushbutton to access the remaining Demand History
parameter screens:
• Min Load Voltage E
• Max Load Voltage E
• Max Pri. Current E
• Max Primary Watts E
• Max Primary VArs E
• Max Primary VA E
• PF @ Max VA E
• Press ENT to reset Demand History
• Press ENT to perform Master Reset
3.8.4 Accessing the demand and energy metering from TCC600
1. To access the Demand & Energy Metering screen from the TCC600® Main Menu,
select Monitor/Demand & Energy Metering. TCC600 will display the Demand &
Energy Metering screen.
The Demand & Energy Metering screen, when connected to a control, displays
parameter values consistent with the capabilities of the communication system.
78 TCC300
User Manual
Operation
GUID-E7200160-B164-429C-A5C3-D8FC53F3E204 V1 EN
Figure 39: Demand and Energy Metering Screen
2. Each element of the Demand History and Energy Metering can be reset individually
by selecting the desired parameter(s) and then selecting Reset Selected Items.
When the Reset command is issued, the metered value is reset to zero and the time
and date are updated.
• Select All – Allows the user to select all parameters.
• Clear All – Allows the user to reset all parameter values.
• Reset Selected Items – Allows the user to reset only the selected parameter
values.
TCC300 79
User Manual
Operation
Table 4: Demand & Energy Metering screen contents

Item Description
Demand Interval The Demand Interval applies to the Demand Present
Primary Current (Amps) parameter and the Demand
History parameters. The Demand Interval can be set
to 5, 10, 15, 30, and 60 minutes.
Demand Present Primary Current The Demand Present Primary Current parameter
value follows the concept of a lagged demand meter.
The demand time interval is selected by the user as
5, 10, 15, 30 or 60 minutes. This is the time it takes for
a thermal meter to indicate 90% of a change in load.
Load Voltage Displays the real-time measured value of voltage at
the Tapchanger or transformer and includes any
corrections made using the user selected VT
Correction Voltage.
Primary Current Displays the calculated primary demand current
based on the user-selected current multiplier and
Primary Watts Displays the real time demand value base on the
user-selected voltage and current multipliers; VT
configuration (line-to-ground or lineto- line), single-
phase or three-phase, and measured secondary
voltage and current.
Primary VAr Displays the real time demand value based on the
user-selected voltage and current multipliers, VT
configuration (line-to-ground or line-to-line), single-
Primary VA Displays the real time demand value based on the
configuration (line-to-ground or lineto- line), single-
3.8.5 Demand history/energy metering

All demand history (single phase) and Energy Metering Values include the date and time
at which each occurred. A drag hand value is the maximum or minimum value of a
measured quantity recorded since the last reset.
80 TCC300
User Manual
Operation
Table 5: Demand history (single phase) and Energy Metering values

Item Description
Minimum Load Voltage Displays minimum Load voltage at the Tapchanger
or transformer. This value continuously averaged
over consecutive 32-second intervals.
Maximum Load Voltage Displays drag hand maximum Load voltage at the
Tapchanger or transformer. This value continuously
averaged over consecutive 32-second intervals.
Maximum Primary Current Displays drag hand maximum primary current.
Maximum Primary Watts Displays drag hand maximum primary watts.
Maximum Primary VAr Displays drag hand maximum primary VArs.
Maximum Primary VA Displays drag hand maximum primary VA. Resets
automatically when Power Factor at (Max) VA value,
below, is reset.
Power Factor @ Max VA Displays drag hand power factor at time of maximum
VA.
Forward Watt Hours Displays drag hand forward Watt hours.
Reverse Watt Hours Displays drag hand reverse Watt hours.
Lagging VAr Hours Displays drag hand Lagging VAr hours.
Leading VAr Hours Displays drag hand Leading VAr hours.
3.8.6 Accessing the energy metering screens from the HMI
Metering
3. Press the Right or Left arrow pushbutton, as necessary, to advance to "Energy
Metering".
(Watt Hours Fwd) of the "Energy Metering" screens.
The remaining "Energy Metering" screens are accessed by navigating within the
"Energy Metering" menu. When accessed, the individual screen's bottom line
display will cycle between the Energy Metering parameter value and the
corresponding Date and Time Stamp for that value. "Energy Metering" screens that
include an "E" on the right side of the top display line can be reset individually or all
at one time.
5. Press the Down arrow pushbutton to access the remaining Energy Metering
parameter screens:
• Lagging VAr Hours E
• Watts Hours Rev E
• Leading VAr Hours E
TCC300 81
User Manual
Operation
• Press ENT to reset Energy Metering

• Press ENT to perform Master Reset
3.8.7 Resetting individual demand history or energy metering values

from the HMI
The presence of the "E" on the top line of the display indicates that the value can be reset
from this menu item. The steps necessary to reset individual Demand History or Energy
Metering items are as follows:
1. Navigate to the desired Demand History or Energy Metering parameter screen, then
press the ENT pushbutton.
2. Press the ENT pushbutton. The control will reset the displayed value.
The screen will return to the parameter screen and display the new value.
3.8.8 Resetting all demand history or energy metering parameter

values from the HMI
All Demand History or Energy Metering parameter menu items that include an "E" on the
top line of the display can be reset from this menu item. The steps necessary to reset ALL
Demand History or Energy Metering parameter values are as follows:
1. Navigate to the "Reset Demand History" or "Reset Energy Metering" screen.

2. Press the ENT pushbutton. The control will display a "confirmation" screen similar
to the following.
Press Ent to confirm reset Demand History (or Energy
Metering)
3. Press the ENT pushbutton. The control will reset ALL the Demand History or
Energy Metering values.
Demand History (or Energy Metering) has been reset.
4. Press the Exit pushbutton to return to the "Demand History" or "Energy Metering"
menu.
3.8.9 MASTER RESET of all demand history and energy metering

parameter values from the HMI
The "Demand History" menu includes the capability to initiate a Master Reset of both the
Demand History and Energy Metering parameter values. This capability is also included
in the "Energy Metering" menu. The steps necessary to reset ALL Demand History and
Energy Metering parameter values are as follows:
82 TCC300
User Manual
Operation
1. Navigate to the "Master Reset" menu item within the "Demand History" or "Energy
Metering" menus.
2. Press the ENT pushbutton. The control will respond with a "confirmation" screen.
Press ENT to confirm
Press Exit to cancel
3. Press the ENT pushbutton. The control will then display the following sequence of
screen displays.
Master Reset is complete.
Press ENT to perform Master Reset
4. Press the Exit pushbutton to return to the "Demand History" or "Energy Metering"
menu.
3.9 Real Time Voltage Plot
3.9.1 Accessing Real Time Voltage Plot from TCC600

The Real Time Voltage Plot feature allows the user to monitor in real time the last 60
seconds of the source voltage value and load voltage. The Voltage Chart freezes the last
30 seconds of the voltage profile and displays the current values.
• To access the Real Time Voltage Plot screen from the TCC600® Main Menu, select
Monitor/Real Time Voltage Plot. TCC600 will display the Real Time Voltage
Chart screen.
TCC300 83
User Manual
Operation
GUID-9DB711F5-2328-42EE-A564-6C63AD18201A V1 EN
Figure 40: Real Time Voltage Chart
3.10 Display all metering
The Display All Metering feature provides the user with a snapshot of all metering
parameters. This feature also allows the Display All Metering screen to be printed or saved
to a *.HTM file.
84 TCC300
User Manual
Operation
TCC300 85
User Manual
Operation
GUID-CAAD4C5B-C0D4-4957-81FC-968E6C0C91C3 V1 EN
GUID-11122053-923B-43EE-B8C8-A20A212AED2B V1 EN
Figure 41: Display All Metering Screen
86 TCC300
User Manual
Operation
3.11 Motor current profile
3.11.1 Accessing the motor current screensfrom the HMI
Metering
3. Press the Right or Left arrow pushbutton, as necessary, to advance to the "Motor
Current" screen.
4. Pressing the Down arrow pushbutton will advance the menu to the first element
(Peak RMS Curr) of the "Motor Current" screens.
5. Press the Down arrow to access the following "Motor Current" parameter screens.
• Avg RMS Curr
• Profile Duration
• Peak Motor Current E
The remaining Motor Current screens are accessed by navigating within the "Motor
Current" menu. When accessed, the individual screen displays bottom line will
display current values for each parameter. For Peak Motor Current, Peak RMS
Current, Average RMS Current and Duration the bottom display line may also
include a "T" that indicates the Motor Current Monitoring is in the "Training" mode.
The "Training" mode is used during commissioning of the Tapchanger control.
Several tapchange operations are manually performed, then the profile is stored in
the EEPROM. The profile is compared during normal tapchange operation to initiate
alarms.
3.11.2 Initializing motor current values from the HMI
Tapchanger Type
3. Press the Right or Left arrow pushbutton as necessary until "Mtr Current Profile" is
displayed.
4. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as necessary, to navigate to the "Init. Motor
Current" screen.
5. Press the ENT pushbutton. The control will momentarily display the following.
Init. Motor Current Initialization Done
Init. Motor Current Press ENT to reset
TCC300 87
User Manual
Operation
3.11.3 Accessing motor current profile screen, resetting training mode

and peak motor current from TCC600

2. Select Monitor/Motor Current Profile from the TCC600 toolbar. TCC600 will
display a "Motor Current Profile" dialog screen.
GUID-72B84BB9-CA50-4888-8B37-C0DCF1192B97 V1 EN
Figure 42: Motor Current Profile Dialog Screen
3. To reset the Motor Current Profile to the Training Mode select "Reset Training
Mode". TCC600 will display a "Motor Current Profile Reset" confirmation screen.
GUID-2A637F08-8FED-4AA1-BC6C-13B11C769522 V1 EN
Figure 43: Motor Current Profile Training Mode Reset Confirmation Screen
4. Select OK. TCC600® will display a Motor Current Profile Reset successfully sent
GUID-19938FEB-20C0-4D81-8714-28C7039E1180 V1 EN
Figure 44: Reset Training Mode Command Successfully Sent Confirmation

Screen
5. To reset the Peak Motor Current Value to zero select "Reset Motor Current".
TCC600 will display a "Peak Motor Current" reset configuration screen.
88 TCC300
User Manual
Operation
GUID-90FF28D9-0152-4C13-99FF-905F6201A0CF V1 EN
Figure 45: Peak Motor Current Profile Reset Confirmation Screen
6. Select OK. TCC600 will display a Peak Motor Current reset successfully sent
GUID-E5B94FD8-0BC5-4F9E-B842-455E53D5772B V1 EN
Figure 46: Peak Motor Current Profile Reset Successfully Sent Confirmation
Screen
7. Select OK. TCC600 will return to the Motor Current Profile dialog screen
3.12 Harmonic analysis
3.12.1 Accessing the harmonics screens from the HMI
Metering
3. Press the Right or Left arrow pushbutton, as necessary, to advance to the
"Harmonics" screen.
4. Pressing the Down arrow pushbutton will advance the menu to the first element
(Voltage % THD) of the "Harmonics" screens.
5. Press the Down arrow to access the remaining "Harmonics" parameter screens.
• Current % THD
• View Voltage Harmonics
• View Current Harmonics
The remaining "Harmonics" screens are accessed by navigating within the
"Harmonics" menu.
TCC300 89
User Manual
Operation
3.12.2 Viewing individual voltage/current harmonics screens from the

HMI
1. Navigate to the "Voltage" or "Current Harmonics" screen.

2. Press the ENT pushbutton.
3. Press the Up or Down arrow pushbutton as necessary to navigate to the desired
Harmonic.
3.12.3 Accessing harmonic analysis screen from TCC600

2. Select Monitor/Harmonic Analysis from the TCC600 toolbar. TCC600 will display
a "Harmonic Analysis" screen.
GUID-1BFA9A41-F7E5-4B52-8B26-4FE87D65BD39 V1 EN
Figure 47: Harmonic Analysis Screen
90 TCC300
User Manual
Operation
3.13 Tap information
3.13.1 Accessing the tap information screens from the HMI
Metering
3. Press the Left or Right arrow pushbutton, as necessary, to advance to "Tap
Information".
(Tap Position/Cal) of the "Tap Information" screens.
In order to verify Neutral Tap Position, when the tap position is "0",
but no neutral input is detected, the Tap Position screen will display
"- - -" instead of "0".
The remaining "Tap Information" screens are accessed by navigating within the
"Tap Information" menu. "Tap Information" screens that include an "E" on the right
side of the top display line can be reset from this menu item.
• Tap Position/Cal
• Drag Hands (Reset)
• Definite Timer (Raise Sec./Lower Sec.)
• Intertap Timer (0-100%)
• Operation Counter
• Resettable (Operation) Counter (reset)
• Neutral Switch Counter
• Lower Counter
• Raise Counter
• View Specific Tap Statistics
• Clear Specific Tap Statistics
• RTN Success Counter
• RTN Status (Enabled/Disabled)
• Count to RTN Active
TCC300 91
User Manual
Operation
3.13.2 Calibrating tap position from the HMI
1. Navigate to the "Tap Position/Cal" screen in the Monitor/Tap Information menu.

2. Press the ENT pushbutton. If prompted, enter a valid Level 2 Access Code.
3. At the cursor, input the desired Tap Position utilizing arrow pushbuttons, then press
the ENT pushbutton. The display will return to the "Tap Position/Cal" screen.
3.14 Drag hands
3.14.1 Resetting drag hands values from the HMI
1. Navigate to the "Drag Hands" screen in the Monitor/Tap Information menu.

The presence of the "E" on the top line of the display indicates that the Drag Hands
values can be reset from this menu item.
2. Press the ENT pushbutton. The displayed "E" will change to a "R".
3. Press the ENT pushbutton. The control will display the following.
Drag Hands R Press ENT to confirm
Drag Hands L=0N R=0N
The Drag Hands values are now reset to the current value.
3.14.2 Resetting drag hands values from TCC600
1. Select Setup/Tap Settings from the TCC600 toolbar. TCC600 will display the Tap
Settings dialog screen.
2. From the "Drag Hands" section of the Tap Settings dialog screen select "Reset".
3. Select Save. TCC600 will display a "Save to Device" confirmation screen.
4. Select OK. TCC600 will display a Setpoints "Successfully Written to Control"
The Drag Hands values will be reset to the current value.
92 TCC300
User Manual
Operation
3.15 Resettable operation counter
3.15.1 Resetting operation counter from the HMI
1. Navigate to the "Resettable Counter" screen in the Monitor/Tap Information menu.

2. Press the ENT pushbutton. The displayed "E" will change to a "R", then press ENT
again.
Resettable Counter 0
The Operation Counter is now reset.
4. Press the Exit pushbutton to return to the "Tap Information" screen.
3.15.2 Resetting operation counter from TCC600
2. From the "Operation Counter" section of the Tap Settings dialog screen select the
"Reset" for the "Resettable" parameter.
The Operations Counter value will be reset to zero.
3.16 Tap statistics
3.16.1 Viewing specific tap statistics from the HMI
1. Navigate to the View Specific Tap Statistics screen in the Monitor/Tap Information
menu.
2. Press the ENT pushbutton. The control will display the number of recorded
tapchanges and the Accumulated Primary Current for each individual tap position on
the Tapchanger control.
3. The Up and Down arrow pushbuttons are utilized to scroll through the tap positions.
Press the Exit pushbutton to exit Tap Stats.
TCC300 93
User Manual
Operation
3.16.2 Clearing tap statistics from the HMI
1. Navigate to the Clear Tap Statistics screen in the Monitor/Tap Information menu.
Press ENT to confirm Clearing Tap Stats
3. Press the ENT pushbutton. The control will briefly display the "Tap Statistics have
been cleared" confirmation and then return to the previous display.
4. Press the Exit pushbutton to exit Tap Statistics.
3.16.3 Viewing tap statistics from TCC600

2. Select Monitor/Tap Statistics from the TCC600 toolbar. TCC600 will display a "Tap
Statistics" screen.
GUID-29DEE835-D924-4505-BC5A-219A1A325DDA V1 EN
Figure 48: Tap Statistics Screen
By pointing the mouse to any bar, the corresponding tap statistic will
be highlighted as well as displayed in a tool tip.
The "Tap Statistics" screen includes the capability to Refresh the screen display,
Reset All displayed values, and save the data to a ".csv" file which can be read by a
spreadsheet program.
Selecting "Reset All" will clear the Individual Tap Wear Alarm in the Metering &
Status screen.
94 TCC300
User Manual
Operation
3.17 Smart flash SD card
3.17.1 Accessing the smart flash SD card screens from the HMI
The "Smart Flash SD Card" menu screens can only be accessed when a
properly formatted Smart Flash SD Card or SDHC Card is inserted and
seated in the Smart Flash SD Card slot.
1. Verify that a (FAT) formatted Smart Flash SD or SDHC Card is inserted into the
Smart Flash SD Card slot.
2. Press the Right Arrow (COMM Hot Button) pushbutton to awaken the unit. The
menu will advance to "Memory Card".
The Memory Card can now be utilized to:
• Quick Capture
• Load Setpoints
• Save Setpoints
• Save Data Log
• Save Sequence of Events
• Save Oscillograph Records
• Clone Save
• Clone Load
• Load DNP Config
• Save DNP Config
• Save Metering Data
• Firmware Update
• Save/Load IEC 61850 CID Files
• User Access Code Key
• Save Wakeup Screen Parameter data
If the Smart Flash SD Card has a valid Access Level 1 or Level 2

code saved to it, the control will accept the code and not prompt for
an Access Code.
3.17.2 SD card quick capture

The SD Card Quick Capture feature provides the means (in one step) to initiate a save of
the following data files to the inserted SD Card (if they exist on the control):
TCC300 95
User Manual
Operation
• Control Clone
• Data Logging
• Oscillography
• Sequence of Events
• DNP Map
• Multi-user Access Code
• Multi-user Access Code Log
The SD Card Quick Capture feature requires a Level 2 Access Code to initiate. If any data
file other than "Control Clone" does not exist on the control at the time the Quick Capture
is initiated, the control will display a "XXX file doesn't exist" message for approximately
three seconds before continuing with the Quick Capture process.
3.17.2.1 Quick capture file naming convention
Since Data Logging and Oscillography files both utilize the same Comtrade format, the
Quick Capture feature will name Data Logging files as DSXXXXXX.dat and
DSXXXXXX.cfg. Oscillography files will be named as YYXXXXXX.dat and
YYXXXXXX.cfg, with YY representing the "Partition" and XXXXXX representing the
"Serial Number" of the control. For example, 16009999.dat would be an Oscillography
file of the 16th Partition in control Serial Number 9999.
3.17.3 Initiating a smart flash SD card quick capture
1. Insert the target Smart Flash SD Card into the control as previously described.
2. Press the Right Arrow (Comm Hot Button) pushbutton. The control will go directly
to the "Memory Card" menu.
3. Press the Down Arrow pushbutton as necessary to navigate to the "SD Quick
Capture" menu item.
Confirm press ENT
Cancel press EXIT.
5. Press the "ENT" pushbutton. The control will cycle through the Quick Capture
sequence of displays.
Confirm press ENT Cancel press EXIT
Saving... Clone File
Saving... DNP CFG file
Saving... SOE file
Saving... Data Log file
Saving data file ......
Saving... OSC file
Saving... Multi-user Pass.log
96 TCC300
User Manual
Operation
Quick Cap Complete Any key to continue
If a file is not present (OSC for example) the control will display a
"XXX file does not exist" message for approximately three seconds
before continuing with the next save item in the Quick Capture
sequence.
3.17.4 Loading setpoints from a smart flash SD card
1. Insert the target Smart Flash SD Card (that includes the setpoints file) into the
control as previously described.
2. Press the Right Arrow (COMM Hot Button) pushbutton. The control will go directly
3. Press the Down pushbutton arrow as necessary to navigate to the "Load Setpoints"
menu item.
Confirm press ENT
Cancel press EXIT.
If an arrow is displayed on either end of the bottom display line,

additional setpoint files are available for selection.
5. Press the ENT pushbutton. The control will prompt the user to select the file to be
loaded.
6. Utilize the Right or Left arrow pushbutton to select the desired setpoint file (*.tpt) .
Setpoint changes are immediately acted upon by the control and may
cause undesired control operation.
7. Select ENT. The control will briefly display a progress screen and then display the
setpoints loaded screen.
Loading file. Please wait........
Setpoints loaded. Any key to continue
The new setpoints are now available to the control.
TCC300 97
User Manual
Operation
3.17.5 Saving setpoints to a smart flash SD card
1. Insert the Smart Flash SD Card (that has adequate space available) into the control
as previously described.
3. Press the Down pushbutton arrow as necessary to navigate to the "Save Setpoints"
menu item.
4. Press the ENT pushbutton. The control will respond with a "confirmation" message
screen.
Confirm press ENT
Cancel press EXIT.
5. Press the ENT pushbutton. The control will prompt for a file name to be entered.
6. Utilize the arrow pushbuttons to enter the desired file name.
7. Select ENT. The control will briefly display a progress screen and then display the
setpoints loaded screen.
Saving setpoints Please wait........
File saved! Any key to continue
3.17.6 Saving control data record files to a smart flash SD card

Control data record files may be saved to a Smart Flash SD card. The following data files
are available from the "Memory Card" menu:
• Data Log (selectable data range)

• Oscillograph Record (selectable partition)
• Metering Data
• Wakeup Screen Data
The following steps illustrate saving a Data Log file to the SD Card. The steps to save other
available data record files are similar.
3. Press the Down pushbutton arrow as necessary to navigate to the "Save Data Log"
menu item.
4. Press the ENT pushbutton. The control will respond with a "confirmation" message
screen.
Press ENT to view available data range
5. Press the ENT pushbutton. The control will display a range of data.
98 TCC300
User Manual
Operation
6. Press the ENT pushbutton to enter the desired data range.

7. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons enter the desired "start" date and time, then press
ENT.
8. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons enter the desired "end" date and time, then press
ENT.
9. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons enter the desired "file name", then press ENT. The
control will briefly display a progress screen and then display the file saved screen.
Saving data file. Please wait........
3.17.7 Clone save and load

There are two types of "Clone Save" and "Clone Load" features included in the control.
The two types are distinguished by the file name that is utilized when initiating a Clone
Save or Clone Load.
Clone Save with "DNP Configuration" and "Multi-user Password" files

When the Clone Save feature is initiated, a default file name that includes the control
Serial Number is displayed (SNxxxxxx). If the user utilizes the default file name, the
control will write the control Settings File, DNP Configuration File and Multi-user
Password File (if the DNP and Password files exist on the control) to the Smart Flash SD
Card.
If the DNP and/or Password files do not exist on the cloned control, a message stating
"DNP CFG file does not exist" or "Multi-user Password file doesn't exist" will be
displayed during the Load sequence.
Clone Load with "DNP Configuration" and "Multi-user Password" files

When the Clone Load feature is initiated, the user must enter/select the clone file name that
includes the control Serial Number (SNxxxxxx) that was saved with the associated DNP
Configuration and Multi-user Password files. When the clone file name is entered, the
control will check for DNP and Multi-user Password files named for the serial number of
the clone file and will write the found files to the target control.
If the DNP and/or Password files do not exist on the cloned control, a message stating
"DNP CFG file does not exist" or "Multi-user Password file doesn't exist" will be
displayed during the Load sequence.
Clone Save Without "DNP Configuration" and "Multi-user Password" files

When the Clone Save feature is initiated, a default file name that includes the control
Serial Number is displayed (SNxxxxxx). If the user enters a different file name the control
will only write the control Settings File to the Smart Flash SD Card.
TCC300 99
User Manual
Operation
3.17.7.1 Saving clone to a smart flash SD card
2. Press the Right Arrow (COMM Hot Button) pushbutton. The control will display the
"Memory Card" menu.
3. Press the Down pushbutton arrow as necessary to navigate to the "Clone Save" menu
item.
4. Press the ENT pushbutton. The control will respond with a "confirmation" screen.
Confirm press ENT
Cancel press EXIT.
5. Press ENT. The control will respond with a "Enter file name" prompt screen with the
cursor under the far left position.
6. Determine if any found DNP Configuration and Multi-user Password files are to be
included in the Clone Save and proceed as follows:
• If found DNP Configuration and Multi-user Password files are to be included
in the Clone Save go to Step 10.
• If found DNP Configuration and Multi-user Password files are not to be
included in the Clone Save go to Step 7.
7. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons enter the desired file name, then press ENT.
8. When the file has been saved to the Smart Flash SD Card, then the control will
display the following "confirmation" screen:
File Saved!
Any key to continue
9. Press any key. The display will return to the "Clone Save" screen. No further action
is required.
10. To include found DNP Configuration and/or Multi-user Password files in the Clone
Save, Do Not change the default file name displayed by the control.
11. Press "ENT". The control will display the following sequence of screens:
Saving data XXXXXXXXX
Saving... DNP CFG File
If DNP Configur ation file does not exist on the control the following will be
displayed:
DNP CFG File doesn't exist!
Saving... Multi-user Password
If Multi - user Password File file does not exist on the control the following will be
displayed:
Multi-user Pass File File doesn't exist!
File Saved! Any key to continue
12. Press any key, the display will return to the "Clone Save" screen. No further action
is required.
100 TCC300
User Manual
Operation
3.17.7.2 Loading clone from a smart flash SD card
To load Clone files to another control which may or may not include DNP Configuration
and/or Multi‑user Password files proceed as follows.
1. Insert the Smart Flash SD Card (that includes the Clone file) into the control as
previously described.
3. Press the Down pushbutton arrow as necessary to navigate to the "Clone Load"
menu item.
Confirm press ENT
Cancel press EXIT.
5. Press ENT. The control will display the following:
SN000001.cln
MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM →
6. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons select the desired Clone File name, then press ENT.
The control will display the following:
Loading file Please wait ....
Loading... DNP CFG File
If DNP Configur ation file does not exist on the control the following will be
displayed:
DNP CFG File doesn't exist!
Loading... Multi-user Password
If Multi - user Password File file does not exist on the control the following will be
displayed:
Multi-user Pass Log File doesn't exist!
7. When the clone file has been loaded the control will display the following
"confirmation" screen:
Clone loaded Any key to continue
8. Press any key. The display will return to the "Clone load" screen.
3.17.8 Loading configuration files from a smart flash SD card

Configuration files may be loaded from a Smart Flash SD card. The following
Configuration files are available to load from the "Memory Card" menu:
• DNP
• IEC 61850 (if purchased)
TCC300 101
User Manual
Operation
The following steps illustrate loading a DNP Configuration file from the SD Card. The
steps to load an IEC 61850 Configuration file are similar.
1. Insert the Smart Flash SD Card (that includes the DNP config file) into the control
3. Press the Down pushbutton arrow as necessary to navigate to the "Load DNP
Config" menu item.
5. Select the desired file name, then press the ENT pushbutton. The control will display
the following:
File loaded! Any key to continue
The new DNP configuration is now available to the control.
3.17.9 Saving configuration files to a smart flash SD card

Configuration files may be saved to a Smart Flash SD card. The following Configuration
files are available from the "Memory Card" menu:
• DNP
• IEC 61850 (if purchased)
The following steps illustrate saving a DNP Configuration file to the SD Card. The steps
to save an IEC 61850 Configuration file are similar.
3. Press the Down pushbutton arrow as necessary to navigate to the "Save DNP
Config" menu item.
5. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons enter the desired file name, then press the ENT
pushbutton. The control will save the DNP config file and respond with a
"confirmation message" screen.
102 TCC300
User Manual
Operation
3.17.10 Updating firmware from smart flash SD card
1. Insert the Smart Flash SD Card (that contains the firmware update file) into the
control as previously described.
3. Press the Down pushbutton arrow as necessary to navigate to the "Firmware Update"
menu item.
control will begin the firmware update.
Updating From SDCARD ...
5. When the firmware update is complete the control will display a "confirmation
message" screen.
Update Complete Rebooting...
After the setpoints and configuration have been successfully restored after
rebooting, the control will display the following:
Update Successful Any Key to continue
At this point the control is fully operational by pressing any key.
6. Press any key. The control will display the following sequence of screens:
User Line 1
User Line 2
D-0214VXX.XX.XX
Serial Number XXXX
Date & Time
XX/XX/XX XX:XX:XX
Factory Options
XXXXX XXXXX
User Line 1
User Line 2
If restoring of setpoints and configuration fail, then the control will display the
following:
Failed to restore! Any key to continue
At this point the control will be operating with default initialized setpoints and
configuration data.
If this condition exists, the user should reload the correct file settings and contact
ABB Customer Service.
3.17.11 Entering the smart flash SD card user access code

A user Access Code Level 1 or 2 can be written to a Smart Flash SD Card. The user Access
Code will be read by the control when the SD Card is inserted into the Smart Flash Card
slot on the front of the control. As long as the SD Card is inserted, the control will not
prompt for the Level Access Code contained on the SD Card.
TCC300 103
User Manual
Operation
1. Start the TCC600® Communications Software on the PC.

2. Open a TCC600 "File" or connect to TCC300 control.
3. Verify that the target Smart Flash Card is inserted in the PC.
4. Select Utility/SD Card Access Code. TCC600 will display the SD Card dialog
screen.
GUID-15999F53-E9F3-4101-9F9A-BFF7B73ACD3C V1 EN
Figure 49: SD Card Dialog Screen
5. From the Operation section of the dialog screen select the drive that the SD Card
represents in the drop down menu.
6. Enter the desired User Access Code, then select "Write". TCC600 will display a
"Write Successfully" confirmation screen.
GUID-1BC8D3A3-B88F-4850-B156-DC0F6401E614 V1 EN
Figure 50: SD Card Access Code Written Successfully Confirmation Screen
7. Select “OK”, then select "Verify". TCC600 will display the user Access Code that
was written to the SD Card.
104 TCC300
User Manual
Operation
GUID-138244E2-5106-4D05-976F-86B9A73CBC64 V1 EN
Figure 51: SD Card User Access Code Verification Screen
8. Select OK. The SD Card now contains the user Access Code and will be read each
time the SD Card is inserted into the control.
3.18 Utility/Calibration
3.18.1 Accessing utility/calibration screens from the HMI
The following information regarding changing calibration parameters is

intended for authorized personnel only. Changes to these parameters can
result in physical damage to the control and the system/component to
which it is applied.
The Utility/Calibration HMI screens provide access to calibration parameters that can be
reset by the user as necessary to restore calibration settings to those that were calculated
at the factory. Also included are key parameters that are indication only.
The following calibration parameters can be accessed and set by the user:
• Voltage Offset
• Volt Cal Coefficient
• Volt RMS Coefficient
• Curr Cal Coefficient
• I Sin Coefficient
• I Cos Coefficient
• Mtr Cal. Coefficient
• Mtr Sin Coefficient
• Mtr Cos Coefficient
• Mtr RMS Coefficient
TCC300 105
User Manual
Operation
• Circ Cal Coefficient

• Circ Sin Coefficient
• Circ Cos Coefficient
Indication only parameters available from the Calibration/Test HMI menus:
• Load Voltage
• Control Load I
• Power Factor
• Motor Current
• X1 Duration
These instructions describe making a change to the "Volt Cal Coefficient" calibration
parameter. The other calibration parameters are changed in the same manner.
Incorrect calibration parameter settings can result in damage to the

control.
1. Press the ENT (UTIL Hot Button) pushbutton to awaken the unit. The menu will
advance to "UTILITIES".
Calibration/Test
3. Press the Down arrow pushbutton as necessary to navigate to the "Volt Cal
Coefficient" calibration parameter screen.
4. Press the ENT pushbutton. The following will be displayed.
ENTER LEVEL 3 ACCESS
5. Enter a valid Level 3 Access code, then press the ENT pushbutton.
If a valid Level 3 Access code was entered, then the display will briefly flash a
confirmation screen, then a "C". If not, reenter a valid code.
6. At the cursor, input the desired Voltage Calibration Coefficient value utilizing the
arrow pushbuttons, then press the ENT pushbutton. The display will return to the
"Voltage Calibration Coefficient" screen.
7. Remove power to the control, then reapply power to the control.
106 TCC300
User Manual
Operation
3.19 Source voltage
3.19.1 Changing source voltage input

This feature allows the user to manually switch the sensing voltage source for diagnostic
procedures.
To manually switch the Source Voltage input proceed as follows:
Calibration/Test
3. Press the Down arrow pushbutton as necessary to navigate to the "Change Src Input"
screen.
4. To toggle between voltage source inputs press the ENT pushbutton. The following
will be displayed depending on the source that is selected:
Change Src Input Calculated XXX.X V
Change Src Input Measured XXX.X V
3.20 Watchdog and power resets
3.20.1 Resetting watchdog and power counters

This feature provides the user with the ability to determine the number of processor resets
that have occurred and also the number of power cycles the control has experienced. Both
counters can be reset by the user.
In the event that a "checksum error" occurs this menu will change to "Init Setpoints".
Calibration/Test
3. Press the Down arrow pushbutton as necessary to navigate to the "Clear reset
counters" screen.
Confirm press ENTER
Cancel press EXIT.
5. Press ENT. The control will display a "Counters Reset" screen, then return to the
following:
TCC300 107
User Manual
Operation
Clear reset counters

Press ENT to begin
3.20.2 Reinitializing control setpoints due to checksum error
When a Checksum ERROR occurs the voltage control element of the

control is NOT available.
In the event a "checksum error" occurs, then the control will initiate a cycling "Checksum
Error" display. In this case the "Clear reset counters" menu item in the Utilities/
Configuration/Test menu display will change to "Init setpoints" function. To reinitialize
the control setpoints perform the following:
Calibration/Test
3. Press the Down arrow pushbutton as necessary to navigate to the "Init setpoints"
screen.
Init setpoints
Press ENT to begin
Confirm press ENT
Cancel press EXIT.
6. Press ENT. The control will display the following sequence of screen displays:
Initializing....
Initialization Done
Init Setpoints
Press ENT to begin
3.21 About screens
3.21.1 Accessing the about screens from the HMI

The About screens provide the user with unit serial number and firmware version.
108 TCC300
User Manual
Operation
Calibration/Test
3. Press the Right or Left arrow pushbutton. The menu will advance to About.
4. Press the Down arrow pushbutton as necessary to navigate to the desired screen.
3.22 Remote control
This feature should be used with extreme caution.
The Remote Control menu item located in the Utility drop down menu displays the
applicable Remote Control screen.
GUID-53E63F94-8E89-48E6-8C7D-3CB55622B3C2 V1 EN
Figure 52: Remote Control Screen for Toggle or None Auto/Manual Switch Type
TCC300 109
User Manual
Operation
GUID-217CAB51-2F4A-4235-B7F3-4985B331F3EC V1 EN
Figure 53: Remote Control Screen for SCAMP Auto/Manual Switch Type
Remote Control allows the user to:
• Remotely raise or lower one tap position.

• Apply Voltage Reduction Step 1 or 2 or 3.
• When the Auto/Manual Switch Type is set to either "Toggle" or "NONE" the Block
Auto Control via Communication (Comm Block) setting is available.
• When the Auto/Manual Switch Type is set to "SCAMP" the SCAMP Auto/Manual
Control setting is available.
Remote Tap Control
If the unit is supplied with DC Power Backup, then all automatic Raise or
Lower operations are blocked when the input voltage decreases to less
than 85.0 Vdc. Remote initiated Raise or Lower operations will still be
initiated if Motor Power is available.
The control will not accept a new command unless the previous command
is completed.
Lower 1 Tap
110 TCC300
User Manual
Operation
Initiates remote Lower in 1 tap increments. Limited by tap Block Lower setpoint and tap
If an appropriate pulse width setting is not input, then a misoperation of

the tapchanger may occur when a SCADA Manual Raise or Lower is
initiated.
Raise 1 Tap
Initiates remote Raise in 1 tap increments. Limited by tap Block Raise setpoint and tap
Remote Voltage Reduction

Off
No Voltage Reduction command is sent when Apply is selected.
Step #1
Initiates first step voltage reduction command for addressed control.
Step #2
Initiates second step voltage reduction command for addressed control.
Step #3
Initiates third step voltage reduction command for addressed control.
Block Auto Control via Communication

Block
Blocks automatic operation of the addressed control.
Unblock
Initiates automatic operation of the addressed control.
Remote Control/Miscellaneous
Close
Returns to the TCC600® main screen.
TCC300 111
User Manual
Operation
SCAMP control
The SCAMP Control feature allows the user to remotely observe the status of the Adapter
Panel SCAMP pushbutton (when equipped). This feature also allows the user to change
the state of the Local SCAMP pushbutton on the Adapter Panel/Control.
3.23 Low current alarm/block
3.23.1 Clearing low current alarm/block from the HMI
Tapchanger Type
3. Press the Right or Left arrow pushbutton, as necessary, until "Programmable Alarm"
is displayed.
4. Press the Down arrow, as necessary, until the following is displayed.
Clr Low Current Blk
Ready Press ENTER
Confirm press ENTER
Cancel press EXIT.
6. Press the ENT pushbutton. The following sequence of screens will be displayed:
Confirm press ENTER Cleared
Clr Low Current Blk Ready Press ENTER
3.23.2 Clearing low current alarm/block from TCC600
1. Select Setup/Alarms from the TCC600 toolbar. TCC600 will display the
Programmable Alarm dialog screen.
112 TCC300
User Manual
Operation
GUID-DB6FD36C-9F05-4D30-AC1B-EE38A978625A V1 EN
Figure 54: Programmable Alarms Dialog Screen
2. From the Low Current Block Reset section of the dialog screen select Reset.
3.24 Motor seal-in failure alarm/block
When Motor Seal-in is selected in the control the Motor Seal-in Failure Alarm/Block
feature and the input to the Abnormal Tap Position alarm are enabled by default. The user
may choose to disable the Motor Seal-in Block feature. However, the input to the
Abnormal Tap Position alarm and the Motor Seal-in Failure Alarm is always enabled
when Motor Seal-in is selected. The feature includes the following:
Abnormal Tap Position Alarm Input - The Motor Seal-in Failure Block feature provides
an input to the "Abnormal Tap Position" alarm. This input is actuated on the first
occurrence of a tapchange coincident with no motor seal-in current detected for 15
seconds.
TCC300 113
User Manual
Operation
Motor Seal-in Failure Alarm - The Motor Seal-in Failure Alarm is actuated on the second
occurrence (either direction) of a tapchange coincident with no motor seal-in current
detected for 15 seconds. This alarm can be reset by the user from the Human Machine
Interface (HMI), from the TCC600® "Alarms" dialog screen or via SCADA. The alarm
is also reset when a successful tapchange operation occurs (motor seal-in current detected)
in either direction.
Alarm Active
MTR SEAL-IN FAILURE
Motor Seal-in Failure Block - The Motor Seal-in Failure Block is actuated on the second
occurrence of a tapchange coincident with no motor seal‑in current detected for 15
seconds in either direction. The block will be in effect in the direction that produced the
second Motor Seal-in Failure occurrence. If a Motor Seal-in Failure is detected in the
opposite direction, then operation will be blocked in that direction also.
This Block can be reset by the user from the HMI, from the TCC600 "Alarms" dialog
screen or via SCADA. The block is also reset when a successful tapchange operation
occurs (motor seal-in current is detected) in the opposite direction.
The internal accumulator that counts the occurrences of failed tapchanges is stored in
volatile memory and is set to zero when a loss of power occurs and the unit is not equipped
with a backup power supply. This is considered normal operation of the feature.
3.24.1 Resetting motor seal-in failure alarm block from the HMI
Tapchanger Type
is displayed.
Clear Seal in Alarm
Ready Press ENTER
Confirm press ENTER
Cancel press EXIT.
Clear Seal in Alarm Ready Press ENTER
114 TCC300
User Manual
Operation
3.24.2 Resetting motor seal-in failure alarm/block from TCC600
1. Select Setup/Alarms from the TCC600 toolbar. TCC600 will display the
2. From the Motor Seal-in Failure Alarm reset section of the dialog screen select Reset.
3.25 Lockout alarms
3.25.1 Clearing master/follower or delta VAr peer to peer lockout alarm

from the HMI
Tapchanger Type
3. Press the Right or Left arrow pushbutton, as necessary, until "Paralleling" is
displayed.
4. Press the Down arrow, as necessary, until the following will be displayed.
Clear Lockout Alarm
Ready Press ENTER
Confirm press ENTER
Cancel press EXIT.
Clear Lockout Alarm Ready press ENTER
3.25.2 Clearing master/follower lockout alarm from TCC600
1. Select Utility/Master/Follower configuration from the TCC600 toolbar. TCC600

will display the Access Level Code dialog screen.
TCC300 115
User Manual
Operation
GUID-8C5481C0-365B-4398-B96B-245B6558B9F0 V1 EN
Figure 55: Access Level Code Dialog Screen
2. Enter a valid Level 2 Access Code, then select OK. TCC600 will display the Access
Granted Successfully confirmation screen.
GUID-75008FE6-45FF-41FE-8C8F-00FD57F9CA77 V1 EN
Figure 56: Access Granted Successfully Confirmation Screen
3. Select OK. TCC600 will display the Master/Follower Configuration Tool dialog
screen.
GUID-A4EA0D98-BFCB-4E3B-BBF5-327A050956CE V1 EN
Figure 57: Master/Follower Configuration Tool Dialog Screen
4. Select the desired control to be reset, then select "Alarm Reset" to reset the Master/
Follower Lockout Alarm.
116 TCC300
User Manual
Operation
The Master/Follower Lockout Alarm can also be reset from the

3.25.3 Clearing delta VAr peer to peer paralleling lockout/alarms from

TCC600
Delta VAr Peer to Peer Paralleling Lockout/Alarms can be cleared/reset in TCC600® in
two places. Individual control Lockout/Alarms can be reset from the Alarms dialog screen
under the Setup menu and also from the Peer to Peer Paralleling Configuration Tool. All
or selected individual control Alarms/Lockouts can be reset from the Peer to Peer
Paralleling Configuration Tool.
To clear/reset Delta VAr Peer to Peer Paralleling Lockout/Alarms on an individual control

from the TCC600 Alarms Setup dialog screen, perform the following:
1. Establish communications with the target control.

2. Select Setup/Configuration/Alarms from the TCC600 toolbar. TCC600 will
display the Alarms dialog screen.
3. Select "Peer to Peer Lockout Reset". TCC600 will display the "Command
successfully sent to control" dialog screen.
To clear/reset Delta VAr Peer to Peer Paralleling Lockout/Alarms on an individual control

or multiple controls from the TCC600 Peer to Peer Configuration Utility perform the
following:
1. Establish Ethernet communications with the target control.

2. Select Utility/Peer to Peer Paralleling Configuration from the TCC600 toolbar.
TCC600 will display the Access Level Code dialog screen.
GUID-8C5481C0-365B-4398-B96B-245B6558B9F0 V1 EN
3. Enter a valid Level 2 Access Code, then select "OK". TCC600 will display a "Access
granted successfully." dialog screen.
4. Select "OK". TCC600 will display an un-populated "Peer to Peer Paralleling
Configuration Tool" dialog screen.
TCC300 117
User Manual
Operation
GUID-348BAE84-9B04-412A-B247-631070BD1240 V1 EN
Figure 59: Un-populated Peer to Peer Paralleling Configuration Tool Dialog

Screen
5. Verify/select the correct Network Interface.

6. Select "Discover Paralleled Devices". TCC600 will populate the Setting/Status
portion of the dialog screen with those devices identified as Peer to Peer Paralleling
devices.
GUID-C8439FC3-CE88-4E61-8E98-6570DABF1599 V1 EN
Figure 60: Populated Peer to Peer Paralleling Configuration Tool Dialog

Screen
118 TCC300
User Manual
Operation
7. Select the individual unit or the "Select All Units" selection.

8. Select "Alarm Reset". TCC600 will display the "Alarm Reset" dialog screen.
GUID-E1FE0595-2FFD-41C7-94C1-5ECF79AF2FFE V1 EN
Figure 61: Alarm Reset dialog screen
9. Select "OK". TCC600® will display a "Successfully sent reset command."

confirmation Screen.
GUID-26583FFF-B8ED-406B-A9BC-1698CA6A26BE V1 EN
Figure 62: Successfully Sent Reset Command Confirmation Screen
TCC300 119
User Manual
120
TCC600
Section 4 TCC600
4.1 Hardware requirements
TCC600 will run on any PC that provides at least the following:
• Windows 2000®, Windows XP®, Windows Vista® or Windows 7®

• One CD‑ROM drive
• One USB (serial) port
Hardware Required for Direct USB (Serial) Communication

To use TCC600 to communicate with a ABB Digital Tapchanger Control using a direct
USB (serial) connection, a USB cable is required.
The TCC300 Digital Tapchanger Control includes a fiber optic port and RS‑485 port.
4.2 Installing TCC600
The TCC600 installation program has been written to overwrite previous versions of
TCC600. However, considering variations in installed software, hardware and operating
systems, if you are upgrading from a previous version of TCC600, it is recommended that
any older versions of the TCC600 program be removed before installing the new TCC600.
TCC600 runs with the Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Vista or Windows 7
operating system. Familiarity with Windows is important in using TCC600, as the
conventions defined in the Windows documentation are strictly followed.
TCC600 will be installed on the host PC’s hard disk. While it does not require special
installation procedures, an installation utility has been provided to make the process
easier.
The USB cable must be disconnected from the TCC300 control before
installing TCC600.
TCC300 121
User Manual
TCC600
1. Insert the TCC600 software into your CD‑ROM drive.

2. Select Run from the Start Menu.
3. In the Run dialog box, initiate software installation by typing D:\Setup.exe (or other
drive designator:\Setup.exe, depending on the letter designation for the CD‑ROM
drive).
4. The Installation Wizard will prompt the user through the installation process. After
installation, the TCC600 program icon (located in the Becoware folder) can be
placed on the desktop.
GUID-2965F41C-97DB-4D97-B463-7C84058A0770 V1 EN
Figure 63: TCC600 Program Icon
5. Select the TCC600 program-item icon from the Becoware group in the Program
Manager, or select TCC600 from the program list using the Start Menu to start
TCC600. The TCC600 Main Screen will be displayed.
4.3 Initial local communications using direct USB

connection
The TCC300 and TCC600 Communications Software are shipped from the factory with
the same default communication parameters. Therefore, it may not be necessary to setup
communication parameters.
To use TCC600® to interrogate, set, or monitor the TCC300 Digital Tapchanger Control
using a direct USB connection, the appropriate driver must be loaded. The driver that is
required to be resident in the "windows\inf" folder on the host PC is "beco_usb.inf." This
driver is automatically loaded by the TCC600 installation software.
When the control is connected to the PC utilizing a USB cable, Windows will enumerate
the control as a serial com device and will assign an unused COM Port to the control.
1. For Direct Communication Using USB (Serial) Connection, ensure the following
conditions exist:
1.1. TCC600 is installed on the host computer
1.2. The control is energized
2. Plug the USB cable into the host PC USB port.
3. Plug the USB cable into the USB port on the control. The host PC will:
122 TCC300
User Manual
TCC600
3.1. Interrogate the control to determine the type of hardware device it is.
If the host PC cannot identify the proper driver for the

TCC300, the driver can be found on the TCC600 software
installation disk.
3.2. Load any required drivers.

3.3. Assign the next available COM port to the USB connection.
4. Start the TCC600 program. TCC600 will display the TCC600 Main dialog screen.
5. Select Connect/USB from the Connect drop-down menu.
GUID-42DB6CDF-5494-4502-94C6-EA2AD600B667 V1 EN
Figure 64: Selecting USB from the Connect menu
TCC600 will display the USB Port dialog screen.
GUID-7CCDEA4F-0E42-4270-B0D0-58C603C9AC19 V1 EN
Figure 65: USB Port Connection Dialog Screen
6. Ensure that the correct COM port is displayed for the selected USB device.
TCC600 will automatically choose the port for the connected

control.
7. Enter "Access Level Code" and check "Save" if desired. Default Values:
TCC300 123
User Manual
TCC600
• Level 1: 000000 (Disabled)

• Level 2: 222222
GUID-F319E4A5-88B6-4699-8B1B-FB4280BEBA4A V1 EN
Figure 66: Checking Save
8. Select Connect. TCC600 will attempt to connect to the target control.

9. If TCC600® returns a Failed to Connect Error screen, then repeat Steps 6,7 and 8.
GUID-E30C4027-330B-4500-A102-756531F004F3 V1 EN
Figure 67: Failed to Connect Error Screen
10. If Level 1 Access is not active or the proper Level 1 or Level 2 access code was
entered, then TCC600 will briefly display a "Successfully Connected Level 1/Level
2" confirmation screen, then display the connected version of the TCC600 Main
Screen with the appropriate Access Level.
11. If Level 1 Access is active and an invalid access code was entered, then TCC600 will
display a "Failed to complete Access Code Verification" error message.
124 TCC300
User Manual
TCC600
GUID-CAEECE81-E308-4243-A5C6-0D47BD0F0266 V1 EN
Figure 68: Failed to complete Access Code Verification Error Screen
12. Select OK. TCC600 will briefly display the "Successfully Connected Read-Only
Access" screen and then display the connected version of the TCC600 Main Screen
with Read-Only permission.
GUID-81515E62-F457-4D29-8D24-E69FB0931AF9 V1 EN
Figure 69: Successfully Connected Read Only Access Screen
GUID-CDFC7223-A8E9-48C7-A412-0EECA7FFD1FC V1 EN
Figure 70: Successfully Connected Access level 1 Screen
TCC300 125
User Manual
TCC600
GUID-46025E27-EEFF-4A9A-A95C-8FC9626F1265 V1 EN
Figure 71: Successfully Connected Access level 2 Screen
4.4 Using RS-485 communications
To use TCC600 to interrogate, set, or monitor the TCC300 Digital Tapchanger Control
using a RS-485 connection the following conditions must be met:
• The control is physically connected to a RS-485 network consistent with the correct
hardware and connection requirements.
• TCC600 software communication parameters and device parameters must match the
control’s default RS-485 settings and the selected/default device parameters.
Elements of the control’s RS-485 Port communication parameters include the following
(default settings):
• Baud Rate (9600 bps)

• Sync Time (2 ms)
• Parity (None)
• Stop Bits (1)
Default device parameters that are at the default settings or have been configured locally
at the control include (default settings):
• Device (Comm) Address (1)

• Protocol (DNP)
• Echo Cancel (fiber optic) (None)
1. For Communication Using RS-485 Connection, ensure the following conditions

exist:
126 TCC300
User Manual
TCC600
1.1. The control is physically connected to the RS-485 network

1.2. TCC600® is installed on the host computer
3. Select Connect/Com Port from the Connect drop-down menu.
Figure 72: Serial Port dialog screen
TCC600 will display the Serial Port dialog screen.

4. Ensure that the correct COM port is displayed.
5. Ensure that both the Device and Comm settings are consistent with the control’s
default values.
7. If TCC600 returns a Failed to Connect Error screen, then repeat Steps 4, 5 and 6.
GUID-E30C4027-330B-4500-A102-756531F004F3 V1 EN
display a "Failed to complete Access Code Verification" error message. Select OK.
TCC600 will briefly display the "Successfully Connected Read-Only Access"
TCC300 127
User Manual
TCC600
screen and then display the connected version of the TCC600 Main Screen with
Read-Only permission.
4.5 Using fiber-optic communications
The fiber optic interface is connected to the rear COM Port of the device. It can be enabled
through the front panel under the Comm setting menu. When fiber optic is selected, the
RS-485 is disabled. The fiber optic baud rate is selectable from 300 to 115200 bps.
The echoing of the received data is supported by the hardware. Switch (located on the side
of the control to the right of the TX fiber transmitter connection as viewed from the rear
of the control) opened, will disable the echoing feature (echo off). Echo ON is primarily
used if the control is in a daisy chain network. Disabling the echo transmission is usually
done when there is peer to peer communication. If the client software supports echo
canceling, as is the case for TCC600, then there is no need to disable echo transmission.
In this case echo cancel should be enabled on the client software. Physical specification:
• Fiber type: Multi mode

• Tested with fiber size 62.5/125 or 200 HCS™
• 820 nm nominal wavelength
To use TCC600 to interrogate, set, or monitor the TCC300 Digital Tapchanger Control
using a Fiber Optic connection the following conditions must be met:
• The control is physically connected to a Fiber Optic network consistent with the
correct hardware and connection requirements.
• TCC600 software communication parameters and device parameters must match the
control’s default Fiber Optic settings and the selected/default device parameters.
Elements of the control’s Fiber Optic Port communication parameters include the
following (default settings):
• Baud Rate (115200 bps)

• Sync Time (2 ms)
• Parity (None)
• Stop Bits (1)
Default device parameters that are at the default settings or have been configured locally
at the control include (default settings):
128 TCC300
User Manual
TCC600
• Device (Comm) Address (1)

• Protocol (MODBUS®)
• Echo Cancel (fiber optic) (None)
1. For Communication Using Fiber Optic Connection, ensure the following conditions
exist:
1.1. The control is physically connected to the Fiber Optic network
1.2. TCC600® is installed on the host computer
3. Select Connect/Com Port from the Connect drop-down menu.
Figure 74: Serial Port dialog screen
TCC600 will display the Serial Port dialog screen.

4. Ensure that the correct COM port is displayed.
5. Ensure that both the Device and Comm settings are consistent with the control’s
default values.
7. If TCC600 returns a Failed to Connect Error screen, then repeat Steps 4, 5 and 6.
TCC300 129
User Manual
TCC600
GUID-E30C4027-330B-4500-A102-756531F004F3 V1 EN
4.6 Using Ethernet communications
The optional Ethernet Port can be purchased as either a RJ-45 (10/100 Base-T) interface
or Fiber Optic through ST or SC connectors (100 Base-Fx) for Ethernet communication
to the TCC300. The port supports up to 17 concurrent connections. The maximum number
of allowed DNP connections is five. The maximum number of MODBUS® connections
is eight. When IEC 61850 is purchased, the maximum number of IEC 61850 connections
is four. The port supports DHCP protocol and also allows manual configuration of the
Ethernet port. MODBUS protocol "Port Number" and DNP Protocol "Port Number" are
required for manual configuration.
TCC600 can be used through the Ethernet port and may be considered a
MODBUS connection for the purpose of determining how many
concurrent connections are allowed.
Using Fiber Ethernet requires the Auto Negotiate setting in the control be
set to Disable to operate correctly
130 TCC300
User Manual
TCC600
Ethernet Fiber Optic Physical Specification:
• Fiber type: Multi mode

• Tested with Fiber size 62.5/125 or 200 HCS™
• 1300 nm nominal wavelength
1. For Communication Using Ethernet Connection, ensure the following conditions

exist:
1.1. The control is physically connected to the Ethernet network
3. Select Connect/TCP/IP from the Connect drop-down menu. TCC600 will display
the TCP/IP Connection Dialog Screen
4. Enter the Device and TCP/IP parameters for the target control or select from the
Address Book.
6. If TCC600 returns a Failed to Connect Error screen, then repeat Steps 4 and 5.
If the control is to be connected to a network that does not support DHCP protocol, then
the following information must be obtained from the Network Administrator, to be
entered locally at the control or remotely utilizing TCC600:
• IP Address
• Net Mask
• Gateway (may be necessary)
Also, if the network MODBUS® Port address is not "502" or the DNP Port address is not
"20000", then the MODBUS and DNP Port settings must be set.
TCC300 131
User Manual
TCC600
COM 1, RS-485, (2Wire),

Fiber Optic (ST) or (V-pin) Cable
ABB
TCC300
Digital
Tapchanger
Control
USB Cable
To Transformer/Regulator
Printer WindowsTM based computer Running

TCC600 ® Communications Software
GUID-1D42A696-28D0-40CA-BDD4-3497CBD9F008 V1 EN
Figure 76: Direct Connection
4.7 Using bluetooth communications
Optional Bluetooth
The Bluetooth® option enables wireless access to the TCC300. Utilizing the Bluetooth
wireless feature the user is able to configure the control, read status and metering values,
as well as change setpoints.
The ABB factory default values for device information are:
132 TCC300
User Manual
TCC600
• Friendly Name – TCC300-Serial Number

• Mode of Device – Mode0 (discoverable)
• Internal operation status – Standby
• Authentication: None
• Encryption: None
1. For Communication Using Bluetooth Connection, ensure the following conditions

exist:
1.1. The Bluetooth Factory Option is enabled on the control
1.2. The Bluetooth Status on the control is "Present" and "Connectable"
3. Select Connect/Bluetooth from the Connect drop-down menu. TCC600 will
display the Bluetooth Connection Dialog Screen.
4. Enter the Bluetooth device parameters for the target control or select from the
Address Book.
The connection time to the control will depend on the distance between the control
and the client device and also on the amount of RF interference present.
6. If TCC600 returns a Failed to Connect Error screen, then repeat Steps 4 and 5.
4.8 Communications with multiple controls
Each control connected to either a direct or modem connection

configuration must have a unique communications address. If two or more
controls share the same address, corrupted communication will result.
The remote addressing capability of TCC600® and the TCC300 Digital Tapchanger
Control allows multiple controls to share a direct or network connection. A fiber optic
loop network, RS‑485 tree configuration or Ethernet Network may also be used.
TCC300 133
User Manual
TCC600
A control address of zero is a "wild card" that will illicit a response from all controls on
a shared connection and result in corrupted communication.
With these arrangements, any control can be selected from within TCC600 by specifying
it’s unique communications address, ranging from 1 to 200. The communications address
must have previously been set from the control’s front panel.
Connect to computer
WindowsTM based computer Running

Straight DB25 TCC600® Communications Software
Connection to Computer
RS-232 COM Port
ST Multi-mode 62/125 Optical Fiber
Dymec Model No. 5843 TX

DTE=On
Repeat=Off RX
GUID-271F9BD4-D15A-4AE5-8204-6FB5F7DAE9DD V1 EN
Figure 77: Fiber Optic Connection Loop
134 TCC300
User Manual
TCC600
Connect to computer

Straight DB9 Connection TCC600® Communications Software
to Computer RS-232
COM Port
120 Ω
Model No. 485 LP9TB A

B & B Electronics
RS-232/RS-485 B
GUID-F139EEC0-5E4C-43F1-9D0C-A0BA1A539D7E V1 EN
Figure 78: RS‑485 Connection Tree

TCC600® Communications Software
Network
CAT 5 Twisted Pair RJ-45
Hub or
Fiber Optic Through
ST Connectors
GUID-82218814-F8B6-4A25-8F70-57A8CDDD4382 V1 EN
Figure 79: Optional Ethernet Network Connection
TCC300 135
User Manual
TCC600
CELLULAR
TOWER
Cellular Modem with TCP/IP

or UDP capabilities using
standards-based
EDGE, GPRS or CDMA
technologies
RS232 Link
RS232 Link
RS232 Link
GUID-E72349E6-DFE8-48C6-AD77-72D09C6DF90C V1 EN
Figure 80: Cellular Modem Network
4.9 Cautions
Control and TCC600 Compatibility

Every attempt has been made to maintain compatibility with previous control software
versions. In some cases (most notably, with older controls), compatibility cannot be
maintained. However, TCC600 should work correctly with more than one version of the
TCC300 Series Digital Tapchanger Controls on a single bus, provided that the controls are
all set to use the same protocol. If there is any question about compatibility, contact the
factory.
Control Priority
Control conflicts will not occur as local commands initiated from the front panel receive
priority recognition.
136 TCC300
User Manual
TCC600
Time and Date Stamping

Time and date stamping of events is only as useful as the validity of the control’s internal
clock. Under the Configuration/System Clock menu, the Set Control Date/Time
command allows you to manually set the control’s clock. For reference, the computer’s
clock is also displayed.
4.10 Operation overview
The TCC600® Communications Software can be used to successfully communicate

settings and operational commands to the TCC300 as well as access the extensive
monitoring and status reporting features. Figure 81 represents the TCC600 Main Screen
menu structure. TCC600 Main Screen "File Mode" menu structure and TCC600 Main
Screen "Connected" menu structure are presented in Figure 82 and Figure 83 respectively.
GUID-AD6D489A-E763-406B-9964-E773A52E040D V1 EN
Figure 81: TCC600 Main Screen Menu Selections
TCC300 137
User Manual
TCC600
GUID-86278804-7C17-4025-939F-E535678DDBEB V1 EN
Figure 82: TCC600 Main Screen Menu Selections (File Mode)
This section provides a general description of each TCC600 menu selection and command
in the same order as they are displayed in the software program.
The TCC600® Main Screen "Connected" also displays the type of connection that is in
effect (top of menu bar), and on the bottom menu bar the Control Time, Firmware Version,
Connection Status and Active Setpoint Profile. When in File Mode with a named file open
the file name and path to the file are displayed in the top menu bar. Also displayed is the
Active Profile in the bottom menu bar.
138 TCC300
User Manual
TCC600
GUID-1B570062-4D2F-4FD4-A69B-C7D482197DC3 V1 EN
Figure 83: TCC600 Main Screen Menu Selections (Connected)
If communication is not established to the unit and no file is open, items

relating to settings, utilities, or monitoring are disabled. If not connected
but a file is open, monitoring and utilities screens are displayed without
data (Tap and Harmonics display simulated data.)
Once installed, the TCC600® program-item icon is available from the Program Manager
and TCC600 can be run like any other Windows™ program (The installation utility places
TCC600 in a Program Manager group named Becoware).
4.10.1 File menu

The contents of the File menu depend on whether TCC600 is connected to a control or a
file is open.
GUID-196B9CBE-156C-4248-A0E6-4ABD59ED4E08 V1 EN
Figure 84: File menu in the Not Open or Not Connected Mode
TCC300 139
User Manual
TCC600
Table 6: File menu contents in the Not Open or Not Connected Mode
Item Description
New Opens the File Information Box to allow the user to
select the unit type and nominal frequency.
Open Opens the file browser window to allow the user to
select an existing file. It will not allow the user to
create a new file.
Exit Exits the TCC600 program.
GUID-99A49348-671D-47B7-90C2-407E387E84B3 V1 EN
Figure 85: File menu in the Open or Connected Mode
Table 7: File menu contents in the Open or Connected Mode

Item Description
Save Saves the open file.
Save As Allows the user to save the open file with a different
file name.
Close Closes the open file in the control window.
Write to Control When connected to a control and no file is previously
open, this function allows the user to open a *.cfg file
and send the setpoints and configuration to the
control in one step.
Read from Control When connected to a control and no file is previously
open, this function allows the user to recall the
control profile and save the data to a *.cfg file.
Exit Exits the TCC600 program.
140 TCC300
User Manual
TCC600
4.10.2 Connect menu
GUID-8F8AE233-1833-43BB-8C84-B8CD4A97639D V1 EN
Figure 86: Connect menu
The Connect drop down menu is displayed when the unit is not connected to a control.
This menu provides the user with access to the screens that are necessary to set TCC600®
communication parameters and connect to the target control. Menu selections include
USB, Com Port, Modem, TCP/IP and Bluetooth.
Table 8: Connect menu contents
Item Description
USB The USB menu selection initiates the USB dialog
screen to connect to the TCC300 USB Port (Figure
87). The user is prompted to input the required
Device and Access code. The USB/Comm Port
selection identifies the PC Comm Port to be utilized
for communication.
Com Port The Com Port menu selection initiates the Serial Port
dialog screen (Figure 88. The user is prompted to
input the necessary communications information to
open Serial communications through the selected
Comm Port.
Modem The Modem menu selection initiates the Modem
communication dialog screen (Figure 89). This
screen contains the Device, Phone, PC Comm Port
and Modem parameters that are necessary to setup
and communicate with a modem attached to the host
PC and the target TCC300. This screen also
contains a phone book, selection of Comm Port or
modem and a selection for bringing up a terminal
window after dialing.
TCP/IP The TCP/IP menu selection initiates the TCP/IP
screen contains the parameter settings for
communicating with a TCC300 over a network.
Bluetooth The Bluetooth menu selection initiates the Bluetooth
screen contains the parameter settings for
communicating with a TCC300 using the optional
Bluetooth feature.
TCC300 141
User Manual
TCC600
GUID-7CCDEA4F-0E42-4270-B0D0-58C603C9AC19 V1 EN
Figure 87: USB Port Connection Dialog Screen
GUID-A4371D9D-5833-4B0A-9CDC-667908F2EBFA V1 EN
Figure 88: Serial Port Connection Dialog Screen
142 TCC300
User Manual
TCC600
GUID-4BD1BA3D-8354-401B-A129-BBC6A633DC1E V1 EN
Figure 89: Modem Connection Dialog Screen
GUID-723542DF-F06D-4688-B9FD-3392C7AD99CF V1 EN
Figure 90: TCP/IP Connection Dialog Screen
TCC300 143
User Manual
TCC600
GUID-A32416BD-A527-4BAA-9417-2C35FBE8C034 V1 EN
Figure 91: Bluetooth Connection Dialog Screen
4.10.3 Communication menu
GUID-ACB3D9D9-3C35-4E6B-B4E7-D8E98F2110D3 V1 EN
Figure 92: Communication menu
The Communication drop down menu is displayed when TCC600 is connected to a

control. This menu provides the user with access to the screens that are necessary to
Disconnect from the target control, initiate the Open Terminal Window feature or access
the Setup menu items.
The Setup submenu provides the user with the capability to setup and configure the
standard RS485 Fiber Optic Port. Also, the Setup submenu provides for the setup and
configuration of the RS-232 port, optional Ethernet and Bluetooth® communication
features.
The Communication/Setup submenu also provides the user with access to the Change
Address, Communication Access Timeout and HeartBeat settings.
144 TCC300
User Manual
TCC600
Table 9: Communication menu contents

Item Description
Disconnect The Disconnect menu item when selected prompts the user to confirm
the disconnect command (Figure 93).
Open Terminal Window Not Available at this time.
Setup Comm Port The Comm Port settings can be modified in the Setup Comm Port
dialog (Figure 94) when the RS-485/Fiber Optic rear Comm Port is
present.
RS-232 Comm Port The RS-232 Comm Port settings can be modified in the Setup RS232
Comm Port dialog (Figure 95) when the RS-232 Comm Port is present.
Ethernet The Ethernet Port Settings can be modified in the Setup Ethernet dialog
(Figure 96) when the Ethernet Port is present.
Change Address Multiple Control Addressing
The Control Communication Address can be modified in the Change
Communication Address screen (Figure 97). The Communication
Address is used for both MODBUS® and DNP protocols. Substation
and Feeder Addresses apply only to DNP protocol.
When Change Address submenu item is selected, TCC600® will
respond with a confirming dialog screen (Figure 98), As long as
communication to the remote location is maintained, the user can
switch between controls.
Miscellaneous:
Save – The Save command saves the Address change to the control
when TCC600 is connected to a control.
Close – The Close command cancels any Address changes before the
changes have been sent to the control.
Communication Access Security When Communication Access Security is enabled it applies only when
MODBUS has been selected regardless of the physical interface. If
enabled, the user Level Access Code must match either the Level 1 or
Level 2 Access Codes in order to be granted the access to control
settings ascribed to each Level. If an invalid Access Level Code is
entered at the connection prompt, then read only access will be
granted. TCC600® must be closed for the timeout period specified (1 to
50,000 seconds) in order for any Access Code changes to take effect
when this feature is enabled. The setting range is from 1 to 50,000
seconds (Figure 99).
HeartBeat Option The purpose of the SCADA HeartBeat feature is to have two sets of
settings for the control and switch between these two setting sets
based on the presence or absence of SCADA communications
(utilizing the DNP protocol) to the control. The SCADA HeartBeat
feature can be enabled from TCC600 Communications software. There
are four different types of SCADA HeartBeat modes that can be
selected:
• SCADA HeartBeat for transformer control applications (LTC)

• SCADA HeartBeat for regulator control applications (Regulator)
• Profile Switching (DNP)
• Profile Switching (GOOSE)
HeartBeat can be enabled or disabled (Figure 100) and the control type
selected.
Bluetooth® Settings The Bluetooth Information dialog screen (Figure 101) provides the user
with the capability to setup Bluetooth communication parameters and
also initiate a "Reset" of the Bluetooth module.
TCC300 145
User Manual
TCC600
Item Description
Options This feature allows the user to enable RS-232 and the optional
Bluetooth module if equipped (Figure 102).
TCC600 provides the means to enable or disable installed RS-232 and
Bluetooth modules. This capability is provided by a communication
options utility under the Communications menu. Prompts to enable
communication hardware are also contained in the individual port setup
menus.
GUID-2A90E297-855B-40C6-BDE0-083E12B2DA4C V1 EN
Figure 93: Disconnect Command Confirmation Screen
GUID-46276A35-BF4F-47FB-AD5B-DFFFEF5AF5C6 V1 EN
Figure 94: Setup Comm Port Dialog Screen
146 TCC300
User Manual
TCC600
GUID-A989FBA4-22E9-46A4-8F03-7C399A6442F1 V1 EN
Figure 95: Setup RS-232 Comm Port Dialog Screen
TCC300 147
User Manual
TCC600
GUID-F33E119B-6B7F-46D6-BAAC-641D2E385712 V1 EN
Figure 96: Ethernet Setup Dialog Screen
148 TCC300
User Manual
TCC600
GUID-D872DE0E-459B-4CC0-94D6-33BE7D0F8761 V1 EN
Figure 97: Change Communication Address Dialog Screen
GUID-AF9E62BF-79B7-4EEA-A49D-C9C78944C74F V1 EN
Figure 98: Change Address Warning Screen
TCC300 149
User Manual
TCC600
GUID-779D2DA9-A591-4D74-8C45-ECE2F9F25B68 V1 EN
Figure 99: Communication Access Security Dialog Screen
GUID-BB3EBE8A-3E09-4B7C-BA7E-2F7DC25F61B4 V1 EN
Figure 100: HeartBeat Option Screen
GUID-1D3DDB88-E2FE-49A3-BFF4-ECFEC0D0ABBA V1 EN
Figure 101: Bluetooth Information Dialog Screen
150 TCC300
User Manual
TCC600
GUID-112916B1-ACD4-4628-8019-F19903A166FB V1 EN
Figure 102: Communication Options Dialog Screen
4.10.4 Monitor menu
GUID-511D5AE7-4DEB-445A-A5B3-F6B2A0F8EB3B V1 EN
Figure 103: Monitor menu
The Monitor toolbar item provides the user with the means to display the control’s
screens.
• Metering & Status

• Motor Current Profile
• Demand & Energy Metering
• Tap Statistics
• Real Time Voltage Plot
• Harmonic Analysis
• Master/Follower Alarm Messages
• Display All Metering
• Set Metering Colors
The data that is displayed is only available when communication is established between
the control and the PC.
TCC300 151
User Manual
TCC600
4.10.4.1 Metering & Status
The Metering & Status submenu item displays the Metering & Status Screen. Values
displayed are updated depending on communication system capabilities.
Table 10: PRIMARY STATUS (Single or Three-Phase)

Item Description
Voltage Displays the calculated primary voltage based on the
user-selected voltage multiplier, VT corrections, and
measured secondary voltage.
Source Voltage Displays the calculated primary source voltage
based on the user selected source voltage multiplier,
source VT corrections and source secondary
voltage.
Current Displays the calculated primary current based on the
user-selected current multiplier, and measured
secondary current.
152 TCC300
User Manual
TCC600
Item Description
Watts Displays the calculated primary quantity based on
the user-selected voltage and current multipliers; VT
configuration (line-to-line or line-to-ground), single-
VAr Displays the calculated primary quantity based on
the user-selected voltage and current multipliers, VT
VA Displays the calculated primary quantity based on
the user-selected voltage and current multipliers, VT
Table 11: REMOTE VOLTAGE BIAS

Item Description
Voltage Displays the Remote Voltage value provided to the
control utilizing either DNP 3.0, MODBUS or IEC
61850 protocols. If a voltage value is present the
control is utilizing the Remote Voltage Bias Voltage
to control.
Table 12: SECONDARY STATUS

Item Description
the regulator or transformer and includes any
corrections made using the user‑selected VT
correction voltage.
Meter Out Voltage Displays the measured voltage at the terminals of the
TCC300 without any software modifications. Used
as the base for normalizing voltage.
Source Voltage Displays the calculated primary source voltage
based on the user selected source voltage multiplier,
source VT corrections and source secondary
voltage.
Compensated Voltage Displays the calculated voltage at the "load center".
Normalizing Voltage A Normalizing Voltage Multiplier with a range of 0.80
to 1.20 is available to be applied to Meter Out Voltage
and displayed in real time as Normalizing Voltage.
Load Current Displays the real-time measured value of current.
Power Factor Displays the real-time calculated value of power
factor.
TCC300 153
User Manual
TCC600
Item Description
Frequency Displays the real-time measured frequency value.
Circulating Current Displays a representative value of circulating
current, if the control is used with a ABB M‑0115A
Parallel Balancing Module, or its equivalent.
DVAr Current Displays a representative value of DVAr current
when in the DVAr Peer to Peer Paralleling mode.
Table 13: TAP INFORMATION

Item Description
Tap Position Displays the tap position of the tapchanger when any
method of KeepTrackTM is used. Recognizes
tapchanges commanded via manual, automatic or
external (SCADA) means.
In order to verify Neutral Tap

Position, when the tap position is
"0", but no neutral input is
detected, "- - -" will be displayed
instead of "0".
Drag Hands Displays the tap position Drag Hands values for each
direction.
Raise Timer Displays the integrated out-of-band time for a voltage
excursion greater than the upper band limit up to the
value of the time delay setpoint.
Lower Timer Displays the integrated out-of-band time for a voltage
excursion less than the lower band limit up to the
value of the time delay setpoint.
Intertap Timer In the sequential mode of operation, displays the
integrated out-of-band time for a voltage excursion
and the subsequent tap-change. Adjustable from 0 to
60 seconds, in 1 second increments, with a factory
setting of 0 seconds.
Operation Counter Records the number of raise and lower operations.
The operation counter will advance by one or two
counts, as set by the user, for each open-close-open
contact operation. This counter is not resettable.
The counter accommodates 999,999 operation
counts and the number of counts stored in memory is
not affected by a loss of supply power. Total
operation count is displayed in the Status Menu. This
counter cannot be reset, but can be preset to any
value up to 999,999 in the Configuration menu.
154 TCC300
User Manual
TCC600
Item Description
Resettable Operations Counter second, resettable operations counter operates with
the method selected by X1/X2/Count Window. The
user resets this counter to zero by pressing ENT
while viewing the resettable operation counter
screen within the Status Menu. No password is
required to reset the resettable operations counter.
The counter will only increment

with a connection to the counter
input.
Neutral Switch Counter The Neutral Switch Counter is updated each time the
neutral input is detected. Neutral Switch Counter can
also preset to any value. The Neutral Switch Counter
is a software counter that is stored in non-volatile
memory and has a maximum value of 1,000,000.
RTN Status Displays the "Run Through Neutral" feature status
(Enabled or Disabled).
Count To RTN Active Displays the number of counter operations since the
operations between runs setting was set, or since the
feature was enabled. The counter will reset to zero if
the feature is enabled and successfully runs through
neutral.
RTN Counter The RTN Counter will increment after each
successful operation of the Run Through Neutral
feature.
Table 14: TAPCHANGER STATUS

Item Description
Operation Mode (Auto) Gray Background – Indicates that the control is in
automatic mode of operation.
Yellow Background – Indicates Automatic but some
Limits in effect.
Red Background – Indicates Auto Operation
Blocked.
Block Status Indicates blocks that are active.
Band Status Indicates one of three conditions: High, when voltage
is out of band high, Low when voltage is out of band
low, and OK when voltage is within band.
TCC300 155
User Manual
TCC600
Item Description
VAr Bias Effect Indicates one of three conditions when enabled. If
the control has determined that the absolute reactive
power is >¾ of the Max Cap Bank Setting and the
inverse timer has timed out, then the control will
increase the effective bandcenter by 1 Volt
depending on the direction of the reactive power and
will either indicate "Bandcenter Raise" for negative
reactive power or "Bandcenter Lower" for positive
reactive power. If the absolute power is <¾ of the
Max Cap Bank Setting then the display will indicate
"None".
Whenever VAr Bias is in effect, the control will
display the "VAr Bias in effect" message on the
display and the appropriate Raise/Lower LED will
flash.
Power Direction Indicates one of two power directions: Forward
(forward power condition) and Reverse (reverse
power condition).
Voltage Reduction VR Off Indicates voltage reduction is not active, blocked
either by non‑sequential input, a reverse power
condition, or by communicated command. Steps 1,
2, and 3 indicate that voltage reduction is in effect for
the stated step value.
HMI Active Mode Indicates (Yellow) that HMI menu at the control is
active.
Table 15: ALARM STATUS

Item Description
Comm Block The control has had its automatic operation blocked
via communications and is now in manual operation
mode and the alarm output is on due to this condition.
Block Raise (Tap) The tap position equals or exceeds the block raise
tap limit setting and the alarm output is on due to this
condition.
Block Lower (Tap) The tap position equals or exceeds the block lower
tap limit setting and the alarm output is on due to this
condition.
Block Raise (Voltage) The tap position equals or exceeds the block raise
voltage limit setting and the alarm output is on due to
this condition.
Block Lower (Voltage) The tap position equals or exceeds the block lower
voltage limit setting and the alarm output is on due to
this condition.
DVar2 Load Current Limit DVar2 Load Current is exceeding the respective
maximum current limit setting and the alarm output is
Motor Seal-In Failure Indicates that motor current has not been detected
for a period 15 seconds after a Raise or Lower
command has been executed. This event must occur
two consecutive times for this alarm to occur.
156 TCC300
User Manual
TCC600
Item Description
Backup Pwr Failure Indicates the absence of Backup Power circuiting
when Backup Power option has been detected.
Low Current Block When enabled the control determines if Load Current
following a tap change is less than 4 mA, coincident
with Tap Delta Voltage being less than 4 Vac. When
these conditions exist the control will initiate an alarm
and block regulation.
Individual Tap Wear The number of operations on any single tap exceeds
the Individual Tap Wear Alarm setting.
Tap Changer Failure When the Operation Counter Configuration is set to
"Cam Follower" and this alarm has been enabled,
indicates the counter contact input has detected a
Tap Changer Failure condition.
A Cam Follower contact is a cam driven contact
which is normally closed when the Tapchanger is at
rest, and opens and closes once during each tap
operation in either direction. If this contact does not
open and close within 30 seconds after the control
issues a Raise or Lower in either local automatic or
remote manual operational modes, this alarm will
activate. This alarm can be reset either by the Cam
Follower contact operating correctly during a
subsequent Raise or Lower operation, or if reset by
the user.
LDC/LDZ Any value other than zero has been set for LDC/LDZ.
Line Current Limit The line current is exceeding the respective
maximum current limit setting and the alarm output is
Reverse Power Reverse power is present at the control and the
alarm output is on due to this condition.
Abnormal Tap Position Abnormal Tap Position is indicated when the alarm is
enabled, KeepTrackTN is enabled and the neutral
input is detected but the present tap position at that
instant is neither at minus one nor plus one. The
Abnormal Tap Position Alarm will also be activated
when the Motor Seal-in Failure detection feature has
detected a Motor Seal-in Failure.
Voltage Reduction Any level of voltage reduction is active.
VAr Bias Lead or Lag Indicates when the VAr Bias effect (Lead or Lag) has
exceeded the time limit imposed by the Max VAr Bias
Duration Setting.
TCC300 157
User Manual
TCC600
Item Description
Indicates when the VAr Bias effect (Lead or Lag) has There are two types of lockout conditions, Master
exceeded the time limit imposed by the Max VAr Bias lockout and Follower lockout. Any lockout of the
Duration Setting. paralleling mode will set the Master/Follower
Lockout Alarm. When a lockout condition exists, the
control issuing the lockout will stop any further
GOOSE publishing and will stop load voltage
regulation. Also, the alarm can be configured as a
DNP event, or as a report in case of IEC 61850. The
lockout state will be displayed on the control front
panel display and in the Master/Follower
Configuration Tool.
Master/Follower Alarm
messages can be observed for
the connected control from the
TCC600® Monitor/Master/
Follower Alarm messages menu
item.
158 TCC300
User Manual
TCC600
Item Description
Peer to Peer Lockout The Delta VAr Peer to Peer Paralleling feature
includes the following alarms which will activate the
"Peer to Peer Lockout" Alarm:
• Sympathy Lockout – actuates when a control

detects that another control in the network has
locked out due to a Tie Breaker Status Conflict
Lockout or a Delta VAr Limit Lockout.
• Initiator Communications Lockout – actuates
when an Initiator fails to receive the expected
messages for three consecutive Peer to Peer
Update Frames.
• Reactive Current Limit Lockout – actuates
when the calculated Reactive Current value is
greater than the configured Reactive Current
limit. This lockout/alarm can only be cleared by
the user.
• Non-Initiator Detection Lockout – When the
control powers up in Initiator Mode, the control
will wait for approximately 65 seconds to allow
all the GOOSE messages from all the Non-
Initiators in the network to reach the Initiator.
Once all GOOSE messages have been
received, the Initiator will start its normal
algorithm. If within that initial 65 second period
the Initiator does not receive all the GOOSE
messages it expected, it will enter the Initiator
Lockout state. This lockout/alarm can only be
cleared by the user.
• Breaker Status Conflict Lockout – activates
when a control detects that it's status for a tie
breaker, shared with another control,
disagrees with that unit's status for the same tie
breaker. The Breaker Status Conflict Lockout
alarm is only applicable in the "Single" and
"Ring Bus" topology.
• Message Response Time Lockout – actuates
when a Non-Initiator has not received all the
expected GOOSE messages within the
specified time period for three consecutive
update periods.
RTN Fail The RTN Fail alarm will actuate when the "Maximum
RTN operations before Alarms" setting has been
exceeded.
Op Count Signal The total number of operations has exceeded the
Operations Counter Alarm Limit setting.
There are three available states designated by color for each of the Alarm Status elements:
• Gray with Dark Gray Text – Alarm disabled.

• Gray with Black Text – Alarm enable and condition not met
• RED – Alarm enabled and condition exists
TCC300 159
User Manual
TCC600
Table 16: INPUT STATUS

Item Description
Neutral Tap Indicates (Green) neutral position contact input is
closed.
Counter Indicates (Green) operation counter contact input is
closed.
Non-Sequential Indicates (Green) Non‑sequential contact input is
closed. Tapchanger control blocks raise or lower
operation on a sustained closed contact.
Motor Seal-in Indicates (Green) when motor power is applied.
Volt Reduction 1 Indicates (Green) Step 1 voltage reduction contact
output is closed.
Volt Reduction 2 Indicates (Green) Step 2 voltage reduction contact
output is closed.
SCADA Cutout Indicates (Green) SCADA (switch) input is closed.
Tapchanger control blocks Raise or Lower
operation.
Table 17: OUTPUT STATUS

Item Description
Raise Indicates (Green) when a Tap Raise output is active.
Limited by tap Block Raise setpoint and tap position
limit settings.
Lower Indicates (Green) when a Tap Lower output is active.
Limited by tap Block Lower setpoint and tap position
limit settings.
Programmable Alarm Indicates (Green) when a Programmable Alarm
condition is true.
Motor Seal-In Indicates when a Motor Seal-In Output in active.
CBEMA EVENTS AND COUNTER STATUS

When the Load Voltage is sagging or swelling greater than the pickup setting, then a
pickup status will be set after a minimum duration, in addition to incrementing a counter.
Up to 4 CBEMA events can be set and enabled allowing the control to trigger a Sequence
of Events record when each event occurs. Also, the control will report both the time and
duration of each event via DNP. These 4 settings allow the control to be set to record
violations of the ITIC curves (formerly known as CBEMA curves).
AUX INPUT STATUS

Indicates (red) when the Auxiliary Input is active.
160 TCC300
User Manual
TCC600
4.10.4.2 Motor Current Profile
The TCC300 Tapchanger Control measures the motor current during tapchange
operation. The motor current is sampled at 64 samples per cycle and the total RMS value
of the current is computed every cycle (60 Hz or 50 Hz cycle). The dynamic range of the
current measurement is from 0 to 10 A.
The tapchange start signal is generated when the motor current exceeds a threshold value
(user programmable or fixed at a small value such as 0.1 A). The tapchange operation is
considered complete when the counter contact input is generated. If the tapchanger is
making multiple tapchanges where the current is not interrupted between tapchanges then
the counter contact can be used to decide the completion of one tap before the start of the
next tap.
The following parameters are logged for the motor current profile:
• Average RMS value of the motor current (once every cycle for the complete duration
of the tapchange)
• Total duration of the tapchange in ms
• Peak RMS value of the motor current
The Sequence of Events Recorder will trigger when any of the following conditions occur:
The average RMS current is the average of the RMS current for the
tapchange duration.
• Peak RMS current exceeds a certain percent (programmable from 110% to 200%) of
the stored peak current which was recorded during the training mode.
• Average RMS current exceeds a certain percent (programmable from 110% to 200%)
of the stored average RMS current which was recorded during the training mode.
• Total duration of the tapchange exceeds a certain percent (programmable from 110%
to 200%) of the stored value which was recorded during the training mode.
The training mode will be used during the commissioning of the Tapchanger Control. In
this mode twenty tapchange operations will be manually conducted and the average
profile stored in non‑volatile memory. This profile will be compared with the profile
during normal tapchange operation to trigger the Sequence of Events Recorder when the
above conditions occur.
TCC300 161
User Manual
TCC600
GUID-72B84BB9-CA50-4888-8B37-C0DCF1192B97 V1 EN
Figure 105: Motor Current Profile Dialog Screen
4.10.4.3 Demand & Energy Metering
The Demand & Energy Metering submenu item displays the Demand & Energy Metering
screen. Real‑time demand and metering information can be monitored from an addressed
control.
162 TCC300
User Manual
TCC600
GUID-E7200160-B164-429C-A5C3-D8FC53F3E204 V1 EN
Figure 106: Demand & Energy Metering Dialog
TCC300 163
User Manual
TCC600
Table 18: Demand & Energy Metering

Item Description
Demand Interval The Demand Interval applies to the Demand Present
Primary Current (Amps) parameter and the Demand
History parameters. The Demand Interval can be set
to 5, 10, 15, 30, and 60 minutes.
Demand Present The Demand Present Primary Current parameter
value follows the concept of a lagged demand meter.
The demand time interval is selected by the user as
15, 30 or 60 minutes. This is the time it takes for a
thermal meter to indicate 90% of a change in load.
the regulator or transformer. This value continuously
Primary Current Displays the calculated primary demand current
based on the user-selected current multiplier and
Primary Watts Displays the real time demand value base on the
user-selected voltage and current multipliers; VT
Primary VAr Displays the real time demand value based on the
Primary VA Displays the real time demand value based on the
configuration (line-to-ground or line‑to‑line), single-
Demand History All demand history values (single phase) include the
date and time at which each occurred. A drag hand
value is the maximum or minimum value of a
measured quantity recorded since the last reset.
Minimum Load Voltage Displays minimum local voltage at the regulator or
transformer. This value continuously averaged over
consecutive 32-second intervals.
Maximum Load Voltage Displays drag hand maximum local voltage at the
regulator or transformer. This value continuously
Maximum Primary Current Displays drag hand maximum primary current.
Maximum Primary Watts Displays drag hand maximum primary watts.
Maximum Primary VAr Displays drag hand maximum primary VArs.
Maximum Primary VA Displays drag hand maximum primary VA. Resets
automatically when Power Factor at (Max) VA value,
below, is reset.
Power Factor @ Max VA Displays drag hand power factor at time of maximum
VA.
164 TCC300
User Manual
TCC600
Energy Metering
The Energy Metering section of the Demand & Energy Metering screen displays the
Energy Metering parameters. This feature enables the user to review real-time and
historical demand metering information (Single Phase). This section includes Forward
and Reverse Watt Hours and Lagging and Leading VAr Hours.
Miscellaneous
Each element of the Demand History and Energy Metering can be reset individually by
selecting the desired parameter(s) and then selecting Reset Selected Items. When the
Reset command is issued, the metered value is reset to zero and the time and date are
updated
• Select All – Allows the user to select all parameters.

• Clear All – Allows the user to reset all parameter values.
• Reset Selected Items – Allows the user to reset only the selected parameter values.
4.10.4.4 Tap Statistics
The Tap Statistics submenu item displays a statistical representation of the Tapchanger
operation. The cumulative (since last visit) number of tapchanges and the Accumulated
Primary Current for each tap position is displayed both graphically and numerically.
Selecting Refresh updates tap statistical data. Selecting Reset All resets all tap statistic
counters to zero and clears the Individual Tap Wear Alarm in the Metering & Status
screen. Selecting Save to CSV File allows the user to save the tap statistics as a ".csv" file
which can be read by a spreadsheet program.
GUID-29DEE835-D924-4505-BC5A-219A1A325DDA V1 EN
Figure 107: Tap Statistics Screen
TCC300 165
User Manual
TCC600
By pointing the mouse to any bar, the corresponding tap statistic will be
highlighted as well as displayed in a tool tip.
4.10.4.5 Real Time Voltage Chart
The Real Time Voltage Chart feature allows the user to monitor in real time the last 60
seconds of the source voltage value and load voltage. The Voltage Chart freezes the last
30 seconds of the voltage profile and displays the current values.
GUID-9DB711F5-2328-42EE-A564-6C63AD18201A V1 EN
Figure 108: Real Time Voltage Chart
4.10.4.6 Harmonic Analysis
The input signal is sampled at 64 samples per cycle, giving an overall sampling rate of
3840 samples per second for a 60 Hz system. This provides the ability to reproduce signals
of up to 1920 Hz. Therefore, up to the 31st harmonic can be calculated using discrete
Fourier transform with a fundamental frequency of 60 Hz. The fundamental for both the
Voltage and Current channels is calculated every sample meaning, every 260.41 μs. These
166 TCC300
User Manual
TCC600
voltage and current magnitudes are used in a real-time decision making algorithm and
real-time metering.
Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) for both voltage and current are calculated and
displayed using the following equation:
 31 2 
∑ A k 
THD =  k =2 2 
A0
GUID-90760A74-ED50-4E03-A4F9-9D62B07E87A1 V1 EN (Equation 1)
k Harmonic number k=2,3...31
In addition to Harmonics and THD calculations the secondary task also triggers the
Sequence of Event (SOE) recorder whenever any Harmonic selected by the user exceeds
a preset threshold level.
The user is able to select which Harmonic(s) will trigger the SOE function and also set the
threshold level, above which the SOE recorder will be initiated and below which the
current will be ignored. The threshold level is set as a percentage of the magnitude of the
fundamental. The user can also set the threshold level of either the Voltage or the Current
Harmonic.
TCC300 167
User Manual
TCC600
GUID-1BFA9A41-F7E5-4B52-8B26-4FE87D65BD39 V1 EN
Figure 109: Harmonic Analysis Dialog Screen
4.10.4.7 Master/Follower Alarm Messages
Master/Follower Alarm Messages for the control that TCC600® is connected to can be
observed from TCC600 by selecting Monitor/Master/Follower Alarm Messages.
GUID-12E92DF5-9596-44B9-BCA1-7A5D386A6C69 V1 EN
Figure 110: Master/Follower Alarm Messages Screen
168 TCC300
User Manual
TCC600
4.10.4.8 Display All Metering
The Display All Metering feature provides the user with a snapshot of all metering
parameters. This feature also allows the Display All Metering screen to be printed or saved
as a *.HTML file. The menu bar also includes a refresh feature to refresh parameters
displayed on the screen.
TCC300 169
User Manual
TCC600
170 TCC300
User Manual
TCC600
GUID-CAAD4C5B-C0D4-4957-81FC-968E6C0C91C3 V1 EN
GUID-11122053-923B-43EE-B8C8-A20A212AED2B V1 EN
Figure 111: Display All Metering Screen
TCC300 171
User Manual
TCC600
4.10.4.9 Set Metering Colors
This feature allows the user to select individual display colors for the Metering and Status
screen. The Alarm, Warning, Input, Output and Metering Background text and
background colors can be set.
GUID-B579FC75-5C65-4104-92F2-9E796588A766 V1 EN
Figure 112: Set Metering Colors Screen
Toolbar Editor
The Toolbar Editor feature allows the user to create TCC600® toolbar menu items that are
available from the TCC600 main menu screen. By right clicking on the toolbar TCC600
will display the Toolbar Editor Mode selections "Start Edit Toolbar" and "End Edit
Toolbar". To add a Toolbar item simply select "Start Edit Toolbar" and then drag and drop
the desired single menu item onto the main toolbar. To remove menu items drag and drop
the item on the "Help" menu item. When the Toolbar Editor is active (as displayed in the
TCC600 menu top line) no TCC600 functions can be initiated.
By right clicking and selecting "End Edit Toolbar" TCC600 features are accessible.
172 TCC300
User Manual
TCC600
GUID-7CDB7DBB-3ED2-48A3-8597-10719CDCC70F V1 EN
Figure 113: TCC600 Main Menu Screen with Toolbar Editor Active
TCC300 173
User Manual
TCC600
4.10.5 Setup menu
GUID-A69645CF-1A84-4857-A3BC-80A3F106C30B V1 EN
Figure 114: Setup menu
The Setup menu item provides the user with access to the submenu items.
• Profile
• Tapchanger Type
• Setpoints
• Configuration
• Tap Settings
• Alarms
• Wakeup Screens
• Data Logging
• Harmonics Setup
• Oscillograph
• CBEMA Events
The setpoint information displayed on these screens can be from either the control or from
an open TCC600® file.
Also included in the Setup submenu is the Display All Settings command which when
invoked displays the TCC300 All Setpoints Dialog Screen
174 TCC300
User Manual
TCC600
GUID-76DDE8BF-4A38-4B24-8C76-ADD0DB605A36 V1 EN
Figure 115: All Setpoints Dialog Screen
TCC300 175
User Manual
TCC600
4.10.5.1 Profile
The Profile menu item includes the "Set Active Profile" selection which allows the user
to manually select the active Setpoint Profile. Also included is the "Profile Names" menu
item which allows the user to Enter/Edit the 16 character Profile name for each file
GUID-7C752949-D815-41B9-BAEE-5FF10F6B4204 V1 EN
Figure 116: Profile Names Dialog Screen
4.10.5.2 Tapchanger Type
The Tapchanger Type Selection feature provides the user with the ability to set regulator
vendor specific configuration settings in the control from TCC600.
176 TCC300
User Manual
TCC600
GUID-B9B7CEAA-1AE2-4B8E-9EA5-CE948E205369 V1 EN
Figure 117: Tapchanger Type Selections Dialog Screen
TCC300 177
User Manual
TCC600
4.10.5.3 Setpoints
Table 19: General
Item Description
Line Drop Compensation Toggles between two modes of operation: R, X
(factory setting), and Z.
Timer Delay Selection Toggles between two modes of operation: Definite
Time (factory setting) and Inverse Time.
Basic Timer Type Toggles between Integrating and Instant Reset.
Power Direction Bias The Power Direction Bias setpoint feature includes
three settings to determine how the control will switch
between forward and reverse power operation. The
three settings are None, Forward, and Reverse.
Table 20: Voltage Reduction

Item Description
Step 1 First of three independent steps of voltage reduction
adjustable from 0% to 10% in 0.1% increments of the
bandcenter setpoint. Factory setting is 2.5%.
Step 2 Second voltage reduction step, adjustable from 0%
to 10% in 0.1% increments of the bandcenter
setpoint. Factory setting is 5.0%.
Step 3 Third voltage reduction step, adjustable from 0% to
10% in 0.1% increments of the bandcenter setpoint.
Factory setting is 7.5%.
Standard VR Allows standard Voltage Reduction to be Enabled or
Disabled.
Smart VR Allows Smart Voltage Reduction to be Enabled or
Disabled. This setting is only available when
Standard VR is Disabled.
Com VR Turnoff Timer Allows Voltage Reduction to be turned off after a
prescribed time period from 1 to 999 minutes. A
setting of zero disables this feature.
Save VR at Power Off Save Voltage Reduction at Power Off allows the
state of the "Voltage Reduction" communication
command to be saved or not saved when power has
been lost. The default setting is "Don’t Save".
178 TCC300
User Manual
TCC600
Table 21: Limit and Runback

Item Description
Block Raise Over voltage limit is adjustable from 95.0 V to 135.0
V in 0.1 V increments with a factory setting of 128.0
V.
Runback Deadband Adjustable from 1.0 V to 4.0 V in 0.1 V increments
with a factory setting of 2.0 V.
Block Lower Under voltage limit is adjustable from 95.0 V to 135.0
V in 0.1 V increments with a factory setting of 114.0
V.
Runup Deadband Adjustable from 1.0 V to 4.0 V in 0.1 V increments
Runup This feature may be Enabled/Disabled.
Current Limit Adjustable from 50 mA to 640 mA, in increments of 1
mA. If the value of the current exceeds the current
limit setpoint, the unit will not permit automatic
control in either the raise or lower direction. Factory
setting is 640 mA.
Table 22: Forward Power

Item Description
Band Center Adjustable from 100.0 V to 135.0 V in 0.1 V
increments with a factory setting of 120 V.
Band Width Adjustable from 1.0 V to 10.0 V in 0.1 V increments
Definite/Inverse Time Adjustable from 1 sec. to 360 sec. in 1 second
increments with a factory setting of 30 seconds.
LDC‑Z Adjustable from 0 V to 72 V in 1 V increments with a
factory setting 0 V.
LDC Resistance Adjustable from –72 V to +72 V in 1 V increments with
a factory setting of 0 V.
LDC Reactance Adjustable from –72 V to +72 V in 1 V increments with
TCC300 179
User Manual
TCC600
Table 23: Reverse Power

Item Description
Operation Toggles between eight modes of operation:
• Block – inhibits automatic tapchange

operation.
• Regulate Forward (Ignore) – continues unit
action as though forward power flow continued
to exist.
• Regulate Reverse – (calculated voltage or
measured voltage) detects a reverse power
condition and regulates according to reverse
power settings.
• Return to Neutral – detects a reverse power
operation and drives tap position to neutral and
then stops.
• Regulate Reverse (Measured) – allows the
control to switch it’s voltage sensing input from
a load side VT to a source side VT if one is
available and operate in Reverse Power Mode
using that input.
• Distributed Generation – allows alternate LDC
R and X values to be applied to the control
when reverse power is detected.
• Auto Determination – allows the control to use
the "Smart Reverse Power" feature to choose
the applicable reverse power mode, either
Distributed Generation or Regulate Reverse.
• Auto Determination (Measured) – allows the
control to use the "Smart Reverse Power"
feature to choose the applicable reverse power
mode, either Distributed Generation or
Regulate Reverse (Measured).
The Setpoints Reverse Power section also contains

a link which displays the "Reverse Power Vendor
Cross Reference" table showing Cooper/Siemens
reverse power names and their ABB equivalents
(Figure 121).
Band Center Adjustable from 100.0 V to 135.0 V in 0.1 V
increments with a factory setting of 120 V.
Band Width Adjustable from 1.0 V to 10.0 V in 0.1 V increments
Definite/Inverse Time Adjustable from 1 sec. to 360 sec. in 1 second
increments with a factory setting of 30 seconds
LDC‑Z Adjustable from 0 V to 72 V in 1 V increments with a
factory setting 0 V.
LDC Resistance Adjustable from –72 V to +72 V in 1 V increments with
LDC Reactance Adjustable from –72 V to +72 V in 1 V increments with
180 TCC300
User Manual
TCC600
VAr Bias can be enabled or disabled. Use of VAr Bias allows coordination of the TCC300
with Autodaptive® Control devices and M‑6280 series Capacitor Bank Controls.
Table 24: VAr Bias (Step)
Item Description
Disable on Reverse Power When selected, the control will disable VAr Bias
when Reverse Power is detected.
Forward Power Max 3 Phase Capacitor Bank Size Maximum Capacitor Bank size is adjustable from 4
KVAr to 12000 KVAr.
Reverse Power Max 3 Phase Capacitor Bank Size Maximum Capacitor Bank size is adjustable from 4
KVAr to 12000 KVAr.
Lead % Bank Size Pickup Lower negative Var limit in percentage of the Max
Cap Bank size below which the control will increase
the upper band edge by the amount defined by VAr
Bias Voltage Step.
Lag % Bank Size Pickup Upper positive Var limit in percentage of the Max Cap
Bank size above which the control will decrease the
lower band edge by the amount defined by VAr Bias
Voltage Step.
VAr Bias Voltage Step Amount by which the control will increase or
decrease the Upper or Lower band edges when
there is a VAr Bias out of band situation.
Max VAr Bias Duration Maximum allowable time in minutes the control will
bias the voltage edge.
Table 25: VAr Bias (Linear)

Item Description
Current Multiplier Base Value Adjustable from 0 to 32600.
No Voltage Reduction:
Linear Voltage Bias (-X) The Linear Voltage Bias (-X) setting defines the
amount of voltage bias to be applied to the
Bandcenter when at 1 PU reactive current loading.
Adjustable from -72 to 0 Volts at 200 mA Reactive
Load.
Linear Voltage Bias (-X) Limit The Linear Voltage Bias (-X) Limit, limits the total
voltage bias that can affect the control
Bandcenter.Adjustable from -5.0 to 0.0 Volts.
During Voltage Reduction:
Linear Voltage Bias (+X) The Linear Voltage Bias (+X) setting defines the
Adjustable from 0 to 72 Volts at 200 mA Reactive
Load.
Linear Voltage Bias (+X) Limit The Linear Voltage Bias (+X) Limit, limits the total
voltage bias that can affect the control Bandcenter.
Adjustable from 0.0 to 5.0 Volts.
TCC300 181
User Manual
TCC600
Table 26: Miscellaneous

Item Description
Undo/Refresh The Undo command allows the user to undo any
setting changes in the Setpoints screen before the
settings have been saved to either the Device or
Open File. It also refreshes the screen with the data
stored in the unit.
Save The Save command saves the setting changes to
either the Open File when in File mode or the Device
when TCC600® is connected to a device.
Close The Close command cancels any setting changes
before the settings changes have been sent to either
the Device or Open File.
GUID-6A8E37E4-305B-47A3-8B69-8F2792EE95C1 V1 EN
Figure 118: Setpoints Dialog Screen
182 TCC300
User Manual
TCC600
GUID-9031B92C-17AA-46BF-A9DD-C718F890688D V1 EN
Figure 119: Setpoints Dialog Screen with Step VAr Bias Enabled
GUID-048D237F-43CD-4AD9-AE34-E622A23E6616 V1 EN
Figure 120: Setpoints Dialog Screen with Linear VAr Bias Enabled
TCC300 183
User Manual
TCC600
GUID-F94E7F6F-8790-48D5-8849-51B45512FDBC V1 EN
Figure 121: Reverse Power Vendor Cross Reference Table
4.10.5.4 Configuration
Table 27: Primary
Item Description
Voltage Multiplier Adjustable from 0.1 to 3260.0 in 0.1 increments with
a factory setting of 60.0. User selection must include
knowledge of VT ratio and sensing VT-ratio
correction.
Voltage Source Multiplier Adjustable from 0.1 to 3260.0 in 0.1 increments with
a factory setting of 60.0. User selection must include
knowledge of source VT ratio and sensing source
VT-ratio correction.
Current Multiplier Adjustable from 1 to 32600 in 1 increments with a
factory setting of 6000. User selection must include
knowledge of CT ratio, from primary rating to 0.2 A
rating of control.
Primary Power Display Toggles between two modes of operation: Single-
Phase – based on measured inputs, and Three-
Phase – based on measured inputs and presumed
balanced system. Factory setting is single-phase.
184 TCC300
User Manual
TCC600
Table 28: VT/CT Load

Item Description
Normalizing Voltage Multiplier Displays the result of the Normalizing Multiplier (0.80
to 1.20) times the Meter Out Voltage.
VT Correction Adjustable from –15.0 V to +15.0 V in 0.1 V
increments with a factory setting of 0.0 V.
CT/VT Phasing Adjustable from 0° to 330° in 30° increments with a
factory setting of 0°.
Aux Current Transformer The Current Transformer units display scaling
selection can be set to 200 mA, 1 A or 5 A. This
choice determines the unit display scaling of both the
metering readout quantities and the settings and
current values.
VT Configuration Load VT configuration toggles between Line-to-Line
and Line-to-Ground.
Table 29: VT/CT Source

Item Description
VT Source Correction Adjustable from –15.0 V to +15.0 V in 0.1 V
increments with a factory setting of 0.0 V.
CT/VT Source Phasing Adjustable from 0° to 330° in 30° increments with a
factory setting of 0°.
Table 30: Raise/Lower Output Contacts

Item Description
Output Selection Toggle between two modes of operation:
CONTINUOUS (factory setting) and PULSED.
Pulse Width Adjustable from 0.2 seconds to 12.0 seconds in 0.1
second increments with a factory setting of 1.5
second. When the output is set to pulse and the
control is calling for Raise/Lower (and no
non‑sequential or counter input is applied), an output
will turn on for the preprogrammed time, and then
turn off for 0.5 seconds, plus the intertap time delay.
A square wave is generated on the output.
Table 31: Motor Current Settings

Item Description
Peak RMS Current Adjustable from 110% to 200% in 1% increments.
Avg RMS Current Adjustable from 110% to 200% in 1% increments.
Avg Duration Adjustable from 110% to 200% in 1% increments.
TCC300 185
User Manual
TCC600
Program Alarm Relay Mode

When the Auto/Manual Switch Type configuration is set to "SCAMP", then the
Programmable Alarm Function can be set to function as "Normal" or "As a Deadman
Output". This option is available when SCAMP mode is used since the Deadman Output
is not available.
Table 32: Inputs and Switch
Item Description
Input Selection 1 Allows the Operation Counter Input to be selected to
either Seal-In Input or Switch Status. When a Cooper
Regulator is used the "Seal‑In Input" selection must
be chosen.
Input Selection 2 The Input Selection 2 can be configured to be either
an input that initiates Non‑Sequential control
operation or a SCADA Cutout switch input. The
default configuration setting is Non-Sequential.
Input Selection 3 Can be configured to become an Auxiliary Input that
can be read as a DNP point or Voltage Reduction 2.
Auto/Manual Switch Type The Auto/Manual Switch Type setting allows the
Auto/Man Switch type on the adapter panel to be set
to "Toggle, SCAMP or None". None is used when no
Auto/Manual Switch exists. The default configuration
setting is None.
Table 33: Regulator

Item Description
Regulator Type Allows the Regulator type to be selected as Type A or
B for correct source voltage calculation. Factory
setting is Type A.
Table 34: Paralleling

Item Description
Paralleling Type Paralleling Type can be selected (when purchased)
to Disable, Circulating Current, ΔVAR®1, ΔVAR2,
ΔVAR2 (KeepTrackTM), Master/Follower, or ΔVAR
Peer to Peer.
186 TCC300
User Manual
TCC600
GUID-6C74AD06-67C3-433B-B783-6A218088FA6D V1 EN
GUID-410A9481-2BEA-4C94-9395-C80C846B85D6 V1 EN
Figure 122: Configuration Dialog Screens
TCC300 187
User Manual
TCC600
Table 35: Paralleling Options for ΔVAR2 and ΔVAR2 (KeepTrack)

Item Description
Sensitivity Adjustable from –4 to +4 in 0.1 increments with a
factory setting of 0.0.
Circulating Current Limit (Reactive) Adjustable from 5 mA to 200 mA in 1.0 mA
increments with a factory setting of 200 mA.
Input Ratio (Load/Parallel) Adjustable from 0.50 to 2.00 in 0.01 increments with
a factory setting of 1.00.
GUID-4881EAFB-9162-4DE7-9B75-C3F6D8E940FA V1 EN
Figure 123: DVAR2 and DVAR2 (Keeptrack) Configuration Dialog Screen
Table 36: Master/Follower Paralleling Configuration Settings

Item Description
Paralleling Address The unique address for each device (range 1-16).
Master/Follower Configuration Sets the control configuration as None, a Follower or
a Master.
Number of Devices The total number of devices that are in the paralleling
scheme (maximum of 16 inclusive of the master).
Tap Difference The difference between Master and Follower tap
positions that will result in a Lockout condition.
Tap Position Response Timeout The time within which the Followers have to be at the
same tap position as that of the Master (range 1,000
ms - 6,000 ms).
If the Master Timeout is greater than the intertap
delay setting, then the Master Timeout is used as the
Intertap delay, so that the Master waits for all the
Followers to make a tapchange before the Master
takes the next Tap.
Line Breaker, Right Tie Breaker, Left Tie Breaker The Line Breaker, Right and Left Tie Breakers can be
individually selected to be included or excluded from
the algorithm. Furthermore, the polarity of the input
detection can be either negative or positive.
188 TCC300
User Manual
TCC600
GUID-26B4E01A-A9E4-460F-B212-82D473C4DF76 V1 EN
Figure 124: Master/Follower Configuration Dialog Screen
Table 37: Delta VAr Peer to Peer Options

Item Description
Sensitivity Adjustable from -4 to +4 in 0.1 increments with a
factory setting of 0.0.
Circulating Current Limit (Reactive) Adjustable from 5 mA to 200 mA in 1.0 increments
with a factory setting of 200 mA.
Number of Devices The number of total devices that are in the paralleling
scheme (maximum 16 inclusive of the Initiator).
Paralleling Address The unique address for each device (Range 1 – 16).
Peer to Peer Update Speed (in milliseconds) The time period allocated to read all the paralleled
units relevant data, make the necessary calculations
and disseminate paralleling driven updates to the
system (Range 1000 to 10000).
MVA Rating The MVA rating of the transformer (Range 1.0 to
1000.0).
Peer to Peer Current Multiplier Correction A scaling factor to compensate Delta Vars
Calculation, if the CT value is not in the ratio to the
MVA rating (Range 20 to 500 %).
TCC300 189
User Manual
TCC600
Item Description
Topology Single Bus, Ring Bus or Double Bus topologies may
be entered.
Load Side Breaker Configuration Can be set to Not Used, 52a (positive polarity), or
52b (negative polarity).
Right Tie Breaker Configuration Can be set to Not Used, 52a (positive polarity), or
Left Tie Breaker Configuration Can be set to Not Used, 52a (positive polarity), or
GUID-B4AD5865-FC06-4CAC-BA98-547AA1CD232B V1 EN
Figure 125: Delta VAr Peer to Peer Configuration Dialog Screen
190 TCC300
User Manual
TCC600
Table 38: Remote Voltage Bias

Item Description
Enable/Disable Allows Remote Voltage Bias to be Enabled or
Disabled.
RVB Scale Factor Allows a forward scale factor to be applied to the raw
value being supplied to the control from SCADA.
RVB Heartbeat Timer The Heartbeat Timer is the refresh value of the
Internal Heartbeat. The remote voltage parameter
must be written to the control within the period
defined in the RVB Heartbeat Timer. If the timer
times out, the control reverts back to the normal
chosen regulating method using the bandcenter and
LDC settings.
Reverse RVB Scale Factor Allows a reverse scale factor to be applied to the raw
value being supplied to the control from SCADA.
Table 39: Run Through Neutral

Item Description
Enable/Disable Allows the Run Through Neutral feature to be
Enabled and Disabled.
Maximum Allowed Taps The Maximum Allowed Tap setting provides a user
selectable limit for the number of taps that are
allowed to be taken to accomodate taking one tap
through neutral.
Tap Operations Between Runs This setting is the number of operations the control
will count up to before allowing the Run Through
Neutral feature to operate if all pre-conditions are
met.
Maximum Load Current The Run Through Neutral feature will not be allowed
to operate when the Maximum Load Current setting
is exceeded.
Maximum RTN Standby Operations This setting provides the number of attempts to
exceed the RTN feature before the "RTN Fail to
Operate" Alarm is initiated.
Low Current Block

When enabled the control determines if Load Current is less than 4 mA coincident with
Tap Delta Voltage being less than .4 V AC. When these conditions exist the control will
initiate an alarm and block regulation.
Save Comm Block at Power Off

When the Auto/Manual Switch Type is set to "None" or "Toggle", the following
selections are available:
TCC300 191
User Manual
TCC600
• Don’t Save – Allows the state of the "Block Auto Operation" communication
command to NOT be saved when power has been lost.
• Save – Allows the state of the "Block Auto Operation" communication command to
be saved when power has been lost.
SCAMP Initialize on Power Up

When the Auto/Manual Switch Type is set to "SCAMP", the following selections are
available:
When Last Save is selected, the SCAMP switch is configured in such a way that upon the
control performing a cold power up, the state of the SCAMP switch is initialized to the last
saved state of the SCAMP switch prior to the control powering off.
For example, if prior to powering off the control, the SCAMP switch was in Manual, then
when the control is powered back on the control will initially go back to the Manual state
and vise versa. Now when Auto Mode is selected, the control always initializes into the
Auto Mode after powering up regardless of the saved state of the control prior to powering
off.
Table 40: Fast Voltage Recovery
Item Description
Enable/Disable Allows Fast Voltage Recovery to be Enabled or
Disabled.
Fast Voltage Recovery Allows a setting from 1.0 to 15.0 V outside the normal
band edges in 1.0 V increments. When voltage
exceeds the Raise or Lower band edge plus the Fast
Voltage Recovery setting, the normal definite or
inverse time delay is replaced with instantaneous
operation (<0.5 Sec).

Item Description
setting changes in the Configuration screen before
the settings have been saved to either the Device or
stored in the unit.
Save The Save command saves the setting changes to
either the Open File when in File mode or the Device
when TCC600® is connected to a device.
Close The Close command cancels any hardware setting
changes before the hardware settings changes have
been sent to either the Device or Open File.
192 TCC300
User Manual
TCC600
4.10.5.5 Tap Settings

Table 42: General
Item Description
Tap Information Tap information can be disabled or can be selected
to one of the following tap position knowledge
methods:
• Regulate Internal (KeepTrackTM)

• Regulate External #1
• XFMR External #1
• Contact KeepTrackTM 1R1L
• Contact KeepTrack 1N
InterTap Delay Adjustable from 0 to 60 seconds in 1 second

increments with a factory setting of 0 seconds. This
value must be set less than the count window setting
for counter operation.
Table 43: Tap Limits

Item Description
Enable/Disable Allows Tap Limits to be enabled or disabled.
Block Raise/Block Lower When enabled, Block Raise and Block Lower are
adjustable from the Tap Maximum configuration
point to the Tap Minimum value in 1 step increments
(Tap Limit Block Raise cannot be lower than Tap
Limit Block Lower +4. Tap Limit Block Lower cannot
be higher than Tap Limit Block Raise -4).
Highest Tap/Lowest Tap The TCC300 Digital Tapchanger Control tap position
information applies to many different configurations
of tapchangers, e.g., ±16 taps, 1 to 17 taps, ±10 taps,
1 to 33 taps, etc. Two configuration points, Lowest
Tap and Highest Tap, are assigned to allow the user
to select the range of a specific tapchanger. The
Highest Tap range is 0 to 33 taps, and the Lowest
Tap range is -33 to +29 taps.
TCC300 193
User Manual
TCC600
Table 44: Operation Counter

Item Description
Configuration Selects the contact operation sequence that will
cause the software counter to increment by one.
Open/close/open (X1), open/close or close/open
contact operation (X2). The count window mode
registers any activity as a valid input within the count
window time setting. Factory setting is X1.
The Cam Follower setting should be selected when a
Cam Follower contact input is wired into the Counter
contact input of the TCC300. The operation counter
and resettable operation counter will increment when
the counter input sees the cam follower open and
then close.
The Cooper Quick Drive setting should be enabled
for a Cooper QD regulator. When enabled, this
setting applies a 0 second seal-in output. For Cooper
Spring Drive and Direct Drive regulators, this setting
should be disabled. When disabled, this applies a 3
second seal-in output.
Count Window Operation count will increment by only one count
during a set time period or "Count Window". This is
true no matter how many counter inputs occur during
the count window time period. After a counter input is
accepted, the count window timer begins and
another count won’t be accepted until the count
window time period expires. The count window time
period can be set from 0.5 to 60.5 seconds. The
count window setting must be set greater than the
InterTap Delay setting.
X Mode Delay When the control is using X1 or X2 mode counter
contact detection method, the X1/X2 mode delay
setting in millisecond can be used to delay the
detection of the NEUTRAL position switch. This is
sometimes necessary if the regulator activates the
counter contact switch before the neutral switch
when moving to the neutral position. The default
value is 10 ms.
Preset (Counter) Displays the number of operations since the last
reset.
Alarm Limit (Op Count Signal Alarm) Displays the Op Count Signal Alarm limit value from
0 to 999,999. This value sets the trigger for the
Programmable Alarm "Op Count Signal" if enabled.
Resettable (Operation Counter) Displays the number of operations since the last
reset. Selecting the Reset check box and then
selecting Save sends a reset command to the
control.
Neutral Counter The Neutral Switch Counter is updated each time the
neutral input is detected. Neutral Switch Counter can
also preset to any value. The Neutral Switch Counter
is a software counter that is stored in non-volatile
memory and has a maximum value of 999,999.
194 TCC300
User Manual
TCC600
Motor Seal-in Failure Block

When Input Selection 1 is set to "Seal-In Input", the Motor Seal-in Failure Block feature
and the input to the Abnormal Tap Position alarm are enabled by default. The user may
choose to disable the Motor Seal-in Block feature. However, the input to the Abnormal
Tap Position alarm is always enabled when Motor Seal-in is selected.
Table 45: Drag Hands
Item Description
Drag Hands Lower Displays the lowest tap since last reset. Selecting the
Reset check box and then selecting Save sends a
reset command to the control.
Drag Hands Raise Displays the highest tap since last reset. Selecting
the Reset check box and then selecting Save sends
a reset command to the control.
Tap Statistics
The Tap Statistics Tap Wear feature provides the user with the capability to determine tap
wear in a regulator’s tap change mechanism. The Tap Statistics Tap Wear feature records
the accumulated primary current on each tap change using the measured Primary Current
just prior to moving off a tap. Primary current is calculated from measured Secondary
Load Current times the Primary Current Multiplier. The accumulated Primary Current for
each tap position is displayed on the Tap Statistics dialog screen which displays the
number of times the regulator has been on each tap. The Tap Statistics are stored in non-
volatile memory and will remain intact through power cycle and firmware update, as its
value is in its long term indication of mechanism wear.
The Tap Statistics can be downloaded to a CSV file and printed. Tap Statistics can also be
downloaded in CSV format to an SD card. The File name defaults to the serial number of
the unit but allows for user modification.
The Tap Statistics Tap Wear feature also includes two settings that are located in the
TCC600, Tap Settings dialog screen in the Tap Statistics section and in the HMI under the
Configuration/Tap Settings menu. Both settings are considered to generate a
Programmable Alarm output "Individual Tap Wear Alarm":
• Maximum Tap Wear setting – The Maximum Tap Wear setting can be set from 1–
65534.
• Individual Tap Wear Alarm setting – The Individual Tap Wear Alarm setting is a
percentage setting with a range from 1-200% and a default of 100%. This setting is
used in conjunction with the Maximum Tap Wear setting to determine when the
"Individual Tap Wear Alarm" is triggered. The Individual Tap Wear alarm will
trigger when the number of operations on any single tap exceeds the Individual Tap
Wear Alarm setting. This alarm also triggers SOE and OSC.
TCC300 195
User Manual
TCC600
GUID-2EDBFD25-222B-4846-9AA2-CDFA5AE21B47 V1 EN
Figure 126: Setup Tap Settings Dialog Screen
GUID-3418ADA0-D3ED-4CB8-A1D1-670EA112C667 V1 EN
Figure 127: Tap Settings Dialog Screen – Contact KeepTrackTM 1N
Tap Calibration
Tap Position – Value of actual tap position can be set from -16 to 16 including Neutral.
In order to verify Neutral Tap Position, when the tap position is 0, but no
neutral input is detected, "- - -" will be displayed instead of "0".
196 TCC300
User Manual
TCC600

Item Description
setting changes in the Tap Settings screen before
the settings have been saved to either the Device or
stored in the unit.
Save The Save command saves the Tap Settings changes
to either the Open File when in File mode or the
Device when TCC600® is connected to a device.
Close The Close command cancels any Tap Settings
changes before the changes have been sent to
either the Device or Open File.
4.10.5.6 Alarms
Programmable Alarm Relay

The programmable alarm function provides alarm monitoring for one or more of the
following conditions: Comm Block, Block Raise (Tap), Block Lower (Tap), Block Raise
(Voltage), Voltage Reduction, Max VAr Bias Duration Lead/Lag, Individual Tap Wear,
LDC/LDZ, Line Current Limit, Reverse Power, Block Lower (Voltage), Abnormal Tap
Position, Backup Power Fail, Run Through Neutral Fail to Operate, and Operations Count
Signal. Alarm conditions are continuously displayed in the Metering & Status screen.
TCC300 197
User Manual
TCC600
Figure 128: Programmable Alarms Dialog Screen
The Tap Changer Failure Alarm is only functional when the Operation Counter
configuration is set to Cam Follower.
The Alarms Dialog screen also provides the means to reset the Motor Seal-in Failure
Alarm/Block, the Low Current Block, the Run Through Neutral Fail to Operate Alarm,
Master/Follower Lockout and Peer to Peer Lockout.
198 TCC300
User Manual
TCC600

Item Description
setting changes in the Alarms screen before the
settings have been saved to either the Device or
stored in the unit.
Save The Save command saves the Alarms settings
changes to either the Open File when in File mode or
the Device when TCC600 is connected to a device.
Close The Close command cancels any Alarms setting
4.10.5.7 Wakeup Screens
The Wakeup Screens feature allows the user to select specific control parameters that will
be displayed when the control is awakened by depressing the EXIT/WAKE pushbutton.
When the control is awakened the selected parameters are displayed in a cycling fashion.
The display can also be directed to a specific parameter by utilizing the Up or Down
pushbuttons. Pressing the EXIT pushbutton will stop the cycling display on the displayed
parameter. Press EXIT again to return to the User Lines screen.
TCC300 199
User Manual
TCC600
GUID-FF6B60AF-BD80-4C42-81F4-7D2EA39644F0 V1 EN
Figure 129: Setup Wakeup Screen Dialog Screen

Item Description
Default The Default command allows the user to reset the
Wakeup Screens to the default settings.
Save The Save command saves the Wakeup Screen
the Device when TCC600® is connected to a device.
Close The Close command cancels any Wakeup Screen
200 TCC300
User Manual
TCC600
4.10.5.8 Data Logging
Data is recorded internally into non volatile memory. The data log is transferred in the
Comtrade format. The Comtrade format consist of two files, the configuration file (*.cfg)
and the data file (*.dat).
Data logging will continue indefinitely as long as the data interval is set to a non-zero
value. A zero value for the data interval will effectively disable data logging. The data log,
can be downloaded using MODBUS® (see TCC300 protocol document) or DNP (using
file transfer) protocol. The data can be viewed using any Comtrade compatible viewer.
TCC600 provides such a tool.
Data logging interval ranges from 0 to 120 min with an increment of 1 minute. Once data
logging is enabled, the control will store the data in records at the data interval rate. Each
record has the following data:
• Load Voltage
• Primary VA
• Power Factor
• Source Voltage
• Primary VAr
• Frequency
• Primary Watts
• Load Current
• Tap Position
• Primary Current
• Operations Count
• Circulating/DVAr Current
• RTN Counter
The checksum is used to ensure the integrity of the record stored. The average value is
calculated over the data logging interval.
Due to the internal structure of the Comtrade format, time stamping is always performed.
A total of 6 Mbytes (100,000 records) of data can be saved in non volatile memory.
When connected to a TCC300 Tapchanger Control the Data Logging feature provides the
user with the ability to initiate data logging of all control parameters to the selected control
for downloading at a later time.
This feature allows the user to configure the parameters that the control will use to log
data, and to download the logged data to a Comtrade (*.cfg) file. This file format can be
viewed by a third party Common Format for Transient Data Exchange (COMTRADE)
format viewer software.
TCC300 201
User Manual
TCC600
Table 49: Setup

Item Description
Data Log Interval Allows the user to input the interval in minutes at
which the data will be logged.
Save The Save command saves the Data Logging Setup
the Device when TCC600® is connected to a device.
Close The Close command cancels any Data Logging
setup changes before the changes have been sent to
When Load Voltage, Compensated Voltage, Source Voltage and Load

Current are selected, the data to be retrieved will consist of the average,
minimum and maximum values over the sampling period.
GUID-CF69965E-8DF7-4CE6-B1F3-146B6168A4D5 V1 EN
Figure 130: Data Logging Setup Dialog Screen
Retrieve
This submenu item when selected, displays the Data Log Download Screen which allows
selection of the parameters and date/time range to be retrieved. Selecting "Download"
initiates the retrieval of the current data logging file from the control.
202 TCC300
User Manual
TCC600
GUID-C05B6A4F-FD6A-492E-8F52-FDC5D31F6722 V1 EN
Figure 131: Data Log Download Dialog Screen
Clear
This submenu item when selected, clears the data logging information stored in the
control.
4.10.5.9 Harmonics Setup
The Harmonics Setup dialog screen provides the user with the ability to select Voltage and
Current Harmonics for monitoring relative to a Voltage and Current threshold setting.
Whenever any selected Voltage or Current Harmonic exceeds their respective threshold
if selected in Sequence of Events setup will initiate Sequence of Events recording. The
threshold level is set as a percentage of the fundamental.
TCC300 203
User Manual
TCC600
GUID-66C7020F-96BE-4BE4-ACDD-389E3F8D9C8D V1 EN
Figure 132: Harmonics Setup Dialog Screen
4.10.5.10 Oscillograph
Setup
The Oscillograph Recorder provides comprehensive data recording (voltage, current and
status input/output signals) for all monitored waveforms (at 16 samples per cycle).
Oscillograph data can be downloaded using the communications ports to any WindowsTM
personal computer running the TCC600® Communications Software. Once downloaded,
204 TCC300
User Manual
TCC600
the waveform data can be examined and printed using the TapPlot® Oscillograph Data
Analysis Software.
GUID-A53F1F0A-2EDF-4A7B-BE1D-3B5393FE92C7 V1 EN
Figure 133: Oscillograph Setup Dialog Screen
The general information required to setup the Oscillograph Recorder includes:
• Number of Partitions – When untriggered, the recorder continuously records

waveform data, keeping the data in a buffer memory. The recorder’s memory may be
partitioned into 1 to 16 partitions. When tr iggered, the time stamp is recorded and the
recorder continues recording for a user-defined period. The snapshot of the waveform
is stored in memory for later retrieval using TCC600 Communications Software.
• Samples/Cycle – The number of samples/cycle can be selected to either 16, 32 or 64
samples/cycle.
• Post-Trigger Delay – A post-trigger delay of 5% to 95% must be specified. After
triggering, the recorder will continue to store data for the programmed portion of the
total record before rearming for the next record. For example, a setting of 80% will
result in a record with 20% pre-trigger data and 80% post-trigger data.
TCC300 205
User Manual
TCC600
Table 50: Oscillograph Recorder Partitions and Cycles for 16 Samples/Cycle

Number of Partitions Cycles Per Partition
1 1365
2 910
3 682
4 546
5 455
6 390
7 341
8 303
9 273
10 248
11 227
12 210
13 195
14 182
15 170
16 160
Front Panel Message

The "Oscillograph Record Triggered" cycling display can be enabled from the TCC600®
Communications Software by navigating to the "Oscillography Message" (Setup/
Oscillograph/Front Panel Message) dialog screen and selecting "Enable". It can also be
enabled from the HMI by navigating to the "Communication HMI" menu.
GUID-AD7616A3-48B4-470D-B84F-0A0543ADD728 V1 EN
Figure 134: Oscillograph Front Panel Message Dialog Screen
206 TCC300
User Manual
TCC600
Trigger
The Oscillograph Recorder can be manually triggered by the user. When trigger is
selected a confirming dialog screen is displayed. Selecting Yes triggers the Oscillograph
Recorder and TCC600 displays a confirming dialog screen.
GUID-A84DA2DF-C40F-4830-B67D-2A7681A2E2B3 V1 EN
Figure 135: Oscillograph Trigger Dialog Screen
Retrieve
The Retrieve command initiates a sequence of dialog screens to download the
Oscillograph data from the currently connected control. Oscillograph data must be
retrieved from the control in a Comtrade file (*.cfg) in order to be viewed. TapPlot® can
be utilized to view the file contents.
TCC300 207
User Manual
TCC600
GUID-D8C914BE-C38E-407B-B8DC-67571D3A9FDC V1 EN
Figure 136: Retrieve Oscillograph Record Dialog Screen
208 TCC300
User Manual
TCC600
GUID-CB9AF680-1903-49FC-A8A3-69ABE85B87DB V1 EN
Figure 137: Retrieve Oscillograph Record (Save As) Dialog Screen
Clear
The Clear command clears any Oscillograph records on the connected control.
4.10.5.11 Sequence of Events
Setup
The Sequence of Events Setup consists of selecting the initiating Pickup and Dropout
elements of the control and also setting any logical conditions relative to the Pickup and
Dropout sequence to trigger the Sequence of Events recorder.
Selecting the OR and AND Trigger elements is accomplished by selecting either OR or

AND Gate boxes. TCC600® will display the OR Gate or AND Gate Setup Dialog Screen.
After selections are made in the OR Gate and AND Gate dialog screens the user must
select either OR or AND logic to initiate the Sequence of Events recorder. Selecting
SAVE then writes the settings to the control.
TCC300 209
User Manual
TCC600
GUID-BF519BAB-7DC5-410B-9F18-CD497208D5EE V1 EN
Figure 138: Sequence of Events Trigger Logic and Element Selection Dialog Screen
GUID-7D753199-D1A2-4C2D-884A-CC02CF6834F9 V1 EN
Figure 139: Sequence of Events Pickup/Dropout Edge Sensitive OR Gate Setup

Dialog Screen
210 TCC300
User Manual
TCC600
GUID-EC49D1D9-D642-4A0E-8127-6388DD1A6A1C V1 EN
Figure 140: Sequence of Events Pickup Level Sensitive AND Gate Setup Dialog
Screen
TCC300 211
User Manual
TCC600
GUID-BE90F7B7-0EB1-4489-B87A-0666B3AB9C8D V1 EN
Figure 141: Sequence of Events Dropout Level Sensitive AND Gate Setup Dialog
Screen
Retrieve
The Retrieve command downloads the events from the currently connected control.
Events must be retrieved from the control and stored in a file in order to be viewed.
212 TCC300
User Manual
TCC600
GUID-C6644544-0558-4839-8C73-3C1B1A6D4A87 V1 EN
Figure 142: Retrieve Sequence of Events File Save As Dialog Screen
View
The View command permits the user to display a detailed list of past Sequence of Events
and their corresponding captured parameters. The parameters captured in the Sequence of
Events file include:
• Local Voltage
• Source Voltage
• Frequency
• Tap Position
• Motor Current
• Load Current
• Resettable Operations Counter
• RMS Voltage
• RTN Success Counter
• Profile Number
• Time Stamp
• Trigger Status
• Voltage Harmonics Magnitude
TCC300 213
User Manual
TCC600
• Current Harmonics Magnitude

• Voltage Harmonics Status (31)
• Current Harmonics Status (31)
GUID-BAF63489-005D-4884-A8EA-A4F80902F00C V1 EN
Figure 143: View Sequence of Events Record Dialog Screen
Clear
The Clear command clears out the Sequence of Events recorder.
GUID-D0BD2C44-414D-48FC-B223-D19162B126C4 V1 EN
Figure 144: Clear Sequence of Events Record Dialog Screen
214 TCC300
User Manual
TCC600
4.10.5.12 CBEMA Events
Setup
There are a total of 4 Event Monitors in CBEMA (Computer Business Equipment
Manufacturers Association). Each CBEMA event monitor has a different minimum
duration limit; Event 1, 1 – 60 cycles, Event 2, 1 – 120 cycles, Event 3, 60 – 60000 cycles
and Event 4, 1 – 60 cycles. When Pickup is set to less than 100% it operates as a sag (under
voltage) function, and when it is greater than 100% it operates as a swell (over voltage)
function.
GUID-B2EEC973-DB34-457C-B220-832923151E0D V1 EN
Figure 145: CBEMA Setting Dialog Screen
TCC300 215
User Manual
TCC600
4.10.5.13 Display All Settings Command
Selecting Display All Settings displays the All Setpoints dialog screen. This dialog screen
contains the settings for each control function within a single window to allow scrolling
through all control setpoint and configuration values.
216 TCC300
User Manual
TCC600
GUID-76DDE8BF-4A38-4B24-8C76-ADD0DB605A36 V1 EN
Figure 146: All Setpoints Dialog Screen
TCC300 217
User Manual
TCC600
The individual Feature and Function selection buttons are described in the applicable
sections.
The All Setpoint Table includes Jump Command Buttons which allow the user to jump
from a scrolling dialog screen to an individual control function dialog screen and return to
the scrolling dialog screen. All available parameters can be reviewed or changed when
jumping to an individual control function dialog screen.
The All Setpoints screen can be printed or saved to a *.HTM file for viewing.
4.10.6 Utility menu
GUID-E3A05CE2-9BC0-44F3-916F-4266904D9717 V1 EN
Figure 147: Utility menu
The Utility menu includes the submenu items.
• Remote Control
• Control Information
• Change User Access Code
• Set Date & Time
• Device Discovery
• Multi Level Access Code
• SD Card Access Code
• IEC 61850
• DNP
• Peer to Peer Paralleling Configuration
• Master/Follower Configuration
218 TCC300
User Manual
TCC600
• Send Firmware Update

• Convert Datalog File to CSV Format
• Convert Binary Soe File to .SOE Format
• TapPlot®
4.10.6.1 Remote Control
This feature should be used with extreme caution.
The Remote Control menu item located in the Utility drop down menu displays the
applicable Remote Control screen. Remote Control allows the user to:
• Remotely raise or lower one tap position.

• Apply Voltage Reduction Step 1 or 2 or 3.
• When the Auto/Manual Switch Type is set to either "Toggle" or "NONE" the Block
Auto Control via Communication (Comm Block) setting is available.
• When the Auto/Manual Switch Type is set to "SCAMP" the SCAMP Auto/Manual
Control setting is available.
Figure 148: Remote Control Screen for Toggle or None Auto/Manual Switch Type
TCC300 219
User Manual
TCC600
GUID-217CAB51-2F4A-4235-B7F3-4985B331F3EC V1 EN
Figure 149: Remote Control Screen for SCAMP Auto/Manual Switch Type
Block Auto Control via Communication

Block – Blocks automatic operation of the addressed control.
Unblock – Initiates automatic operation of the addressed control.
Restoring Automatic Operation (Local)

Automatic operation can be restored from the front panel by removing the "Block Auto
Control via Communication" through TCC600® or by performing the following:
1. From the control front panel pushbuttons change the Comm Block Auto setting in the
Configuration/Nameplate menu to DON’T SAVE.
2. Remove power to the control, then reapply power to the control. Automatic operation
will then be restored.
SCAMP Control
The SCAMP Control feature allows the user to remotely observe the status of the Adapter
Panel SCAMP pushbutton (when equipped). This feature also allows the user to change
the state of the Local SCAMP pushbutton on the Adapter Panel/Control.
220 TCC300
User Manual
TCC600
4.10.6.2 Control Information
The Control Information submenu item displays the Control Information Screen. The
Control Information screen provides specific information about the addressed control.
GUID-D66D3E54-5CD3-4055-A8EA-5A3D3D9F2C01 V1 EN
Figure 150: Control Information Screen
The Control Information screen includes the following:

• The addressed control’s serial number
• Control’s firmware version
• The text currently displayed in the User Lines 1 and 2
The Control Information screen also provides the user with the ability to review and
change the user lines for the addressed control.
Item Description
Save The Save command saves the User Line changes to
the control when TCC600® is connected to a control.
Close The Close command cancels any User Line changes
before the changes have been sent to the control.
4.10.6.3 Change User Access Code
The User Access Code Level 1 and User Access Code Level 2 protect access to the control
from the front keypad and TCC600.
TCC300 221
User Manual
TCC600
Table 52: User Access Code protection, when implemented

Level Description
Default View All
Level 1 Change Setpoints, Date/Time
Level 2 Change Setpoints, Configuration, Communication,
Set New Access Codes, Start Data Logging, Setup
Data Logging, Remote Control, Set User Text Lines,
Set Control Date/Time
If additional Access Codes are desired, see Multi Level Access Code.
Changing User Level Access Codes
1. Select Utility/Change User Access Code from the TCC600 toolbar. TCC600 will
display the Change User Access Code dialog screen.
GUID-6AA2119F-CDBB-45CB-B614-80C0ABDE6AFC V1 EN
Figure 151: Change User Access Code Dialog Screen
2. Enter a new Level 1/Level 2 six digit alphanumeric User Access Code.
3. Enter the User Access Code from Step 2, in Confirm New User Access Code.
4. Select Save. TCC600 will display a Save to Device confirmation screen.
5. Select Yes. TCC600 will return to the Main Screen.
222 TCC300
User Manual
TCC600
4.10.6.4 Set Date & Time
The Set Date & Time submenu item enables the user to review the internal clocks for the
PC or the addressed control and also allows the selection of daylight saving.
Setting date/time and daylight savings from TCC600
1. Select Utility/Set Date & Time from the TCC600® toolbar. TCC600 will display
a Warning regarding time stamped values. Select OK.
GUID-2C0D517B-47AA-4E8A-92A5-874A50C0B30B V1 EN
Figure 152: Set Date/Time Warning Dialog Screen
2. From the Set Control Date/Time dialog screen select either "Control Clock" or "PC
Clock".
TCC300 223
User Manual
TCC600
GUID-7A1849CE-95E5-4103-91BB-61B5E03CE87C V1 EN
Figure 153: Set Control Date/Time Dialog Screen
3. Verify that the desired Daylight Saving setting is selected.

4. If desired select "Sync Time at Startup" and the desired "Allowable Time mismatch"
value.
5. Determine if the control is to be set to either "PC Clock" or "Control Clock", then
proceed as follows:
• If "PC Clock" was selected and the Date/Time of the PC is the desired time to
be set in the control, then select Save.
• If "Control Clock" was selected, input the desired Date/Time, then select Save.
TCC600 will respond with a Reset Demand and Energy warning screen.
224 TCC300
User Manual
TCC600
GUID-92824E70-6A91-4395-AF31-BAFE0A04B540 V1 EN
Figure 154: Reset Demand and Energy Warning Dialog Screen
Whenever the clock is reset and data logging is enabled the data log
should be cleared.
6. Select OK to reset Demand Metering, Energy Metering, Drag Hands and Resettable
Operation Counter or Cancel which will not reset these parameters.
TCC600 will return to the Main Screen.
4.10.6.5 Device Discovery
The Device Discovery menu selection can be used when the control exists on an Ethernet
network. It allows the user utilizing TCC600® to discover TCC300 ABB products on the
network without needing to know the individual IP Addresses of other controls. When a
control is found and selected the user can send and receive DNP Configuration files, IEC
61850 CID files and receive Access Code Log files.
TCC300 225
User Manual
TCC600
GUID-EB2EEB48-24A0-4640-9DCB-C0F9F8A2FF77 V1 EN
Figure 155: Device Discovery Dialog Screen
4.10.6.6 Multi Level Access Code
The Multi Level Access Code menu selection provides the user with the ability to create
up to 30 unique fifteen character Access Codes. The list is created in TCC600 and
downloaded to the control. Once a control has the list, the user can download a log of date
and time each access code was used to access the control as well as when that access was
terminated.
GUID-3DAE0E58-9A7A-40EB-89D2-A92BCFE7B994 V1 EN
Figure 156: Multi Level Access Code Dialog Screen
226 TCC300
User Manual
TCC600
4.10.6.7 SD Card Access Code
This feature allows the user to write a User Access Code Level 1 or 2 to a Smart Flash SD
Card. When a User Access Code is present on the SD Card, when inserted, the control
reads the User Access Code and does not prompt for the Access Code while the SD Card
is inserted.
GUID-15999F53-E9F3-4101-9F9A-BFF7B73ACD3C V1 EN
Figure 157: SD Card Access Code Dialog Screen
4.10.6.8 IEC 61850
The IEC 61850 menu selection (when purchased) provides the user with access to the IEC
61850 Protocol Configuration Editor.
GUID-A923C81F-A8CD-489B-97B3-9AFE2D718005 V1 EN
Figure 158: IEC 61850 Configuration Editor Dialog Screen
The following Configuration Editor features are provided:
TCC300 227
User Manual
TCC600
• File - New, Open, Save Template, Save, Save As

• Schema - 1.4 or 3.0
• Reporting - Metering Dataset and Status Dataset
• GOOSE Publisher - 1 through 5
• GOOSE Subscriber - 1 and 2
• Validate • Print and Print Preview
• See Appendix D for detailed information
Also, the IEC 61850 menu provides access to "Send" and "Receive" Configuration Files,
CID File Identifier and the Non-Standard Data Definition document (.pdf) for reference.
Sending IEC 61850 configuration files
1. Start the TCC600® Communications Software on the PC.

2. Connect to the TCC300 control.
3. Select Utility/IEC61850/Configuration File/Send. TCC600 will display the
"Authentication Key Generated Successfully" confirmation screen.
GUID-05A47015-EBDE-4BE3-B4DA-60BA37437FC2 V1 EN
Figure 159: Authentication Key Generated Dialog Screen
4. Select OK. TCC600 will display the "Open" dialog screen with a default file
extension of "*.cid".
5. Select the desired Configuration file, then select "Open". TCC600 will display the
"Send" status screen while the Configuration file is sent.
228 TCC300
User Manual
TCC600
GUID-58A93588-7D97-4A96-B5B7-71933BB3DA4D V1 EN
Figure 160: Send Status Screen
6. When the file has been successfully sent to the control, TCC600 will display the File
Uploaded Successfully confirmation screen.
GUID-3F648A49-9AD4-4075-AE9E-811B1F4007F6 V1 EN
Figure 161: IEC Configuration File Uploaded Successfully Confirmation Screen
Receiving IEC 61850 configuration files
1. Start the TCC600 Communications Software on the PC.

2. Connect to the TCC300 control.
3. Select Utility/IEC61850/Configuration File//Receive. TCC600 will display the
"Save As" dialog screen with a default file extension of "*.cid".
4. Name the Configuration file, then select "Save". TCC600 will display the
"Transferring" status screen while the Configuration file is transferred.
TCC300 229
User Manual
TCC600
GUID-4A34871F-E147-4A6F-9031-6744B687FFC1 V1 EN
Figure 162: IEC Configuration File Transferring Status Screen
5. When the file has been successfully downloaded from the control, TCC600 will
display the File Downloaded Successfully confirmation screen.
GUID-2A1B0BA3-F87F-4DE4-88E9-0E98D491AB1A V1 EN
Figure 163: IEC Configuration File Downloaded Successfully Confirmation

Screen
4.10.6.9 DNP
The Utility DNP Menu provides access to the DNP Configuration Editor, Source Address
Validation, Send DNP Configuration, Receive DNP Configuration File, DNP File
Identifier and UDP Port Settings features.
DNP Configuration Editor

The DNP Configuration Editor menu selection opens the TCC300 DNP Configuration
Editor dialog screen which provides the user with the following capabilities:
• TCC300 default DNP configuration files (*.xml) can be loaded for editing or become
the basis for new DNP configuration files.
• Selected DNP configuration files (*.xml) other than TCC300 default files can be
loaded for editing or become the basis for new DNP configuration files.
• Binary Inputs, Analog Inputs, Binary/Control Outputs and Analog Outputs may be
added, edited or deleted.
• Dummy positions may be added to allow SCADA table matching.
• Variations may also be edited.
230 TCC300
User Manual
TCC600
• File can be saved to disk or to the connected control.

• Items in the editor can be moved, added and removed by dragging and dropping.
• Enable/Disable unsolicited response.
• Screen can be printed.
• Master Address for unsolicited responses and/or Source Address Validation.
• See Appendix C for detailed information.
GUID-B874B54E-A407-40AE-85C1-067D6AC561D7 V1 EN
Figure 164: TCC300 DNP Configuration Editor Dialog Screen
Source Address Validation

The Source Address Validation feature is available from the Utility/DNP menu selection.
When Source Address Validation is enabled it applies only when DNP3.0 Protocol has
been selected regardless of the physical interface. If enabled the client address must match
the address set by the user in the DNP Configuration file before accepting the message as
a valid one.
TCC300 231
User Manual
TCC600
GUID-660AD506-6883-4D19-A998-DA9FC6147C55 V1 EN
Figure 165: Source Address Validation Dialog Screen
GUID-A8DD08A2-5FC0-4BA9-9113-12904F4295C7 V1 EN
Figure 166: Confirm Writing to the Device Dialog Screen
Send DNP Configuration File

The Send DNP Configuration File menu selection provides the user with the capability to
upload a DNP configuration file to the control.
Receive DNP Configuration File

The Receive DNP Configuration File menu selection provides the user with the capability
to download a DNP configuration file from the control.
DNP File Identifier

The DNP File Identifier menu selection when selected displays the DNP File Identifier
that is loaded onto the control.
GUID-10E3B0BF-81EB-400C-B7BC-BD1D28B0DADE V1 EN
Figure 167: DNP File Information Dialog Screen
232 TCC300
User Manual
TCC600
UDP Port Settings

A total of 5 UDP channels exist for DNP. The first channel is reserved for unsolicited
messages. The control will send any unsolicited responses to the UDP Remote IP/Port that
has been configured. If the Remote IP and Port have not been configured, the unit will not
send any unsolicited messages.
GUID-10682DFF-292E-4E82-8FD0-AEC80331CB5A V1 EN
Figure 168: UDP Settings Dialog Screen
Uploading DNP configuration files
1. From the TCC600® Main Screen select Utility/DNP/Send DNP Configuration

File. TCC600 will display the Authentication Key Generated dialog screen.
Figure 169: Authentication Key Generated Dialog Screen
2. Select OK. TCC600 will display the Open File Dialog screen with a default *.xml
file extension.
TCC300 233
User Manual
TCC600
GUID-8FFBC659-7C87-428F-807D-F25B2BA0FF70 V1 EN
Figure 170: DNP Open File Dialog Screen
3. Select the target file, then select Open. TCC600 will display the DNP Send status
screen.
4. When the DNP Configuration file has been uploaded TCC600® will display a
confirmation screen. Select OK. TCC600 will return to the Main Screen.
234 TCC300
User Manual
TCC600
GUID-EEE054A1-CA8F-494B-8905-3BCC32C42C8F V1 EN
Figure 172: DNP Upload Complete Screen
Downloading DNP configuration files
1. From the TCC600® Main Screen select Utility/DNP/Receive DNP Configuration

File. TCC600 will display the Save As dialog screen with a default *.xml file
extension.
TCC300 235
User Manual
TCC600
GUID-DA53D651-9420-4DA0-8C2C-66A576F9BE9D V1 EN
Figure 173: Save As File Dialog Screen
2. Select the target file or enter a valid name for the new file, then select Save. TCC600
will momentarily display a download status screen.
3. When the DNP Configuration file has been downloaded TCC600 will display a
confirmation screen. Select OK. TCC600 will return to the Main Screen.
GUID-E87C5597-C70F-45AB-909E-F7E053E4909A V1 EN
Figure 174: Download Complete Dialog Screen
236 TCC300
User Manual
TCC600
4.10.6.10 Peer to Peer Paralleling Configuration
The Peer to Peer Paralleling Configuration tool is available when Delta VAr Peer to Peer
Paralleling is selected in Setup/Configuration.
The configuration tools provide the means to:
• Discover Paralleled Devices

• Save configurations on multiple discovered controls
• Reset Alarms/Lockouts on multiple controls
• Change Delta VAr Peer to Peer settings on multiple controls
• Poll multiple status information
GUID-C8439FC3-CE88-4E61-8E98-6570DABF1599 V1 EN
Figure 175: Delta VAr Peer to Peer Paralleling Configuration Tool
4.10.6.11 Master/Follower Configuration
The Master/Follower Configuration menu selection (when purchased) provides the user
with access to the Master/Follower Configuration Tool dialog screen.
TCC300 237
User Manual
TCC600
GUID-1C232DA5-F848-4026-9280-69A574588EA4 V1 EN
Figure 176: Master/Follower Configuration Tool
The Configuration Tool provides the means to:
• Discover Master/Follower controls on the connected network

• Display Control Master/Follower settings
• Edit and apply Master/Follower settings to the selected control
• Reset the Master/Follower Lockout Alarm
4.10.6.12 Send Firmware Update
The Send Firmware Update feature is available from the Utility menu selection. This
feature allows the user to upload firmware updates to the control. Firmware updates may
be uploaded at any time, as the control settings are not affected.
Sending a firmware update to TCC300
1. Remove the control from service.

2. From the TCC600® Main Screen select Utility/Send Firmware Update. TCC600
will display the Open file dialog screen with a default *.bot file extension.
238 TCC300
User Manual
TCC600
GUID-A36BE431-EAE7-4EDE-BEE6-5C9E6A13C067 V1 EN
Figure 177: Open File Dialog Screen
3. Select the target file, then select Open. TCC600 will display the Firmware Upload
dialog screen.
GUID-BE0A294D-BF50-4D0A-8412-EC93A8D2E22E V1 EN
Figure 178: Firmware Upload Screen
TCC300 239
User Manual
TCC600
The dialog screen contains instructions to verify that the control displays "On the PC
click OK" the control will display the following:
Firmware Update
← Press ENT to begin
4. Press the ENT pushbutton, the control will display the following:
On the PC
Click OK
5. From the Upload dialog screen select OK. TCC600 will display the Send Status
Screen.
GUID-BE0A294D-BF50-4D0A-8412-EC93A8D2E22E V1 EN
Figure 179: Firmware Upload Screen
When the file transfer has been completed TCC600 will display a Firmware Upload
Confirmation screen and close communications.
240 TCC300
User Manual
TCC600
GUID-6950B690-A709-4EE6-8EF6-5A1E16DAAB6E V1 EN
Figure 181: File Transfer Confirmation Screen
6. When the control displays the following, it will reboot automatically.

Update Complete
Rebooting
After a Firmware Update, remove power to the control and then

reapply power to initialize the unit.
7. Select OK. TCC600 will return to the main screen. Communication will need to be
reestablished.
4.10.6.13 Convert Datalog File to CSV Format
This feature allows Datalog Files created on theTCC300 to be converted to "*.csv" format
files that can be opened in any spreadsheet program.
4.10.6.14 Convert Binary Soe File to .SOE Format
This feature allows the user to convert binary Soe files downloaded from third party
software to the Beco (.SOE) format for viewing in the TCC600 SOE Viewer
TCC300 241
User Manual
TCC600
GUID-FA4F3FD5-809C-40D9-9635-E64ECF303217 V1 EN
Figure 182: Convert Binary File to SOE Format Dialog Screen
4.10.7 Windows menu
GUID-6F552815-5006-469A-8CFF-FC14826C1802 V1 EN
Figure 183: Windows menu
The Windows toolbar item provides the Cascade and Tile display options. The Windows
toolbar item also allows the user to select between open TCC600® windows.
4.10.8 Help menu
GUID-A1844CB4-CC46-4A6F-B716-481CB3F17144 V1 EN
Figure 184: Help menu
The Help toolbar item provides the user with information about the control and the
firmware version that is installed in the unit.
242 TCC300
User Manual
TCC600
Table 53: Help menu contents

Item Description
Contents The Instruction Book menu topic has been indexed
to its Table of Contents. By selecting the 'Navigator
pane' in Adobe Acrobat Reader, the user can directly
access selected topics.
About The About submenu item provides the TCC600
software version number, control firmware version,
(if connected), and copyright information.
GUID-05313ED9-385D-4FD6-97AA-734F4555A120 V1 EN
Figure 185: About TCC600
4.11 TapPlot analysis software
The TapPlot® Analysis Software operates in conjunction with all TCC600®

Communications Software on any computer running Windows™. TapPlot allows the user
to plot and print tap data (comtrade*.cfg) retrieved from ABB TCC300 series Digital
Tapchanger Controls.
TapPlot® is a windows based program for viewing the data that has been retrieved using
the Data Logging feature of TCC600®.
TCC300 243
User Manual
TCC600
When TapPlot is started, a menu and tool bar are displayed. This section describes each
TapPlot menu selection and explains each TapPlot command in the same order that they
are displayed in the software program.
Markers
TapPlot includes two user selectable markers. The first is positioned by double clicking on
the plotted wave form data. The second is positioned by pressing and holding the SHIFT
key and then double clicking on the plotted wave form data.
The markers can be dragged by moving the cursor over the marker until the cursor changes
to a double-headed arrow 1, then holding down the Left mouse button and dragging the
marker. The first marker can also be moved an interval at a time by pressing the LEFT or
RIGHT arrow key. The second marker can be moved by pressing the Shift key and the Left
or Right arrow key.
GUID-2DDE41DF-9198-438B-8C06-2CD7CC036D9E V1 EN
Figure 186: TapPlot Screen With Callouts
TapPlot Main Window – Bottom Right Data Display
Data Record Start Time Marker 1 Time Marker 2 Time

GUID-1A6330F9-6D3E-4EE3-931D-9ACB9777A171 V1 EN
Figure 187: TapPlot Main Screen Data Time Stamp Display
Right-Click Filter Menus

Right-Click menus are available to allow filtering of the data results. Figure 188 and
Figure 189 show examples of the right-click menus available in either a Datalog or
Oscillograph file.
244 TCC300
User Manual
TCC600
GUID-360489F0-7E6D-4F20-900E-35B0E454A957 V1 EN
Figure 188: Datalog File Right-Click Filter Menu
GUID-348A389C-34E1-4227-B86B-F09913FF99F7 V1 EN
Figure 189: Oscillograph File Right-Click Filter Menus
TCC300 245
User Manual
TCC600
File Menu
GUID-7C9362F7-7D63-4E2F-B701-246856DE0B81 V1 EN
Figure 190: File menu
The File menu allows the user to:
• Open a TapPlot® (.cfg) file previously downloaded by TCC600®.

• Print the displayed TapPlot data.
• A Print Preview of the displayed TapPlot data.
• Select the printer and printer settings to be used.
• Select from previously viewed .cfg files (the last eight files displayed).
• Exit the TapPlot program.
246 TCC300
User Manual
TCC600
View Menu
GUID-A4905461-9550-4652-B9E2-928116E7958A V1 EN
Figure 191: View menu
The View menu allows the user to:
• Display the Device Information for the corresponding TapPlot data file.
• Fundamental
• Original Waveform
• Harmonics
• Power Factor
• Apparent Power
• PQ Diagram
• Apparent and PF
• Zoom In, increase the resolution of the tap data displayed on the screen.
• Zoom Out, decrease the resolution of the tap data displayed on the screen.
• View ALL, returns the display to include all data within the record.
• Select which Tool Bar (Toolbar/Status Bar) is available on the display window.
TCC300 247
User Manual
TCC600
GUID-F1761467-A897-4A58-87F8-A3E53370E7D5 V1 EN
Figure 192: Device Information Screen
Settings Menu
GUID-9A39319A-D3F2-4121-9172-74F878C266CD V1 EN
Figure 193: Settings menu
The Settings menu allows the selection of the waveforms to be displayed and the format
of display colors.
Select Waveform allows the selection of any of the following Data Log Tap Parameters
to be plotted or printed:
• Load Voltage (V)

• Compensated Voltage (V)
• Primary Watts (W)
• Primary (VA)
• Primary (VAr)
• Load Current (A)
• Power Factor
• Frequency
248 TCC300
User Manual
TCC600
• Tap Position
• Source Voltage (V)
• Primary Current (A)
• Circulating Current (mA)
• Operation Counter
The Waveform selections are made from the Select Waveform screen.
GUID-DF06204F-C7A1-427E-8C8A-53D3B0068484 V1 EN
Figure 194: Select Waveform Dialog Screen
Select Color provides the user with the capability to change Foreground and Background
display color of individual Waveform traces for customized plotting.
TCC300 249
User Manual
TCC600
GUID-D47FBA17-9BD8-485B-8FA3-D8170FA12EB3 V1 EN
Figure 195: Select Color Dialog Screen
Change Scale provides the user with the capability to change the scaling of the displayed
parameter.
GUID-D170B6AB-1650-4B0D-B45C-C6F4C8285FED V1 EN
Figure 196: Change Scale Screen
250 TCC300
User Manual
TCC600
Search Time Stamp provides the user with the capability to place the marker exactly at the
desired time stamp in the TapPlot® window.
GUID-E8A29D92-866A-4155-B9FE-EA612A81EA16 V1 EN
Figure 197: Search Time Stamp Scree
Help Menu
GUID-0B4BF8CA-D448-47B2-A1C4-BA12FEF54D4B V1 EN
Figure 198: Help menu
The Help menu provides access to the Quick Guide which provides basic information
about TapPlot menus and commands. The About command provides version information
for TapPlot.
GUID-2304F603-12F0-45C7-A7DC-5297CC1F7C74 V1 EN
Figure 199: About TapPlot Screen
TCC300 251
User Manual
TCC600
4.11.1 Starting TapPlot
1. Select the TapPlot menu item from the TCC600 Menu (Utility/TapPlot.) The
TapPlot Window and Toolbar is displayed.
GUID-4E962761-E3FB-4EE1-B627-E82719F1446E V1 EN
Figure 200: TapPlot Main Window with Submenus
2. Select File/Open from the menu, and browse for the .cfg file.
3. Open the file. TapPlot should display the saved data.
252 TCC300
User Manual
TCC600
GUID-C26288F6-DB8F-4FE8-8E48-48A29DAF9C41 V1 EN
Figure 201: TapPlot Window with Data Logging Data Example
GUID-9AB72BE4-9AB7-42EE-981B-60877DB723E9 V1 EN
Figure 202: TapPlot Window with Oscillograph Data Example
TCC300 253
User Manual
254
System setup
Section 5 System setup
Appendix A includes the HMI menu structure for reference. Appendix B

is available to document control settings.
5.1 General unit setup
The General Unit setup consists of the setup of the following features and functions:
• User Access Codes

• User Lines
• System Clock
• Time and Date
5.1.1 User access codes

To prevent unauthorized access to the control functions, there are provisions in the
software for assigning a Level 1 and/or Level 2 Access Code (up to six characters). A fixed
factory assigned Level 3 Access Code is required for changing calibration factors. When
Level 1 or Level 2 Access Codes are active, then an additional 30 Level Access Codes (up
to 15 characters) can be enabled as either Level 1 or Level 2. The Access Codes can be set
in the Communication/HMI Menu or from TCC600®.
Level Access protection will be automatically reinstated when either of the following
conditions are met:
• No HMI menu activity for a period of 15 minutes

• The user exits to the top of the HMI menu for a period of greater than 10 seconds
General access to read setpoints, to monitor status, to reset draghand parameters and the
resettable operations counter do not require an Access Code.
The Level 1 Access Code, if set, is required to make setpoint changes. If the Level 1
Access Code is set to all zeros, this request for an Access Code will not be seen and
changes can be made without an Access Code. The default Level 1 Access Code is
000000.
TCC300 255
User Manual
System setup
The Level 2 Access Code, if set, is required to make changes to the configuration,
communication, and utilities. If the Level 2 Access Code is set to all zeros, this request for
an Access Code will not be seen and changes can be made without an Access Code. The
default Level 2 Access Code is 222222.
The Level 3 Access Code is required to make changes to calibration settings on the
control. Contact ABB Customer Service for TCC300 Level 3 Access Codes.
Record all user access codes in a secure location. Contact the factory if the
user access code is lost or forgotten.
Smart Flash SD Card User Access Key Code

If a Smart Flash SD Card inserted into the control has a valid Access Level 1 or Access
Level 2 code written to it, the control will accept the code and not prompt for an Access
Code.
HMI Level Access Prompt

When Level Access is active, the control will display an "Enter Level 1 (2 or 3) Access"
screen if applicable. A valid Level Access Code should be entered to operate the control.
5.1.1.1 Setting level 1 or level 2 user access codes from the HMI
Level 1 and Level 2 User Access Codes are alphanumeric. The alphabetic
characters are upper case only.
When changing an access code, if no key entry is made for approximately 15 minutes, and
the screen goes blank, and the digit furthest to the left has not been entered, the user access
code will revert to the previous one regardless of digits that have been changed. After a
new Level 2 User Access Code has been entered, the new User Access Code must be used
to re-enter the Communications/HMI menu. Be sure to record the new user access code for
future use.
to either "COMMUNICATION" or "Memory Card" (when a Smart Flash SD CARD
is present).
256 TCC300
User Manual
System setup
Level 1 Access Code Pres ENT to change

Change Access Code 000000
When entering the new user access code the display will
automatically advance the cursor to the next digit when input is
momentarily paused.
5. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons, enter the new Level 1/Level 2 User Access Code,
then press the ENT pushbutton. The following will be displayed.
Access Code Updated
As soon as ne w User Access Codes are entered, they will be required to change any
setpoint or configuration parameter.
5.1.1.2 Setting level 1 or level 2 user access codes from TCC600
1. Select Utility/Change User Access Code from the TCC600® toolbar. TCC600 will
display the "Change User Access Code" dialog screen.
GUID-6AA2119F-CDBB-45CB-B614-80C0ABDE6AFC V1 EN
Figure 203: Change User Access Code Dialog Screen
2. Input a new Level 1/Level 2 six digit alphanumeric User Access Code.
3. Input the User Access Code from Step 2, in Confirm New User Access Code.
TCC300 257
User Manual
System setup
GUID-64E3E9D7-7F66-4451-906E-B934BF7F9785 V1 EN
Figure 204: Save to Device Confirmation Screen
5. Select OK. TCC600 will display an "Access Codes Were Changed Successfully"
GUID-200A8108-CBFC-45A9-8B0A-AF79FA805943 V1 EN
Figure 205: Access Codes Were Changed Successfully Dialog Screen
6. Select OK. TCC600 will return to the Main Screen.
As soon as new User Access Codes are entered, they will be required to change any
setpoint or configuration parameter.
5.1.1.3 Setting multi level access codes from TCC600
The Multi Level Access Code feature allows the user to create up to 30 unique Access
Codes. Each Access Code can be up to 15 characters in length including spaces. After
creating a list of Access Codes, the list can be saved to either the host computer or to the
control. The Access Code file is encrypted for security measures.
1. Select Utility/Multi Level Access Code/Send/Retrieve from the TCC600®

toolbar. TCC600 will display the "Multi Level Access Code" dialog screen.
258 TCC300
User Manual
System setup
GUID-3DAE0E58-9A7A-40EB-89D2-A92BCFE7B994 V1 EN
Figure 206: Multi Level Access Code Dialog Screen
2. Select "Add Access Code". TCC600 will display the next consecutive Access Code
Index with a default Level 2 access.
3. Select the desired index (left click), then double left click. TCC600 will display the
Access Code entry/edit dialog box.
4. Enter/Edit the Access Code, then click off the Access Code in the dialog screen.
5. Select "Save to PC". TCC600 will display the "Save As" dialog screen with an *.xml
default file extension.
6. Enter the desired file name and destination folder, then select "Save".
7. To send the Multi Level Access Code file to the control select "Send to Control".
TCC600 will display the "Access Level Code" dialog screen.
GUID-11AD0CDF-6F69-46F8-A6F0-AB5D26D93A97 V1 EN
8. Enter a valid Level 2 Access Code, then select OK. If a valid Level 2 Access Code
was entered, then TCC600 will display the "Access granted successfully" dialog
screen. If not, re-enter a valid code.
GUID-F92BF6AA-42BF-46FD-9EC3-F8DEE895EEBD V1 EN
Figure 208: Access Key Dialog Screen
9. Select OK, TCC600® will display the "Authentication Key generated successfully"
dialog screen.
TCC300 259
User Manual
System setup
GUID-7BC2692E-7E78-497B-ACCC-81B5D763CCEB V1 EN
Figure 209: Authentication Key Generated Successfully Dialog Screen
10. Select OK, TCC600 will display the "Open" dialog screen.
11. Select the Access Code file to be sent to the control, then select "Open". TCC600 will
briefly display a status dialog screen followed by a "Multi Access Code Upload"
dialog screen.
GUID-0569C6C6-7D78-4930-99A2-D536A96079D0 V1 EN
Figure 210: Multi Access Code Upload Complete
12. Select OK. TCC600 will return to the Multi Level Access Code dialog screen.
5.1.2 User lines

The user station identification lines (User Lines) allow the user to uniquely identify the
unit. Each line of this display can have up to 20 ASCII characters. User Lines are factory
preset with "ABB" for Line 1 and "TCC300" for Line 2.
When ENT is pressed at the Communications/HMI/User Line 1 or User Line 2 menu, an

underline cursor is displayed under the left-most digit. Each digit is changed by using the
Up and Down pushbuttons to select the ASCII character (the ASCII character list begins
with "!"). The Left or Right pushbutton is used to move the underline to the next digit.
When the ENT pushbutton is pressed, the new user line is stored into nonvolatile memory.
5.1.2.1 Setting user lines from the HMI
is present).
3. Press the Down arrow as necessary until the following is displayed.
User Line 1 E ABB
New User Line 1 ABB
260 TCC300
User Manual
System setup
When entering the new User Line the display will automatically
paused.
5. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons enter the new Line 1/Line 2 user line(s), then press
the ENT pushbutton. The following will be displayed.
User Line 1 E ABB
5.1.2.2 Setting user lines from TCC600
1. Select Utility/Control Information from the TCC600® toolbar. TCC600 will

display the Control Information dialog screen.
GUID-D66D3E54-5CD3-4055-A8EA-5A3D3D9F2C01 V1 EN
Figure 211: Control Information Screen
2. Input the new Line 1/Line 2 Information.

3. Select Save. TCC600 will display a "Confirm Writing to Device" confirmation
screen.
5.1.3 System clock

The control is equipped with a real-time, 24‑hour clock which is used with the Demand
History feature to record date/time stamp information on quantities saved in memory.
The power source for the clock is maintained for at least 24 hours during a system power
outage by a charged capacitor (no battery). If the power outage lasts longer than 24 hours,
check the clock and reset if necessary.
TCC300 261
User Manual
System setup
The system clock includes the capability to automatically switch to and from daylight
savings time.
5.1.3.1 Setting time/date and daylight savings from the HMI
Whenever clock is reset and data logging is enabled, the data log should
be cleared.
Tapchanger Type
3. Press the Right/Left arrow pushbuttons, as necessary, until the "System Clock"
screen is displayed.
4. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as necessary, until the "Set Date and Time" dialog
Set Date and Time
MM/DD/YY HH:MM:SS
Set Date and Time
MM/DD/YY HH:MM:SS C
The cursor will be positioned under the far left hand "Month"
element of the date. Utilizing the Up/Down arrow pushbuttons will
change the Month. Utilizing the Right/Left arrow pushbuttons will
move the cursor between each element of the date and time.
6. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons enter the desired Date and Time, then press the ENT
pushbutton.
7. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as necessary, until the "Daylight Savings" dialog
Daylight Savings
disable C
9. Utilizing the Up/Down arrow pushbuttons select "ENABLE", then press the ENT
pushbutton. The following will be displayed:
Daylight Savings
ENABLE
262 TCC300
User Manual
System setup
5.1.3.2 Setting date/time and daylight savings from TCC600
1. Select Utility/Set Date & Time from the TCC600® toolbar. TCC600 will display
a Warning regarding time stamped values. Select OK.
GUID-2C0D517B-47AA-4E8A-92A5-874A50C0B30B V1 EN
Figure 212: Set Date/Time Warning Dialog Screen
2. From the Set Control Date/Time dialog screen select either "Control Clock" or "PC
Clock".
TCC300 263
User Manual
System setup
GUID-7A1849CE-95E5-4103-91BB-61B5E03CE87C V1 EN
Figure 213: Set Control Date/Time Dialog Screen
3. Verify that the desired Daylight Saving setting is selected.

4. If desired select "Sync Time at Startup" and the desired "Allowable Time mismatch"
value.
5. Determine if the control is to be set to either "PC Clock" or "Control Clock", then
proceed as follows:
• If "PC Clock" was selected and the Date/Time of the PC is the desired time to
be set in the control, then select Save.
• If "Control Clock" was selected, input the desired Date/Time, then select Save.
TCC600 will respond with a Reset Demand and Energy warning screen.
264 TCC300
User Manual
System setup
GUID-92824E70-6A91-4395-AF31-BAFE0A04B540 V1 EN
Figure 214: Reset Demand and Energy Warning Dialog Screen
Whenever the clock is reset and data logging is enabled the data log
should be cleared.
6. Select OK to reset Demand Metering, Energy Metering, Drag Hands and Resettable
Operation Counter or Cancel which will not reset these parameters.
TCC600 will return to the Main Screen.
5.2 Oscillograph setup
The Oscillograph Recorder provides comprehensive data recording (voltage, current, and
status input/output signals) for all monitored waveforms. Oscillograph data can be
downloaded using the communications ports to any PC compatible personal computer
running the TCC600® Communications Software. Once downloaded, the waveform data
can be examined and printed using TapPlot® Analysis Software. The waveform data is
also available in COMTRADE file format. Oscillograph records are retained if power to
the control is interrupted.
The general information required to be input to complete the Oscillograph Setup includes:
• Number of Partitions – When untriggered, the recorder continuously records

waveform data, keeping the data in a buffer memory. The recorder's memory may be
partitioned into 1 to 16 partitions. When triggered, the time stamp is recorded, and the
recorder continues recording for a user-defined period. The snapshot of the waveform
is stored in memory for later retrieval using TapPlot Analysis Software.
• Samples/Cycle – The number of samples/cycle can be selected to either 16, 32 or 64
samples/cycle.
• Post-Trigger Delay – A post-trigger delay of 5% to 95% must be specified. After
triggering, the recorder will continue to store data for the programmed portion of the
TCC300 265
User Manual
System setup
total record before re-arming for the next record. For example, a setting of 80% will
result in a record with 20% pre trigger data, and 80% post-trigger data.
• Inputs and Outputs – The recorder can be triggered remotely through serial
communications using TCC600, or automatically, using programmed status signals.
Table 54: Recorder Partitions and Cycles for 16 Samples/Cycle

Number of partitions Cycles per partition
1 1365
2 910
3 682
4 546
5 455
6 390
7 341
8 303
9 273
10 248
11 227
12 210
13 195
14 182
15 170
16 160
5.2.1 Setting up the oscillograph recorder
Communication must be established with the target control for this

procedure. When not connected to the control, the Send selection does not
save the Oscillograph Recorder settings to an open file.
1. From the TCC600® Main Screen menu, select Setup/Oscillograph/Setup.

TCC600 will display the Oscillograph Setup dialog screen.
266 TCC300
User Manual
System setup
GUID-A53F1F0A-2EDF-4A7B-BE1D-3B5393FE92C7 V1 EN
Figure 215: Oscillograph Setup Dialog Screen
2. Select the Number of Partitions. The recorder's memory may be partitioned into 1
to 16 partitions. The Oscillograph Recorder memory buffer is fixed and contains
room for a finite number of cycles of recorded data. Consider Table 54 when
determining the number of Oscillograph records. The number of cycles of recorded
data is directly related to the number of records selected.
3. Select the number of Samples/Cycle. The number of Samples/Cycle can be selected
to either 16, 32 or 64 Samples/Cycle.
4. Select the Post Trigger Delay. A post - trigger delay of 5% to 95% must be
specified. After triggering, the recorder will continue to store data for the
programmed portion of the total record before re-arming for the next record. For
example, a setting of 80% will result in a record with 20% pre-trigger data, and 80%
post-trigger data.
5. Select the desired Pickup Trigger(s) and Dropout Trigger(s). The recorder can be
tr iggered remotely through serial communications using TCC600, or automatically,
using programmed status inputs or outputs.
screen.
7. Select OK. TCC600 will display a "Setpoints Successfully Written to Control"
TCC300 267
User Manual
System setup
Figure 216: Setpoints Successfully Written To The Control Confirmation

Screen
5.3 Sequence of events recorder
The Sequence of Events recorder provides comprehensive time tagged data recording of
the following parameters:
• Time Tag
• Local Voltage
• Source Voltage
• Frequency
• Tap Position
• Motor Current
• Load Current
• Counter Operation (presettable)
• Voltage Harmonics Values
• Current Harmonics Values
• Voltage Harmonics Status
• Current Harmonics Status
The total number of events that can be recorded is 132. Sequence of Events data can be
downloaded using the communications ports to any computer running the TCC600®
Communications Software. The Sequence of Events Recorder can be triggered by the
status change of any of the signals in Table 54 or manually by the user from TCC600.
Table 55: Sequence of Events Recorder Triggers
Sequence of Events Recorder Triggers State
Raise Command Initiated
Lower Command Initiated
VR Contact 1 True
VR Contact 2 True
268 TCC300
User Manual
System setup
Sequence of Events Recorder Triggers State

Force Lower (Runback) Initiated
Raise Tap Limit True
Lower Tap Limit True
Low Band Exceeded
High Band Exceeded
Low Voltage Limit True
High Voltage Limit True
Auto Inhibit True
Non-Sequential Exceeded
Reverse Power Detected
Peak Motor Current Exceeded
Average Motor Current Exceeded
Motor Current Duration Exceeded
Voltage Harmonics Exceeded
Current Harmonics Exceeded
CBEMA Event 1 True
CBEMA Event 2 True
CBEMA Event 3 True
CBEMA Event 4 True
VAr Bias Active
Seal-in Failure Alarm Active
Seal-in Failure Raise Block Active
Seal-in Failure Lower Block Active
Low Current Block Active
Motor Seal-in Input Detected
Neutral Input Detected
Counter Input Detected
Op Count Signal Exceeded
HMI Active True
Individual Tap Wear Alarm Active
Event Logic
Combinations of the trigger signals in Table 54 can be AND’ed and OR’ed to produce the
desired trigger logic. Figure 217 illustrates the trigger logic that can be applied.
TCC300 269
User Manual
System setup
Pickup
OR
Dropout
Edge Sensitive Trigger(s)
Start Sequence
Level Sensitive Trigger OR/AND of Events
Recorder
Pickup
AND
Level Sensitive Trigger(s)
Level Sensitive Trigger OR
Dropout
AND
Level Sensitive Trigger(s)
GUID-AB8771DF-9E8C-4442-9AF4-82C7E8C03AEC V1 EN
Figure 217: Sequence Of Events Recorder Trigger Logic
The first level of the Event Logic consists of an "AND" gate and an "OR" gate which uses
the trigger parameters in Table 54 as inputs. The output of the "AND" and "OR" gates are
passed to a logic gate that is user selectable as either an "AND" or "OR" gate. When the
logic is true, it triggers the Sequence of Events Recorder.
The event will be recorded in volatile SDRAM and transferred to non-volatile flash
memory every four cycles. There is a possibility that events can be lost in cases where the
control loses power in the middle of a storage cycle.
5.3.1 Setting up the sequence of events recorder

Pickup or Dropout for each trigger parameter may be selected to trigger the Sequence of
Events Recorder.
Communication must be established with the target control for this

procedure. When not connected to the control, the Save selection does not
save the Sequence of Event settings to the open file.
1. From the TCC600® Main Screen menu select Setup/Sequence of Events/Setup.

TCC600 will display the Sequence of Events Setup dialog screen.
270 TCC300
User Manual
System setup
GUID-BF519BAB-7DC5-410B-9F18-CD497208D5EE V1 EN
Figure 218: Sequence of Events Setup Dialog Screen
2. If an "OR" type trigger logic is desired, then select "Pickup Dropout Edge Sensitive".
TCC600 will display the "OR gate setup" dialog screen. Select the desired "OR gate
setup", Pickup and/or Dropout trigger parameters, and then select OK. TCC600 will
return to the Sequence of Events setup dialog screen.
TCC300 271
User Manual
System setup
GUID-7D753199-D1A2-4C2D-884A-CC02CF6834F9 V1 EN
Figure 219: Sequence of Events Pickup/Dropout Edge Sensitive OR Gate

Setup Dialog Screen
3. If an "AND" type trigger logic is desired, then select the AND "Pickup" or
"Dropout". TCC600 will display the applicable dialog screen. Select the desired
"AND gate setup" Pickup and/or Dropout trigger parameters, then select OK.
TCC600 will return to the Sequence of Events setup dialog screen.
272 TCC300
User Manual
System setup
GUID-EC49D1D9-D642-4A0E-8127-6388DD1A6A1C V1 EN
Figure 220: Sequence of Events Pickup Level Sensitive AND Gate Pickup
Setup Dialog Screen
TCC300 273
User Manual
System setup
Figure 221: Sequence of Events Dropout Level Sensitive AND Gate Dropout
Setup Dialog Screen
4. Select the desired logic gate OR/AND for the "OR" and "AND" gates, then select
Save. TCC600 will display a "Confirm Writing to Device" confirmation screen.

5.4 Wakeup screens
If the "Wake/EXIT" pushbutton is selected, then control will respond as follows:
274 TCC300
User Manual
System setup
• Pressing "EXIT" when User Lines are being displayed will initiate a cycling display
of the selected Wakeup parameters for a period of 15 minutes and then return to the
User Lines display.
• If no Wakeup screens are selected, then nothing will be displayed and the User Lines
will blink for a moment.
The Adapter Panel Drag Hand Reset switches only reset the Tap
position Drag Hands value.
• While cycling is in effect, when ENT is pressed on any demand metering value ("E"
displayed on screen), all demand metering Drag Hand parameters will be reset. This
is also true for all metering Drag Hand values when ENT is pressed on an energy
metering menu.
• The Wakeup stepped display can be stopped on the displayed parameter by pressing
EXIT. Press EXIT again to terminate the stepped parameter display and return to the
User Lines. The Wakeup screen values can be browsed by utilizing the Up and Down
arrow pushbuttons. In this mode, if the ENT pushbutton is pressed while on a demand
or energy metering value, it will only reset that individual Drag Hand value.
• The Wake screen cycles at a 3 second interval between parameters. While the wake
screen menu is cycling, if a parameter is missed while recording, press the up arrow
to display it again. This displays the previous parameter and then continues cycling
to the next parameter 3 seconds later. Pressing ENT stops the cycling and allows the
user to utilize the Up and Down Arrows to view the Wake screen parameters at a user
defined pace.
• When there is a Smart Flash SD Card present while in the Wakeup screen menu, an
additional Smart Flash SD Card menu item will be present. All Wakeup screen
parameters can be saved to the Smart Flash SD Card in *.csv format.
5.4.1 Selecting wakeup screen parameters
1. Select Setup/Wakeup Screens from the TCC600® toolbar. TCC600 will display
the "Wakeup Screen Menu Setup" dialog screen.
TCC300 275
User Manual
System setup
Figure 223: Wakeup Screen Menu Setup Dialog Screen
The order in which parameters are being displayed can be changed

by dragging and dropping items in the active metering window.
2. Select the Wakeup Screen parameters to be displayed by moving, (dragging and

dropping), each parameter from the "Disable Metering Items" to the "Active
Metering Items" list.
3. Select the Wakeup Screen parameters that are not to be displayed by moving
(dragging and dropping) those parameter from the "Active Metering Items" list to
the "Disable Metering Items" list.
screen.
5.5 Communication
The communication ports provide access to all features, including metering, software
updates, and programming of all functions. This is accomplished using a connection from
276 TCC300
User Manual
System setup
any WindowsTM computer running the TCC600® Communications Software or

SCADA communications software.
Using a PC, the operator has real‑time, remote access to all functions of the Digital
Tapchanger Control. The control can act as the monitoring point for all voltage, current,
and related power quantities. This simplifies operation while avoiding transducers and
multiple Remote Terminal Unit (RTU) analog inputs. The protocols implement
half‑duplex, two‑way communications. This allows all functions, which would otherwise
require the presence of an operator at the control, to be performed remotely.
Communication capabilities include:
• Interrogation and modification of setpoints

• Broadcast of commands, such as tapchange inhibit and voltage reduction (up to three
steps) to networked controls
• Recognition of alarm conditions, such as voltage extremes and excessive load
• Selective control of raise and lower tapchange operations
• Re-configuration of the control, such as a change to the demand integration time
period or a selection of different alarm parameters
TCC600 provides the means to enable or disable installed RS-232 and Bluetooth®
modules. This capability is provided by a communication options utility under the
Communication menu. Prompts to enable communication hardware are also contained in
the individual port setup menus.
Direct Connections
TCC600 supports direct communication (MODBUS® protocol) with a ABB Digital
Tapchanger Control using the applicable connector (USB cable) for the PC, Fiber Optic
communication using ST standard, two-wire RS‑485 or RS-232.
Protocols
The standard protocols included in the TCC300 are DNP3.0 and MODBUS. IEC 61850
is available as an option. The USB port uses MODBUS for local communications. The
optional Ethernet Port supports DNP over TCP/IP and UDP; MODBUS over TCP/IP and
UDP protocol and IEC 61850 over TCP/IP protocols simultaneously. The user must select
the protocol that is to be used with the TCC300 Tapchanger Control's RS485/Fiber Optic
Port.
Detailed descriptions of the data points used for the standard protocols are available from
ABB upon request, and are available for download from our website, www.abb.com.
Communication Access Security and Timeout

When Communication Access Security and Timeout is enabled it applies only when
MODBUS has been selected regardless of the physical interface. If enabled the user Level
TCC300 277
User Manual
System setup
Access Code must match either the Level 1 or Level 2 Access Codes in order to be granted
the access to control settings ascribed to each Level. If an invalid Access Level Code is
entered at the connection prompt, then read only access will be granted. TCC600 must be
closed for the timeout period specified (1 to 50,000 seconds) in order for any Access Code
changes to take effect when this feature is enabled.
5.5.1 Enabling communication access security and timeout from the

HMI
is present).
once. The unit will display the "Comm Settings" menu. If Memory Card is
displayed, then press the Right or Left arrow pushbutton, as necessary, until "Comm
Settings" is displayed.
3. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as necessary, until the "Comm Access Security"
menu item is displayed.
Comm Access Security disable C
5. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons select "ENABLE", then press the ENT pushbutton.
The desired Communication Access Security mode will be displayed.
Comm Access Security ENABLE or disable
6. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as necessary, until the "Comm Access Timeout"
Comm Access timeout 60 Sec C
8. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons enter the desired Comm Access timeout value, then
press the ENT pushbutton. The desired Comm Access timeout value will be
displayed.
5.5.2 Enabling communication access security and setting timeout

from TCC600
1. Select Communication/Setup/Communication Access Security from the

TCC600® toolbar. TCC600 will display the "Communication Access Security"
dialog screen.
278 TCC300
User Manual
System setup
GUID-779D2DA9-A591-4D74-8C45-ECE2F9F25B68 V1 EN
Figure 224: Communication Access Security Setup Dialog Screen
2. Select "ENABLE", then enter the desired Communication Access Timeout value
from 1 to 50,000 seconds.
3. Select "Save". TCC600 will display a "Setpoints Successfully Written to Control"
confirmation screen
5.6 Source address validation
When Source Address Validation is enabled it applies only when DNP3.0 Protocol has
been selected regardless of the physical interface. If enabled the client address must match
the address set by the user in the DNP Configuration file before accepting the message as
a valid one.
5.6.1 Enabling source address validation from the HMI
is present).
3. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as necessary, until the "Source Address
Validation" menu item is displayed.
Src Addr Validation disable C
5. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons select "ENABLE", then press the ENT pushbutton.
The desired Source Address Validation mode will be displayed.
TCC300 279
User Manual
System setup
5.6.2 Enabling source address validation from TCC600
1. Select Utility/DNP/Source Address Validation from the TCC600® toolbar.

TCC600 will display the "Source Address Validation" dialog screen.
GUID-660AD506-6883-4D19-A998-DA9FC6147C55 V1 EN
Figure 225: Source Address Validation Dialog Screen
2. Select "ENABLE", then select "Save". TCC600 will display a "Setpoints

Successfully Written to Control" confirmation screen.
5.7 Feeder and substation addressing
Each control has three addresses.
1. Communications address
2. Feeder address
3. Substation address
Any valid DNP command can be used to communicate with individual controls using the
Communications address. To address a group of controls using the Feeder and/or the
Substation addresses, a DNP command with no acknowledgment shall be used. For
example Direct Operate with NO acknowledgment (FC 06). If a command with
acknowledgment is sent by the Client, the control will accept the command but will not
reply with an acknowledgment.
All addresses range from 0 to 0xFFEF. For feeder and substation addresses, setting the
value to zero effectively Disables the corresponding address. It is important that there are
no duplicate addresses on any device on the network.
In the system depicted in Figure 226, there are three substations: S1, S2, and S3. There are
a total of 9 feeders, F1-F9, grouped as shown. Each feeder has 3 controls, one for each
phase. Each control will have 3 addresses assigned to it.
For example: control D1 on Feeder F4 in substation S2 will have the following.
280 TCC300
User Manual
System setup
1. Individual not duplicated communications address (0x212)

2. Feeder address = 0x4003
3. Substation address = 0x5001
In order to poll D1 on an individual basis address, 0x212 is used.
To invoke for example, voltage reduction individually on D1, use direct operate with or
without acknowledge for address 0x212 on the appropriate point.
To invoke voltage reduction on Feeder F4, use direct operate without acknowledge to
address 0x4003 instead of 3 different commands sent to D1, D2 and D3 individually.
Similarly, invoking voltage reduction on an entire substation requires a direct operate

command without acknowledge to be sent to that substation address e.g. substation S2
( address 0x5001).
TCC300 281
User Manual
System setup
GUID-52345AEC-272A-449B-ACDD-144AE3A075EA V1 EN
Figure 226: Multiple Client, Feeder and/or Substation Addressing
The same concept applies to network configuration.
282 TCC300
User Manual
System setup
GUID-475E7743-47C4-48FA-9C08-0916E33C9A46 V1 EN
Figure 227: Single Client, Feeder and/or Substation Addressing Network Connection
Ethernet use with Substation and Feeder Addresses

In order to use the Substation and Feeder addresses over ethernet, the user must send the
commands as mentioned above using DNP over UDP instead of TCP and must use
255.255.255.255 as the IP address to send to (the DNP Broadcast IP address).
TCC300 283
User Manual
System setup
5.7.1 Setting substation address from the HMI
is present).
3. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as necessary, until the "Substation Address"
Substation Address 0 C
When entering the digital values the display will automatically

paused.
5. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons enter the desired Substation Address, then press the
ENT pushbutton. The desired Substation Address will be displayed.
5.7.2 Setting feeder address from the HMI
is present).
3. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as necessary, until the "Feeder Address" menu
item is displayed.
Feeder Address 0
Feeder Address 0 C
284 TCC300
User Manual
System setup
When entering the digital values the display will automatically

paused.
6. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons enter the desired Feeder Address, then press the
ENT pushbutton. The desired Feeder Address will be displayed.
5.7.3 Setting communication addresses from TCC600
1. Select Communication/Setup/Change Address from the TCC600® toolbar.

TCC600 will display the "Change Address Warning" dialog screen.
GUID-AF9E62BF-79B7-4EEA-A49D-C9C78944C74F V1 EN
Figure 228: Change Address Warning Dialog Screen
2. Select Yes. TCC600 will display the "Change Communication Address" dialog
screen.
TCC300 285
User Manual
System setup
GUID-D872DE0E-459B-4CC0-94D6-33BE7D0F8761 V1 EN
Figure 229: Change Communication Address Dialog Screen
3. Enter the desired Communication, Substation or Feeder address, then select "Save".
TCC600 will display the "Save to Device" confirmation screen.
4. Select "OK". TCC600 will display the "Setpoints Successfully Written to Control"
5.8 Automatic mode blocking
The Automatic Mode Blocking feature will cause the control to respond in a predefined
manner to either a serial communication interruption or power loss to the control. The
Control will respond as follows:
• If Automatic control has been Blocked using TCC600, then Automatic Control will
remain Blocked if serial communication is disrupted or lost.
• If Automatic Control has been Blocked using TCC600, and the Save Comm Block at
Power Off selection is Save, then the Automatic Control Block will be reinstated at
power up.
• If Automatic Control has been Blocked using TCC600, and the Save Comm Block at
Power Off selection is Don’t Save, then the Automatic Control Block will not be
reinstated at power up.
286 TCC300
User Manual
System setup
5.8.1 Comm Block Auto

Comm Block Auto allows the state of the "Block Auto Operation" communication
command to be saved or not saved when power has been lost. The default setting is
"DON'T SAVE".
The Comm Block Auto at power off setting requires the "Auto/Manual
Switch Type" in the configuration to be set to either "None" or "Toggle".
5.8.1.1 Setting Comm Block Auto from the HMI
Tapchanger Type
3. Press the Right or Left arrow pushbutton, as necessary, to navigate to the
"Nameplate" menu.
4. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as necessary, until "Comm Block Auto" is
displayed.
Comm Block auto DON'T SAVE C
6. Utilizing the Up/Down arrow pushbuttons, select "DON'T SAVE or SAVE", then
press the ENT pushbutton. The selected setting will be displayed.
5.8.1.2 Setting Comm Block Auto at power off from TCC600
The Comm Block Auto at Power Off setting requires the "Auto/Manual
Switch Type" in the configuration to be set to either "None" or "Toggle".
1. Select Setup/Configuration from the TCC600® toolbar. TCC600 will display the
"Configuration" dialog screen.
TCC300 287
User Manual
System setup
GUID-15173A35-BC1F-46AF-9302-D95A9481CFC8 V1 EN
Figure 230: Configuration (Save Comm Block at Power Off) Dialog Screen
2. Verify that the Auto/Manual Switch Type is set to either "None" or "Toggle". From
the "Save Comm Block at Power Off" section, select either "Don't Save" or "Save",
then select "Save". TCC600 will display the "Save to Device Confirmation Screen".
3. Select "OK". TCC600 will briefly display the "Setpoints successfully written to the
control" confirmation screen.
5.8.2 SCAMP initialize on power up

When Last Save is selected, the SCAMP switch is configured in such a way that upon the
control performing a cold power up, the state of the SCAMP switch is initialized to the last
saved state of the SCAMP switch prior to the control powering off.
288 TCC300
User Manual
System setup
For example, if prior to powering off the control, the SCAMP switch was in Manual, then
when the control is powered back on the control will initially go back to the Manual state
and vice versa. Now when Auto Mode is selected, the control always initializes into the
Auto Mode after powering up regardless of the saved state of the control prior to powering
off.
The "Auto/Manual Switch Type" setting in configuration must be set to

"SCAMP" to effect this setting change.
5.8.2.1 Setting SCAMP initialize on power up from the HMI
Tapchanger Type
"Nameplate" menu.
4. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as necessary, until "SCAMP Init Pwrup" is
displayed.
Scamp Init Pwrup Last Save C
6. Utilizing the Up/Down arrow pushbuttons, select "Last Save or Auto Mode", then
5.8.2.2 Setting SCAMP initialize on power up from TCC600
The "Auto/Manual Switch Type" setting in configuration must be set to

"SCAMP" to effect this setting change.
1. Select Setup/Configuration from the TCC600® toolbar. TCC600 will display the
TCC300 289
User Manual
System setup
GUID-24F1910C-CCF1-4CC0-8382-3B3E7A215415 V1 EN
Figure 232: Configuration (SCAMP Initialize on Power Up) Dialog Screen
2. Verify that the Auto/Manual Switch Type is set to "SCAMP". From the "SCAMP
Initialize on Power Up" section, select either "Auto Mode" or "Last Save", then
select "Save". TCC600 will display the "Save to Device Confirmation Screen".
3. Select "OK". TCC600 will briefly display the "Setpoints successfully written to the
control" confirmation screen.
5.9 Optional Ethernet port
The optional Ethernet Port is available through an RJ45 (10/100 Base-T) or a (100 Base-
Fx) Fiber Optic interface for ethernet communication to the TCC300. The port supports
up to 17 concurrent connections. The maximum number of allowed DNP connections is
five. The maximum number of MODBUS® connections is eight. When IEC 61850 is
290 TCC300
User Manual
System setup
purchased the maximum number of IEC 61850 connections is four. The port supports
DHCP protocol and also allows manual configuration of the Ethernet port. MODBUS
protocol "Port Number" and DNP Protocol "Port Number" are required for manual
configuration.
If no communication activity is detected on a previously open ethernet socket, for the

amount of time specified by the "Keepalive Time" setting, the control will then close the
socket and make it available for future connection.
Keepalive Time applies only to Ethernet communication.
5.9.1 Configuring Ethernet port from TCC600
Manual configuration of the Ethernet Port (not enabling DHCP Protocol)

requires that the IP Address, Net Mask and Gateway settings be obtained
from the System Administrator.
1. Ensure the following conditions exist:

• The control is energized
• TCC600® is installed on the host computer
• The host computer is physically connected to the target control through either
a USB, Serial Port or Modem connection
• The host computer and the control are physically connected to the target
Ethernet network
3. Select Connect/USB, Com Port or Modem from the Connect dropdown menu.
TCC600 will display the appropriate Connection Dialog Screen.
4. Enter a valid Level 2 Access Code (if enabled), then select Connect, TCC600 will
attempt to connect to the target control.
5. If TCC600 returns a Failed to Connect Error screen, repeat Steps 3 and 4.
6. Level 2 Access if enabled is necessary to complete the Ethernet Port configuration.
If an invalid Access Code was entered, TCC600 will display the connected version
of the TCC600 main screen with either "Read-Only" or "Level 1" access. Disconnect
from the control and repeat Step 4.
7. If Level Access is not active or a valid Level 2 Access Code was entered, TCC600
will briefly display the "Successfully Connected Level 2" screen and then display
the connected version of the TCC600 Main Screen with Level 2 Access.
8. From the Communication drop-down menu, select Setup/Ethernet Settings.
TCC600 will then display the Setup Ethernet dialog screen.
TCC300 291
User Manual
System setup
Figure 234: Setup Ethernet Dialog Screen
9. If the Ethernet network that the target control is connected to supports DHCP
Protocol, then perform the following:
292 TCC300
User Manual
System setup
9.1. From the Setup Ethernet dialog screen select DHCP Protocol "Enable"
9.2. Select the desired "Keepalive Time" duration.
9.3. Select "Save" to save the settings to the target control.
9.4. Go to Step 11.
10. If the Ethernet network that the target control is connected to does not support DHCP
Protocol, or manual configuration is desired, perform the following:
10.1. Select DHCP Protocol "Disable".
10.2. Enter the IP Address, Net Mask, Gateway and the applicable MODBUS® or
DNP3.0 Port settings.
10.3. Select the desired "Keepalive Time" duration.
10.4. Select "Save" to save the settings to the target control. TCC600 will display a
"Setpoints Successfully Written to Control" confirmation screen.
11. If the Network MODBUS Port address is not "502" or the DNP Port address is not
"20000", set these parameters to match the target network settings.
The Ethernet option for the control is now enabled. Proceed to connect to the target control
through the Ethernet connection and enable Source Address Validation if desired.
5.9.2 Configuring network time synchronization from TCC600
Network Time Synchronization requires the SNTP (Simple Network

Time Protocol) "Server Name" or "Server IP Address" to be known and
also the Control Location "Time Zone".
1. From the Communication drop-down menu, select Setup/Ethernet Settings.

TCC600® will then display the "Setup Ethernet" dialog screen.
TCC300 293
User Manual
System setup
Figure 235: Setup Ethernet Dialog Screen
2. From the "SNTP Server" section of the dialog screen proceed as follows:
2.1. If the Server Name is known, enter the Server Name and then select the
magnified glass icon. TCC600 will search for the corresponding IP Address.
2.2. If the server IP Address is known, enter the IP Address.
3. Select the Time Zone that the control resides in, then select "Save". TCC600 will
display a "Setpoints Successfully Written to Control" Confirmation Screen.
294 TCC300
User Manual
System setup
5.9.3 Configuring the control’s Ethernet port from the HMI for use on
a network that supports DHCP protocol
is present).
until "Ethernet" is displayed.
3. Press the Down arrow pushbutton once. The following will be displayed.
DHCP Enable disable
DHCP Enable disable C
5. Utilizing the Up/Down arrow pushbuttons select ENABLE, then press the ENT
pushbutton. The following will be displayed.
DHCP Enable ENABLE
6. The control is now addressable from TCC600® over the target network.
• If the network MODBUS® Port address is not "502" or the DNP Port address
is not "20000", proceed to setting the MODBUS Port and DNP Port.
• Enable Source Address Validation if desired.
5.9.4 Configuring the control’s Ethernet port from the HMI for use on
a network that does not support DHCP protocol
is present).
DHCP Enable disable
DHCP Enable disable C
5. Utilizing the Up/Down arrow pushbuttons, select "disable", then press the ENT
DHCP Enable disable
TCC300 295
User Manual
System setup
IP Address
0.0.0.0
IP Address
0.0.0.0 C
8. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons input the desired IP Address, then press the ENT
pushbutton, the desired IP Address will be displayed.
9. Follow the procedure above to enter the desired:
• Net Mask
• Gateway
Auto negotiation is an Ethernet procedure by which two connected

devices choose common transmission parameters, such as speed and
duplex mode. In this process, the connected devices first share their
capabilities as for these parameters and then choose the fastest
transmission mode they both support.
10. If the control is connected to a host device which is capable of 10 and 100 mbps
transmission rates and handles both half or full duplex modes, the Ethernet port is
now configured to support network communications with the MODBUS® port and
DNP port default values. If the network requires specific MODBUS port and DNP
port settings, proceed to setting the MODBUS and DNP ports from the HMI.
Auto Negotiation must be disabled if using Fiber Ethernet.
11. If a fixed speed of 100 mbps is desired as in the case of Fiber Optic mode, utilize the
Up/Down arrow pushbuttons to navigate to the "Auto Negotiation" menu item.
Auto Negotiation ENABLE C
13. Utilizing the Up/Down arrow pushbuttons select "disable", then press the ENT
Auto Negotiation disable
The Ethernet port is now configured to support network communications with the
MODBUS port, DNP port, and Keepalive Time default values. If the network requires
specific MODBUS port and DNP port settings, proceed to setting the MODBUS and DNP
ports from the HMI. If a Keepalive Time duration other than 7200 seconds is desired,
proceed to setting the Ethernet keepalive time from the HMI.
Enable Source Address Validation if desired.
296 TCC300
User Manual
System setup
5.9.5 Setting the MODBUS and DNP ports from the HMI
is present).
3. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as necessary, until the "Enter MODBUS Port"
Enter Modbus Port 502 C
5. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons enter the desired MODBUS® port address, then
press the ENT pushbutton. The desired MODBUS port address will be displayed.
Enter DNP Port 20000
Enter DNP Port 20000 C
8. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons, input the desired DNP Port address, press the ENT
pushbutton, the desired DNP Port address will be displayed.
The control is no w addressable from TCC600® over the network. Ensure that the
MODBUS and DNP Port values are the same as the values manually set when
attempting to communicate with the control from TCC600.
5.9.6 Setting the Ethernet keepalive time from the HMI
is present).
3. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as necessary, until the "Keepalive time" menu
item is displayed.
Keepalive time 7200 sec C
5. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons enter the desired Keepalive Time value, then press
the ENT pushbutton. The desired Keepalive Time value will be displayed.
TCC300 297
User Manual
System setup
5.10 RS-485/Fiber-optic port
TCC300 COM Port can be selected for two different configurations: RS‑485 or Fiber
Optics.
5.10.1 Configuring RS-485/fiber-optic port from the HMI

This procedure provides the steps necessary to setup all RS-485 and Fiber Optic
parameters. Parameter definitions and the default value (default value) for each parameter
are included below:
• Comm Protocol – Allows selection between standard protocols, DNP 3.0 or

MODBUS®. (DNP3.0)
• Comm Address – Configures a three-digit numerical address, from 1 to 200, for
remote communications. (1)
• Baud Rate – Selects baud rate for COM1, located on the top of the control. (9600)
• Parity – None, odd or even parity is available. (NONE)
• Stop Bits – One or two stop bits are available. (ONE STOPBIT)
• Sync Time – This time delay improves robust operation when communication lines
are intermittent. Communication dead-sync time is the time that the control will wait
from the last received character and continue without attempting to resynchronize. (2
ms)
• Echo/Repeat – Selects Echo/Repeat on/off as determined by the user. Selector switch
is located on side of unit adjacent to the Fiber Optic connection and is accessed
through the slot in the cover. Switch position towards the front of the control is the off
position. (OFF)
is present).
3. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as necessary, until "Comm1 Port Type" is
displayed.
Comm1 Port Type RS485 C
5. Utilizing the Up/Down arrow pushbuttons select "RS485 or FIBER", then press the
ENT pushbutton. The selected port type will be displayed.
298 TCC300
User Manual
System setup
• Comm Protocol
• Comm Address
• Baud Rate
• Parity
• Stop Bits
• Sync Time
7. The RS‑485 or Fiber Optic Port is now available for communications.
8. If DNP3.0 was selected as the Comm Protocol and Source Address Validation is
required, proceed to Enabling Source Address Validation.
5.10.2 Configuring RS-485/fiber-optic port from TCC600
1. Select Communication/Setup/Comm Port from the TCC600® toolbar. TCC600 will

display the "Setup Comm Port" dialog screen.
GUID-46276A35-BF4F-47FB-AD5B-DFFFEF5AF5C6 V1 EN
Figure 236: Setup Comm Port Dialog Scree
2. Select Comm Port Type "RS-485" or "Fiber".

3. If Echo/Repeat is required then Enable Echo/Repeat by placing the Echo/Repeat on/
off switch located adjacent to the Fiber connection on the side of the control in the
on position towards the rear of the control.
4. Enter the desired settings for the following parameters:
• Protocol
• Baud Rate
• Parity
TCC300 299
User Manual
System setup
• Stop Bits
• Sync Time
• TX Delay
screen.
7. If DNP3.0 was selected in Step 4 and Source Address Validation is desired, proceed
to enabling Source Address Validation.
5.11 RS-232 port
5.11.1 Configuring RS-232 port from the HMI

This procedure provides the steps necessary to setup all RS-232 Port parameters.
Parameter definitions and the default value (default value) for each parameter are included
below:
• Comm Protocol – Allows selection between standard protocols, DNP 3.0 or

MODBUS®. (MODBUS)
• Baud Rate – Selects baud rate for COM2, located on the top of the control. (115,200)
• Parity – None, odd or even parity is available. (NONE)
• Stop Bits – One or two stop bits are available. (TWO STOPBITS)
• Sync Time – This time delay improves robust operation when communication lines
are intermittent. Communication dead-sync time is the time that the control will wait
from the last received character and continue without attempting to re-synchronize.
(50 ms)
is present).
until "RS232" is displayed.
3. Press the Down arrow pushbutton once. The unit will display the following:
Protocol MODBUS
Protocol MODBUS C
300 TCC300
User Manual
System setup
5. Utilizing the Up/Down arrow pushbuttons, select "DNP3.0 or MODBUS®", then

press the ENT pushbutton. The selected protocol will be displayed.
• Baud Rate
• Parity
• Stop Bits
• Sync Time
7. If DNP3.0 was selected as the Protocol and Source Address Validation is desired,
proceed to enabling Source Address Validation.
5.11.2 Configuring RS-232 port from TCC600
1. Select Communication/Setup/RS232 Comm Port from the TCC600® toolbar.

TCC600 will then display the Setup RS-232 Comm Port dialog screen.
GUID-A989FBA4-22E9-46A4-8F03-7C399A6442F1 V1 EN
Figure 237: Setup RS-232 Comm Port Dialog Screen

• Protocol
• Baud Rate
• Parity
• Stop Bits
• Sync Time
screen.
TCC300 301
User Manual
System setup
The RS-232 option for the control is now enabled. Proceed to connect to the target
control through the RS-232 connection.
5.12 Installation of modems
Using TCC600® to interrogate, set or monitor the control using a modem requires both a
remote modem connected at the controls location and a local modem connected to the
computer with TCC600 installed.
Any compatible modem may be used; however, the unit only

communicates at 1200 to 9600 baud.
In order to use TCC600 to communicate with the control using a modem, the following
must be provided with the control:
• An external modem (1200 baud or higher), capable of understanding standard AT

commands.
• Serial modem cable with 9-pin connector for the control and the applicable connector
for the modem.
Similarly, the computer running TCC600 must also have access to a compatible internal
or external modem.
5.12.1 Connecting the PC modem
1. If the computer has an external modem, then use a standard straight-through RS‑232
modem cable (M-3933) to connect the computer to the modem.
2. If the computer has an internal modem, then refer to the modem’s instruction book
to determine which communications port should be selected.
3. Verify that the modem is attached to (if external) or assigned to (if internal) the same
serial port as assigned in TCC600. While TCC600 can use any of the 255 serial ports
(COM1 through COM255), most computers support only COM1 and COM2.
4. Connect the modem to a telephone line, then energize the modem.
5.12.2 Initializing the PC modem from TCC600
1. Verify that the modem is connected as described in "Connecting the PC Modem".

2. Open TCC600, then select the Connect/Modem menu item.
3. TCC600 will display the Modem Connection Dialog screen.
302 TCC300
User Manual
System setup
GUID-4BD1BA3D-8354-401B-A129-BBC6A633DC1E V1 EN
Figure 238: Modem Connection Dialog Screen
4. Enter the required information in the Modem Settings section of the screen, then
select Connect.
Table 56: Command buttons
Button Description
Add Allows you to review and change the user lines (unit
identifier), phone number, and communication
address of a selected entry.
Remove Deletes a selected entry.
Save Saves any changes to the displayed information.
Connect Dials the entry selected from the directory.
Cancel Ends modem communication, allowing the user to
dial again.
5.12.3 Connecting the local modem to the control
Setup of the modem attached to the control may be slightly complicated. It involves
programming parameters (using the AT command set), and storing this profile in the
modem’s nonvolatile memory.
TCC300 303
User Manual
System setup
After programming, the modem will power up in the proper state for communicating with
the control. Programming may be accomplished by using the "Bring Up Terminal
Window after dialing" selection. Refer to your modem manual for further information.
GUID-E5C7D97C-2A00-4407-B6D0-AC8C96E749D9 V1 EN
Figure 239: Terminal Window
The control does not issue or understand any modem commands. It will
not adjust the baud rate and should be considered a "dumb" peripheral. It
communicates with 1 start, 8 data, and 0, 1 or 2 stop bits.
1. Connect the unit to an external modem by attaching a standard RS-232 modem cable
to the appropriate serial communications port on both the unit and the modem.
2. Connect the modem to a telephone line, then energize the modem.
The modem attached to the control must have the following AT command configuration:
304 TCC300
User Manual
System setup
• E0 No Echo
• Q1 Don’t return result code
• &D3 On to OFF DTR, hangup and reset
• &S0 DSR always on
• &C1 DCD ON when detected
• S0=2 Answer on second ring
The following commands may also be required at the modem:
• &Q6 Constant DTE to DCE

• N0 Answer only at specified speed
• W Disable serial data rate adjust
• \Q3 Bidirectional RTS/CTS relay
• &B1 Fixed serial port rate
• S37 Desired line connection speed
When connected to another terminal device, the Terminal Window allows the user to send
messages or commands. Outgoing communications are displayed in the top pane and
incoming messages are displayed in the bottom two panes, in ASCII text and HEX format.
There are some variations in the AT commands supported by modem manufacturers.

Refer to the hardware user documentation for a list of supported AT commands and
direction on issuing these commands.
5.13 Optional bluetooth
The Bluetooth® option enables wireless access to the TCC300. Utilizing the Bluetooth
wireless feature the user is able to configure the control, read status and metering values,
as well as change setpoints. The following lists the initialization scheme and setpoint
options available for Bluetooth.
The TCC300 provides generic serial Bluetooth service. The user must select the generic
serial service among any other listed services, if the user’s Bluetooth device doesn’t
automatically recognize the available service.
The following features on the TCC300 are available to the user:
• Enable/Disable – The user can enable or disable Bluetooth functionality.

• Reset – The Bluetooth can be reset to ABB factory default values.
• Authentication – The device can be authenticated for security purposes, if enabled,
the user can select a passkey to connect to the device.
• Passkey – If authentication is enabled, the customer can assign up to a maximum of
16 alphanumeric characters as a passkey.
TCC300 305
User Manual
System setup
• Friendly Name – The user can give the Bluetooth his/her preferred name, which can
be a maximum of 20 characters, including alphanumeric as well as the '_' and '-'
characters.
• Mode – The following configurations are available for the Bluetooth Mode:
• Mode 0, the device is discoverable and connectable to any client station.
• Mode 1, the device is non‑discoverable but it is connectable to any client station
that knows the control Bluetooth device address indicated under "Control BT
Device" in the HMI menu.
• Protocol – MODBUS or DNP.
Bluetooth Module Initialization
For first time Bluetooth® module use, the Bluetooth module needs to be
reset to ensure that the Bluetooth module functions according to the ABB
values.
Following a control power cycle, the TCC300 hardware is checked for Bluetooth by
sending an AT command and waiting for an ‘OK’ response. If no response is received, a
‘Bluetooth not present’ message will be displayed on the HMI. If an ‘ERROR’ message
is received, Bluetooth is reset to factory default values and the hardware is checked again.
The Bluetooth device information, i.e., BD address, friendly name, mode of device,
internal operation state and status of authentication and encryption features will be
retrieved.
The ABB default values for device information are:
• Friendly Name – TCC300-Serial Number

• Mode of Device – Mode0
• Internal operation status – Standby
• Authentication: None
• Encryption: None
The retrieved Bluetooth device information is compared to the factory defaults, if they are
not the same; they are forced to the default values. If internal operation status is not
standby, an AT+BTCANCEL command is issued to force standby status. The mode is set
by issuing a AT+BTMODE command. The friendly name is set by AT+BTNAME. The
device is now in connectable mode, hence the user can use the Bluetooth device to connect
to the TCC300 using the generic serial service.
306 TCC300
User Manual
System setup
5.13.1 Configuring bluetooth from the HMI

In order to setup the Bluetooth feature on the TCC300 from the HMI the following
conditions must be present:
• The Bluetooth Factory Option must be enabled on the control

• The Bluetooth Status on the control must be "Present" and "Connectable"
To verify that these conditions are present on the control, observe the display while
applying power to the control. The following sequence of messages will be displayed
during the control boot up:
Factory Options BLUETOOTH
Bluetooth Status BLUETOOTH PRESENT
Bluetooth Status CONNECTABLE
If the unit display messages are consistent with the above, the unit is physically ready to
be setup for wireless communication.
If it becomes necessary to reset the Bluetooth module during the

performance of this procedure, navigate to the Bluetooth Reset menu item
and select ENT.
is present).
until "Bluetooth" is displayed.
3. Press the Down arrow pushbutton once. The unit will display the following:
Bluetooth Enable disable
Bluetooth Enable disable C
5. Utilizing the Up/Down arrow pushbuttons, select "ENABLE", then press the ENT
Bluetooth Enable ENABLE
6. Press the Up/Down arrow pushbutton, as necessary, until the "Bluetooth Protocol"
TCC300 307
User Manual
System setup
Bluetooth Protocol MODBUS C
8. Utilizing the Up/Down arrow pushbuttons select "MODBUS® or DNP3.0", then
press the ENT pushbutton. The selected Protocol setting will be displayed.
9. Press the Up/Down arrow pushbutton, as necessary, until the "Authentication" menu
item is displayed.
10. If "Authentication" is to be ENABLED, press the ENT pushbutton. If prompted,
enter a valid Level 2 Access Code. The following will be displayed:
Authentication disable C
11. Utilizing the Up/Down arrow pushbuttons select "ENABLE", then press the ENT
Please Enter Passkey _
12. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons enter the desired Passkey (up to 16 characters), then
press ENT. The following sequence of screens will be displayed:
Please Enter Passkey Please -WAIT-
Please Enter Passkey -DONE-
Authentication ENABLE
13. Press the Up/Down arrow pushbutton, as necessary, until the "Friendly Name" menu
item is displayed.
Enter New Name –
15. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons, enter the desired Friendly Name value (up to 21
characters), then press the ENT pushbutton. The Friendly Name that was entered
will be displayed.
The Bluetooth® "Device Address" is available by pressing the Down arrow once.
16. Press the Up/Down arrow pushbutton, as necessary, until the "Bluetooth Mode"
Bluetooth Mode Mode0 C
18. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons, select the desired Bluetooth Mode (0 or 1), then
press the "ENT" pushbutton. The selected Bluetooth Mode will be displayed.
The Bluetooth feature is now available for use.
19. If DNP3.0 was selected as the protocol and Source Address Validation is desired,
proceed to enabling Source Address Validation.
5.13.2 Configuring bluetooth from TCC600

In order to setup the Bluetooth feature on the TCC300, the following conditions must be
present:
308 TCC300
User Manual
System setup
• The Bluetooth Factory Option must be enabled on the control

• The Bluetooth Status on the control must be "Present" and "Connectable"
To verify that these conditions are present on the control, observe the display while
applying power to the control. The following sequence of messages will be displayed
during the control bootup:
Factory Options BLUETOOTH
Bluetooth Status BLUETOOTH PRESENT
Bluetooth Status CONNECTABLE
If the unit HMI display messages are consistent with the above, the unit is physically ready
to be setup for wireless communication.
If it becomes necessary to reset the Bluetooth module during the

performance of this procedure, see Resetting bluetooth module TCC600.
1. Select Communication/Setup/Bluetooth Settings from the TCC600 toolbar.

Depending on the status of the Bluetooth option in the control, TCC600 will respond
as follows:
• If the Bluetooth option is disabled in the control, TCC600 will display the
Bluetooth Hardware option dialog screen.
• If the Bluetooth option is enabled in the control, TCC600 will display the
Bluetooth Information dialog screen.
2. If the Bluetooth Hardware option dialog screen is displayed, proceed as follows:
2.1. If the Bluetooth hardware is present, then select "OK" to enable. TCC600 will
then display the Bluetooth Information dialog screen. Go to Step 3.
2.2. If the Bluetooth hardware is not present, then select "Cancel". TCC600 will
return to the Main screen.
TCC300 309
User Manual
System setup
GUID-2B47F402-AABC-4DA4-83F2-95199D7DDB12 V1 EN
Figure 240: Bluetooth Hardware Option Dialog Screen
GUID-1D3DDB88-E2FE-49A3-BFF4-ECFEC0D0ABBA V1 EN
Figure 241: Bluetooth Information Dialog Screen

• Protocol (MODBUS® or DNP3.0)
• Mode (0 or 1)
• Friendly Name (20 characters max)
• Bluetooth (Enable/Disable)
• Authentication (Enable or Disable)
• Set Password (16 characters max) if Authentication is "Enabled"
4. Select Save. TCC600 will display a "Setpoints Successfully Written to Control"
5. Verify that removing power to the control will not cause upset operation conditions
on the control.
6. Remove power to the control, and then reapply power to the control. The Bluetooth
f eature is now available for use. Consult the Bluetooth wireless device
310 TCC300
User Manual
System setup
documentation that is to be used to communicate with the TCC300 for setup

information.
5.13.3 Setting up bluetooth MODE1 from TCC600

When the control’s Bluetooth module is set to MODE1, the only way to connect to the
control is to use the Secure Non-Discoverable connection method.
1. Select Connect/Bluetooth from the TCC600® toolbar. TCC600 will display the
"Secure Bluetooth" dialog screen.
GUID-A32416BD-A527-4BAA-9417-2C35FBE8C034 V1 EN
Figure 242: Secure Bluetooth Setup Screen
2. Enter the Control Name, the control MAC Address, Pass Key if needed and the
Device Address. The user can create a Bluetooth session and save it to an address
book. The session must contain a name unique to the address book, the MAC
address, Pass Key and Device address.
5.13.4 Resetting bluetooth module from the HMI

The Bluetooth Module can be reset to ABB factory values if necessary.
is present).
TCC300 311
User Manual
System setup
3. Press the Down arrow pushbutton as necessary to navigate to the "Bluetooth Reset"
menu item.
CONFIRM PRESS ENTER
Cancel press EXIT.
Bluetooth Reset Resetting -WAIT-
Bluetooth Reset -DONE-
5.13.5 Resetting bluetooth module from TCC600

The Bluetooth Module can be reset to ABB factory values if necessary.
1. Select Communication/Setup/Bluetooth Settings from the TCC600® toolbar.

TCC600 will display the "Bluetooth Information" dialog screen.
2. Select "Reset Control Bluetooth Module". TCC600 will respond with a "Bluetooth
Reset Command Sent Successfully" confirmation screen.
GUID-B59A1423-4505-47E5-AAFD-45DAB56390F7 V1 EN
Figure 243: Bluetooth Reset Command Sent Confirmation Screen
3. Select "OK". TCC600 will send the "reset" command to the control and display a
"Waiting for Bluetooth to Reset" status screen.
312 TCC300
User Manual
System setup
GUID-84762874-30DA-4C8B-B8C6-AEDBECE1E8B2 V1 EN
Figure 244: Bluetooth Reset Status Screen
When the Bluetooth Module has been reset, TCC600 will display "Bluetooth has
been reset successfully" message.
GUID-44ED3D36-C5DD-47C8-B7A3-FD9C54909126 V1 EN
Figure 245: Bluetooth Reset Confirmation Screen
4. Select "OK". TCC600 will return to the "Bluetooth Information" Dialog Screen.
5.13.6 Resetting bluetooth passkey from the HMI

The Bluetooth Passkey can be changed or reset to default conditions (no Passkey and
Authentication Disabled) if necessary.
is present).
3. Press the Down arrow pushbutton as necessary to navigate to the "Bluetooth Pass
Reset" menu item.
TCC300 313
User Manual
System setup
Confirm press ENTER

Cancel press EXIT.
Bluetooth Pass Reset Resetting -WAIT-
Cancel press EXIT.
Bluetooth Pass Reset Ready Press ENTER
The Passkey is now set to NONE and Authentication is disabled.
6. To assign a NEW Passkey, press the Up/Down arrow pushbutton, as necessary, until
the "Authentication" menu item is displayed.
Authentication disable C
8. Utilizing the Up/Down arrow pusbuttons select "ENABLE", then press the ENT
pushbutton. The following will be displayed:
Please Enter Passkey _
9. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons enter the desired Passkey (up to 16 characters), then
press ENT. The following sequence of screens will be displayed:
Bluetooth Pass Reset Resetting -WAIT-
Bluetooth Pass Reset -DONE-
Bluetooth Pass Reset Ready Press ENTER
5.13.7 Resetting bluetooth passkey from TCC600

The Bluetooth Passkey can be reset if necessary.
1. Select Communication/Setup/Bluetooth Settings from the TCC600® toolbar.

TCC600 will display the "Bluetooth Information" dialog screen.
2. Select "Set Password". TCC600 will display the "Bluetooth Authentication
Password" dialog screen.
GUID-16FCDC4F-5A98-40AD-90E8-2DEB5412D45C V1 EN
Figure 246: Bluetooth Authentication Password Dialog Screen
3. Enter the "Old" Password and then enter the desired "New" Password (up to 16
characters).
314 TCC300
User Manual
System setup

screen.
5. Select OK. TCC600 will display a "New Password written successfully"
GUID-06B8C957-A062-4670-8934-7FFD9E7D556F V1 EN
Figure 247: New Bluetooth Password Written Successfully Screen
6. Select OK. TCC600 will return to the "Bluetooth Information" Dialog screen.
5.14 SCADA heartbeat
The purpose of the SCADA HeartBeat feature is to have sets of settings for the control and
switch between these settings sets based on the presence or absence of SCADA
communications to the control.
In order to determine if the SCADA communications is present a HeartBeat detection

algorithm is implemented.
There are four different types of SCADA HeartBeat modes:
• SCADA HeartBeat for transformer control applications (LTC)

• SCADA HeartBeat for regulator control applications (Regulator)
• SCADA HeartBeat for Profile Switching
• Manual HeartBeat Mode
The LTC, Regulator and Profile Switching have to be selected using TCC600®
Communications software or from the HMI, for these modes to be operational. But the
Manual HeartBeat Mode does not need to be selected for operation.
SCADA HeartBeat for LTC and Regulator

SCADA HeartBeat, when enabled, provides an additional set of control settings called
HeartBeat DNP points (HBBandcenter (Forward), HBBandwidth (Forward), etc), that are
only accessible through communications utilizing the DNP protocol. Although LTC and
Regulator modes are mutually inclusive (meaning if one of the options is selected, the
TCC300 315
User Manual
System setup
other selection is also available), the selection is still required due to a difference in the
physical input requirement. In LTC mode, the non-sequential input is used as a counter
input, and hence an object 10 point "Non-Sequential" is made available to activate non
sequential through communication. When SCADA HeartBeat is active, HeartBeat DNP
points are used as a second set of settings.
The HeartBeat DNP points (applicable only for forward power settings) include:
• Bandcenter
• Bandwidth
• Time Delay
• LDC R
• LDC X
• Block Lower Voltage
• Block Raise Voltage
• Intertap Time Delay
• Inverse Time Delay
• HeartBeat Timer Period
• Voltage Reduction 1
As the TCC300 has 4 different setpoint profiles to choose from, when the SCADA
HeartBeat is inactive, the previously selected active profile is used. In order to determine
the actively used settings a third group of DNP points called the Active DNP points
("Active Bandcenter (Forward)", "Active Bandwidth (Forward)" etc), can be used.
Reading the Active DNP points gives the current used settings, but writing always
changes the selected Active Profile.
The SCADA HeartBeat DNP3.0 Protocol sequence for LTC and Regulator are provided
in Figure 248. Also, Object 40 point "Write HB" is mapped by default to Point 195,
"HeartBeat Timer" mapped to 159, "Direct HeartBeat" mapped to 211 and "VRed Turnoff
Time" mapped to 212.
316 TCC300
User Manual
System setup
On Power Up Initially
use Setting #1. Settings that are included in
Load Timer with
Settings #1 and Settings #2
default value Bandcenter
Bandwidth
Time Delay
LDC R
1 Second LDC X
Proceed to Next No
Timer Block Lower
Step
Elapsed? Block Raise
Intertap Delay
Yes Non-Sequential
Timer Period
Voltage Reduction 1
Confirmed HeartBeat Direct HeartBeat Voltage Reduction 2
Timer Type Voltage Reduction 3
Dec Timer
(Point 159) Timer P 0 Yes
(Point 211)
No
Received Yes
Confirmed
Active Settings = Active Settings =
HeartBeat?
Settings #1 Settings #2
No Reload Timer
Yes Timer is Zero

(Point 159)
Active Settings =
Settings #2
Active Settings = No
Settings #1
Comm.
No Voltage
Reduction in
Effect Notes:
1. Object 40 Point 195 is used to update the HeartBeat
Yes Timer Type = Confirmed HeartBeat
2. Object 40 Point 159 is used to update the timer period.
Dec V Red Timer 3. Object 40 Point 211 is added to reload the timer automatically.
(Point 212)
Range 1-999 mins
Timer Type = Direct HeartBeat
4. Object 40 Point 212 is used for Voltage Reduction Timer Reload Value.
No V Red
Timer
O0
Yes
Stop Voltage
Reduction
Proceed to Next
Step
GUID-C6C77AFC-E11B-4FDF-B3AC-561592EA2E59 V1 EN
Figure 248: SCADA HeartBeat LTC and Regulator DNP 3.0 Protocol Sequence
TCC300 317
User Manual
System setup
SCADA HeartBeat for Profile Switching

In the TCC300 algorithm, the user will use Object 40 point "ScadaHB Profile Switch"
(default Point: 79) to renew the Direct HeartBeat timer (writing to point 79), lower 12 bits
of the data will contain the timer reload value in minutes and the most significant 4 bits will
have the profile number to be activated when the timer expires. The range for the timer is
from 0 to 999 minutes and for the profile is from 0 to 3 (profiles 1 through 4). It is important
to know that to terminate the HeartBeat timer at any instant of time and to revert back to
the original active profile, a zero value should be entered for the entire 16 bits of the analog
point. The SCADA HeartBeat DNP3.0 Protocol sequence for Profile Switching is
provided in Figure 249.
318 TCC300
User Manual
System setup
On Power Up Initially use

the Active Profile. Load
Timer with default value
1 Second
No Timer Elapsed
Proceed to Yes
Next Step
Dec Timer
(Point 79)
Yes
Timer = < 0
(Point 79)
No Active settings =
Active Profile (can be
changed manually by
Active settings = Profile using DNP or
Note3 in most significant MODBUS 3796)
nibble of Point 79
Comm.
No Voltage
Reduction in
Effect
Yes
Dec V Red Timer

(Point 212)
No V Red
Timer
=< 0
Yes
Stop Voltage
Reduction
Notes:
1. Object 40 point 79 is added to reload the timer automatically
Proceed to Range 1-999 mins
Next Step Timer Type = Direct HeartBeat
2. Object 40 point 80 is used for Voltage Reduction Timer reload value
3. If IEC 61850 GOOSE is used, then the Active Setting Profile in most
significant nibble of ATCC0$CO$HbTimer$Oper$ctlVal
GUID-9D64E9A9-50FF-43C8-83A9-CF1C58820293 V1 EN
Figure 249: Profile Switching
Additionally an IEC 61850 method of providing a HeartBeat for profile switching is

available when the optional IEC 61850 protocol is purchased. The HeartBeat mode for the
IEC 61850 algorithm works exactly like profile switching HeartBeat mode in DNP,
except that GOOSE subscription is used in case of IEC 61850. The TCC300 subscribes to
HeartBeat GOOSE message which has the following attributes:
TCC300 319
User Manual
System setup
• VLAN-ID: 0
• VLAN-PRIORITY: 4
• MAC Address: 01-0C-CD-00-00-10
• APPID: 0
Also, the GOOSE dataset contains only one data which is organized as, the most
significant 4 bits will have the profile number to be activated and the rest will contain the
timer reload value.
Using this method, the IEC 61850 client should repetitively publish a GOOSE message
with the above mentioned attributes and data, before the timer reload value expires.
HeartBeat Manual Mode

The purpose of the Manual HeartBeat Mode feature is to provide a method to place the
control in Manual operation and automatically place the control back in Auto mode based
on a HeartBeat Timer setting (settable only via DNP communication). The HeartBeat
Timer setting is Object 40 "Remote Manual Timer".
The Manual HeartBeat Timer is settable from 0 to 999 Minutes. When the timer is set to
a non zero value it will place the control in HeartBeat Manual Mode (Auto operation
blocked). If the timer expires the control is placed back in auto mode. If the timer is
refreshed before it expires, the control stays in HeartBeat Manual mode.
The DNP status point (binary input Object 1) that shows if the control is in the HeartBeat
Manual Mode is: "Manual HeartBeat Status". This point will be set to 1 when placed in
manual using the Manual HeartBeat Timer only and not by any other means.
The HeartBeat Manual Mode is separate from the original comm block manual mode.
They both perform the same function, but use a different method and DNP point to activate
auto or Manual mode. When the control is in Comm Blk Manual, the Manual LED will
turn on steady as before, but when in the HeartBeat Manual mode it will flash. The
HeartBeat manual method can only be activated via the new HeartBeat timer setting point
while the old comm blk method can be activated via comms or the toggle/scamp switch as
before.
The Comm Blk mode has priority over the HeartBeat Manual mode regardless of how it
is enabled (through communication or switch input). When in HeartBeat Manual mode the
tap/voltage limit blocks are active just as before with comm blk mode, but in HeartBeat
manual the runback due to high Voltage will also be enabled. If the control is in HeartBeat
Manual mode and the comm blk manual is also turned on (via comms or switch input),
then the HeartBeat timer will continue to count down. If Comm Blk is turned off, then it
will go back to HeartBeat Manual mode unless the HeartBeat manual timer has reached
0.
320 TCC300
User Manual
System setup
5.14.1 Setting SCADA HeartBeat option from TCC600
1. Select Communication/Setup/Heartbeat Option from the TCC600® toolbar.

TCC600 will display the Heartbeat option dialog screen.
GUID-BB3EBE8A-3E09-4B7C-BA7E-2F7DC25F61B4 V1 EN
Figure 250: SCADA HeartBeat Dialog Screen
2. Select either "Disable," "LTC (DNP)," "Regulator (DNP)," "Profile Switching

(DNP)" or "Profile Switching (GOOSE)".
3. Select "Save". TCC600 will momentarily display a "Setpoints Successfully written
to control" confirmation screen.
TCC300 321
User Manual
322
Configuration
Section 6 Configuration
6.1 Tapchanger type selections
The Tapchanger Type Selection feature provides the user with the ability to set vendor
specific regulator configuration settings in the control from TCC600®. These settings can
be accessed through the traditional settings screens or from the Tapchanger Type
Selections dialog screen located in the Setup dropdown menu.
TCC300 323
User Manual
Configuration
GUID-B9B7CEAA-1AE2-4B8E-9EA5-CE948E205369 V1 EN
Figure 251: Tapchanger Type Selections Dialog Screen
The selectable settings are available for the following vendor regulator models:
• Siemens
• Howard
• General Electric
• Cooper Spring Drive
• Cooper Direct Drive
• Cooper Quick Drive
324 TCC300
User Manual
Configuration
The Tap Changer Type Selection feature allows the user to easily select the Vendor of the
Regulator the control is being installed on and populate the settings specific to that Vendor
Regulator type in a single menu. This menu will always display ABB recommended
settings by default for each vendor when opening it, but the interface allows the user to
make changes if desired, and save them to the control or settings file. Once this menu is
saved, these settings are written to the control or settings file and can be viewed in their
appropriate locations.
Table 57: Vendor Specific Regulator Settings
Vendor Regulator Tap Intertap Operation Raise/ Raise/ Input Write SOE
Type Informatio Delay Counter Lower Lower Selection Triggers?
n Configurat Output Output 1
ion Contacts Contacts Configurat
Configurat Pulse ion
ion Width
Default A Disabled 0 X1 Continuo 1.0 Sec. Switch N/A
us Status
Siemens A Regulate 1 Sec. X2 Pulsed 8.0 Sec. Switch N/A
Internal Status
(KeepTr
ack)
Howard A Regulate 1 Sec. X2 Continuo 8.0 Sec. Switch N/A
Internal us Status
(KeepTr
ack)
General A Regulate 1 Sec. X1 Pulsed 8.0 Sec. Switch N/A
Electric Internal Status
(KeepTr
ack)
Cooper A Regulate 1 Sec. X1 Pulsed 3.0 Sec. Seal-In Yes
Spring Internal Input
Drive (KeepTr
ack)
Direct Internal Input
Drive (KeepTr
ack)
Quick Internal Input
Drive (KeepTr
ack)
The Tapchanger "Type" (A or B) and "Regulator Vendor" selection settings can be

observed in the HMI in the CONFIGURATION menu "Tapchanger Type" submenu.
These settings however, cannot be changed from the HMI.
TCC300 325
User Manual
Configuration
6.2 Configuration
6.2.1 User programmable alarm relay

The User Programmable Alarm Relay (Form c) is a non‑latching relay that is capable of
switching 6 A at 125 Vac or 0.2 A at 125 Vdc and is user-programmable to indicate one
or more of the following conditions:
• Block Comm is in effect

• Block-Raise Voltage Limit exceeded
• Block-Lower Voltage Limit exceeded
• Voltage Reduction of any step is invoked
• Reverse Power Flow condition is detected
• Line Current Limit/Limit exceeded
• Tap Block Raise/Lower is in effect
• LDC_LDZ is in effect
• Abnormal Tap position detected
• VAr Bias Lead Limit Exceeded
• VAr Bias Lag Limit Exceeded
• Backup Power Fail (If purchased)
• RTN Fail to Operate
• Individual Tap Wear Limit Exceeded
• Operations Count Limit Exceeded
• Tap Changer Failure
When activated, the LDC/LDZ programmable alarm will initiate when any non-zero
setting has been entered as LDC Fwd resistance or reactance, or LDC-Z. It will also alarm
when any non-zero setting has been entered as LDC Rev resistance or reactance with the
"Rev Power Oper" configuration set to "Regulate in Reverse" and the control in reverse
power mode.
The Alarm Relay will de-energize and generate an output without any of the conditions
being enabled when power to the unit is lost.
6.2.1.1 Setting programmable alarm relay inputs from TCC600
1. Select Setup/Alarms from the TCC600 toolbar. TCC600 will display the Alarms
dialog screen.
326 TCC300
User Manual
Configuration
Figure 252: Programmable Alarm Relay Setting Dialog Screen
2. Select the desired Programmable Alarm relay inputs.

screen.
4. Select OK. TCC600 will display a "Setpoints Successfully Written to the Control"
TCC300 327
User Manual
Configuration
Figure 254: Setpoints Successfully Written To The Control Dialog Screen
328 TCC300
User Manual
Configuration
All Disabled Prog Alarm Function

(factory Setting) 0000000000000000
Prog Alarm Function

1111111111111111 All Enabled
––––––––––––––––
Communication Block (in effect)
COMMUNICATION BLOCK Block Raise Voltage Limit (exceeded)
MNTR Block Lower Voltage Limit (exceeded)
0000000000000001 C
Voltage Reduction (any step) (invoked)
Reverse Power Flow (condition detected)
In "Change Mode" continue pressing Line Current Limit (exceeded)
LEFT to access Programmable Tap Block Raise (in effect)
Alarm Relay II screen Tap Block Lower (in effect)
LDC/LDZ (in effect)
TAP CHANGER FAILURE Abnormal Tap (condition detected)
1– C VAr Bias Lag (limit exceeded)
Var Bias Lead (limit exceeded)
Backup Power Fail (if purchased)
Tap Changer Failure (detected)
RTN Fail To Operate (condition detected)
Individual Tap Wear Limit (exceeded)
Op Count Limit (exceeded)
Programmable Alarm
CNFG
Prog Alarm Function

0000000000000000
Press ENT to enter change mode UTIL

ENT Flashing "Underline" and
"C" indicates change mode
Alarm condition displayed on top communication block
line is based on the digit that is 0 disables alarm condition
underlined on the bottom line 0000000000000000 C 1 enables alarm condition
Use LEFT or RIGHT to navigate to SETP CNFG Use UP or DOWN to select 0 or 1

desired Alarm Condition
COMMUNICATION BLOCK
MNTR
0000000000000001 C Press ENT to exit change
mode and save settings
block raise voltage UTIL

0000000000000001 C ENT
GUID-7564914D-E554-4966-8BCB-D75C77AAEDEB V1 EN
Figure 255: Programmable Alarm Function Programming
TCC300 329
User Manual
Configuration
6.2.1.2 Setting programmable alarm relay inputs from the HMI
Each alarm condition corresponds to one of the digits on the bottom line of the display: a
"0" indicates that the alarm condition is disabled; a "1" indicates that the alarm condition
is enabled.
1. Press the Down Arrow (CNFG Hot Button) pushbutton to wake the unit. The menu
will advance to "CONFIGURATION".
Tapchanger Type
"Programmable Alarm" menu.
4. Press the Down arrow, as necessary, until either of the following are displayed
depending upon whether the Auto/Manual Switch Type is selected to "SCAMP".
Prog Alarm Function
–<0000000000000000
OR when the Auto/Manual Switch Type is selected to "SCAMP":
Prog Alarm Function
NORMAL or AS DEADMAN OUT
5. If the unit displays the Programmable Alarm setup screen (zeros and/or ones on Line
2), then proceed to Step 8.
6. If the unit displays the "SCAMP" Programmable Alarm Function screen, an
additional step is required to access the Programmable Alarm setup screen. Press the
"ENT" pushbutton. If prompted, enter a valid Level 2 Access Code.
7. Ensure the selection is set to "NORMAL" and press the "ENT" pushbutton.
communication block
–<0000000000000000 C
See Figure 255 for the index of alarm functions.
9. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons, enter a "1" for those Alarm Functions to be
activated and a "0" for those that are to be disabled, then press the ENT pushbutton.
The selected alarm will change from "lower case" when disabled (0), to "UPPER
CASE" when activated (1).
6.2.1.3 Programmable alarm relay mode
When the Auto/Man Switch Type is set to "SCAMP", the Programmable Alarm Function
can be set to "Normal" or "As a Deadman Output". This option is used since the Deadman
Output is not available. The default configuration setting is NORMAL.
330 TCC300
User Manual
Configuration
Setting Programmable Alarm relay mode from the HMI
The "Auto/Man Switch Type Selection" in configuration must be set to

"SCAMP" to access this setting.
Tapchanger Type
"Programmable Alarm" menu.
4. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as necessary, until the "Programmable Alarm
Function" screen is displayed.
Prog Alarm Function
NORMAL C
6. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons, select the desired Programmable Alarm Function
Mode (NORMAL or AS DEADMAN OUT), then press the ENT pushbutton.
Setting Programmable Alarm relay mode from TCC600
The "Auto/Man Switch Type Selection" in configuration must be set to

"SCAMP" to access this setting.
1. Select Setup/Configuration from the TCC600 toolbar. TCC600 will display the
Configuration dialog screen.
TCC300 331
User Manual
Configuration
Figure 256: Configuration Dialog Screen
2. Select the desired Programmable Alarm relay inputs.

screen.
332 TCC300
User Manual
Configuration
6.2.2 Op Count Signal Alarm

The Op Count Signal Alarm feature provides the user with the ability to set a predefined
alarm point for the number of tapchanges initiated by the control. When the predefined
alarm setting is exceeded, the following alarm message will be displayed on the HMI
screen:
Op Count Signal Alarm
Rst Op Count XXX
6.2.2.1 Setting Op Count Signal Alarm from the HMI
Tapchanger Type
is displayed.
Op Count Signal Alrm
0
6. Utilizing the Up/Down arrow pushbuttons enter the desired alarm value, then press
the ENT pushbutton.
6.2.2.2 Setting Op Count Signal Alarm from TCC600
TCC300 333
User Manual
Configuration
Figure 259: Tap Settings Dialog Screen
2. From the "Operation Counter" section of the Tap Settings screen select the desired
Op Count Signal Alarm setpoint (Alarm Limit).
screen.
334 TCC300
User Manual
Configuration
6.2.3 Counters
6.2.3.1 Operation counter
The user must select the method of counting tapchanger operations consistent with the
tapchanger.
The Operation Counter accommodates 999,999 operation counts. The number of counts
are stored in non-volatile memory and are not affected by a loss of supply power to the
control. The total number of operation counts is displayed in the Status Menu. The
Operation Counter can be preset to any value up to 999,999.
Cooper Regulators do not provide a counter contact. Therefore, the "Operation Counter
Input Configuration" must be set to "Seal-In Input". The Seal-In Input selection has a fixed
3 second Seal-In Delay.
X1
Operation count will increment by one with an open-close-open state change on the
tapchanger counter switch. The closed state must be present for at least 20 mS. The open
state may be present indefinitely.
X Mode Delay (X1)

When the control is using X1 Mode counter contact detection method, the X Mode Delay
setting in millisecond is used to define the minimum time duration for the X1 counter
contact signal. Any signal duration of less than the X Mode Delay will be considered as
an invalid counter contact signal. Depending on the condition of the counter contact
switch, the X Mode Delay should be set between 10 - - 20 mS. For greater noise immunity
a debounce window of 160 mS exists after valid count operation.
TCC300 335
User Manual
Configuration
X2
Operation count will increment by one with either an open-close or a close-open state
change of the tapchanger operation counter switch. Both the closed and open states may
exist indefinitely.
X Mode Delay (X2)

When the control is in X2 Mode detection, the X Mode Delay setting is used to delay the
detection and processing of the next X2 counter contact signal. This is necessary
especially in the case where the neutral signal starts before the next counter contact signal
when the voltage regulator is moving to neutral.
Count Window
Operation count will increment by only one count during a set time period of "Count
Window". This is true no matter how many counter inputs occur during the count window
time. After a counter input is accepted, the count window timer begins and another count
won't be accepted until the count window time expires. The count window time can be set
from 0.5 to 60.5 seconds.
The Count Window setting should not be set to a value greater than the
Intertap Delay when in pulsed or continuous mode. Also, it should not be
set greater than the Pulse Width setting, if Pulsed mode is used.
Cam Follower
The Cam Follower setting should be selected when a Cam Follower contact input is wired
into the Counter contact input of the TCC300. The operation counter and resettable
operation counter will increment when the counter input sees the cam follower open and
then close.
The Cam Follower contact requires a minimum of 500 milliseconds to

open and a minimum of 500 milliseconds to close. For this reason, if
configuring the Output Selection to Pulsed Mode, the Pulse Width must
be set to longer than the actual time it takes for the Cam Follower switch
to complete its operational cycle. If this is not set correctly, tap position
could be inaccurate. ABB recommends that Output Selection be
configured to Continuous unless the LTC mechanism requires Pulsed
Mode to operate correctly.
Cooper Quick Drive

The Cooper Quick Drive setting should be enabled for a Cooper QD regulator. When
enabled, this setting applies a 0 second seal-in output. For Cooper Spring Drive and Direct
336 TCC300
User Manual
Configuration
Drive regulators, this setting should be disabled. When disabled, this applies a 3 second
seal-in output.
Neutral Switch Counter

The Neutral Switch Counter is updated each time the neutral input is detected. Neutral
Switch Counter can also preset to any value. The Neutral Switch Counter is a software
counter that is stored in non-volatile memory and has a maximum value of 999,999.
6.2.3.2 Setting the Operation Counter Configuration from the HMI
This feature is not functional unless Input Selection 1 is set to "Switch

Status".
Tapchanger Type
3. Press the Right or Left arrow pushbutton, as necessary, to navigate to the "Tap
Settings" menu.
4. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as necessary, until the "Operation Counter
Configuration" screen is displayed.
Op Counter Config
1 X C
6. Utilizing the Up/Down arrow pushbuttons, select the desired counter configuration
for the application (1 X, 2 X, COUNT WINDOW or CAM FOLLOWER), then press
the ENT pushbutton. The following will be displayed reflecting the counter
configuration that was entered.
7. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as necessary, until the "Cooper Quick Drive"
Cooper Quick Drive
disable C
9. Utilizing the Up/Down arrow pushbuttons, select ENABLE for a Cooper Quick
Drive regulator. For a Cooper Spring Drive or Direct Drive regulator, leave this
selection "disable".
10. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as necessary, until the "Cam Follower" screen is
displayed.
Cam Follower
TCC300 337
User Manual
Configuration
disable C
12. Utilizing the Up/Down arrow pushbuttons, select ENABLE to enable the Cam
Follower feature.
13. Depending on the Operation Counter configuration that was selected, proceed as
follows to complete the Operation Counter configuration:
• If the "1 X" or "2 X" counter configuration was selected, proceed to setting the
Operations Counter X Mode Delay from the HMI.
• If the "COUNT WINDOW" counter configuration was selected, proceed to
setting the Counter Time Window.
• If the "CAM FOLLOWER" counter configuration was selected, the Operation
Counter configuration is complete.
6.2.3.3 Setting Operation Counter X Mode Delay from the HMI

Status".
Tapchanger Type
Settings" menu.
4. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as necessary, until the "X Mode Delay" screen is
displayed.
X Mode Delay
10 ms C
6. Utilizing the Up/Down arrow pushbuttons select the desired Counter X Mode Delay
value for the application (0 to 3000 ms), then press the ENT pushbutton.
6.2.3.4 Setting Operation Counter X Mode Delay from the HMI

Status".
338 TCC300
User Manual
Configuration
Tapchanger Type
Settings" menu.
4. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as necessary, until the "Counter Time Window"
Counter Time Window
0.5 Sec C
6. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons select the desired "Counter Time Window" value
for the application (0.5 to 60.5 Seconds), then press the ENT pushbutton.
6.2.3.5 Configuring the Operation Counter from TCC600

Status".
TCC300 339
User Manual
Configuration
2. Select the desired Operation Counter configuration (X1, X2, Count Window or Cam
Follower).
3. If "X1 or X2" configuration was selected in Step 2, enter the desired "X Mode Delay"
setting (0 to 3000 mS).
4. If "Count Window" configuration was selected in Step 2, enter the desired "Count
Window" setting (0.5 to 60.5 seconds).
screen.
340 TCC300
User Manual
Configuration
6.2.3.6 Resetting the Resettable Operation Counter from the HMI
The resettable operation counter operates with the method selected by X1, X2, Count
Window or Cam Follower. This counter can be reset to zero.
1. Press the Left Arrow (MNTR Hot Button) pushbutton to wake the unit. The menu
Metering
3. Press the Right or Left arrow pushbutton, as necessary to advance to the "Tap
Information" screen.
4. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as necessary, to navigate to the "Resettable
Counter" menu.
5. Press ENT, a flashing "R" will be displayed. Press ENT again to reset the Operations
Counter.
6.2.3.7 Resetting the Resettable Operation Counter from TCC600
TCC300 341
User Manual
Configuration
2. Select the "Reset" check box located next to the "Resettable" counter located in the
Operation Counter section of the dialog screen.
screen.
342 TCC300
User Manual
Configuration
6.2.3.8 Presetting the Presettable Operation Counters from the HMI
The Operation, Neutral, Lower and Raise Counters operate with the selected count
method (X1, X2, Count Window or Cam Follower). It provides the user with the ability
to preset a value up to 999,999. The counters will increment from the preset value based
on the selected count method.
Tapchanger Type
Settings" menu.
4. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as necessary, until the "Op Counter Preset"
Op Counter Preset
000000 C
6. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons enter the desired Operations Counter Preset value
from 0 to 999,999, then press the ENT pushbutton.
6.2.3.9 Presetting the Presettable Operation Counters from TCC600
To Preset the Operation and/or Neutral Counter from TCC600®, perform the following:
TCC300 343
User Manual
Configuration
2. Enter the Operation/Neutral Counter Preset value located in the Operation Counter
section of the dialog screen.
screen.
344 TCC300
User Manual
Configuration
6.2.4 Inputs and switch configuration
6.2.4.1 Setting Input Selection 1 Operation Counter Input Configuration to Switch

Status from the HMI
Tapchanger Type
3. Press the Right or Left Arrow pushbutton, as necessary, until "Input Selection" is
displayed.
4. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as necessary, until the "Input Selection 1" screen
is displayed.
5. Press the ENT pushbutton. If prompted, enter a valid Level 2 Access
Input Selection 1
SWITCH STATUS C
Input Selection 1 is required to be set to "Switch Status" if "Contact

KeepTrack™ 1R1L" or "Contact KeepTrack 1N" is selected for Tap
Information. The unit will display the following error message if
applicable:
Tap Info conflict
Any Key to Continue
6. Utilizing the Up/Down arrow pushbuttons, select "SWITCH STATUS" then press
the ENT pushbutton.
The applicable counter type must be selected in Tap Settings.
TCC300 345
User Manual
Configuration
6.2.4.2 Setting Input Selection 1 Operation Counter Input Configuration to Switch

Status from TCC600
Input Selection 1 is required to be set to "Switch Status" if "Contact

KeepTrack 1R1L" or "Contact KeepTrack 1N" is selected for Tap
Information. TCC600 will display the following Error Screen if
applicable.
346 TCC300
User Manual
Configuration
GUID-B6D4D46A-325E-40E8-98DC-360F2D08C41C V1 EN
Figure 272: Tap Information/Input Selection Conflict Error Screen
2. From the "Inputs and Switch" section of the dialog screen set Input Selection 1 to
"Switch Status".
screen.
TCC300 347
User Manual
Configuration
6.2.5 Motor seal-in failure block

The Motor Seal-in Failure Block feature addresses the following scenarios that can occur
on Cooper regulators which can result in incorrect tap position, a failure of the regulator
to regulate voltage, or both conditions simultaneously.
Failing or Open Motor Capacitor (Stalled Tapchanger)

If the motor capacitor degrades over time, it will result in a motor that does not always
have enough torque to operate correctly. Eventually, it will degrade enough to prevent any
operation of the motor. The result of this scenario is a regulator that intermittently and
eventually permanently fails to regulate voltage and cannot track tap position accurately.
The Motor Seal-in Failure Block feature will block the regulator from operating and
actuate an alarm to alert the user to this malfunction. If the motor capacitor is not open but
degraded, then input voltage affects the motor’s ability to operate. For this reason, instead
of blocking the regulator operation permanently, it will only block in the direction it was
moving when the Motor Seal-in Failure Block feature was triggered.
Low Motor Voltage (Stalled Tapchanger)

For example a brown out condition, could result in a motor temporarily not having enough
torque to operate correctly. The result of this scenario is a regulator that intermittently fails
to regulate voltage and cannot track tap position accurately.
In this scenario, the motor also does not have enough torque to execute a tapchange. The
Motor Seal-in Failure Block feature will operate the same as it does for a failing or open
motor capacitor except that once voltage is restored, the control will operate normally.
The alarm will alert the user to the low voltage condition and its effect on the regulator.
Motor Seal-In Switch Malfunction

The Motor Seal-in Switch in the Cooper regulator may malfunction in either one direction
or both. The result of this condition is a regulator that cannot track tap position accurately.
In this scenario, the motor is capable of turning, but tap position will be inaccurate as the
circuit’s proper operation is the only method of tracking tap position accurately. Since it
is possible for the Motor Seal-in switch to fail in only one direction, the blocking function
of the Motor Seal-in Failure feature is designed to be unidirectional such that it will allow
the regulator to operate in the opposite direction that caused the block to occur.
The Motor Seal-in Failure Block feature actuates an alarm to alert the user to the problem.
The operation block would not be needed in this scenario as loss of accurate KeepTrack™
is the only negative consequence of the malfunction. Since the unit cannot detect the
difference between this failure and the Stalled Tapchanger scenario, the block must be in
effect. The block function of this feature can be disabled by the user if it is desired to
348 TCC300
User Manual
Configuration
continue operating the regulator with this failure until it can be repaired. The alarm
however, will remain in effect as long as the failure conditions exist.
Reaching a Physical Tap Limit Set in the Regulator

When the tap limit is reached, motor power is physically disconnected from the raise or
lower motor windings in the direction of the tap limit and operation in that direction cannot
occur.
This scenario removes motor power from the raise or lower motor winding when the
associated physical tap limit is reached. There is no negative consequence of this
occurring when the Motor Seal-in Failure Block feature is disabled. With the Motor Seal-
in Failure Block feature enabled however, the control cannot detect the difference
between Reaching a Physical Tap Limit and a Motor Seal-in Switch failure, so it must
block and alarm.
The unidirectional nature of the block is designed for this scenario as well as a Motor Seal-
in Switch failure to allow operation of the regulator in the opposite direction when needed.
Alarming in this condition can provide the user with information that there may be a
settings error or an upstream Fixed Tap Transformer may be tapped incorrectly as a
regulator should not normally need to issue a raise or lower command when at its physical
limit.
When Motor Seal-in is selected in the control the Motor Seal-in Failure Block feature and
the input to the Abnormal Tap Position alarm are enabled by default. The user may choose
to disable the Motor Seal-in Block feature. However, the input to the Abnormal Tap
Position alarm is always enabled when Motor Seal-in is selected. The feature includes the
following:
Abnormal Tap Position Alarm Input

The Motor Seal-in Failure Block feature provides an input to the "Abnormal Tap Position"
alarm. This input is actuated on the first occurrence of a tapchange coincident with no
motor seal-in current detected for 15 seconds.
Motor Seal-in Failure Alarm

The Motor Seal-in Failure Alarm is actuated on the second occurrence (either direction)
of a tapchange coincident with no motor seal-in current detected for 15 seconds. This
alarm can be reset by the user from the Human Machine Interface (HMI), from the
TCC600® "Alarms" dialog screen or via SCADA. The alarm is also reset when a
successful tapchange operation occurs (motor seal-in current detected) in either direction.
Motor Seal-in Failure Block

The Motor Seal-in Failure Block is actuated on the second occurrence of a tapchange
coincident with no motor seal-in current detected for 15 seconds in either direction. The
block will be in effect in the direction that produced the second Motor Seal-in Failure
TCC300 349
User Manual
Configuration
occurrence. If a Motor Seal-in Failure is detected in the opposite direction, then operation
will be blocked in that direction also.
This Block can be reset by the user from the HMI, from the TCC600 "Alarms" dialog
screen or via SCADA. The block is also reset when a successful tapchange operation
occurs (motor seal-in current is detected) in the opposite direction.
The internal accumulator that counts the occurrences of failed tapchanges is stored in
volatile memory and is set to zero when a loss of power occurs and the unit is not equipped
with a backup power supply. This is considered normal operation of the feature.
6.2.5.1 Setting Input Selection 1 Operation Counter Input Configuration to Motor

Seal-In from the HMI
If Tap Information is selected to either "Contact KeepTrack™ 1R1L" or

"Contact KeepTrack 1N" the control will not accept an Input Selection 1
setting of "Seal-In Input". The unit will display the following error
message if applicable:
Tap Info conflict
Any Key to Continue
Motor Seal-in Delay is fixed at 3 seconds.
Tapchanger Type
3. Press the Right/Left arrow pushbutton as necessary to navigate the "Input Selection"
screen.
is displayed.
Input Selection 1
SWITCH STATUS C
6. Utilizing the Up/Down arrow pushbuttons, select "SEAL-IN INPUT", then press the
ENT pushbutton.
350 TCC300
User Manual
Configuration
6.2.5.2 Setting Input Selection 1 Operation Counter Input Configuration to Motor

Seal-In from TCC600
If Tap Information is selected to either "Contact KeepTrack 1R1L" or

"Contact KeepTrack 1N" the control will not accept an Input Selection 1
setting of "Seal-In Input". TCC600 will display the Tap Information/Input
Selection Error Screen if applicable.
GUID-B6D4D46A-325E-40E8-98DC-360F2D08C41C V1 EN
Figure 275: Tap Information/Input Selection Conflict Error Screen
Tap Configuration dialog screen.
TCC300 351
User Manual
Configuration
2. From the "Inputs and Switch/Input Selection 1" section of the dialog screen select
"Seal-in Input".
3. Select Save. TCC600 will display a "Setpoints Successfully Written to the Control"
6.2.5.3 Setting Motor Seal-in Failure Alarm/Block from the HMI
Tapchanger Type
Settings" menu.
352 TCC300
User Manual
Configuration
4. Press the Down arrow, as necessary, until the following will be displayed.
Seal-In Fail Block
disable
6. Utilizing the Up/Down arrow pushbuttons select enable, then press the ENT
pushbutton.
6.2.5.4 Setting Motor Seal-in Failure Alarm/Block from TCC600
2. From the "Block Automatic Operation on Motor Seal-in Failure" section of the Tap
settings screen select Motor Seal-in Failure "Enable" or "Disable".
screen.
TCC300 353
User Manual
Configuration
6.2.5.5 Input Selection 2 (Non-Sequential or SCADA Cutout)
The Input Selection 2 can be configured to be either an input that initiates Non-Sequential
control operation or a SCADA Cutout switch input. The default configuration setting is
Non-Sequential.
Setting Input Selection 2 from the HMI
Tapchanger Type
3. Press the Right or Left arrow pushbutton, as necessary, to navigate to the "Input
Selection" menu.
is displayed.
Input Selection 2
354 TCC300
User Manual
Configuration
NONSEQ INPUT C
6. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons, select the desired Input Selection 2 (Non-
Sequential or SCADA Cutout), then press the ENT pushbutton.
Setting Input Selection 2 from TCC600
either "Non-sequential" or "SCADA Cutout".
screen.
TCC300 355
User Manual
Configuration
6.2.5.6 Input Selection 3 (VR2 or Aux)
The Input Selection 3 can be configured as the Voltage Reduction 2 input or as an auxiliary
input that can be read as a DNP or MODBUS® point. The default configuration setting is
Voltage Reduction 2.
Setting Input Selection 3 (VR2/Aux) from the HMI
Tapchanger Type
3. Press the Right or Left arrow pushbutton, as necessary, to navigate to the "Input
Selection" menu.
is displayed.
Input Selection 3
356 TCC300
User Manual
Configuration
VOLTAGE RED 2 C
6. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons, select the desired Input Selection (VR2/Aux), then
Setting Input Selection 3 from TCC600
either "VR2" or "Aux" for Input Selection 3.
screen.
TCC300 357
User Manual
Configuration
6.2.6 Auto/Manual switch type

The Auto/Manual Switch Type setting allows the Auto/Man Switch type on the adapter
panel to be set to "Toggle, SCAMP or None". None is used when no Auto/Manual Switch
exists. The default configuration setting is None.
When the Auto/Manual Switch Type configuration is set to "SCAMP",

the Programmable Alarm Function can be set to function as "Normal" or
"As a Deadman Output". This option is available when SCAMP mode is
used since the Deadman Output is not available.
6.2.6.1 Setting Auto/Man Switch Type from the HMI
358 TCC300
User Manual
Configuration
Tapchanger Type
"Nameplate" menu.
4. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as necessary, until the "Auto/Man Sw Type"
Auto/Man Sw Type
NONE C
6. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons, select the desired Auto/Manual Switch Type
(None, Toggle or SCAMP), then press the ENT pushbutton.
6.2.6.2 Setting Auto/Manual Switch Type from TCC600
2. From the "Inputs and Switch/Auto/Man Switch Type" section of the dialog screen
select either "None, Toggle or SCAMP".
screen.
TCC300 359
User Manual
Configuration
6.2.7 Ratio multipliers
6.2.7.1 Voltage and current multipliers
The voltage and current multipliers do not affect the regulation of the
control. They are only used in the calculation of primary values.
The use of a voltage correction factor is incorporated in the calculation of

primary quantities in the control. Although the control operation is not
affected, erroneous values will be displayed and recorded if the VT
correction factor is not included in the PT multiplier.
Primary quantities are displayed when voltage and current multipliers are set in the
control. The voltage multiplier is:
Vmult = Vpri/(Vsec + Vcorr)
For a VT ratio of 7620/117 V and a voltage correction of 3 V, the multiplier is:
360 TCC300
User Manual
Configuration
Vmult = 7620/(117 + 3) = 63.5
The voltage multiplier setting range is from 0.1 to 3260.0 in 0.1 steps.
The current multiplier is the value of the line CT primary rating divided by 0.2 A. For a CT
primary rating of 1000 A, the multiplier is:
CTmult = 1000/0.2 = 5000
The current multiplier setting range is from 1 to 32600 in 1 step increments.
Normalizing Voltage Multiplier

A Normalizing Voltage Multiplier with a range of 0.80 to 1.20 is available to be applied
to Meter Out Voltage and displayed in real time as Normalizing Voltage. The purpose of
the Normalizing Voltage Multiplier is to allow the user to overcome differences in the
ratio of the PT that the Meter Out Voltage input is using versus the PT the end user or other
metering methods are using.
6.2.7.2 Setting the Voltage and Current Multipliers from the HMI
The current input to the control is rated at 0.2 A continuous, 0.4 A for two
hours, and 4.0 A for 1 second.
The CT Multiplier selection in the Configuration/CT and VT menu only

changes the scaling factor for current reading and setting.
Tapchanger Type
"Nameplate" menu.
The following sequence of steps provide direction for setting the

Current Multiplier. The steps necessary to set the Load Voltage,
Source Voltage and Normalizing Voltage multipliers are similar.
TCC300 361
User Manual
Configuration
4. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as necessary, until the "Current Multiplier"
CT Multiplier
6000 X C
6. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons enter the desired Current Multiplier value from 1 to
32600, then press the ENT pushbutton.
6.2.7.3 Setting the Voltage and Current Multipliers from TCC600
2. Enter the Current, Voltage, Voltage Source and Normalizing Voltage Multipliers.
screen.
362 TCC300
User Manual
Configuration
6.2.8 Primary power display

The Primary Power Display Selection toggles between two modes of operation:
• Single-Phase-based on measured inputs

• Three-Phase-based on measured inputs and presumed balanced system
Factory setting is single-phase.
6.2.8.1 Setting Primary Power Display Selection from the HMI
Tapchanger Type
"Nameplate" menu.
TCC300 363
User Manual
Configuration
4. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as necessary, until the "Power Display Option"
Power Display Option
SINGLE_PHASE C
6. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons, select the desired Power Display Option, then press
the ENT pushbutton.
6.2.8.2 Setting Primary Power Display Selection from TCC600
2. From the "Primary Power Display" section of the dialog screen select either "Single
Phase" or "Three Phase".
screen.
364 TCC300
User Manual
Configuration
6.2.9 Correction factors
6.2.9.1 VT ratio correction
The operation of some regulators is such that the internal VT does not provide the desired
voltage ratio. In these cases, it is desirable to correct the VT secondary voltage to a 120
Vac reference base. This change is easily made in software, eliminating the need for a
multi-tap sensing transformer.
The correction is derived from information provided by the regulator original equipment
manufacturer (OEM). The numerical value of the correction is the value, in volts, required
to adjust the VT nominal secondary voltage to 120.0 volts. The correction range is ±15
volts in 0.1 volt increments.
The maximum allowable continuous VT secondary voltage is 140 volts.

The correction is made only in software. As a result, the value of VLoad
read on the control display will differ from that measured at the voltmeter
test terminals by the percent of the correction voltage.
TCC300 365
User Manual
Configuration
6.2.9.2 Setting Load and/or Source VT Correction Factor from the HMI
Tapchanger Type
"Nameplate" menu.
4. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as necessary, until the "Load (Source) VT
Correction" screen is displayed.
Load (Source) VT Correction
0.0 Volts C
6. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons, enter the desired Load (Source) VT Correction
value from -15.0 to +15.0 Volts, then press the ENT pushbutton.
6.2.9.3 Setting Load and/or Source VT Correction Factors from TCC600
366 TCC300
User Manual
Configuration
2. Enter the Load and/or Source VT Correction Factor value(s) (–15.0 to +15.0 Volts).
screen.
TCC300 367
User Manual
Configuration
6.2.9.4 CT/VT phase shift
The control will recognize forward and reverse power flow to the load. With the CT and
VT (reference) signals in-phase for unity power flow to the load, it will properly calculate
line drop compensation.
Depending on the connection of the CT and VT, the phasors may not be in‑phase. If this
is the case, the phase shift can be corrected in software. The usual characteristics of three
phase systems only allow multiples of 30° phase shifts. The control, therefore, has a range
of 0° to 330° in 30° increments.
By comparing system operating conditions with power flow direction and power factor as
shown on the TCC300 Tapchanger Control, improper phase shift can be determined. An
incorrect connection may be resolved using well-known phasor methods.
The following procedure may be useful to check the choice of correction or even to
determine the correction by trial and error:
1. Place the regulator in manual control.

2. Determine the Watts and VArs load on the regulator from other metering.
3. Read the Watts and VArs indicated by the control, and make certain that they are of
the same sign and ratio of magnitudes as obtained from the external readings.
4. If not, change the correction in 30° increments until the control and external readings
are in best agreement.
When two single-phase regulators are connected in open delta, the current signals will be
out-of-phase with the voltage signals. For one regulator, the current will lead the voltage
by 30° and is called the "leading" regulator. For the "lagging" regulator, the current will
lag the voltage by 30°.
Contact ABB for more information on VT and CT connections.
368 TCC300
User Manual
Configuration
Source Side parameters are used when operation mode is regulate reverse
(measured) and the system is in reverse power.
6.2.9.5 Setting CT/Load and/or CT/Source Phase Shift Quantities from the HMI
Tapchanger Type
"Nameplate" menu.
The following sequence of steps provide direction for setting the

CT/Load VT Phasing quantities. The steps necessary to set the CT/
Source VT Phasing are similar.
4. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as necessary, until the "CT/Load VT Phasing"
CT/Load VT Phasing
0 Deg C
6. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons, enter the desired CT/Load VT Phasing value from
0 to 330 Degrees (30 Degree increments), then press the ENT pushbutton.
6.2.9.6 Setting CT/Load and/or CT/Source Phase Shift Quantities from TCC600
TCC300 369
User Manual
Configuration
2. Enter the CT/Load or CT/Source Phase Shift Quantities (0 to 330 Degrees, in 30

Degree Increments).
screen.
370 TCC300
User Manual
Configuration
6.2.10 Auxiliary current transformer

The current input rating of the TCC300 Tapchanger Control is 200 mA, continuous.
Auxiliary CT's are necessary if primary currents exceed this value.
The Current Transformer units display scaling selection is set in the Configuration menu
to be 200 mA, 1 A or 5 A. This choice determines the unit display scaling of both the
metering readout quantities and the settings of current values.
The metering screens showing this information, Load Current and Circulating Current
will be updated accordingly. The Line Limit Current setpoint screen is also affected by
this selection.
This selection is for scaling purposes only, and neither 1 A nor 5 A should
be input to the control.
The values of the current displayed in the control Load Current, and on Circulating
Current screens can be displayed in either 200 mA, 1 A or 5 A units. 1 A or 5 A displayed
values are calculated from the actual 200 mA connected current.
6.2.10.1 Setting Auxiliary Current Transformer Units Display from the HMI
TCC300 371
User Manual
Configuration
Tapchanger Type
"Nameplate" menu.
4. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as necessary, until the "Aux Current
Transformer" screen is displayed.
Aux Curr Transformer
200 mA C
6. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons, enter the desired Aux Current Transformer units
display (200 mA, 1 Amp or 5 Amps), then press the ENT pushbutton.
6.2.10.2 Setting Auxiliary Current Transformer Units Display from TCC600
2. From the "VT/CT Load/Aux Current Transformer" section of the dialog screen
select either "200 mA, 1 Amp or 5 Amps".
screen.
372 TCC300
User Manual
Configuration
6.2.11 Metering factors

The control has the capability of displaying measured and calculated secondary quantities
and calculated primary quantities.
TCC300 373
User Manual
Configuration
Primary
IPRI
Bypass
Arrestor IL VT
0.2 A
VS Nominal VLOC VCOMP
Load Current
VPRI
Primary
Source Voltage 120 V Compensated
Voltage Nominal Voltage
NOTE: The VT and CT are usually integral to the regulator.

S L SL
Regulator
GUID-A89B422C-1E9B-4D1B-88FD-E533FF66A54F V1 EN
Regulator Applications
Primary
IPRI
Auxiliary VT
CT
Primary
IL VLOC
Voltage VCOMP
0.2 A VPRI
Nominal
High Low Load Current 120 V Compensated
Voltage Voltage
Nominal Voltage
NOTE: The figure shows a Line-to-Ground VT and a

single-phase CT. The system can also accommodate a
Line-to-Line VT and a Phase-to-Phase connected CT.
Transformer
GUID-A3C2F09C-5B01-4938-AA65-3C56CF85FD08 V1 EN
Transformer Applications
374 TCC300
User Manual
Configuration
6.2.11.1 Secondary
The display will show local voltage, source voltage, compensated voltage, line frequency,
and load current in secondary quantities along with load power factor. The voltage is
displayed on a 120 V base and the current is displayed on a 200 mA base.
The local voltage displayed will not match the voltage measured at the test
terminals on the adapter panel if a sensing VT ratio correction other than
0.0 V has been entered.
6.2.11.2 Primary
In order to use the calculated primary quantities feature, the user must enter the following
data in the Configuration Menu:
• Select line-to-line or line-to-ground VT configuration.

• Select single-phase quantities based on measured inputs, or three-phase quantities
based on measured inputs and assume a balanced system.
• Select primary voltage and current multipliers needed to calculate primary quantities.
6.2.11.3 Present demand
The Present Demand metering capability provided in the control follows the concept of a
lagged demand meter. The demand time interval is selected by the user as 5, 10, 15, 30 or
60 minutes. This is the time it takes for a thermal meter to indicate 90% of a change in load.
6.2.11.4 Energy metering
The Energy Metering function of the control displays the following measured values:
• Total Lagging VAr Hours (KVArh, MVArh or GVArh)

• Total Leading VAr Hours (KVArh, MVArh or GVArh)
• Total Reverse Watt Hours (KWh, MWh or GWh)
• Total Forward Watt Hours (KWh, MWh or GWh)
The measured values are retained in non-volatile memory. A real time clock is utilized to
record a date/time stamp for each quantity to indicate when the period of measurement
was initiated.
When a Energy Metering screen is selected, the screen cycles continuously to indicate the
total value, date and time the measurement was initiated. The E indicates that the
measured value can be reset by pushing ENT.
TCC300 375
User Manual
Configuration
6.2.11.5 Demand history
Demand History quantities are the maximum and minimum values for the period since the
last reset command. These are retained in non-volatile memory. A real-time clock allows
the recording of a date/time stamp with each Demand History quantity. The following are
available for drag hand use:
• Min/Max tap position (when Tap Position is enabled)

• Min Load voltage (120 V base)
• Max Load voltage (120 V base)
• Max Primary current
• Max Primary watts, kW or MW
• Max Primary VAr, kVAr or MVAr
• Max Primary VA, kVA or MVA
• Power Factor at max VA
Where primary quantities are used, values displayed are single-phase or three-phase as
defined in the Primary Power Display Screen of the Configuration Menu.
When the TCC300 Tapchanger Control is used with an ABB adapter

panel, the panel’s drag hands reset button only resets the mechanical drag
hands of the regulator or LTC transformer. The button does not reset the
tap drag hands information stored in the control. The maximum and
minimum tap position of the control should always be reset when the
mechanical drag hands are reset.
The values retained in memory are time-tagged quantities that are calculated using the
demand period selected (5, 10, 15, 30 or 60 minutes). For voltage, values are the average
of samples taken over a period of 32 seconds which avoids undue retention of momentary
voltage transients. The load power factor retained is the value at the time of max VA.
When selected, two screens for each parameter cycle continuously and indicate the value,
date and time of each parameter. The E indicates that the drag hand can be reset by pushing
ENT.
The control is equipped with a real-time, 24‑hour clock which is used with the drag hand
feature to record date/time stamp information on quantities saved in memory. The power
source for the clock is maintained for at least 24 hours during a system power outage by
a charged capacitor (no battery). If the power outage lasts longer than 24 hours, check the
clock and reset if necessary.
376 TCC300
User Manual
Configuration
6.2.11.6 Frequency
The control provides for real-time metering of the line frequency. If the control is a 60 Hz
model, the operating frequency is 55 to 65 Hz; if the control is a 50 Hz model, the operating
frequency is 45 to 55 Hz.
6.2.12 Load VT configuration

Load VT Configuration toggles between Line-to-Line and Line-to-Ground.
6.2.12.1 Setting Load VT Configuration from the HMI
Tapchanger Type
"Nameplate" menu.
4. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as necessary, until the "Load VT Configuration"
Load VT Config
LINE_TO_GROUND C
6. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons, select the desired Load VT Configuration (Line-to-
Line or Line-to-Ground), then press the ENT pushbutton.
6.2.12.2 Setting Load VT Configuration from TCC600
TCC300 377
User Manual
Configuration
2. From the "VT/CT Load" section of the dialog screen select either "Line-to-Line" or
"Line-to-Ground".
screen.
378 TCC300
User Manual
Configuration
6.2.13 Output selection
6.2.13.1 Output pulse
If an appropriate pulse width setting is not entered, then a misoperation of

the tapchanger may occur when a SCADA Manual Raise or Lower is
initiated.
When the output selection is "Pulsed", the pulse width can be programmed from 0.2 to 12
seconds, in increments of 0.1 seconds. An initiated pulse will continue until the pulse time
has been reached or a counter contact or motor hold input operates.
Under normal conditions, when the output is set to "Pulsed" and the control is calling for
Raise/Lower, an output will turn on for the pre‑programmed time, or until a counter
contact or motor hold input operates, and then turn off the output for a time period of 0.5
seconds plus the intertap time delay setting value. When the control is calling for a Raise/
Lower and no non‑sequential or counter input or motor hold input is applied, the output
will activate for the full pre‑programmed time and deactivate for 0.5 seconds, plus the
intertap time delay.
When a counter input or motor hold input is applied, and there is an intertap delay, the
pulse will cease immediately with counter contact closure for the intertap time delay.
After the counter contact or motor hold input opens, the intertap timer will start at the end
of the time delay. If there is still a Raise/Lower condition, another pulse will start.
When the non‑sequential input is applied, the Raise/Lower timers will reset with the
contact closure, and a timer count will start again, if a Raise/Lower condition is still
present, the pulse will start once more.
SCADA INITIATED Manual Raise/Lower

When the control is placed in Manual via SCADA, to perform a Manual Raise/Lower, the
control will switch to the "Pulsed" output mode until the control is returned to "Auto". This
TCC300 379
User Manual
Configuration
will allow only a single Raise/Lower operation to take place each time a SCADA Raise/
Lower command is sent. When the control is returned to "Auto," the control will revert
back to the output selection setting. Therefore, an appropriate "Pulsed" output time setting
should be set if SCADA initiated Manual Raise/Lower operations are performed.
Continuous
The output is continuous until the voltage returns into the bandwidth.
6.2.13.2 Setting Output Configuration from the HMI
Tapchanger Type
"Nameplate" menu.
4. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as necessary, until the "Output Selection" screen
is displayed.
Output Selection
0CONTINUOUS C
6. Utilizing the Up/Down arrow pushbuttons, select the desired Output configuration
(CONTINUOUS or PULSED), then press the ENT pushbutton.
7. Depending on the Output configuration that was selected, proceed as follows to
complete the Output configuration:
• If the "CONTINUOUS" Output configuration was selected, the Output
configuration is complete.
• If a "PULSED" Output configuration was selected, proceed as follows.
8. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as necessary, until the "Output Pulse" screen is
displayed.
Output Pulse
1.5 Sec C
10. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons, enter the desired "Output Pulse" (0.2 to 12.0 Sec)
duration, then press the ENT pushbutton.
6.2.13.3 Setting Output Configuration from TCC600
380 TCC300
User Manual
Configuration
2. From the "Raise/Lower Output Contacts" section of the dialog screen select either
"Continuous" or "Pulsed", then proceed as follows:
• If "Continuous" was selected, go to Step 3.
• If "Pulsed " was selected, enter a "Pulse Width" value (0.2 to 12.0 seconds)
screen.
TCC300 381
User Manual
Configuration
6.2.14 Motor current detection and monitoring

The TCC300 includes a tapchanger Motor Current Measurement and Recording feature.
The TCC300 tapchanger control measures the motor current during tapchange operations.
The motor current is sampled at 64 samples per cycle and the total RMS value of the
current is computed every cycle (60 Hz or 50 Hz cycle). The dynamic range of the current
measurement is from 0 to 10 A.
The tapchange start signal is generated when the control begins a Raise or Lower
operation. The tapchange operation is considered complete when the counter contact
input is generated. If the tapchanger is making multiple tapchanges where the current is
not interrupted between tapchanges then the counter contact can be used to decide the
completion of one tap before the start of the next tap.
The Motor Current Monitor feature also includes a Training Mode which will be used
during the commissioning of the tapchanger control. In this mode several tapchange
operations will be manually conducted and the profile stored. This profile will be
compared with the profile during normal tapchange operation to generate alarm signals.
Based on the type of regulator, the counter contact signal will be different:
• GE: Counter pulse is used to indicate the completion of the tapchange

• SIEMENS and Howard: State change of the counter contact is used to detect the
tapchange (X 2 setting)
• Cooper: Motor seal-in current is used to detect the tapchange operation.
The following parameters are logged for the motor current profile and are stored in battery
backed-up RAM for each tapchange:
• Peak RMS Current
382 TCC300
User Manual
Configuration
1Totalprofiles
∑
i i =1
PeakRMSCurrent i 2
GUID-5201B4E1-35A5-4F51-A148-28E2E5130526 V1 EN (Equation 2)
• Average RMS Current
1Totalprofiles
∑
i i =1
AverageRMSCurrent i 2
GUID-F7C669FA-FF2A-4B1A-8D3A-598A534DBD99 V1 EN (Equation 3)
• Average Duration
1Totalprofiles
∑ Durationi
i i =1
GUID-8DE287CB-3F96-48F6-A1E1-3A579567164E V1 EN (Equation 4)
Where i is the training profile number and Totalprofiles is the total number of training
profiles (fixed to 20 training operations).
An alarm will be generated when any of the following conditions occur:
• Peak RMS current exceeds a defined percent (programmable from 110% to 200%) of
the stored Peak RMS Current which was recorded during the Training Mode.
• Average RMS Current exceeds a certain percent (programmable from 110% to
200%) of the stored Average RMS Current which was recorded during the Training
Mode. T he Average RMS Current is the average of the RMS current for the
tapchange duration.
• The Average Duration of the tapchange exceeds a certain percent (programmable
from 110% to 200%) of the stored value which was recorded during the Training
Mode.
6.2.14.1 Setting the Motor Current Detection Settings from the HMI
The steps necessary to set the Peak RMS Current Percent Change setting
are described here. The steps to set the Average RMS Percent Change and
Average Duration Percent Change are similar.
TCC300 383
User Manual
Configuration
Tapchanger Type
3. Press the Right or Left arrow pushbutton, as necessary, to navigate to the "Mtr
Current Profile" menu.
4. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as necessary, to navigate to the "Peak RMS %
Change" (Average RMS Current % Change or Average Duration % Change)
settings dialog screen.
Peak RMS % Change
110 C
6. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons enter the desired Peak RMS Current % Change
value (110% to 200%), then press the ENT pushbutton.
6.2.14.2 Setting the Motor Current Detection Settings from TCC600
2. From the "Motor Current Settings" section of the dialog screen enter the desired
Peak RMS Current, Average RMS Current and Average Duration settings (110% to
200%).
screen.
384 TCC300
User Manual
Configuration
6.2.15 Regulator type

Regulator Type A or B can be selected. This will allow the source voltage to be calculated
correctly for either type of regulator . It will also allow the control to operate more
accurately when in the "regulate in reverse power" mode.
General Electric VR-1 voltage regulators are available in two winding configurations;
Type "A" non-inverted configuration and type "B" inverted configuration. These types
refer to the internal power component connections.
TCC300 385
User Manual
Configuration
GUID-234E3B5D-5D29-4A3C-983C-8428572CD49F V1 EN
Figure 316: Regulator Type
The Type "A" non-inverted configuration regulator includes a wire jumper on the NN
terminal block for Potential Transformer tap selection.
On the older regulator controls (those not having power disconnect and CT shorting knife
switches), the PT tap selection jumper is usually connected between terminals NN-9 and
NN-20, NN-21 or NN‑22. On newer regulator controls, (those with power disconnect and
CT shorting knife switches), the PT tap selection jumper is usually connected between
terminals NN-8 and NN-20, NN-21 or NN-22. There are special cases when a PT ratio
correcting transformer is supplied and the jumper position is different. In all cases consult
the regulator tank nameplate for the proper jumper connections.
The Type "B" inverted configuration regulator is supplied from the factory with a standard
0.75 ohm resistor installed on the NN terminal block in addition to the PT tap selection
jumper. This series resistor limits short circuit currents in the event of an external fault.
On the older regulator controls (those not having a power disconnect and CT shorting
knife switches), the resistor is usually connected between terminals NN-9 and NN-22. The
PT tap selection jumper is usually connected between terminals NN-22 and NN-20 or
NN-21. On newer regulator controls, (those with power disconnect and CT shorting knife
switches) the resistor is usually connected between terminals NN-8 and NN-22. The PT
tap selection jumper is usually connected between terminals NN-22 and NN-20 or NN-21.
In all cases, consult the regulator tank nameplate for the proper jumper connections.
The control can be damaged if the PT tap selection jumper is not

connected properly when the regulator is energized.
The control is not powered if either the PT tap selection jumper or resistor is missing or
open.
386 TCC300
User Manual
Configuration
The user should always verify proper connections by consulting the nameplate on the
regulator tank. The user is cautioned that the nameplate on the control cabinet could
possibly be incorrect if the control has ever been replaced. If the serial number on the
control cabinet matches the serial number on the regulator tank or nameplate, the control
cabinet nameplate may be consulted for proper jumper configuration.
6.2.15.1 Setting Regulator Type from the HMI
Tapchanger Type
"Nameplate" menu.
4. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as necessary, until the "Regulator Type" screen
is displayed.
Regulator Type
TYPE A C
6. Utilizing the Up/Down arrow pushbuttons, select the desired Regulator Type (Type
A or Type B), then press the ENT pushbutton.
6.2.15.2 Setting Regulator Type from TCC600
TCC300 387
User Manual
Configuration
2. From the "Regulator "section of the dialog screen select either "Type A" or "Type
B".
screen.
388 TCC300
User Manual
Configuration
6.2.16 Remote voltage bias

The Remote Voltage Bias (RVB) feature is similar to Load Drop Compensation (LDC)
that biases the Bandcenter of the control using the difference between a remotely
monitored voltage and the control's Load voltage. This method allows the control to
operate using the existing timing as well as allow it to respond to the blocking limits and
runback functions.
The TCC300 will regulate the measured voltage according to a calculated Effective
Bandcenter. The Effective Bandcenter will ONLY be calculated when a Remote
measurement is supplied to the control. The Effective Bandcenter calculation is based on
the following equations:
BCbias = Vremote − BC
GUID-1CFA423F-068F-4A7D-A740-796321CC76DB V1 EN (Equation 5)
BCbias Bandcenter bias
Vremote Remote voltage
BC Bandcenter setting
EffBCi = (Vmeasured − BCbias )

GUID-B8A247C8-6628-4457-9BBE-E90064B03F06 V1 EN (Equation 6)
EffBCi Effective Bandcenter
Vmeasured Measured secondary voltage
BCbias Bandcenter bias
TCC300 389
User Manual
Configuration
The currently effective high band (Veffhi)i will be at EffBCI+ BW/2 and the currently
effective low band (Vefflo)i will be at EffBCi – BW/2, where BW is the regular bandwidth
setting.
Example:
If BC = 120 V, BW = 2 V and the system is in band Vmeasured = 120 V.
Initially before the first Vremote is received, EffBCi = BC = 120 V.
Then, if Vremote = 117 V, BCbias = (117–120) = –3, EffBCi = 120 – (–3) = 120 + 3 = 123
V
Since Vmeasured is 120 V, the control will perform approximately 3 tap operations in the
RAISE direction to bring the Vmeasured back in band.
The Remote Voltage Bias feature requires a remote voltage parameter to be written to the
control within a period defined by a Remote Voltage Heartbeat timer. If the timer times
out without the Remote Voltage being written to the control, then the control reverts back
to the normal chosen regulating method using the Bandcenter and LDC settings.
A Forward and a Reverse Remote Voltage parameter can be written to the control utilizing
DNP3.0, MODBUS or IEC 61850 protocols. The range is determined by the "Remote
Voltage Maximum" and "Remote Voltage Minimum" values. Each value has a range from
90.00 to 150.00 volts. Any value received by the control above or below these settings will
be discarded and the Remote Voltage Heartbeat Timer will not be refreshed. Upon
receiving a valid Forward/Reverse Remote Voltage value, the control will start or restart
an internal heartbeat timer with the value set by the "Remote Voltage Heartbeat Timer"
setting. Upon timeout, the control removes the Bandcenter bias and controls solely by the
Bandcenter and LDC settings.
The Forward parameter will be used as Vremote in Forward Power mode only. This point’s
associated internal timer will only be used in Forward Power mode. Similarly, the Reverse
parameter will be used as Vremote in Reverse Power mode only. This point’s associated
internal timer will only be used in Reverse Power mode.
The RVB scale factor is the scale factor by which the raw remote voltage value obtained
through the DNP3.0, MODBUS or IEC 61850 analog output point is scaled by before
being used in the Remote Voltage Bias feature.
If Voltage Reduction is initiated while RVB mode is enabled and active, it will be
calculated based on the regular Bandcenter setting, not the Effective Bandcenter.
If Reverse Power is sensed and the control is set to "Regulate Reverse" or "Regulate
Reverse (Measured)", the control will use the "Reverse Remote Voltage" parameter in the
390 TCC300
User Manual
Configuration
Effective Bandcenter calculation. It will also apply BCbias to the Reverse Power
Bandcenter setting.
The equation for BCbias when in reverse:
BCbias = Vremote – BCreverse.
6.2.16.1 Enabling/Disabling Remote Voltage Bias from the HMI
Tapchanger Type
3. Press the Right or Left arrow pushbutton, as necessary, until the "Remote Voltage
Bias" screen is displayed.
Enable/Disable
disable
6. Utilizing the Up/Down arrow pushbuttons, select either "Enable" or Disable", then
7. Depending on the selection, proceed as follows:
• If Remote Voltage Bias was "DISABLED", no further action is required.
• If Remote Voltage Bias was "ENABLED", proceed as follows.
8. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as necessary, until the "RVB HB Timer" screen
is displayed.
RVB HB Timer
5 Secs C
10. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons, enter the desired RVB Heartbeat Timer (2 to 120
Seconds), then press the ENT pushbutton.
• Forward RVB Scale Factor
• Reverse RVB Scale Factor
6.2.16.2 Enabling/Disabling and Setting Remote Voltage Bias from TCC600
TCC300 391
User Manual
Configuration
2. Select "Enable" or "Disable" from the Remote Voltage Bias section of the dialog
screen.
3. If Remote Voltage Bias was "ENABLED", proceed as follows.
4. Enter the Remote Voltage Bias settings:
• Forward RVB Scale Factor (0.1 to 100.0)
• RVB Heartbeat Timer (2 to 120 Sec)
• Reverse RVB Scale Factor (0.1 to 100.0)
screen.
392 TCC300
User Manual
Configuration
6.2.17 Run through neutral

The Run Through Neutral feature allows the reversing switch of a regulator to be
exercised periodically to prevent contact buildup and coking. The Run Through Neutral
feature considers regulator operating parameters to periodically run the regulator through
neutral. The frequency is primarily based on the Tap Operations Between Runs setting
value. However, in addition to the Tap Operations Between Runs setting, the following
regulator operating parameters are also considered and must all be within prescribed
limits before the feature will be activated.
• The regulator must be within 2-6 taps of neutral (Actual value based on a Maximum
Allowed taps setting). The Run Through Neutral feature will require the control to
take one tap in the same direction it was moving once a Neutral input is received to
accomplish the swipe of the reversing switch.
• Measured load current is below the user set Maximum Load Current setting.
• The feature will not operate the regulator if its operation would cause the control to
exceed any voltage or tap limits. (If tap limits are enabled.)
• The feature will not operate if any of the Motor Current settings are exceeded.
The control also considers the following conditions during operation of the Run Through
Neutral feature:
• If detected tap position is determined to be incorrect during the feature’s operation,

the control will attempt to find neutral within an allowed number of operations, and
trigger an Abnormal Tap Position alarm if it is unsuccessful.
• If the control initiates the feature and does not receive a neutral input by the time it
reaches the Maximum Allowed Taps setting, it will initiate operations in the opposite
direction not to exceed the original starting position, plus the Maximum Allowed
Taps setting.
For example, if the Maximum Allowed Taps setting is 4, and Tap Position starts at 3R, the
control will move 4 taps towards what it thinks is neutral, and if the Neutral input is not
TCC300 393
User Manual
Configuration
energized, then 7 taps in the opposite direction. It will not take the eighth tap as that is
reserved for exercising the reversing switch by passing through neutral).
If Neutral indication is not sensed during this process, the Abnormal Tap Position alarm
will be activated and will not reset until the tap position has been re-calibrated.
If Neutral is "found" during this process, but the feature cannot complete the reversing
switch swipe successfully due to the Maximum Allowed Taps setting, then the Run
Through Neutral feature will standby until the conditions that are necessary to run are met
and it can complete.
After the feature has completed successfully, the control will return to regulation and take
any taps necessary to satisfy its settings requirements.
Manipulating the Tap position via communications or HMI while Run

Through Neutral is active and in the process of running through neutral
will result in the feature not properly executing and could trigger an
Abnormal Tap Position Alarm depending on the changes made and where
tap position was when it was changed by a user.
6.2.17.1 Enabling/Disabling and Setting Run Through Neutral from the HMI
Tapchanger Type
3. Press the Right or Left arrow pushbutton, as necessary, until the "Run Through
Neutral" screen is displayed.
Enable/Disable
disable
• If Run Through Neutral was "DISABLED", no further action is required.
• If Run Through Neutral was "ENABLED", proceed as follows.
8. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as necessary, until the "Reset RTN Success
Counter" screen is displayed.
Confirm press ENTER
394 TCC300
User Manual
Configuration
Cancel press EXIT

10. Press the ENT pushbutton. The following will briefly be displayed confirming the
reset of the counter and then return to the "Reset RTN Succ Ctr" screen.
RTN Succ Ctr Reset
• Max Allowed Taps
• Taps Between Runs
• Max Load Current
• Max RTN Standby Ops
6.2.17.2 Enabling/Disabling and Setting Run Through Neutral from TCC600
2. Select "Enable" or "Disable" from the Run Through Neutral section of the dialog
screen.
3. If Run Through Neutral was "ENABLED", proceed as follows:
4. Enter the following Run Through Neutral settings:
TCC300 395
User Manual
Configuration
• If desired, reset the RTN Successful Operations Counter

• Maximum Allowed Taps (3 to 7)
• Tap Operations Between Runs (10 to 10000)
• Maximum Load Current (1 to 200 mA)
• Maximum RTN standby operations before Alarm (1 to 10000)
screen.
6.2.18 Fast voltage recovery

The Fast Voltage Recovery feature when enabled, bypasses normal timing operation to
return voltage to an in-band condition as rapidly as possible. This is required for
unplanned and planned load transfers to allow critical loads to be shifted to a transformer
quickly without causing that transformer’s voltage to decrease too quickly.
When Fast Voltage Recovery is enabled in automatic mode and the voltage exceeds either
the Raise or Lower Band edges plus the Fast Voltage Recovery setting, the normal definite
or inverse time delay curve and setting is replaced with instantaneous operation (<0.5
seconds). In all cases, once the normal time delay has been replaced with instantaneous
operation, normal timing will not be in effect until the voltage returns in band. This feature
396 TCC300
User Manual
Configuration
can be enabled or disabled and will not affect other functions until the Fast Voltage
Recovery setting is exceeded.
The setting range is from 1.0 to 15.0 volts outside the normal band edges in 0.1 V
increments. Once the voltage is back in band, the instantaneous operation curve is
replaced by the normal definite or inverse time delay curve and setting. Subsequent
excursions outside the bandwidth will use the original time delay unless the voltage again
exceeds the Fast Voltage Recovery threshold setting.
When Fast Voltage Recovery is active, Overcurrent Blocking (Current limit setting) will
be bypassed should conditions require this block to be in effect. Fast Voltage Recovery is
not available if any paralleling method is active. If an Intertap delay is set in the control,
it will not be bypassed by this feature.
6.2.18.1 Enabling/Disabling and Setting Fast Voltage Recovery from the HMI
Tapchanger Type
3. Press the Right or Left arrow pushbutton, as necessary, until the "Nameplate" screen
is displayed.
4. Press the Down Arrow pushbutton as necessary to navigate to the "Fast Voltage
Recovery" menu item.
Fast Volt Recovery
disable C
7. Enabling/Disabling and Setting Fast Voltage Recovery from the HMI
• If Fast Voltage Recovery was "DISABLED", no further action is required.
• If Fast Voltage Recovery was "ENABLED", proceed as follows.
8. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as necessary, until the "Fast Volt R Setting"
Fast Volt R Setting
5.0 V C
10. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons, enter the desired Fast Voltage Recovery setting (1.0
to 15.0 V), then press the ENT pushbutton.
TCC300 397
User Manual
Configuration
6.2.18.2 Enabling/Disabling and Setting Fast Voltage Recovery from TCC600
2. Select "Enable" or "Disable" from the Fast Voltage Recovery section of the dialog
screen.
3. If Fast Voltage Recovery was "ENABLED", proceed as follows.
4. Enter the Fast Voltage Recovery setting (1.0 to 15.0 V).
screen.
398 TCC300
User Manual
Configuration
6.3 Parallel operation
6.3.1 Circulating current and delta VAR methods

The user with access to the Configuration Menu may select the circulating current method
of paralleling LTC transformers, or disable the feature. If the optional ΔVAR®1/ΔVAR2
methods were purchased, they may also be selected. Paralleling by the circulating current
method or the ΔVAR1 method involves a configuration in which each TCC300
Tapchanger Control is used with an ABB M‑0115A Parallel Balancing Module. The
control is provided with a current input which is representative of the circulating current
between two or more LTC transformers operating in parallel.
See Appendix A for the HMI Configuration Menus.
6.3.1.1 Circulating current/ΔVAR1
The general paralleling schemes for two and three transformer paralleling using the
circulating current method are shown in Figure 329, Figure 330 and Figure 331.
TCC300 399
User Manual
Configuration
GUID-1DF44008-F4FC-4E72-B7F9-894A23FF1004 V1 EN
Figure 329: Simplified Schematic of Current Circuit for TCC300 Paralleling Two
Transformers using the Circulating Current or ΔVAR® Method
1. 52 contacts are shown in the breaker closed position; 43P in parallel

position.
2. K3 is a circulating current sensitivity control.
3. M-0127A is a current relay to detect excessive circulating current.
400 TCC300
User Manual
Configuration
GUID-A9AB4C0B-39BE-44DB-8CFD-092C60404EFC V1 EN
Figure 330: TCC300 and TCC300M2067 Paralleling Scheme for Two Transformers
using the Circulating Current or ΔVAR® Method
TCC300 401
User Manual
Configuration
GUID-DCBCC020-ABDE-4640-9036-89604B2EEB76 V1 EN
Figure 331: TCC300 and TCC300M2067 Paralleling Scheme for Three

Transformers using the Circulating Current or ΔVAR® Method
402 TCC300
User Manual
Configuration
Figure 329 is a schematic of the current circuit only; redrawn from the Paralleling Scheme
figures to allow easier tracing of the load current (IL) and circulating current (Ip) paths.
current, is fed to the M‑0115A unit. Because of the secondary parallel connection,
however, this is actually the vector sum of the desired load current and any undesired
circulating current. The M‑0115A separates these currents, and sends them to the proper
load (LDC) and circulating current inputs of the associated control.
Two current loops are formed. One involves the K3 auxiliary transformers in each of the
M‑0115A units. This loop forms a measure of the transformer bank circulating current,
subtracted from the LDC control input and forced to flow into the control circulating
current input.
The second loop involves the K1 and K2 auxiliary transformers. They force the load
current to divide properly between the various controls so that each senses its proper
portion of the total bank load. Thus, the LDC setting for each control may properly be the
same, regardless of whether or not the associated transformer is being used in parallel.
The first current path shown (Circulating Current) has a current analogous in angle and
magnitude to the reactive current circulating through the paralleled transformers. It also
includes the M‑0127A Overcurrent Relay, which is used to detect excessive circulating
current and block the tapchanger movement, if this occurs. Also, a lamp will alert the
operator when excessive circulating current is detected.
The second path shown (Balance Current), connecting the K1 auxiliary CT of the
M‑0115A modules together, has a balance current which forces the two load currents of
transformers #1 and #2 to be identical. This means that any difference in currents must
flow in the circulating current path.
The third and fourth path shown (Half Current and LDC Current), connecting the K2
auxiliary CT of the M‑0115A modules together, ensures proper operation of the Load
Drop Compensator circuit if one of the transformers is taken out of service by opening its
breaker. For instance, if transformer #2 is taken out of service by opening breaker 52-2,
then half of transformer #1's load current is forced to flow through the half current loop.
In this way, transformer #1's voltage regulating control sees the same load current as it did
before, and the proper amount of line drop compensation in the transformer #1 control is
maintained. This circuit configuration and grounding points must be maintained, if
transformers are to be successfully paralleled.
A more detailed description of the theory of operation is available from ABB upon
request. Application Note #11, "Introduction to Paralleling of LTC Transformers by the
Circulating Current Method" and Application Note #13, "Advanced Paralleling of LTC
Transformers by the Circulating Current Method" provide a thorough analysis of parallel
LTC transformers operating by the circulating current method.
TCC300 403
User Manual
Configuration
It is suggested that either the non‑sequential or Intertap time delay be used when
paralleling.
The sensitivity of the control or the amount of control setpoint bias for a 200 mA
circulating current is 24 V. For circulating current applications, that is a 24 V setpoint shift
for 200 mA of total circulating current input. For ΔVAR1 applications, that is a 24 V
setpoint shift for 200 mA of reactive circulating current.
For applications with low transformer impedances, the circulating current or VArs per tap
difference is greater than in applications with high transformer impedances. This creates
a need for a method to adjust the sensitivity of the control according to the system
application.
On the circulating current application method and the ΔVAR1 application method, this is
accomplished with a sensitivity adjustment on the M‑0115A Parallel Balancing Module
(see the M‑0115A Instruction Book.)
In all M‑0115A applications, the M‑0115A sensitivity settings should be

equal on all paralleled transformers.
6.3.1.2 ΔVAR2 paralleling and ΔVAR2 paralleling + KeepTrack™
The theoretical basis for the ΔVAR®2 Method of paralleling is that paralleled
transformers are meant to SHARE the VAr load (as well as the KW load) of the load bus.
Since the KW sharing of the parallel transformers is determined by the relative
transformer impedances and NOT the tap position, KW flow should not effect tap position
choice. Further, that the best choice of loading parallel transformers is to maintain the VAr
sharing regardless of KW loading which can be accomplished with relative tap
positioning.
The ΔVAR Method will result in the VAr flow to the substation load to be shared in the
appropriate ratio of the paralleled transformers’ ratings. It should be noted that auxiliary
CT’s are required in circulating current schemes to balance the currents when
transformers with different impedances are paralleled. Those auxiliary CT’s are not
necessary when the ΔVAR Method is used.
The ΔVAR2 implementation is limited to use with no more than two transformers and
each transformer current is input to each control. This eliminates the need for the parallel
balancing module and removes the path for the installation of the overcurrent relay. For
this implementation, the sensitivity setting is added to the TCC300 Tapchanger Control
along with a circulating current overcurrent inhibit function. The ΔVAR2 implementation
also contains a CT ratio-matching setting making it unnecessary to match CT ratios
exactly to transformer MVA ratings for proper operation.
404 TCC300
User Manual
Configuration
The ΔVAR2 Method is incorporated in the ABB TCC300 Tapchanger Control, as an

option. This option internally calculates and compares the individual transformer VAr
flows. Decisions for voltage setpoint biasing are then made and implemented to change
tap positions in such a manner that the difference in VAr flow is minimized.
Action is taken continuously as the MVAr load is changing such that the magnitude of
difference in VAr loading is minimized (depending on the VAr difference of one, off-
optimum, tap position).
The use of LDC (line drop compensation) is precluded when ΔVAR2 is used since no
provision is made for the increase in load currents in one transformer when the other is out
of service. The result would be doubling the LDC effect when in independent operation.
6.3.1.3 ΔVAR2 connection
As shown in Figure 332, the current input is connected to the load current terminals of the
control and then into the circulating current terminals (Ip) of the paralleled transformer
control. Each control now sees the same voltage and each transformer current separately.
This allows each control to calculate the VAr flows in both transformers for comparison,
without externally sorting out the load and circulating current values. Breaker contact
52‑3b is used to signal theTCC300 Control to disable paralleling using the neutral light
input (Redefined when ΔVAR2 selected). An external independent/parallel switch (43P)
is suggested to provide manual control for testing and maintenance. The effectiveness of
this grounding is important for the recognition of this condition.
TCC300 405
User Manual
Configuration
Main CT
TRANS 1
52-1
Optional 2 1
LOADS
52-1b M-0169A Auxiliary 5.0 A
Current Transformer Main VT
0.2 A 90 Relay
52-2b 4 3
6 1
IP VT
52-3b 3
5
7
LOADS
Source PAR
Disable
R
L
4
Motor
9 L R
43P IL 52-3
Power In
2 8
Motor
Auxiliary
Relay Coils
LOADS
Main CT
TRANS 2
LOADS
52-2
Optional 2 1
52-1b M-0169A Auxiliary 5.0 A
Current Transformer Main VT
0.2 A 90 Relay
52-2b 4 3
6 1
IP VT
52-3b 3
5
7
PAR R
Disable
L
4
Motor
9 L R
43P IL
Power In
2 8
Motor
Auxiliary
Relay Coils
GUID-0CCD991A-A496-468E-BF35-526F1AD9D910 V1 EN
Figure 332: ΔVAR®2 Paralleling
Paralleling by the ΔVAR2 method does not use the M‑0115A Parallel Balancing Module.
This method of paralleling can only be used for two transformers. See Figure 332 for the
ΔVAR2 connections. Instead, the two load currents are brought into the control, and the
actual ΔVAR's which exist between the paralleled transformers is calculated internally.
When using the ΔVAR2 method, the control's load current input is to be connected to the
load current CT of the transformer which is controlling the tap position. The control's
circulating current is to be connected to the load current CT for the opposite paralleled
transformer.
406 TCC300
User Manual
Configuration
The measured voltage the TCC300 controls on each of the transformers will be biased in
such a way as to attempt to minimize the circulating current between the two. In the case of
ΔVAR, the tap positions will minimize the difference in VArs from each transformer.
For ΔVAR2 applications, there is a 24 V setpoint shift for 200 mA of calculated reactive
current difference between transformers. (ΔVAR2 is only applicable for two parallel
transformer applications.)
For applications with low transformer impedances, the circulating current or VArs per tap
difference is greater than in applications with high transformer impedances. This creates
a need for a method to adjust the sensitivity of the control according to the system
application.
On the ΔVAR®2 application method, which uses no M‑0115A module, a control setting
is provided to accomplishment the sensitivity adjustment.
In all ΔVAR2 applications, the sensitivity settings should be equal on all

paralleled transformer controls.
Exclusively for the ΔVAR2 method, there are three functions activated and set in the
Configuration menu for proper operation: ΔVAR2 Sensitivity, ΔVAR2 Reac Limit, and
ΔVAR2 I Ratio. When the ΔVAR option has not been purchased, these input screens will
be disabled.
The ΔVAR2 Sensitivity ranges from –4.0 to +4.0, as did the M‑0115A adjustment. At a
ΔVAR2 Sensitivity setting of 0.0, 100% of calculated reactive current difference will be
used to bias the setpoint. At a setting of –4.0, only 50% of the calculated reactive current
difference will be used to bias the setpoint, making the control less sensitive to the
circulating current. At a setpoint of +4.0, the bias will be adjusted by a value of 200% of
the calculated reactive current difference, making the control more sensitive to the system
current.
The ΔVAR2 Circ Limit I setpoint establishes a limit on the calculated reactive current
difference between transformers. The settings range from 5 mA to 200 mA in 1 mA
increments. If the calculated reactive current difference reaches this setpoint, the
operation of the control will be blocked and the alarm output function will be activated, if
enabled. The purpose of this limit is to stop any runaway condition. This feature is
required to replace the M‑0127A overcurrent relay used in the circulating current and
ΔVAR1 applications.
Care must be taken in setting the ΔVAR2 Circ Limit I, to ensure it is high
enough to allow a two or three tap difference from optimum in
transformers before operating. Some knowledge of system impedances
are useful in determining this setting, but the current difference may also
TCC300 407
User Manual
Configuration
be tested for immediate system conditions by reading the current change

when one tap is changed on either transformer.
The ΔVAR2 I Ratio is used to adjust the sensitivity to the line current input versus the
circulating current input (opposite transformer load current) to compensate for unequal
CT ratios between transformers. For proper operation with a ratio setting of 1, the ratio of
the CT ratios must be equal to the ratio of the transformer ratings (CT1/CT2=MVA1/
MVA2).
 TX1 Rating   TX2 CT Ratio  T

   = Ratio TX 1
 TX2 Rating   TX1 CT Ratio 
GUID-B2A8BFE8-DF9C-482A-A7A6-66CD23E437B4 V1 EN (Equation 7)
 TX2 Rating   TX1 CT Ratio  T

   = Ratio TX 2
 TX1 Rating   TX2 CT Ratio 
GUID-63BF9653-000A-43C9-A5A2-0E61A95FF8BA V1 EN (Equation 8)
Example:
A 20 MVA transformer is being paralleled with a 15 MVA transformer. If the CT ratios

are 2000 A and 1500 A to 0.2 A, no compensation would be required (both transformers
are fully loaded when the CT outputs are 200 mA.) However, if they each had 2000 A to
0.2 A CTs, the ΔVAR2 I Ratio on the 20 MVA transformer control should be 1.34, and the
ΔVAR2 I Ratio on the 15 MVA transformer control should be 0.75.
The settings for this ratio are 0.50 to 2.00, in 0.01 increments. When the setting is 0.50, the
control will be 0.50 times as sensitive to the VArs from the circulating current input versus
the load input current. The default setting for the sensitivity is 1.00, indicating the ratio of
the CT ratios are equal to the ratio of the transformer ratings.
This feature can also be used to replace the need for auxiliary transformer for matching
transformer CT ratios. No correction is necessary to compensate for impedance
differences in the transformers with ΔVAR operation.
For ΔVAR2 applications (without KeepTrack™), paralleling will be disabled if either

current input drops to less than approximately 10 mA or if a neutral input is present. When
ΔVAR2 operation is configured, the normal neutral input is directed to this duty rather
than the normal neutral light operation. It is highly recommended that this input be
connected to operate whenever any breaker opens which isolates the transformer from
parallel operation.
For ΔVAR2 Paralleling mode the Auxiliary Input A1 will be the ΔVAR2 Disable Input.
This is needed since the Neutral Position Input is used for KeepTrack.
408 TCC300
User Manual
Configuration
This input configuration has changed from previous firmware versions

(V01.05.13 and prior).
6.3.1.4 Selecting and Setting ΔVAR2 Paralleling Method from the HMI
Tapchanger Type
"Paralleling" menu.
4. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as necessary, until the "Paralleling Type" screen
is displayed.
Paralleling Type
DISABLE C
6. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons, select DVAR2 or DVAR2 (KeepTrack) then press
the ENT pushbutton.
DVAR2 Sensitivity
0.0
8. Press the ENT pushbutton. The following will be displayed
DVAR2 Sensitivity
0.0 C
9. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons, select the desired DVAR2 Sensitivity, then press
the ENT pushbutton.
• DVAR2 Reac I Lmt
• DVAR2 I Ratio
6.3.1.5 Selecting and Setting ΔVAR2 Paralleling Method from TCC600
TCC300 409
User Manual
Configuration
2. From the "Paralleling" section of the dialog screen select DVAr 2 or DVAr 2
(KeepTrack) Paralleling Type. Enter the desired DVAr2 Sensitivity, Reactive
Current Limit and Input Ratio.
GUID-4881EAFB-9162-4DE7-9B75-C3F6D8E940FA V1 EN
Figure 334: DVAr2 and DVAr2 (KeepTrack) Paralleling Settings (Configuration

Dialog Screen)

screen.
410 TCC300
User Manual
Configuration
6.3.2 Optional master/follower parallelling method

The Master/Follower Paralleling scheme employs the GOOSE messaging of the IEC
61850 protocol to provide peer to peer communications. The control can be placed in
either the Master or Follower mode if paralleling is to be achieved. The Master/Follower
settings can also be changed individually on each control through Setup/Configuration/
Paralleling. The Master/Follower Configuration Tool includes the settings for each
control in the network for the Master/Follower paralleling scheme.
TCC300 411
User Manual
Configuration
GUID-26B4E01A-A9E4-460F-B212-82D473C4DF76 V1 EN
Figure 337: Master/Follower Paralleling Settings (Configuration Dialog Screen)
GUID-1C232DA5-F848-4026-9280-69A574588EA4 V1 EN
6.3.2.1 Grouping operation algorithm (GOA)
This GOA determines the action that is taken by the control when it detects any OPEN Tie
Breakers in the network.
412 TCC300
User Manual
Configuration
GUID-528C13D5-EC59-4860-9A2E-0C3D90EC84EA V1 EN
Figure 339: Breaker/Control Network Map
Each control individually monitors the status of the Tie Breakers (A2, A3 Auxiliary
Inputs) and broadcasts to all the other controls these statuses via a GOOSE message. Each
control in turn processes the tie breaker statuses to produce a map of the network every 64
ms.
Each control upon detecting a change in any Breaker Status or Tap Position will issue a
GOOSE message to update all the other controls in the network with the new information.
The following rules are applied to produce the Control Network Map:
• The Master in the initial setup of the network should always be at the highest position
in the network map (e.g. position 8).
• The paralleling address of each control should be the same as the position it is located
in the network map (e.g. position 7 = address 7).
• All GOOSE messages are sorted according to their corresponding paralleling
addresses.
• The control scans all the tie breakers statuses (if any) in the downstream positions to
find the downstream boundary.
• The first OPEN status indicates the boundary has been reached. Similarly the control
scans all the upstream tiebreaker statuses (if any) to find the upstream boundary.
Once the boundaries are located the sub network is defined.
• If the control is a Master, the control will determine how many Followers are in its
network.
• If the control is a Follower, the Master/Follower Identification will be equal to the
address of the Master in that network.
TCC300 413
User Manual
Configuration
6.3.2.2 Master/follower alarm messages
The Master/Follower Alarm Messages that are displayed on the Control’s HMI display,
can be remotely observed from TCC600® utilizing the Monitor/Master/Follower Alarm
Messages menu selection. In addition to the lockout conditions, it also will display the
serial number of the Follower that caused the lockout condition for Tap Difference
Lockout.
GUID-12E92DF5-9596-44B9-BCA1-7A5D386A6C69 V1 EN
Figure 340: Master/Follower Alarm Messages
6.3.2.3 Lockout condition
There are two types of lockout conditions, Master Lockout and Follower Lockout. Any
lockout of the paralleling mode will initiate a Lockout alarm. When a lockout is active, the
unit issuing the lockout will stop any further GOOSE publishing and will stop load voltage
regulation. Also, the alarm can be configured as a DNP event, or as a report in the case of
IEC 61850. The lockout alarm will be displayed on the control front panel HMI display
and in the Master/Follower Configuration Tool.
Master/Follower Alarm messages can be observed for the connected

control from the TCC600 Monitor/Master/Follower Alarm Messages
menu item.
Master lockout
There are four Master Lockouts:
1. GOOSE Message Delay – When the control powers up in Master Mode, the control
will wait for approximately 65 sec to allow all the GOOSE messages from all the
Followers in the network to reach the Master. Once all GOOSE messages have been
received, the Master will start its normal algorithm. If within that initial 65 second
414 TCC300
User Manual
Configuration
period the Master does not receive all the GOOSE messages it expected, it will enter
the Master lockout state.
2. Tap Position Response Timeout Lockout – The Tap Position Response Timeout will
start after the Master has published its new tap position message after it has performed
a successful tap operation. If it doesn’t receive the tap position messages from all the
participating Followers in the network before the timer expires, then a Master
Lockout is issued.
3. Tap Difference Lockout – If the Tap position difference between any Follower and
the Master is greater than or equal to Tap Difference setting, the Master will enter the
lockout state.
4. Follower Communication Loss Lockout – If any follower does not send a valid
re‑transmitted GOOSE message within a 65 sec internal Follower Detection Lockout
"Keep Alive" time, then a lockout is issued, signaling a broken communication link.
Follower lockout
There are three types of Follower Lockout:
1. Master Communication Loss Lockout – When the Follower does not receive a valid
re-transmitted GOOSE message from the Master within a 65 second internal "Keep
Alive" time, and the previous Master GOOSE message indicates that the breaker
statuses were closed, then a Follower Lockout is activated. This Lockout is an
indication that communication with the Master has been lost.
2. Follower Communication Loss Lockout – If any follower does not send a valid re-
transmitted GOOSE message within a 65 sec internal Keep Alive time, then a lockout
is activated, indicating a broken communication link.
3. Tap Difference Lockout – If the Tap Position Difference between the Follower and
the Master is greater than or equal to the Tap Difference setting, a Follower Lockout
will be activated.
6.3.2.4 Master/follower configuration tool
TCC600® includes a Master/Follower Configuration Tool located in the Utility menu to

help configure the controls for the Master/Follower Paralleling scheme. The tool allows
the user to discover on a Local Area Network (LAN) all the ABB TCC300 controls that
have the Master/Follower feature. Note that the Master/Follower Paralleling scheme can
only be implemented on controls that are on the same network. In addition, if a multiple
network adapter exists on the host computer the configuration tool will allow the user to
select on which network card the tool should perform the discover of all TCC300 controls.
Failure to choose the correct network card may result in the tool not discovering all the
available TCC300 controls. Accessing the Master/Follower Paralleling Tool dialog
screen requires a Level 2 Access code.
TCC300 415
User Manual
Configuration
Discovered devices
Each discovered control and its data is displayed on the Master/Follower Configuration
Tool dialog screen. The data is organized into control identifiers, read only statuses, and
configurable (writable) settings. The control identifiers are indicated by the color
"yellow", read only statuses by "green", and configurable settings are identified by an
asterisk. NA indicates the data is not applicable.
The Control Identifiers are:
• SN – Serial Number of the device

• IP Address – IP address of the device
• User Line – User Logo on the device
The Read Only Statuses are:
• Status – Indicates whether the device is a Master, Follower or None and whether the
unit is in Lockout condition.
• Tap Pos – Tap position of the device
• A1 – Line Breaker status of the device
• A2 – Right Tie Breaker status of the device
• A3 – Left Tie Breaker status of the device
A1, A2, and A3 are references to the TCC300 Auxiliary Inputs.
The Configuration Tool allows the user to enter the following settings:
• Paralleling Mode – Master/Follower Paralleling Mode is automatically changed to

Master/Follower when settings are written to the control.
• Paralleling Address – The unique address for each device (Range 1 – 16)
• Mode – Master/Follower mode of operation. M = Master, F= Follower, N = None
• Tap Difference – The difference between Master and Follower tap positions for
which Lockout will be issued.
• Tap Position Response Timeout – Time within which the Followers have to be at the
same tap position as that of the Master (Range 1000 ms – 60000 ms). If the Tap
Position Response Timeout is greater than the Intertap Delay setting, then the Tap
Position Response Timeout is used as the Intertap Delay, so that the Master waits for
all the Followers to make a tapchange before the Master takes the next tap.
• # Devices – The number of total devices that are in the paralleling scheme (maximum
16 inclusive of the Master)
• Breaker In Use (A1) – Option to use the Line Breaker Status in the algorithm.
• Breaker Polarity – Positive or negative polarity of the Line Breaker.
• Right TB In Use (A2) – Option to use the Right Tie Breaker Status in the algorithm.
• Right TB Polarity – Positive or negative polarity of the Right Tie Breaker.
• Left TB In Use (A3) – Option to use the Left Tie breaker Status in the algorithm.
• Left TB Polarity – Positive or negative polarity of the Left Tie Breaker.
416 TCC300
User Manual
Configuration
6.3.2.5 Setting of masters and followers from TCC600
A minimum of 2 controls are required for the paralleling scheme to work. The Master unit
will be configured first and then the Follower(s).
This procedure requires communication to be established with the target

control (Master or Follower) with Level 2 Access.
Setting up Master Control from TCC600
1. Verify that the appropriate Setup Settings have been entered for the control
application.
2. Place the Master Control to be setup in Manual by selecting "Block" from the
Remote Control dialog screen "Remote Operation/Block Auto Control via
Communication (Comm Block)" section.
Figure 341: Remote Control Dialog Screen
3. Select Paralleling Type to be "Master/Follower" from the "Paralleling" section of

the "Configuration" dialog screen.
TCC300 417
User Manual
Configuration
4. Select "None" from the "Master/Follower Configuration" section of the

The Master/Follower Configuration settings can also be set utilizing

the Master/Follower Configuration Tool.
GUID-1C232DA5-F848-4026-9280-69A574588EA4 V1 EN
5. Enter the desired Master/Follower Configuration Settings from the "Master/

Follower Configuration Settings" section of the "Configuration" dialog screen:
• Paralleling Address (1 to 16) – The Master Paralleling Address must be the
highest address in the network. All Follower addresses must be a value less
than the Master. The control’ s position in the paralleling network is
determined by its paralleling address. As shown in Figure 339, Position 1
418 TCC300
User Manual
Configuration
should be assigned a paralleling address of 1, Position 2 a paralleling address

of 2 and so on, in an ascending order. In this example the Master control will
be in Position 8 with a Paralleling Address of 8.
• Number of Devices (2 to 16)
• Tap Difference (2 to 8)
• Tap Position Response Timeout (1000 to 60000 ms) The T ap Position
Response Timeout is the time within which the Followers have to be at the
same tap position as that of the Master (Range 1000 ms – 60000 ms). If the Tap
Position Response Timeout is greater than the Intertap Delay setting, then the
Tap Position Response Timeout is used as the Intertap Delay, so that the
Master waits for all the Followers to make a tapchange before the Master takes
the next tap.
• Line Breaker "Not In Use" or "In Use" (Auxiliary Input A1)
• Line Breaker Polarity "Positive" or "Negative"
• Right Tie Breaker "Not In Use" or "In Use" (Auxiliary Input A2)
• Right Tie Breaker Polarity "Positive" or "Negative"
• Left Tie Breaker "Not In Use" or "In Use" (Auxiliary Input A3)
• Left Tie Breaker Polarity "Positive" or "Negative"
Followers are in remote manual mode and operate in "Pulse Mode"

regardless of the mode of operation of the Raise/Lower Output
contacts.
Setting up Follower Control from TCC600
application.
2. Verify that the designated network Master Control operational mode is as follows:
• The control is in "Manual".
• The "Master/Follower Configuration" section of the Configuration dialog
screen is selected to "None".
3. Select Paralleling Type to be "Master/Follower" from the "Paralleling" section of
TCC300 419
User Manual
Configuration
4. Select "Follower" From the "Master/Follower Configuration" section of the

5. Enter the desired Master/Follower Configuration Settings from the "Master/
Follower Configuration Settings" section of the "Configuration" dialog screen:
• Paralleling Address (1 to 16) – The Follower Paralleling Address must be a
value less than the Master. The control’s position in the paralleling network is
determined by its paralleling address. As shown in Figure 339, Position 1
should be assigned a paralleling address of 1, Position 2 a paralleling address
of 2 and so on, in an ascending order. In this example the Master control will
be in Position 8 with a Paralleling Address of 8.
• Number of Devices (2 to 16)
• Tap Difference (2 to 8)
• Tap Position Response Timeout (1000 to 60000 ms) The Tap Position
Response Timeout is the time within which the Followers have to be at the
same tap position as that of the Master (Range 1000 to 60000 ms). If the Tap
Position Response Timeout is greater than the Intertap Delay setting, then the
Tap Position Response Timeout is used as the Intertap Delay, so that the
Master waits for all the Followers to make a tapchange before the Master takes
the next tap.
• Line Breaker "Not In Use" or "In Use" (Auxiliary Input A1)
• Line Breaker Polarity "Positive" or "Negative"
• Right Tie Breaker "Not In Use" or "In Use" (Auxiliary Input A2)
420 TCC300
User Manual
Configuration
• Right Tie Breaker Polarity "Positive" or "Negative"

• Left Tie Breaker "Not In Use" or "In Use" (Auxiliary Input A3)
• Left Tie Breaker Polarity "Positive" or "Negative"
6. Drive the Follower Tap Position to match the Master Tap Position.
7. Repeat Steps 3 through 6 for each Follower in the Master/Follower scheme.
8. Determine the Master Band Status, then proceed as follows:
9. If the Master Band Status is "In‑Band":
9.1. Select "Master" from the Master, "Master/Follower Configuration" section of
After placing the Master control in "Master" the Master will

not respond to any tapchange requests for 32 seconds.
9.2. When at least 32 seconds have elapsed, initiate a Raise or Lower tapchange
from the Master, Remote Control dialog screen "Tap Control" section.
9.3. Verify that all Followers initiate tapchanges to match the Master tap position.
9.4. If necessary, return the Master to an "In-Band" tap position.
9.5. Select "Unblock" from the Master, Remote Control dialog screen "Remote
Operation/Block Auto Control via Communication (Comm Block)" section.
Figure 345: Remote Control Dialog Screen
10. If the Master Band Status is not In‑Band:
TCC300 421
User Manual
Configuration
10.1. Adjust the Master tap position by initiating a tapchange as necessary to bring
the Master Band Status "In-Band" from the Master, Remote Control dialog
screen "Tap Control" section.
10.2. Drive each Follower tap position in the Master/Follower scheme to match the
Master tap position.
10.3. Select "Master" from the Master, "Master/Follower Configuration" section of

10.4. When at least 32 seconds have elapsed, initiate a Raise or Lower tapchange
from the Master, Remote Control dialog screen "Tap Control" section.
10.6. If necessary, return the Master to an "In-Band" tap position.
10.7. Select "Unblock" from the Master, Remote Control dialog screen "Remote
Operation/Block Auto Control via Communication (Comm Block)" section.
11. The Master/Follower Paralleling scheme is now in effect.
6.3.2.6 Setting of masters and followers from the HMI
A minimum of 2 controls are required for the paralleling scheme to work. The Master unit
will be configured first and then the Follower(s).
Setting up Master Control from the HMI
This procedure requires Level 2 Access.
application.
2. Place the Master Control to be setup in Manual.
Tapchanger Type
"Paralleling" menu.
is displayed.
422 TCC300
User Manual
Configuration
Paralleling Type
DISABLE C
8. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons, select the Paralleling Type to be "MASTER/
FOLLOWER", then press the ENT pushbutton.
9. Press the Down arrow pushbutton once, the "Master/Follower" screen will be
displayed.
10. Verify that the Master/Follower Configuration is selected to "NONE".
• If the Master/Follower Configuration is set to "NONE", proceed to the next
step.
• If the Master/Follower Configuration is not set to "NONE", utilize the arrow
pushbuttons to select "NONE", then press the ENT pushbutton.
11. Press the Down arrow pushbutton once, the "Paralleling Address" screen will be
displayed.
Paralleling Address
16
The Master P aralleling Address must be the highest address in the network. All
Follower addresses must be a value less than the Master.
The control’s position in the paralleling network is determined by its paralleling
address. As shown in Figure 339, Position 1 should be assigned a paralleling address
of 1, Position 2 a paralleling address of 2 and so on, in an ascending order. In this
example the Master control will be in Position 8 with a Paralleling Address of 8.
Paralleling Address
16 C
13. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons, enter the desired Paralleling Address (1 to 16) then
14. Press the Down arrow pushbutton once, the "Num. Devices" screen will be
displayed.
Number of De vices is the number of total devices that are in the paralleling scheme
(maximum 16 inclusive of the Master).
Num. Devices
2 C
16. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons, enter the total Number of Devices then press the
ENT pushbutton.
17. Press the Down arrow pushbutton once, the "T.P.R. Timeout" screen will be
displayed.
T.P.R. Timeout
60000 ms
TCC300 423
User Manual
Configuration
The Tap Position Response Timeout is the time within which the Followers have to
be at the same tap position as that of the Master (Range 1000 to 60000 ms).
If the Tap Position Response Timeout is greater than the Intertap Delay setting, then
the Tap Position Response Timeout is used as the Intertap Delay, so that the Master
waits for all the Followers to make a tapchange before the Master takes the next tap.
T.P.R. Timeout
60000 ms C
19. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons, enter the desired Tap Position Response Timeout
then press the ENT pushbutton.
20. Press the Down arrow pushbutton once, the "Breaker Option" screen will be
displayed.
line breaker
000000 C
22. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons, enter the desired Breaker Options:
Position 1 is the first position from the right.
Position 1 – Line Breaker (A1)

• "0" = Not Selected
• "1" = Selected
Position 2 – Line Breaker Polarity
• "0" = Positive
• "1" = Negative
Position 3 – Right Tie Breaker (A2)
• "1" = Selected
Position 4 – Right Tie Breaker Polarity
• "0" = Positive
• "1" = Negative
Position 5 – Left Tie Breaker (A3)
• "1" = Selected
Position 6 – Left Tie Breaker Polarity
424 TCC300
User Manual
Configuration
• "0" = Positive
• "1" = Negative
When all Break er Options have been entered, then press the ENT pushbutton.
23. Press the Down arrow pushbutton once, the "Tap Difference" screen will be
displayed.
The Tap Difference setting is the difference between Master and Follower tap
positions for which Lockout will be issued.
Tap Difference
2 C
25. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons, enter the desired Tap Difference setting (2 to 8)
Setting up Follower Control from the HMI
application.
2. Verify that the designated network Master Control operational mode is as follows:
• The control is in "Manual"
• The "Master/Follower Configuration" section of the Configuration dialog
screen is selected to "None".
If the designated netw ork Master Control is not in the operational mode described
above, then take the necessary steps to place the control in the described operational
mode before continuing.
Tapchanger Type
"Paralleling" menu.
is displayed.
Paralleling Type
DISABLE C
TCC300 425
User Manual
Configuration
8. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons, select the Paralleling Type to be "MASTER/

FOLLOWER", then press the ENT pushbutton.
9. Press the Down arrow pushbutton once, the "Master/Follower" screen will be
displayed.
Master/Follower
NONE C
11. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons select "FOLLOWER", then press the ENT
pushbutton.
12. Press the Down arrow pushbutton once, the "Paralleling Address" screen will be
displayed.
The Master P aralleling Address must be the highest address in the network. All
Follower addresses must be a value less than the Master.
The control’ s position in the paralleling network is determined by its paralleling
Paralleling Address
16 C
14. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons, enter the desired Paralleling Address (1 to 16) then
15. Press the Down arrow pushbutton once, the "Num. Devices" screen will be
displayed.
Number of De vices is the number of total devices that are in the paralleling scheme
(maximum 16 inclusive of the Master).
Num. Devices
2 C
17. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons, enter the total Number of Devices then press the
ENT pushbutton.
18. Press the Down arrow pushbutton once, the "T.P.R. Timeout" screen will be
displayed.
The Tap Position Response Timeout is the time within which the Followers have to
be at the same tap position as that of the Master (Range 1000 to 60000 ms).
If the Tap Position Response Timeout is greater than the Intertap Delay setting, then
the Tap Position Response Timeout is used as the Intertap Delay, so that the Master
waits for all the Followers to make a tapchange before the Master takes the next tap.
T.P.R. Timeout
426 TCC300
User Manual
Configuration
60000 ms C
20. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons, enter the desired Tap Position Response Timeout
21. Press the Down arrow pushbutton once, the "Breaker Option" screen will be
displayed.
22. Press the ENT pushbutton. If Level 2 Access is not active or has been previously
input, the following will be displayed.
line breaker
000000 C
23. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons, enter the desired Breaker Options:
Position 1 is the first position from the right.
Position 1 – Line Breaker (A1)

• "1" = Selected
Position 2 – Line Breaker Polarity
• "0" = Positive
• ""1" = Negative
Position 3 – Right Tie Breaker (A2)
• "1" = Selected
Position 4 – Right Tie Breaker Polarity
• "0" = Positive
• ""1" = Negative
Position 5 – Left Tie Breaker (A3)
• "1" = Selected
Position 6 – Left Tie Breaker Polarity
• "0" = Positive
• ""1" = Negative
When all Break er Options have been entered, then press the ENT pushbutton.
24. Press the Down arrow pushbutton once, the "Tap Difference" screen will be
displayed.
The Tap Difference setting is the difference between Master and Follower tap
positions for which Lockout will be issued.
TCC300 427
User Manual
Configuration
Tap Difference
2 C
26. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons, enter the desired Tap Difference setting (2 to 8)
27. Drive the Follower Tap Position to match the Master Tap Position.
28. Repeat the procedure above for each Follower in the Master/Follower scheme.
29. Determine the Master "Band Status" by navigating on the Master HMI menu to the
"Monitor/Status" menu item, then proceed as follows:
29.1. Press the Down arrow pushbutton as necessary to navigate to the "Tapchanger
Status" screen.
29.2. Press the ENT pushbutton. The control will display a summary of the
Tapchanger Status parameters.
TAP BDS PWR BLK VRD
0 lo fwd --- off
BDS = Band Status "lo, hi, ok"
29.3. If the Master Band Status is not In‑Band:
• Adjust the Master tap position by initiating a tapchange as necessary to
bring the Master Band Status In‑Band.
• Drive each Follower tap position in the Master/Follower scheme to
match the Master tap position.
30. With the Master Band Status In-Band "ok", proceed as follows:
30.1. From the Master Control HMI, navigate to the "Master/Follower" menu.
30.2. Press the ENT pushbutton. If prompted, enter a valid Level 2 Access Code.
The following will be displayed:
Master/Follower
NONE C
30.3. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons select "MASTER", then press the ENT
pushbutton.

30.4. When at least 32 seconds have elapsed, initiate a Raise or Lower tapchange.
30.6. Place the Master Control in Automatic and verify Automatic operation.
The Master/Follower Paralleling scheme is now in effect.
428 TCC300
User Manual
Configuration
6.3.3 Optional delta VAR peer to peer parallelling method

The Delta VAr Peer to Peer Paralleling method utilizes the difference in VArs between the
VAr contribution of an individual transformer and the average number of VArs (the sum
of VArs in the paralleled transformers, divided by the number of transformers paralleled)
produced in a parallel configuration. The difference in VArs is then converted to an
equivalent bias voltage. This bias voltage is utilized to proportionally increase or decrease
the control center band of the control based on the VAr deficiency or excess.
The Delta VAr Peer to Peer Paralleling method employs the GOOSE messaging element
of the IEC 61850 protocol to provide peer to peer communications. The paralleling
configuration consists of one Initiator (INI) control that holds the highest network address
and up to 15 Non‑Initiator (NINI) controls on the same network. All of the controls
perform their own calculations based on the information being passed between the
controls using the peer to peer communications. Once a control has been determined to be
the Initiator, it starts (initiates) the parallel calculations in the network (or sub-network) of
Non-Initiator controls.
The Delta VAr Peer to Peer settings are available to be changed individually on each
control through Setup/Configuration/Paralleling. Also included is the Delta VAr Peer to
Peer Paralleling Configuration Tool which contains the editable settings for each
individual control in the Delta VAr Peer to Peer paralleling network.
TCC300 429
User Manual
Configuration
GUID-B4AD5865-FC06-4CAC-BA98-547AA1CD232B V1 EN
Figure 346: Delta VAr Peer to Peer Paralleling Settings (Configuration Dialog
Screen)
430 TCC300
User Manual
Configuration
Figure 347: Delta VAr Peer to Peer Paralleling Configuration Tool Dialog Screen
6.3.3.1 Bus topology
Bus configurations are processed to divide the main paralleling group into several sub
groups. The algorithm that is used to accomplish this task is called the Grouping Operation
Algorithm (GOA).
The basic bus configurations supported are Single Bus, Ring Bus and Double Bus. In
addition to obtaining VArs or load Current information through communication, this
method has the capability to recognize which transformers are still in parallel in the event
of tiebreakers or switches being opened or closed. Depending on the bus configuration,
each control monitors 1 Line Breaker and 1 or 2 Tie Breakers.
A means to make commissioning of the paralleling system easier, TCC600 provides a

feature to detect all ABB controls that form part of the parallel network. After detection
of the controls, depending on the bus configuration selected, the user can view the
paralleling network as a whole and also individually configure each control.
Single bus
A Single Bus with eight transformers is shown in Figure 348.
TCC300 431
User Manual
Configuration
GUID-D6DD2EAF-5392-4BE6-BB3B-64BE90567BF6 V1 EN
Figure 348: Single Bus Breaker/Control Network Map
LB1 through LB8 are the Line Breakers and TB1-2 through TB7-8 are the Tie Breakers.
The user is required to enter the position of each control in the network.
The upstream control will be given Position 8 and consecutively decrement this number
as the user moves towards the downstream of this control. It is important to note that the
user should activate the Position 8 control last since this control is the Initiator, the one
responsible to start any timing signal/messages.
Ring bus
Figure 349 represents a Ring Bus with 8 transformers.
Ring Bus
High Side Bus
T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8
TCC300 TCC300 TCC300 TCC300 TCC300 TCC300 TCC300 TCC300
Position 1 i1 Position 2 i2 Position 3 i3 Position 4 i4 Position 5 i5 Position 6 i6 Position 7 i7 Position 8 i8
LB1 LB2 LB3 LB4 LB5 LB6 LB7 LB8
TB1-2 TB2-3 TB3-4 TB4-5 TB5-6 TB6-7 TB7-8
Low Side Bus
TB8-1
GUID-AFAE6202-2A2C-4B46-ABC8-B97C60D95344 V1 EN
Figure 349: Ring Bus Breaker/Control Network Map
432 TCC300
User Manual
Configuration
LB1 through LB8 are Line Breakers and TB1-2 through TB8-1 are the Tie Breakers which
take the transformer out of paralleling. Transformer 8 is connected to Transformer 1
through the Tie Breaker TB8-1 which makes the single bus a special case of a ring bus.
To isolate a single transformer or create two sub-networks, at least two Tie Breakers must
be open. For example, consider Figure 349. When it is time for the control in Position 8
on the ring bus to publish its GOOSE message, the control will determine whether Tie
Breakers TB8‑1 and TB7‑8 are both open. This would create two sub-networks.
Transformers 7 & 8 would be one paralleled network, and transformers 1 through 6 would
be a separate paralleled network. Each network would operate individually as separate
parallel groups.
The Ring Bus application is similar to a Single Bus application except that the last
designated control in the ring must evaluate the TB8-1 Tie Breaker and adjust the Delta
VAr Peer to Peer Paralleling system accordingly.
Double bus
Figure 350 represents a Double Bus with eight transformers.
Double Bus
High Side Bus
T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8
TCC300 TCC300 TCC300 TCC300 TCC300 TCC300 TCC300 TCC300
Position 1 i1 Position 2 i2 Position 3 i3 Position 4 i4 Position 5 i5 Position 6 i6 Position 7 i7 Position 8 i8
LB1 LB2 LB3 LB4 LB5 LB6 LB7 LB8
Low Side Bus A
DB1-A DB2-A DB3-A DB4-A DB5-A DB6-A DB7-A DB8-A
DB1-B DB2-B DB3-B DB4-B DB5-B DB6-B DB7-B DB8-B
Low Side Bus B

GUID-83AC47C0-A8FA-43FA-BFD0-1E4D259BF912 V1 EN
Figure 350: Double Bus Breaker/Control Network Map
LB1 through LB8 are the Line Breakers. DB1-A through DB8-A and DB1-B through
DB8-B are Double Bus Breakers, which connect the transformer to either the Low Side
Bus A or Low Side Bus B, or both.
There are two Low Side buses which the transformer can drive. The user must enter the
position of the control in the network. The downstream control should be given position
1 and consecutively increment this number as the user moves towards the right most
control. The Initiator address is incremented based on the Line breaker.
In a Double Bus application, paralleling groups are formed in the following ways:
TCC300 433
User Manual
Configuration
• If any adjacent Double Breakers DBx-A and DBx-B (on the same node Nx) are both
Closed, then every transformer whose DBx-A or DBx-B double breaker is Closed is
in parallel with each other. For example, if DB8-A and DB8-B are Closed, then if
DB1-A, DB2-B, DB3-B, DB4-A, DB5-B, DB6-B, DB7-A are Closed, then all
transformers are paralleled.
• There can be a maximum of two Paralleling Groups, only if none of the adjacent
Double Breakers DBx-A and DBx-B (on the same node Nx) are both Closed. For
example, if DB1-A, DB2-B, DB3-A, DB4-B, DB5-A, DB6-B, DB7-A, DB8-B then
T1,T3,T5,T7 are in one group and T2, T4, T6, T8 are in the other group.
Table 58: Double Bus Truth Table

XFMR Position DA(x) Double DB(x) Double LB(x) Line Breaker Parallel Condition
Breaker Breaker
1 0 0 0
0 1 0 0
0 0 1 0
X 1 0 1 1
0 1 1 2
1 1 1 3
1 1 0 3
• Parallel Condition = 0 The transformer at position "X" is not contributing to any load
and not paralleling
• Parallel Condition = 1 The transformer at position "X" is contributing to Low Side
Bus A and is in Paralleling Group 1
• Parallel Condition = 2 The transformer at position "X" is contributing to Low Side
Bus B and is in Paralleling Group 2
• Parallel Condition = 3 The Low Side Bus A and Low Side Bus B are tied together,
therefore all transformers whose Parallel Condition = 1 or 2, are in parallel
If a unit has either Tie Breaker closed, and any other unit has both closed,
then the first unit (with one Tie Breaker closed) is still paralleled on both
buses.
6.3.3.2 Grouping operation algorithm (GOA)
This GOA determines the action that is taken by the control when it detects any Open Tie
Breakers in the network.
434 TCC300
User Manual
Configuration
GUID-D6DD2EAF-5392-4BE6-BB3B-64BE90567BF6 V1 EN
Figure 351: Single Bus Breaker/Control Network Map
Each control individually monitors the status of the Tie Breakers (A2, A3 Auxiliary
Inputs) connected to its section of the bus, and broadcasts to all the other controls these
statuses via a GOOSE message. Each control in turn processes the tie breaker statuses
from the other controls to produce a map of the network every 64 ms.
Each control upon detecting a change in any Breaker Status will issue a GOOSE message
to update all the other controls in the network with the new information.
The following rules are applied to produce the Control Network Map:
• The Initiator in the initial setup of the network should always be at the highest
position in the network map (e.g. Position 8).
• The paralleling address of each control should be the same as the position it is located
in the network map (e.g. Position 7 = Address 7).
• All GOOSE messages are sorted according to their corresponding paralleling
addresses.
• The control scans all the tie breakers statuses (if any) in the downstream positions to
find the downstream boundary.
• The first OPEN status indicates the boundary has been reached. Similarly the control
scans all the upstream tie breaker statuses (if any) to find the upstream boundary.
Once the boundaries are located the sub network is defined.
• In each sub network the control with the highest paralleling address becomes the
Initiator.
• If the control is a Initiator, the control will determine how many Non-Initiators are in
its network.
• The Initiator then starts the paralleling calculations in the controls in its network (or
sub network).
TCC300 435
User Manual
Configuration
6.3.3.3 Delta VAr peer to peer paralleling alarm messages
The Delta VAr Peer to Peer Paralleling Alarm Messages that are displayed on the
Control’s HMI display are also displayed on the TCC600® "Metering & Status" screen
Table 59: Delta VAr Peer to Peer Paralleling front panel alarms
Message Description
Alarm Active P2P Sympathy Lockout The Sympathy Lockout/Alarm actuates when a
control detects that another control in the network
has locked out due to a Tie Breaker Status Conflict
Lockout or a Delta VAr Limit Lockout.
The Sympathy Lockout/Alarm will reset when the
control with the Tie Breaker Status Conflict Lockout
or Delta VAr Limit Lockout resets the lockout, or if
cleared by the user.
Alarm Active P2P INI Comm Lockout The Initiator Communications Lockout alarm will
actuate when an Initiator fails to receive the expected
messages for three consecutive Peer to Peer Update
Frames.
The Initiator will enter lockout and stop sending
GOOSE messages which effectively disables the
Peer to Peer paralleling scheme. This lockout can
only be cleared by the user.
Alarm Active P2P React I Limit LO The Reactive Current Limit Lockout alarm actuates
when the calculated Reactive Current value is
greater than the configured Reactive Current limit.
This lockout/alarm can only be cleared by the user.
Alarm Active P2P NINI Detect Lockout Non - Initiator Detection Lockout – When the control
powers up in Initiator Mode, the control will wait for
approximately 65 seconds to allow all the GOOSE
messages from all the Non-Initiators in the network to
reach the Initiator. Once all GOOSE messages have
been received, the Initiator will start its normal
algorithm and the algorithm of the other controls in its
network.
If within that initial 65 second period the Initiator does
not receive all the GOOSE messages it expected, it
will enter the Initiator Lockout state. This lockout/
alarm can only be cleared by the user.
Alarm Active P2P Brk Status Confl LO The Breaker Status Conflict Lockout alarm activates
when a control detects that its status for a tie breaker,
shared with another control, disagrees with that
unit's status for the same tie breaker.
The Breaker Status Conflict Lockout alarm is only
applicable in the "Single" and "Ring Bus" topology.
Alarm Active P2P Msg Rsp Time Lockout The Message Response Time Lockout alarm will
actuate when a Non-Initiator has not received all the
expected GOOSE messages within the specified
time period for three consecutive update periods.
436 TCC300
User Manual
Configuration
6.3.3.4 Lockouts
The Delta VAr Peer to Peer Paralleling Mode includes the following lockouts:
• Initiator Lockout
• Non-Initiator Lockout
• Shared Lockout
Any lockout of the paralleling mode will initiate a Lockout alarm. When a lockout is
active, the unit issuing the lockout will stop any further GOOSE publishing and will stop
load voltage regulation. Also, the alarm can be configured as a DNP event, or as a report
in the case of IEC 61850. The lockout alarm will be displayed on the control front panel
HMI display and in the TCC600 Metering & Status screen.
Initiator lockout
There are two Initiator Lockouts:
1. Non-Initiator Detection Lockout – When the control powers up in Initiator Mode, the
control will wait for approximately 65 seconds to allow all the GOOSE messages
from all the Non-Initiators in the network to reach the Initiator. Once all GOOSE
messages have been received, the Initiator will start its normal algorithm. If within
that initial 65 second period the Initiator does not receive all the GOOSE messages it
expected, it will enter the Initiator Lockout state. This lockout can only be cleared by
the user.
2. Communication Loss Lockout – The Initiator will enter lockout and stop sending
GOOSE messages if it fails to receive any expected messages for three consecutive
Peer to Peer Update Frames. This effectively disables the Peer to Peer paralleling
scheme. This lockout can only be cleared by the user.
Non-initiator lockout
There are two Non-Initiator Lockouts:
1. Initiator Communication Loss Lockout – When the Non-Initiator does not receive a
valid Initiator GOOSE message within the Peer to Peer Update Frame, it will enter the
Non‑Initiator lockout state. This lockout can only be cleared by the user.
2. Communication Loss Lockout – A Non‑Initiator will enter lockout state and stop
sending its GOOSE messages if it fails to receive any expected messages for three
consecutive Peer to Peer Update Frames. This condition will eventually cause the
Initiator to disable the Peer to Peer paralleling scheme.
Shared lockouts
There are three lockouts that are shared between Initiator and Non-Initiator controls:
1. Tie Breaker Status Conflict Lockout – The Tie Breaker Status Conflict Lockout
activates when a control detects that its status for a tie breaker, shared with another
TCC300 437
User Manual
Configuration
control, disagrees with that unit's status for the same tie breaker. The Tie Breaker
Status Conflict Lockout is only applicable in the "Single" and "Ring Bus" topology.
Any control receiving a GOOSE message indicating that a unit is in a Tie Breaker
Status Conflict Lockout will immediately enter lockout state. This lockout can only
be cleared by the user.
2. Delta VAr Limit Lockout – The Delta VAr Limit Lockout actuates when the
calculated Delta VAr value is greater than the configured Delta VAr limit. This
lockout can only be cleared by the user.
3. Sympathy Lockout – The Sympathy Lockout actuates when a control detects that
another control in the network has locked out due to a Tie Breaker Status Conflict
Lockout or a Delta VAr Limit Lockout. The Sympathy Lockout will reset when the
control with the Tie Breaker Status Conflict Lockout or Delta VAr Limit Lockout
resets the lockout, or if cleared by the user. If the Sympathy Lockout was cleared by
the user, the control will re-enter the lockout state if any GOOSE messages indicate
that either the Tie Breaker Status Conflict Lockout or Delta VAr Limit Lockout state
still exists.
6.3.3.5 Delta VAr peer to peer paralleling configuration tool
TCC600® includes a Delta VAr Peer to Peer Paralleling Configuration Tool located in the
Utility menu to help configure the controls for the Delta VAr Peer to Peer Paralleling
scheme.
Figure 352: Delta VAr Peer to Peer Paralleling Configuration Tool Dialog Screen
438 TCC300
User Manual
Configuration
The tool allows the user to discover on a Local Area Network (LAN) all the ABB TCC300
controls that have the Delta VAr Peer to Peer feature. Note that the Delta VAr Peer to Peer
Paralleling scheme can only be implemented on controls that are on the same network. In
addition, if a multiple network adapter exists on the host computer the configuration tool
will allow the user to select which network card the tool is to perform the discover of all
TCC300 controls.
Failure to choose the correct network card may result in the tool not discovering all the
available TCC300 controls. Accessing the Delta VAr Peer to Peer Paralleling
Configuration Tool dialog screen requires a Level 2 Access code.
Discovered paralleled devices

Each discovered control and its data is displayed on the Delta VAr Peer to Peer
Configuration Tool dialog screen. The data is organized into control identifiers, read only
statuses, and configurable (writable) settings. The control read only statuses are indicated
by the color "gray", and configurable settings are identified by Bold Type. NA indicates
the data is not applicable.
The Control Identifiers are:
• SN – Serial Number of the device

• IP Address – IP address of the device
• User Line – User Logo on the device
The Read Only Statuses are:
• Paralleling Status – Indicates whether the device is a DVAr (1) Initiator or DVAr (2)
Non-Initiator, or None and whether the unit is in a Lockout condition.
• Tap Pos – Tap position of the device (if available)
• DVAr Current
• A1 – Line Breaker status of the device
• A2 – Right Tie Breaker status of the device
• A3 – Left Tie Breaker status of the device
A1, A2, and A3 are references to the TCC300 Auxiliary Inputs.
The Configuration Tool allows the user to enter the following settings:
• Topology – Single Bus, Ring Bus or Double Bus topologies may be entered.
• Number of Devices – The number of total devices that are in the paralleling scheme
(maximum 16 inclusive of the Initiator)
• Paralleling Address – The unique address for each device (Range 1 – 16)
TCC300 439
User Manual
Configuration
• Sensitivity – Allows the user to scale the control's reaction to changes in Reactive
Circulating Current (Irc). The following data demonstrates the linear relationship
between the Sensitivity setting and the % Multiplier (Range -4.0 to +4.0).
• -4.0 = Irc • 50 %
• -2.0 = Irc • 75 %
• 0.0 = Irc • 100 %
• +2.0 = Irc • 150 %
• +4.0 = Irc • 200 %
• Reactive Circulating Current Limit – The Reactive Circulating Current Limit is the
maximum Delta VAr value allowed for bandcenter adjustment. Range and units are
dependent on the Aux Current Transformer units display setting in TCC300.
Table 60: Reactive Circulating Current Limit values
CT Display Range Units
200 mA 5...200 mA
1 A1) 0.02...1.00 A
5 A1) 0.1...5.0 A
1) Calculated from the actual 200 mA connected current

• MVA Rating – The MVA rating of the transformer (Range 1.0 to 1000.0).
• Current Multiplier – The overall ratio of CT supplying the load current to the control,
including the main CT and any auxiliary CTs. For example, if the main CT is 600 to
5 A with auxiliary CT of 5 to 0.2 A, then current multiplier is 600/0.2 = 3,000. (Range
1 to 32600).
• Peer to Peer Update Speed – The time period allocated to read all the paralleled units'
relevant data, make the necessary calculations and disseminate paralleling driven
updates to the system (Range 1000 to 10000 ms).
• Peer to Peer Current Multiplier Correction – A scaling factor to compensate Delta
Vars Calculation, if the CT value is not in the ratio to the MVA rating (Range 20 to
500 %).
• Load Side Breaker Configuration – Can be set to Not Used, 52a (positive polarity), or
• Right Tie Breaker Configuration – Can be set to Not Used, 52a (positive polarity), or
• Left Tie Breaker Configuration – Can be set to Not Used, 52a (positive polarity), or
• Polling Interval – The Polling Interval of the Configuration Tool can be set from 3 to
10 seconds. When Enab led, the user must select "Discover Paralleled Devices" to
start polling the controls.
The Configuration Tool also provides the means to:
• Save Configurations
• Reset Alarms
440 TCC300
User Manual
Configuration
6.3.3.6 Delta VAr peer to peer paralleling application
A minimum of two controls are required for the Delta VAr Peer to Peer Paralleling scheme
to function. The Delta VAr Peer to Peer Paralleling scheme can accommodate up to
sixteen controls (including the Initiator Control which has the highest assigned numerical
Paralleling Address). The Non-Initiator controls which have a lower Paralleling Address
are configured first and then the Initiator control which starts the timing of the messaging.
Control network map determination

The Delta VAr Peer to Peer Paralleling settings for each control must meet the criteria
described below based on the Bus Topology. It is recommended that the user create a
Control Network Map of the proposed Delta VAr Peer to Peer Paralleling scheme similar
to those presented in Figure 348, Figure 349 and Figure 350:
The following criteria must be incorporated in the user's Control Network Map to properly
implement the Delta VAr Peer to Peer Paralleling scheme:
• The Bus Topology must be identifiable as either Single Bus, Ring Bus or Double Bus.
• The Initiator in the initial setup of the network must always be at the highest position
in the Control Network Map. For example, Position 8, Figure 348.
• The Paralleling Address of each control must be the same as the position that it is
located at in the Control Network Map. For example, Position 7 = Address 7.
6.3.3.7 Setting up Delta VAr Peer to Peer Paralleling Control from TCC600
This procedure requires communication to be established with the target control (Initiator
or Non-Initiator) with Level 2 Access.
Until the Initiator control is added to the Delta VAr Peer to Peer
Paralleling scheme the Non-Inititator controls will not respond to system
changes.
1. Determine the number of controls in the Delta VAr Peer to Peer Paralleling scheme
from the Control Network Map.
2. For the first Non-Initiator control to be setup, verify that all the appropriate Setup
Settings other than the "Paralleling Type" setting have been entered for the control
application.
3. From the Paralleling Type section of the TCC600® Configuration dialog screen
select "Peer2Peer DVAr".
TCC300 441
User Manual
Configuration
4. From the Paralleling Options section of the Configuration dialog screen, enter the
following settings consistent with the control's position in the Control Network
Map:
• Number of Devices – Total number of controls in the Delta VAr Peer to Peer
Paralleling scheme determined in Step 1, (2 to 16).
• Sensitivity (-4.0 to +4.0)
• Reactive Circulating Current Limit
Range and units are dependent on the Aux Current Transformer units display setting
in TCC300.
Table 61: Reactive Circulating Current Limit values
CT Display Range Units
200 mA 5...200 mA
1 A1) 0.02...1.00 A
5 A1) 0.1...5.0 A
1) These are calculated from the actual 200 mA connected current.
• Paralleling Address (Control Network Map position, 1 to X)

• Peer to Peer Update Speed (1000 to 10000 ms)
• MVA Rating (1.0 to 1000.0)
• Peer to Peer Current Multiplier Correction (20 to 500 %)
442 TCC300
User Manual
Configuration
• Topology (Single Bus, Ring Bus or Double Bus)

• Load Side Breaker Configuration (Not Used, 52A Positive Polarity, or 52B
Negative Polarity)
• Right Tie Breaker Configuration (Not Used, 52A Positive Polarity, or 52B
Negative Polarity)
• Left Tie Breaker Configuration (Not Used, 52A Positive Polarity, or 52B
Negative Polarity)
5. Repeat Steps 2 through 4 for the remaining Non-Initiator controls.
After placing the Initiator control in the Delta VAr Peer to Peer
Paralleling scheme the controls will not respond to any tapchange
requests for 30 seconds.
6. Repeat Steps 2 through 4 for the Initiator control.

7. The Delta VAr Peer to Peer Paralleling scheme is now in effect.
The proper oper ation of the Delta VAr Peer to Peer Paralleling scheme should be
verified by performing the Delta VAr Peer to Peer Paralleling Test Procedure.
6.3.3.8 Setting up Delta VAr Peer to Peer Paralleling Control from the HMI
1. Determine the number of controls in the Delta VAr Peer to Peer Paralleling scheme
from the Control Network Map determined earlier in this section.
2. For the first Non-Initiator control to be setup, verify that all the appropriate Setup
Settings other than the "Paralleling Type" setting have been entered for the control
application.
Tapchanger Type
"Paralleling" menu.
is displayed.
Paralleling Type
DISABLE C
TCC300 443
User Manual
Configuration
8. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons, select the Paralleling Type to be "PEER2PEER

DELTAVAR", then press the ENT pushbutton.
9. Press the Down arrow pushbutton as necessary, to navigate to the "P2P DVar
Sensitivity" menu.
P2P DVar Sensitivity
0.0 C
11. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons, enter the desired P2P DVar Sensitivity (-4.0 to
+4.0), then press the ENT pushbutton.
• DVAR2 Reac I Lmt
• Bus Topology
• Paralleling Address [1]
• Number of Devices
• P2P Update Speed
• Load Side Breaker Configuration
• Right Tie Breaker Configuration
• Left Tie Breaker Configuration
• MVA Rating
• Current Multiplier Correction
The control’ s position in the paralleling network is determined by its paralleling
13. Repeat the Configuration Steps for the remaining controls. The control with the
highest address (the Initiator) must be setup last.
After placing the Initiator control in the Delta VAr Peer to Peer
Paralleling scheme the controls will not respond to any tapchange
requests for 30 seconds.
14. The Delta VAr Peer to Peer Paralleling scheme is now in effect.
The proper oper ation of the Delta VAr Peer to Peer Paralleling scheme should be
verified by performing the Delta VAr Peer to Peer Paralleling Test Procedure.
[1] The Initiator Paralleling Address must be the highest address in the network. All Non-Initiator addresses must be a value less than the Initiator.
444 TCC300
User Manual
Configuration
6.4 Tap settings
6.4.1 Tap information

The TCC300 Digital Tapchanger Control tap position information applies to many
different configurations of tapchangers, for example, ±16 taps, 1...17 taps, ±10 taps, 1...33
taps, and so on. Two configuration points, Lowest Tap and Highest Tap, are assigned to
allow the user to select the range of a specific tap changer. The Highest Tap range is 0...33
taps, and the Lowest Tap range is –33...+29 taps. The user is able to program the control
to select the method of tap position knowledge or to disable this feature.
Table 62: Tap Information Screen Selections
Screen resolutions Tap position knowledge Current range Screens disabled
method
XFMR EXTERNAL #3 Current Loop 0...1 mA Primary & Secondary
Source Voltage
XFMR EXTERNAL #2 Current Loop 4...20 mA Primary & Secondary
Source Voltage
XFMR EXTERNAL #1 Current Loop 0...1; 0...2; or ±1 mA Primary & Secondary
Source Voltage
REG EXTERNAL #3 Resistor Divider N/A None
REG EXTERNAL #2 Current Loop 4...20 mA None
REG EXTERNAL #1 Current Loop 0...1; 0...2; or ±1 mA None
INTERNAL Motor Direct Drive N/A None
KEEPTRACK KeepTrack
CONTACT KT 1R1L Direct Contact N/A Primary & Secondary
KeepTrack Source Voltage
CONTACT KT 1N Direct Contact N/A Primary & Secondary
KeepTrack Source Voltage
DISABLE None None Primary & Secondary
Source Voltage, Tap
Position
6.4.1.1 Load tapchanger (LTC) positive tap position knowledge
With the advent of Smart Grid initiatives, Utility SCADA systems require positive tap
position information for Real Time Power Flow Calculations that are required for proper
implementation of their Integrated Volt VAr Management (IVVM) programs. This
section reviews several different methods that can be used to provide positive tap position
knowledge in LTC transformer applications. The following positive tap position
knowledge methods will be reviewed that can be applied in new and retrofit applications
depending on installed equipment.
TCC300 445
User Manual
Configuration
• Contact KeepTrack™
• Shaft Coupled KeepTrack™
• Resistor Divider KeepTrack™
• Motor Direct Drive KeepTrack™
6.4.1.2 Contact KeepTrack™
TCC300 Tapchanger Control Firmware Version D-0214V01.06.04 and above include the
1R/1L and 1N Contact KeepTrack methods. No cost firmware upgrades are available for
TCC300 Tapchanger Controls with earlier firmware versions.
There are two basic methods of Contact KeepTrack. The applicable method used depends
on whether a neutral contact is available that will always stay closed while the LTC is on
neutral, including multiple neutrals. Both methods require that up to four contacts be
available and accessible in the LTC to operate correctly.
The original TCC300 Voltage Reduction inputs are now used for the Aux Raise and Aux
Lower Inputs required by the Contact KeepTrack methods. Thus, the voltage reduction
function via physical contacts will not be available when Contact KeepTrack is selected,
but voltage reduction via communications is not affected.
The Raise and Lower Outputs from the control must agree with the operation of the
external Aux Raise and Aux Lower status contacts, and this must be maintained whether
the tapchanger is on the low or the high side of the transformer.
The Neutral input on the TCC300 is used for Tap Calibration in the Contact KeepTrack
method.
Contact KeepTrack Method I – Using 1R/1L Contact Input

If the neutral contact can’t be used, the following four Cam switch based dry contacts are
required.
• Aux Raise contact – This contact must close and open once between taps each time
the LTC takes a tap in only the Raise direction.
• Aux Lower contact – This contact must close and open once between taps each time
the LTC takes a tap in only the Lower direction.
• 1R contact – This contact must close when the tapchanger moves onto the 1 Raise tap
position and open when leaving it.
• 1L Contact – This contact must close when the tapchanger moves onto the 1 Lower
tap position and open when leaving it.
All four contacts must be either dry contacts or run through auxiliary relay contacts if wet.
The TCC300 control Voltage Reduction, Neutral, and Counter inputs require dry inputs
wetted internally with 12 Vdc.
446 TCC300
User Manual
Configuration
TCC300 With Raise/Lower Contact KeepTrack ™

Feedback Inputs
TCC300
TCC300 VR1 Aux Raise contact N.O.
Input (Changes state for each Raise operation)
(Acts as a Raise counter input)
Switch 1 Cam
TCC300 VR2 Aux Lower contact N.O.

Input (Changes state for each Lower operation)
(Acts as a Lower counter input)
Switch 2 Cam
TCC300
Neutral Input 1R contact N.O.
(Closes when in Tap 1R)
Switch 3 Cam
TCC300
Counter Input 1L contact N.O.
(Closes when in Tap 1L)
Switch 4 Cam
TCC300 +12 Vdc

wetting output
GUID-F32C977A-9698-4555-A951-84AE67051173 V1 EN
Figure 354: Cam Switches Available With Dry Contacts
TCC300 447
User Manual
Configuration
TCC300
Aux Relays
TCC300 VR1 Aux Raise contact N.O.

(Changes state for each Raise operation)
Input
120 Vac
Aux Relay 1
TCC300 VR2 Aux Lower contact N.O.

(Changes state for each Raise operation)
Input
120 Vac
Aux Relay 2
TCC300 1R contact N.O.

(Closes when on Tap 1R)
Neutral Input
120 Vac
Aux Relay 3
TCC300 1L contact N.O.

(Closes when on Tap 1L)
Counter Input
120 Vac
Aux Relay 4
TCC300 +12 Vdc

wetting output
GUID-A2C94934-6EC0-4BA4-A071-8EAE55F907D3 V1 EN
Figure 355: Cam Switches Available With Wetted 120 Vac
Example of Contact KeepTrack Method I – Using 1R/1L Contact Input

In this example, an out‑of‑band condition occurs which causes the raise output from the
TCC300 to turn on. This will cause current to flow to the motor causing it to start a raise
operation. The Aux Raise contact will close which will send directional feedback to the
VR1 Input of the TCC300. This will tell the control to increment the Contact KeepTrack
tap position by 1 tap.
Once the raise operation is completed, the Aux Raise contact will open removing the input
to VR1. When the unit no longer requires a raise output the raise output from the control
will be turned off. If a lower operation is required then the same steps will occur except
that Aux Lower contact will close and VR2 will be used.
Activation of the 1R contact in conjunction with the Aux Raise contact closing, then
opening will cause the Contact KeepTrack tap position to be set to 1R. If the next operation
results in the 1R contact opening in conjunction with the Aux Lower contact closing then
opening, then Contact KeepTrack will increment to Neutral. Once in Neutral, the control
will continue to display Neutral until either the 1R or 1L contact operates in conjunction
448 TCC300
User Manual
Configuration
with the appropriate Aux Raise or Lower contact. That allows the control to compensate
for multiple neutrals.
Contact KeepTrack Method II – Using Neutral Contact Input

This method provides Contact KeepTrack for LTC transformers that have dedicated
Raise, Lower, and a Neutral contact that stays closed while the LTC is on neutral,
including multiple neutrals. A Counter contact may also be required.
This Contact KeepTrack method requires a pulsed input for each tap operation either raise
or lower. The raise contact input to the TCC300 must close and open each time the tap
position raises by one tap as is the case when the contacts are derived from Cam switches.
Likewise the lower contact input to the TCC300 must close and open each time the tap
position lowers by one tap.
If the contacts are derived from 84R and 84L relays, an additional contact derived from the
operations counter must be placed in series with them to provide the required pulsed input.
With these inputs the TCC300 Control can "keep track" of the tap position since it will
always receive either a raise or lower pulse as an indication of which direction the
tapchanger is moving.
The neutral contact input recalibrates the control tap position to neutral if needed. This
provides an extremely positive indication that the tapchanger is performing either a raise
or lower operation.
To implement the Contact KeepTrack™ Method II scheme with contacts derived from
Cam switches, the Contact KeepTrack method requires that three contacts be available
and accessible in the LTC to operate correctly.
• Aux Raise contact – This contact closes when the LTC takes a tap in the Raise
direction.
• Aux Lower contact – This contact closes when the LTC takes a tap in the Lower
direction.
• Neutral contact – This contact must close when the unit moves onto the Neutral tap
All three contacts must be either dry contacts or run through auxiliary relay contacts if wet.
The TCC300 Voltage Reduction inputs, now used for the Aux Raise and Aux Lower
contact inputs, and the Neutral input require dry contacts wetted internally with 12 Vdc.
TCC300 449
User Manual
Configuration
TCC300 With Raise/Lower Contact KeepTrack ™ Feedback Inputs
TCC300
TCC300 VR1
Input Aux Raise contact N.O.
Switch 1 Cam
TCC300 VR2
Input Aux Lower contact N.O.
Switch 2 Cam
TCC300
Neutral Input
Neutral contact
Switch 3 Cam
TCC300 +12 Vdc

wetting output
GUID-46B88126-939F-458B-B5D8-B217B5802FEF V1 EN
Figure 356: Cam Switches Available
To implement the Contact KeepTrack Method II scheme with 84R and 84L derived
contacts, the KeepTrack method requires that four contacts be available and accessible in
the LTC to operate correctly.
• Aux Raise contact – This contact closes when the LTC takes a tap in the Raise
direction.
• Aux Lower contact – This contact closes when the LTC takes a tap in the Lower
direction.
• Counter contact – This contact is only required when using Aux Relays and must
close and open when the unit moves in either the Raise or Lower tap position.
• Neutral contact – This contact must close when the unit moves onto the Neutral tap
Auxiliary relays must be connected to the 84R and 84L contacts to provide dry contacts
for the Aux Raise and Aux Lower inputs. The Neutral and Counter contacts must be either
dry contacts or run through auxiliary relay contacts if wet. The Aux Raise and Aux Lower
contacts are connected in series with a dry Operations Counter contact. They are then
wetted with the TCC300’s internal 12 Vdc wetting voltage thereby providing the required
pulsed signals to properly increment tap position.
450 TCC300
User Manual
Configuration
TCC300 Aux Relays
Aux Raise contact N.O.

TCC300 VR1
Input
120 Vac
Aux Relay 1 84R
Aux Lower contact N.O.

TCC300 VR2
Input
120 Vac
Aux Relay 2 84L
120 Vac
Aux Relay 3 Counter
TCC300 Neutral
Input
120 Vac
Aux Relay 4 Neutral contact
TCC300 +12 Vdc

wetting output
GUID-E4D72427-798E-4DDF-AAD6-0010DF55A581 V1 EN
Figure 357: 84R and 84L Aux Relays Available With Wetted 120 Vac
Example of Contact KeepTrack Method II – Using Neutral Contact Input

(with 84R/84L derived contacts)
In this example, an out‑of‑band condition occurs which causes the raise output from the
TCC300 to turn on or a manual operation is initiated. This will cause current to flow to the
motor and it will start a raise operation. The Aux Raise contact will close and then the
counter contact will close once the tap change is in process. When both of these contacts
close they will send directional feedback to the VR1 Input of the TCC300. This will tell
the control to increment the KeepTrack tap position by 1 tap.
If more than one tap raise is needed, the raise contact will stay closed and the Counter
contact is used to open the Aux Raise contact circuit removing the input to VR1 resulting
in the correct tap position being kept. When the unit no longer requires a raise output, the
raise output from the control will be turned off. If a lower operation is required, then the
same steps will occur except that Aux Lower contact will close and VR2 will be used.
As a verification scheme, a contact that closes when the tapchanger is on the neutral
position is also used as an input to the TCC300 control. When this Cam operated contact
closes, the control recalibrates the tap position to neutral if needed. As an example, if the
tap position is on 1R and a lower command is issued, the tapchanger moves to the neutral
position, and when the neutral contact closes, the control would recalibrate the tap
position if it was not already indicating neutral. If there are multiple neutral positions the
neutral contact would need to be closed on all the neutral positions.
TCC300 451
User Manual
Configuration
6.4.1.3 Shaft Coupled KeepTrack™ tap position knowledge
Applicable controls and accessories for both Shaft Coupled KeepTrack Methods include:
• TCC300 Tapchanger Controls

• M-2025B(D) Current Loop Interface
• M-2948 Tap Position Sensor OR INCON 1292 Synchro Transmitter and 1250 Tap
Position Monitor
ABB Shaft Coupled KeepTrack Method

If Cam positions are not available and switches can not be retrofitted, a Shaft Coupled
KeepTrack method can be used. Most LTC tapchangers have an output shaft on the
tapchanger mechanism whose angular position is a mechanical analog of the tapchanger
tap position. For these applications, the following methods can be used to provide positive
tap position knowledge.
Figure 358 represents a typical application of the ABB Model M-2948 Tap Position
Sensor. The tap position sensor is a rotary shaft encoder with a built-in microprocessor
that provides stepped output signals in 9 or 10 degree increments. The tap position sensor
is available in both clockwise and counter-clockwise rotation configurations for
increasing tap position. It has rotations of 0° to 297°, 306°, 315°, 330°, 340° and 350°
degrees to accommodate tapchangers with 32 taps, 9 or 10 degrees per tap, and one to three
neutral positions.
Control Cabinet
TCC300
RTU / LTC Control
SCADA HMI
Tap Position
Transformer RS-485
or FO
M-2948
mounted on shaft
Interface Cable
M-2948
Sensor
. . M-2025D
Current Loop
Interface
Rx Current
4-20 mA signal Loop Resistor
GUID-1FAC051A-0E85-492A-9FF8-284FBA198723 V1 EN
Figure 358: Tap Position Scheme Using Shaft Coupled KeepTrack
452 TCC300
User Manual
Configuration
Thus, the information needed from an individual transformer is: the number of degrees per
tap (always 9 or 10), rotation of the Tap Position Sensor, and the number of neutral tap
positions. The sensor requires a +12 Vdc power input that is supplied from the TCC300
control via the M‑2025D. The electrical output of the M‑2948 Tap Position Sensor is a
4-20 mA current loop that is converted to a voltage signal at the input of the M-2025D
Current Loop Interface with the addition of a shunt resistor. The resultant voltage signal
is conditioned in the M-2025D Current Loop Interface and routed to the TCC300
Tapchanger Control where the voltage is converted to a corresponding tap position
number. The scheme can be used with all TCC300 Tapchanger Controls.
If replacing an INCON Tap Position Monitoring device, the INCON 1292 Synchro
Transmitter is removed and the ABB M-2948 Tap Position Sensor mounts in the existing
bracket and uses the existing flexible coupling shaft.
ABB-INCON Shaft Coupled KeepTrack Method

If tap position sensors already exist such as the INCON 1292 Synchro Transmitter, the
shaft coupled KeepTrack method is still applicable. The INCON 1292 Synchro
Transmitter is an electromagnetic device that resembles a small electric motor. Although
various configurations of internal windings are used, they typically excite rotor
winding(s), and induce AC signal voltages in the stator windings which can be compared
in amplitude and polarity to determine the angular position of the rotor shaft.
This application is traditionally used with the INCON 1250 Tap Position Monitoring
device. The INCON 1250 supplies the 120 Vac to the INCON 1292 rotor winding(s). It
then measures the resulting signals from the stator winding to determine the shaft's
rotational position. This information is converted to a tap number and displayed on the
front panel numeric readout. An analog current signal is also generated which corresponds
to tap position. The M-2025B(D) Current Loop Interface module accepts this current
analog. The scheme can be used with all TCC300 Load Tap Changer models.
TCC300 453
User Manual
Configuration
Control Cabinet
TCC300
RTU / LTC Control
SCADA HMI
Tap Position
Transformer RS-485
or FO
INCON 1292
mounted on shaft
Interface Cable
1292
Synchro
INCON 1250
Tap Position
. . M-2025B/D
Current Loop
Monitor Interface
Rx Current
4-20 mA dc Loop Resistor
120 Vac signal signal
GUID-30EC8A13-824C-4EB1-B1BE-88C3903D9ED0 V1 EN
Figure 359: Tap Position Scheme Using INCON Devices
Connection of the optional M‑2025B(D) will require either a B‑0752 (5 pin to 6 pin) or
B‑0753 (6 pin to 6 pin) interface cable. See M‑2025B(D) Specification for details.
The transformer (XFMR) and regulator (REG) external setting is for use with the Positive
Knowledge (current loop) system, except REG #3, which is designed to be used with a
Toshiba resistive voltage divider. Selecting either XFMR or REG will determine which
screens are disabled, and then selecting either #1, #2, or #3 will depend on the output
current or voltage signal from the Tap Position monitor. Table 54 outlines the options
available for the Tap Information screen.
The user initializes the control at a given, known, tap position upon installation, by
following the steps described later in this section. See "Initializing Tap Position when
Regulate (Reg or XFMR) External or Contact KeepTrack™ 1R1L/1N is Active" for
detailed steps for entering the tap position using the HMI or TCC600®.
To obtain accurate calibration, it is suggested that the calibration should

be performed near the neutral tap for 0 to 1, 0 to 2 and 4 to 20 mA, and at
tap position 8 R or 8 L in the case of -1 to +1 mA range.
6.4.1.4 Resistor Divider KeepTrack™ tap position knowledge for LTCs
Applicable controls and accessories for Resistor Divider KeepTrack Method include:
454 TCC300
User Manual
Configuration
• TCC300 Tapchanger Controls

• ABB M-2025B(D) Current Loop Interface
• Existing installations may use the Crompton Model 253-TRTU transducer or the
Rochester Instrument Systems Model PR-2050 transducer (both now obsolete).
• New installations or existing installations with failed transducers use the Carrel
Precision Model T-R Series transducer (or equivalent).
The typical application illustrated in Figure 360 uses a resistor string mounted on a
separate insulating deck within the tap-changing mechanism. The resistor string is
comprised of equal value and wattage resistors. Depending on manufacture and age the
resistance varies from 10 to 400 ohms between each tap and can have either the same
valued resistors between multiple neutral positions or direct wire connections.
R R
R 10 R
9 11
8 12
R 13 R
7
6 14
R R RTU / TCC300
15 SCADA LTC Control
5
R R HMI Tap
4 16 Position
R 3 17 R
RS-485
18 or FO
2
R 1 19 R
R R
Interface Cable
AC/DC C&C T-R Series M-2025B(D)

Supply Resistance Current Loop
Transducer Interface
Scaling
4-20 mA signal Resistor
GUID-AD83A531-15DC-4D67-9A61-549E444E48E6 V1 EN
Figure 360: Tap Position Scheme Using Resistor Divider KeepTrack
The application uses a tap position transducer driven from a customer selectable AC or DC
voltage source. The transducer provides a low DC voltage of 1 to 10 volts to the resistor
string of the tapchanger mechanism. The transducer measures the DC voltage from the
wiper on the currently active tap, comparing it to the voltage applied to the string. The
transducer then converts that voltage to a current loop value of 0-1 mA or 4-20 mA for
transmission of an analog signal. The M-2025B(D) Current Loop Interface module
accepts this current analog signal. The scaling to the correct number of taps is achieved by
sizing the scaling resistor to obtain a 3.0 V signal at the maximum tap position.
Older installations may use the Crompton Model 253-TRTU transducer or the Rochester
Instrument Systems Model PR-2050 transducer, both of which are now obsolete. The
TCC300 455
User Manual
Configuration
Carrel Precision Model T-R Series transducer (or equivalent) can be used in new
installations or to replace failed obsolete transducers. The scheme can be used with all
TCC600 Series Load Tap Changer models. This output can then be provided to a
M-2025B(D) Current Loop Interface Module and then input to a TCC300 using the
XFMR EXT #3 configuration setting.
The regulator (REG #3) setting is designed to be used with a Toshiba resistive voltage
divider.
The positive knowledge by voltage divider method (REG External #3) is used on
regulators that have +/– 16 taps, a voltage divider tap position sensor, and a separate raise/
lower output. The Tap Max and Tap Min can only be set to 16 raise and 16 lower,
respectively, while in the REG External #3 tap mode. The voltage divider method is
designed to read a tap position sensor that contains 18 resistors in a voltage divider
network. Each tap position will give a specific output voltage from the tap position sensor.
The voltage from the sensor will only be read into the TCC300 control once one (1) second
has elapsed after the counter input has toggled. The tap position sensor will not be read
again until another tap change occurs, causing the counter input to toggle once more. Also,
an external input to the control will be read to determine if a raise or lower condition exists.
The raise/lower input and the voltage from the divider network will be used to determine
what position the tap is on.
The tap position calibration must be performed at or above the 4 raise tap,
but to obtain the best accuracy, it should be calibrated at or above the 8
raise tap.
6.4.1.5 Motor Direct Drive KeepTrack™
Motor Direct Drive KeepTrack™ tap position knowledge for LTCs

In most Load Tap Changer applications, the TCC300 control does not directly energize
the LTC motor. Instead it energizes interposing relays which energize the motor in the
raise or lower direction.
Some LTC Transformers however, have been designed such that the control does directly
energize the motor similar to a Line or Feeder Voltage Regulator. TCC300 and later ABB
controls contain a Motor Direct Drive KeepTrack method for Line and Feeder Regulators
which may be applicable to these LTC Transformers.
Reverse Power Operation must NOT be programmed for "Regulate in

Reverse" if the "INTERNAL KEEPTRACK" method is used. Incorrect
operation will occur.
456 TCC300
User Manual
Configuration
This can be easily verified on the LTC transformer by setting the Tap Information setting
on the TCC300 Control to Motor Direct Drive KeepTrack "INTERNAL KEEPTRACK"
in the control and observing the tap position displayed in the control during both automatic
and manual tap operation in both the Raise and Lower directions. It is very important that
Reverse Power Operation NOT be programmed for "Regulate in Reverse" if this method
is used. "Regulate in Reverse" was designed for Line and Feeder Regulators which have
fixed impedances. Since LTC Transformer impedances are not predictable, incorrect
operation will occur if Reverse Power Operation is set to "Regulate in Reverse".
Motor Direct Drive KeepTrack™ tap position knowledge for regulators
This feature is applicable to single-phase regulators only.
This feature is only applicable for ±16 tap ranges with neutral tap and
neutral indicator. The source voltage will only be applicable with a tap
range of ±16 taps.
This feature allows the control to keep track of the present tap position. The "INTERNAL
KEEPTRACK" setting is selected for this method.
Do not rely on the tap position indication on the TCC300 Tapchanger

Control display for neutral position when bypassing voltage regulators.
The motor power source for the manual, automatic, or external (SCADA) initiated tap
changes must be the same as the motor power input to the control. The operations counter
and neutral light circuit should be operational. The counter input and power source is
required for detecting tap changes and determining direction of the tap change.
Connecting a regulator neutral tap position indicating contact to the control will reset the
tap position to neutral each time the tap goes through the neutral position. It is
recommended that the indicated tap position be compared to the mechanical tap position
indicator at regular intervals, and that the indicated value be corrected, if necessary.
The tap position stored in memory is not affected by a loss of power. The tap position
record is checked and corrected to neutral, if necessary, with the closure of a neutral
contact (when the neutral tap position contact is connected to the controls).
When the Motor Direct Drive KeepTrack "INTERNAL KEEPTRACK"

tap position method is used, it must be calibrated for proper voltage
control with reverse power operation.
TCC300 457
User Manual
Configuration
If desired, the Motor Direct Drive KeepTrack "INTERNAL KEEPTRACK" feature can
be disabled in which case the screen will indicate "Disabled".
The user initializes the control at a given, known, tap position upon installation, by
selecting "INTERNAL KEEPTRACK" in the Tap Information screen in the
Configuration Menu and following the steps described later in this section. See
"Initializing Tap Position When Motor Direct Drive KeepTrack 'INTERNAL
KEEPTRACK' is Active" for detailed steps for entering the tap position using the HMI or
TCC600®.
Or, if the neutral tap position contact is connected to the control, run the regulator to
neutral as shown by the tap position indicator on the regulator. The control will recognize
the neutral light signal and set the tap position accordingly.
The Motor Direct Drive KeepTrack "INTERNAL KEEPTRACK" procedure recognizes

tapchanges commanded via manual, automatic or external (SCADA) contacts. The power
source for the manual- or SCADA-initiated tapchanges must be the same as the motor
power source used for the automatic tapchangers.
The Motor Direct Drive KeepTrack "INTERNAL KEEPTRACK" position knowledge is

based on the detection of a closed switch (manual or automatic), and feedback from the
operation counter input.
The method by which Motor Direct Drive KeepTrack "INTERNAL KEEPTRACK" is

achieved is as follows:
The control includes two Zero Voltage Detection (ZVD) circuits. These circuits
individually monitor the AC voltage across the internal raise and lower triacs. This is done
since any external raise or lower contacts or manual switches have to be placed in parallel
with the triacs to run the tapchanger motor. When the triacs (or any contact paralleled
across the triacs) closes, the voltage measure decreases to almost zero. When a counter
input event is received while the raise circuit is activated, the Motor Direct Drive
KeepTrack "INTERNAL KEEPTRACK" will increment the tap count by one. When a
counter input event is received while the lower circuit is activated, the Motor Direct Drive
KeepTrack "INTERNAL KEEPTRACK" will decrement the tap count by one.
If the tapchanger reaches the mechanical tap limits of operation, (±16), limit switches
open up the appropriate circuit so the control cannot force a raise above +16, or force a
lower below –16. This is potentially confusing to the ZVD circuits, since they can see zero
voltage on the output with a closed triac and also see zero voltage on the other output due
to an open limit switch. When this condition is encountered, the control can only make a
best guess of which operation really occurs and moves one step in the direction of neutral,
which should be away from the side with the open limit switch.
An additional feature is the neutral zero feature. When a regulator passes through the
neutral position, a neutral contact closes. This is most often used to drive a neutral light
458 TCC300
User Manual
Configuration
that is an indicator that the mechanism is in the neutral position, and it is safe to bridge the
input and output of the regulator because they are at the same voltage. Upon detection of
a neutral circuit closure, Motor Direct Drive KeepTrack "INTERNAL KEEPTRACK"
resets the tap position to neutral to resynchronize the circuit.
6.4.1.6 Selecting Tap Position Knowledge from the HMI
To select the Tap Position Knowledge method of tapchange position monitoring, perform
the following:
When the Motor Direct Drive KeepTrack™ "INTERNAL

KEEPTRACK" tap position method is used, it must be calibrated for
proper voltage control with Reverse Power Operation.
Tapchanger Type
Settings" menu.
4. Press the Down arrow as necessary until the "Tap Information" screen is displayed.
Tap Information
disable C
6. Utilizing the Up/Down arrow pushbuttons, select the desired "Tap Position
Knowledge" method, then press the ENT pushbutton.
7. If "INTERNAL KEEPTRACK" was selected in Step 8, then proceed to "Initializing
Tap Position When Motor Direct Drive KeepTrack is Active" in this section.
8. If an External Tap Position or Contact KeepTrack™ 1R1L/1N method was selected
in Step 8, then proceed to "Initializing Tap Position when Regulate (Reg or XFMR)
External or Contact KeepTrack is Active" in this section.
6.4.1.7 Selecting Tap Position Knowledge from TCC600
TCC300 459
User Manual
Configuration
2. Select either "Disabled" or the desired Tap Position Knowledge from the "General"
screen.
460 TCC300
User Manual
Configuration
5. If "INTERNAL KEEPTRACK" was selected, then proceed to "Initializing Tap

Position When Motor Direct Drive KeepTrack™ is Active" in this section.
6. If an External Tap Position or Contact KeepTrack™ 1R1L/1N method was selected
in Step 7, then proceed to "Initializing Tap Position when Regulate (Reg or XFMR)
External or Contact KeepTrack is Active" in this section.
6.4.1.8 Contact KeepTrack™ 1N – Additional TCC600 settings screen
When Contact KeepTrack 1N is selected as the Tap Information method, an additional

Contact KeepTrack 1N Tap Configuration window becomes available. The Contact
KeepTrack 1N method of Tap Position knowledge can function with any combination of
taps and multiple neutrals, or with the neutral assigned to a non-zero tap.
TCC300 461
User Manual
Configuration
GUID-988E4E0E-F5CC-4EB8-81E2-9AAFE8AEDEC5 V1 EN
Figure 364: Contact KeepTrack 1N Neutral Tap Configuration Dialog Screen
This feature will allow the physical neutral input to automatically calibrate the tap position
to whatever the Neutral Tap Position setting is set to. The recalibrating "neutral" input can
be set for any tap position not just neutral. Also, the Abnormal Tap Position Alarm will
function based on this setting instead of 0. For example, if the Neutral Tap position setting
is 9R, then an Abnormal Tap Position alarm will occur if the physical neutral input is
received with tap position not indicating 8R, 9R, or 10R.
The Neutral Tap Configuration window allows the user to program the following settings:
1. The full tap range of the tapchanger from highest tap to lowest tap (–33...+33)
2. Assign the neutral tap position based on the tapchanger mechanism
3. Assign the number of neutrals based on the tapchanger mechanism
4. Assign a resting tap to communicate tapchanger position when stopped on neutral
5. Assign which neutral taps have an associated closed neutral contact
6. Select Cam Follower as the Operation Counter configuration if desired
462 TCC300
User Manual
Configuration
6.4.1.9 Initializing Tap Position When Motor Direct Drive KeepTrack "INTERNAL
KEEPTRACK" is Active from the HMI
When the Motor Direct Drive KeepTrack tap position method is used, it
must be calibrated for proper voltage control with Reverse Power
Operation.
1. Initialize the control at a given, known, tap position upon installation.

2. Enable Internal KeepTrack method of tap knowledge as described in this section.
but no neutral input is detected, the Tap Position screen of the
TCC300 will display "- - -" instead of "0". When reading the tap
position via comms (Modbus and DNP) a value of 32767 will be
returned when the tap position is "0", but no neutral input is detected,
otherwise a "0" will be returned.
3. Determine and note the actual tap position from the external tap position indicator on
the regulator or transformer.
Tapchanger Type
Settings" menu.
7. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as necessary, until the "Tap Position/Cal" screen
is displayed.
Tap Position/Cal
0 C
9. Utilizing the Up/Down arrow pushbuttons, enter the tap position noted in Step 3,
10. If a neutral tap position contact is connected to the control, run the regulator to the
neutral tap position as indicated on the regulator.
The control will recogniz e the neutral contact/light signal and set the tap position
accordingly.
TCC300 463
User Manual
Configuration
6.4.1.10 Initializing Tap Position When Motor Direct Drive KeepTrackTM

"INTERNAL KEEPTRACK" is Active from TCC600
When the Motor Direct Drive Internal KeepTrack tap position method is
used, it must be calibrated for proper voltage control with Reverse Power
Operation.
2. Verify that "INTERNAL KEEPTRACK" is selected in the "General" section of the

dialog screen.
464 TCC300
User Manual
Configuration
4. Enter the tap position noted in Step 3, then select "Yes" for Tap Calibrate.
screen.
The control will recognize the neutral contact/light signal and set the tap position
accordingly.
6.4.1.11 Initializing Tap Position When Regulate (Reg or XFMR) External or

Contact KeepTrackTM 1R1L/1N is Active from the HMI
When the Regulate (Reg or XFMR) External tap position method is used,
it must be calibrated for proper voltage control with Reverse Power
Operation.
1. Initialize the control at a given, known, tap position upon installation.

2. Enable a Regulate External method of tap knowledge as described in this section.
TCC300 465
User Manual
Configuration
Tapchanger Type
Settings" menu.
7. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as necessary, until the "Tap Position/Cal" screen
is displayed.
Tap Position/Cal
0 C
9. Utilizing the Up/Down arrow pushbuttons, enter the tap position noted in Step 3,
The control will recogniz e the neutral contact/light signal and set the tap position
accordingly.
6.4.1.12 Initializing Tap Position When Regulate (Reg or XFMR) External or

Contact KeepTrackTM 1R1L/1N is Active from TCC600
When the Regulate (Reg or XFMR) External tap position or Contact

KeepTrack method is used, it must be calibrated for proper voltage control
with Reverse Power Operation.
466 TCC300
User Manual
Configuration
2. Verify that a "Regulate (Reg or XFMR) External" mode is selected in the "General"
4. Enter the tap position noted in Step 3, then select "Yes" for Tap Calibrate.
screen.
TCC300 467
User Manual
Configuration
The control will recognize the neutral contact/light signal and set the tap position
accordingly.
6.4.1.13 Setting Highest and Lowest Tap from the HMI
This setting is applicable to Reg External #1 and #2, and XFMR External
#1, #2 and #3, modes of Tap Information.
Tapchanger Type
Settings" menu.
468 TCC300
User Manual
Configuration
4. Press the Down arrow as necessary until the "Highest (Lowest) Tap" screen is
displayed.
Highest (Lowest) Tap
16 C
6. Utilizing the Up/Down arrow pushbuttons, enter the desired Highest (Lowest) Tap
value, then press the ENT pushbutton.
6.4.1.14 Setting Highest and Lowest Tap from TCC600
To set the Highest Tap and Lowest Tap setting from TCC600®, perform the following:
This setting is applicable to Reg External #1 and #2, and XFMR External
#1, #2 and #3, modes of Tap Information.
TCC300 469
User Manual
Configuration
2. Enter the desired Highest and Lowest Tap values from the "Tap Limits" section of
the dialog screen.
screen.
470 TCC300
User Manual
Configuration
6.4.2 Intertap time delay

The intertap time delay may be used in conjunction with sequential operation or pulsed
output. The normal operation of this delay timer occurs once a tapchange command is
initiated, when there would normally be a continuous command (raise or lower) to run the
tapchanger until the voltage has returned to within the band setting, there is now an
intertap time delay initiated between tapchanges. When the intertap time delay is set to
zero, it is disabled.
The intertap time delay will:
• Recognize that a tapchange has occurred, indicated by the counter contact input or
motor hold input.
• Remove the output signal and wait for the intertap time delay, even though the voltage
remains outside the designated voltage band.
• Command another tapchange after the intertap time delay has expired, without regard
to the basic time delay setting, if the voltage remains out of band in the same direction
as the previous tapchange.
If the intertap time delay is enabled on a control where non-sequential operation is

enabled, the intertap time delay setpoint is disregarded. The basic time delay setting
prevails for subsequent tapchange commands in the non-sequential mode.
The intertap time delay is similar in operation to non-sequential operation,

but the two should not be confused. The intertap time delay applies a short
delay after every tapchange. The non‑sequential operation time delay will
be the same as that of the Basic User‑Selected Time Delay. Application
with pulsed output is also possible.
TCC300 471
User Manual
Configuration
Sequential/Non-Sequential/Blocking
The control normally operates in Sequential Mode. In this mode, the tapchange output is
initiated after the time delay timer has timed out. The tapchange output will remain "on"
until the control senses that the voltage has returned in-band. This permits successive
tapchanges to be made in a "sequential" mode with no delay between tapchanges.
If a delay between successive tapchanges is desired, an intertap time delay may be used.
The value is set from 0 to 60 seconds and will interrupt tapchange outputs for the preset
time after a counter-contact closure or motor hold input is detected by the control's
operations counter input #1.
If the full initial time delay is desired, the control may be used in the "non-sequential"
mode. Enabling non-sequential mode operation is accomplished by setting the Input
Selection 2 setting to "non-sequential". Applying a momentary contact closure to the
control's Input Selection 2 will activate non-sequential mode operation.
If the closed contact supplied to Input Selection 2 is maintained, instead of momentary, the
initial timer will not time out for the duration of the maintained contact, and the outputs
of the control will be effectively blocked.
6.4.2.1 Setting the Intertap Delay from the HMI
Tapchanger Type
Settings" menu.
4. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as necessary, to navigate to the "Intertap Delay"
menu item.
Intertap Delay
0 Sec C
6. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons enter the desired Intertap Time Delay value (0 to 60
seconds in 1 second increments), then press the ENT pushbutton.
6.4.2.2 Setting Intertap Time Delay from TCC600
472 TCC300
User Manual
Configuration
2. From the General section of the Tap Settings dialog screen enter the desired Intertap
Delay (0 to 60 seconds in 1 second increments).
screen.
TCC300 473
User Manual
Configuration
6.4.3 Tap limits

Tap Limits, when enabled, include "Block Raise" and "Block Lower" limits which are
adjustable from the Tap Maximum configuration point to the Tap Minimum value in 1
step increments.
6.4.3.1 Enabling/Disabling and Setting Tap Limits from the HMI
Tapchanger Type
Settings" menu.
4. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as necessary, until the "Tap Limits" screen is
displayed.
Tap Limits
disable C
7. Depending on what mode was selected, proceed as follows to complete the Tap
Limits setup:
• If Tap Limits were "DISABLED", no further action is required.
• If Tap Limits were "ENABLED", proceed as follows.
8. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as necessary, until the "Tap Block Raise" screen
is displayed.
Tap Block Raise
474 TCC300
User Manual
Configuration
16 C
10. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons, enter the desired Tap Block Raise limit (–12 to
+16), then press the ENT pushbutton.
11. Press the Down arrow once, the "Tap Block Lower" screen is displayed.
Tap Block Lower
–16 C
13. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons, enter the desired Tap Block Lower limit (–16 to
+12), then press the ENT pushbutton.
6.4.3.2 Enabling/Disabling and Setting Tap Limits from TCC600
2. Select "Enable" from the Tap Limits section of the dialog screen.
3. Enter the desired Block Raise and Block Lower limits.
screen.
TCC300 475
User Manual
Configuration
6.5 Data logging and harmonics
6.5.1 Data logging
Whenever the TCC300 clock is reset and data logging is enabled, the data
log should be cleared.
The Data Logging feature allows the user to record data internally into non volatile
memory. The data log is transferred in the Comtrade format. The Comtrade format
consists of two files, the configuration file (*.cfg) and the data file (*.dat).
Data logging will continue indefinitely as long as the data Interval is set to a non-zero
value. A zero value for the data interval will effectively disable data logging. The data log
can be downloaded using MODBUS® (see TCC300 Protocol document) or DNP (using
file transfer) protocol. The data can be viewed using any Comtrade compatible viewer.
476 TCC300
User Manual
Configuration
Data logging interval ranges from 0 to 120 min with an increment of 1 minute. Once data
logging is enabled, the control will store the data in a data record at the selected interval.
Each data record includes the following data:
• Load Voltage [2]

• Compensated Voltage [2]
• Load Watts
• Load VA
• Load VAr
• Load Current [2]
• Power Factor
• Line Frequency
• Tap Position
• Source Voltage [2]
• Primary Current
• Operation Count
• Circulating/DVAr Current
The Checksum is used to ensure the integrity of the record stored. Data mask is used to
mask off data that the user does not want to retrieve. Due to the internal structure of the
Comtrade format, time stamping is always performed. A total of 200,000 data records can
be saved in non volatile memory.
6.5.1.1 Setting up Data Logging from the HMI
Tapchanger Type
3. Press the Right or Left arrow pushbutton, as necessary, to navigate to the "Data
Logging" menu.
4. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as necessary, until the "Data Log Select" screen
is displayed.
Data Log Select
11111111111111 C
[2] Load Voltage, Compensated Voltage, Load Current and Source Voltage are the average, maximum and minimum value during the data logging
interval.
TCC300 477
User Manual
Configuration
The cursor will be positioned under the far right hand zero which
corresponds to LOCAL VOLTAGE. The remaining Data Log
parameter selections are displayed by moving the cursor to the left.
6. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons enter a "1" for those Data Log parameters to be
7. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as necessary, until the "Data Log Interval" screen
is displayed.
8. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons, enter the desired "Data Log Interval" (0 to 120
minutes in 1 minute increments), then press the ENT pushbutton.
6.5.1.2 Setting up Data Logging from TCC600
1. Select Setup/Data Logging/Setup from the TCC600 toolbar. TCC600 will display
the Data Logging screen.
GUID-CF69965E-8DF7-4CE6-B1F3-146B6168A4D5 V1 EN
Figure 380: Data Logging Setup Dialog Screen
The Data Logging Setup dialog screen contains a self calculating

Duration parameter that represents the number of Days and the
specific time when the data logging buffer will be full. The number
of parameters selected to log and the Data Log Interval are
considered in this calculation.
2. Enter a Data Log Interval (0 to 120 minutes).

screen.
478 TCC300
User Manual
Configuration
6.5.2 Harmonics setup

The Harmonics Calculation feature provides the user with the ability to set predefined
harmonic voltage and current thresholds (individual, voltage percent from 0 to 30%,
current percent from 0 to 100%) for the selected harmonics. Current Threshold includes
a minimum Current Threshold setting from 0 to 200 mA. Also, a common delay setting
from 1 to 10 seconds is available.
The Harmonic voltage and/or current threshold Pickup and Dropout can be selected as
inputs to trigger the Oscillograph Recorder. The Harmonic voltage/current Pickup or the
voltage/current Dropout can be selected to trigger the Sequence of Events Recorder.
6.5.2.1 Setting the Active Harmonics Inputs to the Oscillograph and Sequence of
Events Recorders from the HMI
TCC300 479
User Manual
Configuration
Tapchanger Type
3. Press the Right or Left arrow pushbutton, as necessary, until "Harmonics Setup" is
displayed.
4. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as necessary, until the desired Harmonic setting
Harmonic 2
011101111111111 C
The cursor will be positioned under the far right hand zero which
corresponds to Harmonic 2. The remaining Harmonic selections are
displayed by moving the cursor to the left.
6. Utilizing the Up/Down arrow pushbuttons enter a "1" for those Harmonics to be
7. Repeat the above procedure to setup additional Harmonic Inputs to the Oscillograph
and Sequence of Events recorders.
8. Once all Harmonic inputs have been selected, proceed to the Voltage Alarm
Threshold, Current Alarm Threshold and Harmonic Alarm Delay settings.
6.5.2.2 Setting the Harmonic Voltage, Current Threshold and Minimum Current
Threshold Settings from the HMI
The following sequence of steps are for setting the Voltage Alarm
threshold. The steps used to set the Current Alarm Threshold and
Minimum Current Threshold are the same.
Tapchanger Type
displayed.
4. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as necessary, until the desired "Alarm Threshold"
setting screen is displayed.
V Alarm Threshold
0 % C
6. Utilizing the Up/Down arrow pushbuttons enter the desired Voltage Alarm
Threshold value from 1 to 30%, press the ENT pushbutton.
480 TCC300
User Manual
Configuration
6.5.2.3 Setting the Harmonic Voltage and Current Threshold Delay from the HMI
This delay setting applies to both the Voltage Threshold and the Current
Threshold.
Tapchanger Type
displayed.
4. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as necessary, until the "Harmonic Alarm Delay"
setting screen is displayed.
Harmonic Alarm Delay
1 s C
6. Utilizing the Up/Down arrow pushbuttons, enter the desired Threshold Delay value
from 1 to 10 Seconds, then press the ENT pushbutton.
6.5.2.4 Setting the Active Harmonics Inputs to the Oscillograph and Sequence of
Events Recorders from TCC600
1. Select Setup/Harmonics Setup from the TCC600 toolbar. TCC600 will display the
Harmonics Setup dialog screen.
TCC300 481
User Manual
Configuration
GUID-66C7020F-96BE-4BE4-ACDD-389E3F8D9C8D V1 EN
Figure 383: Harmonics Setup Dialog Screen
2. Select the desired Voltage Harmonics and Voltage Threshold setting.

3. Select the desired Current Harmonics, Current Threshold and Minimum Current
Threshold setting.
4. Select the desired Voltage & Current Delay setting.
screen.
482 TCC300
User Manual
Configuration
6.6 CBEMA configuration
6.6.1 CBEMA functionality

Setpoints
Normal Voltage
CBEMA Event Enable
CBEMA Event Pickup
CBEMA Event Dropout
CBEMA Minimum Duration
Putputs
CBEMA Pickup Status
CBEMA Counters
TCC300 483
User Manual
Configuration
Triggers
Oscillography
Sequence of Events
Operation
There are a total of 4 Event Monitors in CBEMA (Computer Business Equipment
Manufacturers Association). Each CBEMA event monitor has a different minimum
duration limit: Event 1, 1 – 60 cycles; Event 2, 1 – 120 cycles; Event 3, 60 – 60000 cycles
and Event 4, 1 – 60 cycles. When Pickup is set to less than 100% it operates as a sag (under
voltage) function, and when it is greater than 100% it operates as a swell (over voltage)
function. Sags and swells can be accurately detected from 90 to 180 Vac.
The following rules need to be followed when setting up CBEMA Setpoints:
• The Dropout should always be greater than Pickup in the Sag case
• The Dropout should be fixed to 100% in the Swell case
• The Pickup cannot be 100%
If any of the above rules are violated, an ERROR message will scroll across the
When the load voltage is sagging or swelling greater than the pickup setting, then a pickup
status will be set after the set minimum duration, in addition to incrementing the counter.
When the load voltage is back to the dropout level, the status is cleared. Any or all of the
Event Pickup statuses can be used to trigger Sequence of Events and/or Oscillography.
The CBEMA counters are cleared after it reaches 10,000 counts, or it can also be cleared
through the TCC600® Communication Software or the HMI.
Each of the CBEMA Events has a Binary Input DNP point associated with it that will
indicate the status of the event, as well as an Analog Input that will indicate the duration
in cycles of the most recent event.
6.6.2 Setting up CBEMA from the HMI

Setting CBEMA Normal Voltage, enabling Event 1, and entering Event 1 parameters are
described in this procedure. Enabling Events 2, 3 and 4 and entering their respective
settings is similar.
Tapchanger Type
3. Press the Right or Left Arrow pushbuttons, as necessary until the "CBEMA Setup"
484 TCC300
User Manual
Configuration
4. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as necessary, to navigate to the "Normal Voltage"
screen.
Normal Voltage
120.0 Volts C
6. Utilizing the Up/Down arrow pushbuttons, enter the desired "Normal Voltage"
(100.0 to 130.0 Volts) value, then press the ENT pushbutton.
7. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as necessary, to navigate to the "Event 1" screen.
Event 1
ENABLE C
9. Utilizing the Up/Down arrow pushbuttons, select either "Enable" or "Disable", then
10. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as necessary, to navigate to the "Event1 Sag
Pickup" screen.
Event1 Sag Pickup
70 % C
12. Utilizing the Up/Down arrow pushbuttons, enter the desired "Event 1 Sag Pickup"
(50 to 130 %) value, then press the ENT pushbutton.
• Event1 Sag Dropout
• Event1 Sag Min Duration
14. Repeat this procedure to setup Events 2 through 4.
6.6.3 Setting up CBEMA from TCC600
1. Select Setup/CBEMA Events/Setup from the TCC600 toolbar. TCC600 will

display the CBEMA Sequence of Events Setup dialog screen.
TCC300 485
User Manual
Configuration
2. Enter the desired "Normal Voltage" (100.0 to 130.0 Volts) value.

3. From the "CBEMA Event 1" section of the dialog screen select ENABLE, then enter
the following settings:
• Event 1 Sag Pickup
• Event 1 Sag Dropout
• Event 1 Sag Minimum Duration
4. Repeat Step 3 to setup Events 2, 3, 4.
5. Select Save. TCC600 will display a "Do you want to enable CBEMA Sequence of
events?" confirmation screen.
GUID-07992690-3288-489C-89D1-3A411C72C417 V1 EN
Figure 387: CBEMA Sequence of Event Enable Confirmation Screen
6. If CBEMA Events are to be used to trigger the Sequence of Events recorder, then
select "Yes". TCC600 will display the Sequence of Events Setup dialog screen.
CBEMA Event and counter status can be observed on the Metering

and Status screen
486 TCC300
User Manual
Configuration
7. If CBEMA Events are Not to be used to trigger the Sequence of Events recorder, then
select "No". TCC600 will display a "Setpoints Successfully Written to Control"
8. If desired, CBEMA Events can be used to trigger the Oscillograph Recorder.
TCC300 487
User Manual
488
Setpoints
Section 7 Setpoints
7.1 Setpoint profiles
7.1.1 Editing of setpoint profiles

Editing setpoints is accomplished only when the specific setpoint profile has been selected
for editing in TCC600® or the HMI. The following setpoint categories are included in the
four setpoint profiles:
• Common Settings
• Power Flow Forward
• Power Flow Reverse
• Voltage Reduction
• Limits
• VAr Bias
In TCC600 the setpoint profiles are identified by Tabs on the Setpoints dialog screen. In
the HMI, the Common Settings, Power Flow Forward, Power Flow Reverse, Voltage
Reduction, Limits, and VAr Bias submenu headers indicate in the upper right hand corner
the setpoint profile that is being edited.
If a specific setpoint profile has not been previously selected for editing, then the number
in the submenu header will indicate the Active Setpoint Profile. After changing the active
setpoint profile the user must exit the Profile Settings sub header for approximately 1
minute to see the Active Setpoint Profile change indicated in the setpoints sub header.
The control will immediately respond to the new Active Setpoint Profile
settings.
TCC300 489
User Manual
Setpoints
MONITOR SETPOINTS CONFIGURATION COMMUNICATION UTILITIES

Active Setpoint Profile UTIL SETP MNTR CNFG SETP COMM CNFG UTIL COMM MNTR
or Setpoint Profile
Selected for Editing
Limits 1 VAr Bias 1 Profile Settings Common Settings 1 Power Flow Fwd 1 Power Flow Reverse 1 Voltage Reduction 1
Block Raise Voltage Set VAr Bias Method Set VAr Bias Method Active Profile LDC Selection Bandcenter Fwd Bandcenter Rev Standard VR
xxx.x Volts disable(Step/Linear) Linear Profile :1 RX xxx.x Volts xxx.x Volts ENABLE
Runback Deadband VAr Bias Method Disable on Rev Pwr Profile to Edit Timer Characteristic Bandwidth Fwd Bandwidth Rev VRed Turnoff Timer
x.x Volts Step disable Profile :1 DEFINITE x.x Volts x.x Volts 0 Min
With LDC R,X With LDC R,X

Block Lower Voltage Edit Profile 1 Name Timer Reset Smart VR
xxx.x Volts Disable on Rev Pwr Curr Mult Base Value "Empty" INTEGRATING LDC R Fwd LDC R Fwd disable
disable 0 x Volts x Volts
Runup Deadband Repeats for Rev Power Operation Save VR at Power Off
x.x Volts Fwd Max Cap Bnk Size Linear V Bias -X Profiles 2-4 BLOCK * LDC X Fwd LDC X Fwd DON"T SAVE
12000 KVAr 0 Volts x Volts x Volts
Runup Enable/Disable Power Direction Bias Reduction Step 1 %

disable NONE With LDC Z With LDC Z 2.5
Rev Max Cap Bnk Size Normlzd Lin V Bias -X
12000 KVAr x.x Volts LDC Z Fwd LDC Z Fwd
x Volts x Volts
Current Block Limit Reduction Step 2 %
xxx mA 5.0
Lead % Pickup Linear V Bias -X Lmt
75 0.0 Volts Definite (Inverse) Definite (Inverse)
Delay Fwd Delay Fwd
Reduction Step 3 %
xx Sec xx Sec
7.5
Lag % Pickup Linear V Bias +X
75 0 Volts
VAr Bias Volt Step Normlzd Lin V Bias +X

1.0 Volts x.x Volts
* Power Flow Reverse setting screens are only available when the
"Reverse Power Operation" selection under "Common Settings" is
Max VAR Bias Time Linear V Bias +X Lmt selected to either REGULATE REVERSE, REG. R MEASURED SRC,
300 mins 0.0 Volts DISTRIBUTED GENERATION, AUTO DETERMINE or AUTO
DETERMINE MEASURED. If Distributed Generation is selected, then
only LDC values can be set.
Selecting BLOCK, IGNORE or RETURN TO NEUTRAL disables the
Power Flow Reverse setting screens.
GUID-352AFD46-AA92-4E54-AA62-270F071679DF V1 EN
Figure 389: Active Setpoint Profile and Setpoint Profile to Edit Identifier
7.1.1.1 Selecting a setpoint profile for editing from the HMI
1. Press the Up Arrow (SETP Hot Button) pushbutton to wake the unit. The menu will
advance to "SETPOINTS".
Profile Settings
3. Press the Down arrow pushbutton as necessary until the unit displays the following:
Profile to Edit
Profile: 1
4. Press the ENT pushbutton. If prompted, enter a valid Level Access Code. The
Profile to Edit
Profile: 1 C
5. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons, select the desired Setpoint Profile for Editing, then
press the ENT pushbutton. The following will be displayed reflecting the Setpoint
Profile that was selected for Editing.
490 TCC300
User Manual
Setpoints
7.1.1.2 Selecting a setpoint profile for editing from TCC600
• Editing Setpoint Profiles from TCC600 is accomplished by selecting the desired

Profile Tab in the "Setup/Setpoints" dialog screen.
7.1.2 Naming setpoint profiles

Custom names may be assigned to Setpoint Profiles 1 through 4.
• The Profile name may be up to 16 standard alphanumeric characters.

• Alpha characters may be either upper or lower case.
• The user may Enter/Edit the Profile name from the HMI or TCC600.
7.1.2.1 Assigning a setpoint profile name from the HMI
TCC300 491
User Manual
Setpoints
Profile Settings
3. Press the Down arrow pushbutton as necessary until the unit displays the following:
Edit Profile 1 name
0
4. Press the ENT pushbutton. If prompted, enter a valid Level Access Code.
5. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons, enter the desired Setpoint Profile Name, then press
the ENT pushbutton. The following will be displayed reflecting the Setpoint Profile
Name that was entered.
Edit Profile 1 name
XXXXXXX
7.1.2.2 Assigning a setpoint profile name from TCC600
1. Select Setup/Profile/Profile Names from the TCC600 toolbar. TCC600 will display
the Profile Names dialog screen.
GUID-7C752949-D815-41B9-BAEE-5FF10F6B4204 V1 EN
Figure 391: Setpoint Profile Names Dialog Screen
2. Enter the desired names for Setpoint Profiles 1 through 4.

492 TCC300
User Manual
Setpoints


Screen
7.2 Regulation limits
Overvoltage Limit and Voltage Runback

Setpoints are available to establish a block raise limit and voltage runback. The
overvoltage limit is adjustable from 95.0 V to 135.0 V in 0.1 V increments. The
overvoltage limit must be set above the upper control band limit. This limit is one portion
of the First Customer Protector to limit overvoltage from line drop compensation action
during heavy loading.
The voltage runback level is the Block Raise setting plus the Runback Deadband setting
(this establishes the First Customer Protection Level.) This deadband should not be
confused with the control deadband above and below the center voltage setpoint, which is
generally called the control "bandwidth".
The voltage runback deadband is used to assure that the runback setting is sufficiently
above the upper voltage limit setting to limit hunting. It is adjustable from 1.0 to 4.0 V in
0.1 V increments, and must be set greater than the voltage change of one single tapchange,
TCC300 493
User Manual
Setpoints
or hunting will occur. It is suggested that it be set at approximately twice the voltage
change of one tap.
If the voltage exceeds the runback limit, as might be caused by combinations of LDC
action and load shifts or by a system disturbance without LDC action, the control will
immediately call for an "automatic" lower without any time delay. The lower command
will continue until the voltage is within the normal control band.
Overvoltage block can be effectively disabled by setting it to 135 V. By setting the

runback deadband to 4 V, the runback voltage becomes 139 V which effectively disables
the feature. All automatic raise/lower operations are blocked when the input voltage
decreases to less than 85.0 V. Manual tapchanges can be initiated if Motor Power is
available.
Undervoltage Block and Voltage Runup

Setpoints are also available to establish a block lower limit and voltage runup. This limit
is adjustable from 95.0 V to 135.0 V in 0.1 V increments. This limit can be set to limit low
customer voltage to safe limits and will block voltage reduction action that could cause
motor stalling and other undesirable low voltage effects.
The voltage runup level is the Block Lower setting plus the Runup Deadband setting (this
establishes the First Customer Protection Level.)
The voltage runup deadband is used to assure that the runup setting is sufficiently below
the lower voltage limit setting to limit hunting. It is adjustable from 1.0 to 4.0 V in 0.1 V
increments, and must be set greater than the voltage change of one single tapchange, or
hunting will occur. It is suggested that it be set at approximately twice the voltage change
of one tap.
If the voltage is lower than the runup limit, as might be caused by combinations of LDC
action and load shifts or by a system disturbance without LDC action, the control will
immediately call for an "automatic" raise without any time delay. The raise command will
continue until the voltage is above the runup voltage limit. After this occurs, the timer will
reset. If the voltage is still low, normal control action will bring the voltage up to within
the normal control band.
If both "Voltage Runup" and "Fast Voltage Recovery" are enabled, the Fast Voltage
Recovery feature has precedence over Voltage Runup operationally.
Undervoltage block can be effectively disabled by setting it to 95 volts. If the voltage is

below the Block Lower setpoint, the control will not respond to further lower commands.
Raise commands are not affected. All automatic raise/lower operations are blocked when
the input voltage decreases to less than 85.0 V. Manual tapchanges can be initiated if
Motor Power is available.
494 TCC300
User Manual
Setpoints
Overvoltage
Runback 130
Block Raise 128
T1 T1 T2
Bandcenter 120
t t t
Block Lower 114
Low Load Load grows Voltage increases further

No action on part of Raise operation blocked at due to system switching
voltage limit control t = T1 Lower command issued at
V LOCAL
t = T2
Local voltage Raised Due to LDC
GUID-E5B263AB-E207-4E81-B7FE-0950C954B896 V1 EN
Figure 394: Local Voltage as Function of Load Current When Using Line Drop
Compensation/ Action of Overvoltage and Overvoltage Runback Control
Coordination with Backup Relay

The TCC300 Digital Tapchanger Control provides the first customer protection functions.
Use of a backup relay, such as the M‑0329B, is recommended since the TCC300 (or any
independent control) cannot be expected to be its own backup. The backup relay
bandcenter setting is usually set the same as the primary control, with the bandwidth
setting 1 or 2 volts greater than the primary control bandwidth, the block raise setting 1
volt greater than the primary control, and the deadband setting 1 or 2 volts. These settings
create a runback level 1 or 2 volts above the runback level of the primary control.
If primary control operation is desired first, the block raise setting and the resulting
runback level of the backup relay must be higher than those of the primary control and the
block lower setpoint must be lower than the primary control setting.
Tap Position Block

The Tap Position Block is disabled by setting the Tap Information screen to the Disable
condition. If the Tap Information screen is not disabled, the Tap Position block can be
disabled by setting the Tap Limits screen to Disable.
When using the M‑2025B(D) Current Loop Interface Module, a one-second intertap time
delay should be used, due to the time setting of the module.
Overcurrent Block Operation
The Current Block Limit setpoint is available to block operation whenever the current
exceeds the setting. The setting is adjustable from 50 to 640 mA in 1 mA increments.
TCC300 495
User Manual
Setpoints
This feature can be used to protect the tapchanger switch during periods of excessive
current. This feature can be effectively disabled by setting the blocking current to 640 mA.
Low Current Block

When enabled the control determines if Load Current following a tapchange is less than
4 mA, coincident with Tap Delta Voltage being less than 0.4 Vac. When these conditions
exist the control will initiate an alarm and block regulation. The Delta Voltage is measured
on every tap operation once Load Current is less than 4 mA.
Regulation will be blocked until one of the following conditions exists:
• Power to the control is cycled

• The control is switched to Manual remotely
• The control is switched to Manual via the Auto/Manual switch on the control adapter
panel
• The Low Current Alarm is cleared/reset • Load Current measurement is greater than
or equal to 4 mA for 1 second
The Alarm Reset is located on the "Programmable Alarm" dialog screen and in HMI
"Configuration/Programmable Alarm/CLR Low Current Block.
7.2.1 Setting the Overvoltage Block Raise and Block Lower Limit from
the HMI
Profile Settings
3. Press the Right or Left arrow pushbuttons, as necessary, to navigate to the "Limits"
menu.
Editing Setpoints in the wrong Setpoint Profile can cause the control
to operate incorrectly.
4. Verify that the desired Setpoint Profile is indicated, then press the Down arrow as
necessary to display the following:
Block Raise (Lower) Voltage
128.0 Volts
Block Raise (Lower) Voltage
496 TCC300
User Manual
Setpoints
128.0 Volts C
6. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons, enter the desired Block Raise (Lower) Limit (95.0
to 135.0 Volts in 0.1 increments), then press the ENT pushbutton. The following will
be displayed reflecting the value that was entered.
7.2.2 Enabling or disabling Voltage Runup from the HMI
Profile Settings
menu.
4. Verify that the desired Setpoint Profile is indicated, then press the Down arrow
pushbutton, as necessary, until the following is displayed:
Runup Enable/Disable
disable
disable C
6. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons, select ENABLE or disable, then press the ENT
pushbutton. The following will be displayed reflecting the selection.
7.2.3 Setting the Voltage Runback and Runup Deadband from the
HMI
Profile Settings
menu.
TCC300 497
User Manual
Setpoints
Runback (Runup) Deadband
2.0 Volts
Runback (Runup) Deadband
2.0 Volts C
6. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons, enter the desired Runback (Runup) Deadband (1.0
to 4.0 Volts in 0.1 increments), then press the ENT pushbutton.
7.2.4 Setting the Current Block Limit from the HMI
Profile Settings
menu.
Current Block Limit
640 mA
Current Block Limit
640 mA C
6. Utilize the arrow pushbuttons, to enter the desired Current Block Limit (50 to 640
mA in 1 mA increments), then press the ENT pushbutton.
7.2.5 Enabling or disabling the Low Current Block/Alarm from the HMI
Enabling the Low Current Block feature also enables the Low Current
Block/Alarm.
498 TCC300
User Manual
Setpoints
Tap Settings
"Nameplate" menu.
4. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as necessary, until the "Low Current Block"
Low Current Block
disable C
6. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons select ENABLE or Disable, then press the ENT
pushbutton.
7.2.6 Enabling or disabling the Low Current Block/Alarm from

TCC600
Enabling the Low Current Block feature also enables the Low Current
Block/Alarm.
TCC300 499
User Manual
Setpoints
2. From the "Low Current Block" section of the configuration dialog screen select
"Enable or Disable".

500 TCC300
User Manual
Setpoints

Screen
7.2.7 Setting Limits Runback Runup from TCC600
1. Select Setup/Setpoints from the TCC600® toolbar. TCC600 will display the
Setpoints dialog screen.
TCC300 501
User Manual
Setpoints
Selecting "Undo/Refresh" only affects the displayed profile.
2. Select the desired Setpoint Profile (1–4), then from the "Limit and Runback" section
of the Setpoints dialog screen enter the desired settings for the following:
• Block Raise
• Runback Deadband
• Block Lower
• Runup Deadband
• Runup Enable/Disable
• Current Limit
Selecting "Save" saves all profiles to the control.

screen.

502 TCC300
User Manual
Setpoints

Screen
7.3 Voltage reduction
TCC300 allows the selection of either Standard Voltage Reduction or Smart Voltage
Reduction. Standard Voltage Reduction lowers the Bandcenter based on a percentage of
the existing Bandcenter setting. When initiated, the control immediately begins Lower
operations to reduce the voltage until it reaches the new upper band edge (Bandcenter plus
½ the Bandwidth setting). Smart Voltage Reduction will further reduce voltage using a
variety of methods .
The control allows three steps of voltage reduction initiated by external dry contacts, front
panel pushbutton or SCADA. The percentage voltage reduction at each step is adjustable
from 0 to 10% in 0.1% increments. When one or more contacts are closed, the effect is to
shift the bandcenter setpoint lower thus causing the control to lower the voltage.
In addition, voltage reduction functionality can be enabled or disabled using

Communication MODBUS® and DNP protocols.
The Voltage Reduction feature can be turned off by the Voltage Reduction Turnoff Timer
(0 to 999 min). A setting of zero disables the Turnoff Timer.
Recognize that the "effective" bandcenter may have been raised by line drop compensator
action when the voltage reduction is initiated and that the resultant voltage setting will be
the combination of the two effects. Note also that the undervoltage block setting may limit
the lowering of voltage, especially if there is little raising of the local voltage due to LDC
action.
When first initiated, or when a subsequent step of voltage reduction is needed, the control
will respond immediately to the voltage reduction command without regard to either the
intertap time delay setting or the control time delay setting. After the desired voltage
reduction, operation will revert back to normal operation with the time delay.
TCC300 503
User Manual
Setpoints
When Voltage Reduction is enabled the front panel pushbutton, wired SCADA dry
contacts, RS-485, Fiber Optic port or Ethernet connection can be used to provide stepped
voltage reduction as described earlier.
Also, the state of the "Voltage Reduction" communications command can be saved or not
saved when power has been lost. The default setting is "DON'T SAVE".
7.3.1 Setting Voltage Reduction Steps 1, 2 and 3 from the HMI
Profile Settings
3. Press the Right or Left arrow pushbutton as necessary, to navigate to the "Voltage
Reduction" menu.
The following sequence of steps are for enabling Voltage Reduction

and setting Voltage Reduction Step 1. The steps used to set the
Voltage Reduction Steps 2 and 3 are similar.
4. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as necessary, to navigate to the "Reduction Step
1 %" (Step 2 or 3) menu item.
Reduction Step 1 %
2.5 C
6. Utilize the arrow pushbuttons to enter the desired Voltage Reduction (0.0 to 10.0 %
in 0.1 % increments), then press the ENT pushbutton.
7.3.2 Setting Voltage Reduction Steps 1, 2 and 3 from TCC600
504 TCC300
User Manual
Setpoints
2. From the "Voltage Reduction" section of the Setpoints dialog screen enter the
desired Voltage Reduction settings (0.0 to 10.0 % in 0.1 % increments) for the
following:
• Step 1
• Step 2
• Step 3
screen.
TCC300 505
User Manual
Setpoints


Screen
7.3.3 Enabling or disabling Standard Voltage Reduction from the HMI
Profile Settings
3. Press the Right or Left Arrow pushbuttons as necessary until the following is
displayed:
Voltage Reduction
4. Press the Down Arrow pushbutton as necessary to navigate to the "Standard Voltage
Reduction" menu item.
Standard VR
ENABLE C
6. Utilizing the Up/Down arrow pushbuttons, select either "ENABLE" or Disable",
506 TCC300
User Manual
Setpoints
7.3.4 Smart Voltage Reduction

Smart Voltage Reduction, when enabled, will lower voltage to between the new
Bandcenter setting and the lower band edge instead of stopping at the upper band edge. It
will also disable VAr Bias if it is in effect.
7.3.4.1 Enabling or disabling and setting Smart Voltage Reduction from the HMI
Profile Settings
displayed:
Voltage Reduction
4. Press the Down Arrow pushbutton as necessary to navigate to the "Smart Voltage
Reduction" menu item.
Smart VR
disable C
6. Utilizing the Up/Down arrow pushbuttons, select either "ENABLE" or Disable",
7.3.4.2 Enabling or disabling and setting Standard or Smart Voltage Reduction

from TCC600
TCC300 507
User Manual
Setpoints
2. From the "Voltage Reduction" section of the Setpoints dialog screen select
"Standard VR" Enable or "Smart VR" Enable. Only one voltage reduction method
can be enabled.
screen.

508 TCC300
User Manual
Setpoints

Screen
7.3.5 Save Voltage Reduction at power off

Save Voltage Reduction at Power Off allows the state of the "Voltage Reduction"
communication command to be saved or not saved when power has been lost. The default
setting is "DON'T SAVE".
7.3.5.1 Setting Save Voltage Reduction at Power Off from the HMI
Profile Settings
displayed:
Voltage Reduction
4. Press the Down Arrow pushbutton as necessary to navigate to the "Save VR at Power
Off" menu item.
Save VR at Power Off
DON'T SAVE C
6. Utilizing the Up/Down arrow pushbuttons, select "DON'T SAVE or SAVE", then
7.3.5.2 Selecting Save Voltage Reduction at Power Off from TCC600
TCC300 509
User Manual
Setpoints
2. From the "Voltage Reduction" section of the Setpoints dialog screen select Save for
the "Save VR at Power Off" option.
screen.

510 TCC300
User Manual
Setpoints

Screen
7.3.6 Setting Voltage Reduction Turnoff Timer from the HMI
Profile Settings
displayed:
Voltage Reduction
4. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as necessary, until the "Voltage Reduction
Turnoff Timer " screen is displayed.
VRed Turnoff Time
0 Min C
6. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons, select the desired Voltage Reduction Turnoff
Timer value (0 to 999 min), then press the ENT pushbutton.
7.3.7 Setting Voltage Reduction Turnoff Timer from TCC600
TCC300 511
User Manual
Setpoints
Entering a value of zero disables the Voltage Reduction Turnoff

Timer.
2. From the Voltage Reduction section of the dialog screen enter the desired time
period (1 to 999 minutes).
screen.
512 TCC300
User Manual
Setpoints


Screen
7.4 Line drop compensation
Voltage Regulation Without LDC

When the control is just used to regulate the voltage on the regulator low-side bus, the only
input required is voltage from a line-to-line or line-to-ground VT with a nominal 120 Vac
secondary.
Voltage Regulation With LDC

When it is desirable to regulate the voltage at some distance from the voltage regulator, or
in general to raise the voltage during high load conditions, the Line Drop Compensation
(LDC) feature is used.
Two different LDC methods are available in the TCC300 Digital Tapchanger Control. A
selection in the Setpoints/General section allows the user to select from either Resistance/
Reactance (R/X) or LDC-Z.
TCC300 513
User Manual
Setpoints
The Bandcenter, Bandwidth, and Time Delay functions are set the same as if LDC were
not used.
LDC R/X
A classical approach can be used to determine the R/X settings for the LDC, however this
assumes a load center point and is usually not applicable to the typical distribution feeder.
For more information, contact ABB for Application Note #17.
A simpler method, which will work for most applications, is recommended. This involves
looking at the lines leaving the station and determining the resistance/reactance (R/X)
ratio for the main line. The resistive and reactive line drop compensation setpoints should
then be entered in this same R/X ratio.
If the CT and VT phasing corrections have been made to compensate for any phase angles
between measured voltage and load current, only positive values of R and X compensation
need to be used.
Table 63: Approximate Ratio of Line Resistance to Reactance (R/X) of Typical Distribution Circuits
ACSR COPPER
MCM R/X MCM R/X
795 4.0 750 6.0
477 2.5 500 4.5
336 2.0 350 3.3
266 1.5 250 2.4
AVG R/X AVG R/X
4/0 1.2 4/0 2.0
2/0 1.0 2/0 1.5
2 0.5 2 0.7
6 .02 6 0.3
By knowing the ratio of the maximum expected load to the present load, the amount of
voltage compensation needed is found as shown in the following example.
Desired
• local voltage @ min load = 120 volts

• local voltage @ max load = 124 volts
Using the following assumptions:
514 TCC300
User Manual
Setpoints
• Desired Bandcenter = 120 volts

• Desired Bandwidth = 2 volts
• The device being controlled is 50% loaded
Setting
Start with R=0 and X=0 and increase both values using the ratio shown in the table for the
feeder conductor. Keeping the R/X ratio, increase Rset and Xset until the difference
between the compensated voltage and the local voltage is 2.0 volts.
This example would let the voltage vary from 119 V at no load to 125 V at maximum load
taking into account the bandwidth.
With this simplified method of LDC setting, the first customer’s voltage will be limited by
the upper voltage limit at the highest daily load, depending on the accuracy of the daily
load projection. At the same time, the furthest customer will receive the highest voltage
possible under the line and loading conditions. The first customer protection can be set on
the control.
Since the daily load projections will likely have a seasonal variation, the best balance of
first customer to furthest customer voltage may require seasonal adjustment of the LDC
settings. Note that the settings of R and X compensation are proportional to the peak load
projection and that new settings can be scaled from the first setting obtained by the
experimental process just described.
LDC‑Z
The second available compensation method is called Z-compensation (LDC-Z). LDC-Z
must be selected in the control setpoint portion of the menu or software and the
VOLTAGE RAISE (VR) setpoint must be set in order for this feature to be implemented.
The LDC-Z application is especially useful on systems where several lines exist with
different load centers where the proper compensation is not related to any single R & X
values as set in R & X compensation.
Basically, LDC-Z compensation consists of designating a target bus voltage increase (line
drop compensation) that correlates to the magnitude of the control current rather than to
the calculation of input R & X line drop at control current magnitude and angle values.
The setting, (VR), is the calculated load voltage drop (at maximum load) in the circuit or
line that has the ratio of the highest voltage drop at maximum load condition compared to
the rated CT output (200 mA).
VR = 0 to 72 volts in increments of 1 volt.
Example:
TCC300 515
User Manual
Setpoints
• Calculated voltage drop = 5 volts at load level of 150 mA control current.

• VR setting = 200/150 X 5 = 6.7 volts (rounded) = 7 volts
To calculate the line drop compensation at any given control current level (I):
• V = I/200 X 7 (setting): If I = 50 mA; V = 50/200 X 7 = 1.75 volts
As with R & X compensation applications, the "block raise" and "deadband" settings are
used for first house protection on all circuits or lines.
For additional information about LDC‑Z applications, contact ABB to

obtain Distributech Paper 1/27/05, "Maximizing Automatic Reverse
Power Operations with LTC Transformers and Regulators."
Table 64: Line Drop Compensation Setpoint Ranges

Function Setpoint Range Increment Default Setting
Bandcenter 100.0 V to 135.0 V 0.1 V 120.0 V
Bandwidth 1.0 V to 10.0 V 0.1 V 2.0 V
Definite Delay 1 second to 360 seconds 1 second 10 seconds
Inverse Delay 1 second to 360 seconds 1 second 10 seconds
LDC Resistance -72 V to +72 V 1V 0V
LDC Reactance -72 V to +72 V 1V 0V
LDC-Z 0 V to 72 V 1V 0V
7.4.1 Selecting Line Drop Compensation Type and Settings from the
HMI
Profile Settings
3. Press the Right or Left arrow pushbuttons, as necessary, to navigate to the "Common
Settings" menu.
pushbutton, as necessary, to navigate to the "LDC Selection" menu item.
516 TCC300
User Manual
Setpoints
LDC Selection
RX C
6. Utilizing the Up/Down arrow pushbuttons, select the desired type of Line Drop
Compensation (RX or Z), then press the ENT pushbutton.
• If "RX" Line Drop Compensation was selected, proceed to "Setting LDC
Resistance (R) and Reactance (X) Values".
• If "Z" Line Drop Compensation was selected, proceed to "Setting LDC-Z" .
7.4.2 Setting Power Flow Forward and Power Flow Reverse LDC
Resistance (R) and Reactance (X) values from the HMI
The steps necessary to set the Power Flow Forward LDC Resistance (R)
and Reactance (X) values are described here. The steps to set the Power
Flow Reverse LDC Resistance (R) and Reactance (X) are similar.
Profile Settings
Settings" menu.
4. Verify that the desired Setpoint Profile is indicated, then press the Right or Left
arrow pushbutton, as necessary, to navigate to the "Power Flow Forward" menu.
5. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as necessary, to navigate to the "LDC R Fwd" (or
LDC R Rev) menu item.
LDC R Fwd
0 Volts C
The double directional arrows in the display indicate that by

pressing Right or Left arrow pushbuttons the display will jump to the
LDC Selection display in the Common Settings menu. Pressing any
TCC300 517
User Manual
Setpoints
other pushbutton except ENT will then jump back to the LDC R(X)
Fwd(Rev) display.
7. Utilize the arrow pushbuttons to enter the desired LDC R value (–72 to +72 in 1 Volt
increments), then press the ENT pushbutton. The display will advance to the LDC
X Fwd display.
LDC X Fwd
0 Volts C
9. Utilize the arrow pushbuttons to enter the desired LDC X value (–72 to +72 in 1 Volt
increments), then press the ENT pushbutton. The display will return to the LDC R
Fwd display.
7.4.3 Setting Power Flow Forward and Power Flow Reverse LDC Z
values from the HMI
The steps necessary to set the Power Flow Forward LDC Z value are
described here. The steps to set the Power Flow Reverse LDC Z value are
similar.
Profile Settings
Settings" menu.
arrow pushbutton, as necessary, to navigate to the "Power Flow Forward" menu.
5. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as necessary, to navigate to the "LDC Z Fwd" (or
LDC Z Rev) menu item.
LDC Z Fwd
0 Volts C
518 TCC300
User Manual
Setpoints

LDC Selection display in the Common Settings menu. Pressing any
other pushbutton except ENT will then jump back to the LDC Z
Fwd(Rev) display
7. Utilize the arrow pushbuttons to enter the desired LDC Z value (0 to 72 in 1 Volt
increments), then press the ENT pushbutton.
7.4.4 Setting Line Drop Compensation from TCC600
TCC300 519
User Manual
Setpoints
2. Select the desired Setpoint Profile, then from the "General" section of the Setpoints
dialog screen, select the desired type of Line Drop Compensation (R, X or Z).
3. From the "Forward Power" section of the Setpoints dialog screen, enter the desired
LDC R, X or Z for Forward Power settings for the following:
• R, X (–72 to +72 in 1 Volt increments)
• Z (0 to 72 in 1 Volt increments)
If Re verse Power Flow settings are required, enter the desired LDC R, X or Z values
in the "Reverse Power" section of the Setpoints dialog screen.

screen.


Screen
520 TCC300
User Manual
Setpoints
7.5 Basic time delay
The Basic Time Delay setting is required to inhibit the tapchanger from unnecessary
operations on temporary voltage excursions and is commonly set at 30 to 60 seconds. The
timer includes two selectable elements "Definite/Inverse" and "Integrating/Instant
Reset".
The control will only respond to an out-of-band voltage excursion after the Basic Time
Delay has timed out. The Basic Time Delay can be set as an integrating timer or an
instantaneous reset timer upon the voltage return to an in-band condition. As an
integrating timer, it increments during time out-of-band and decrements during time in-
band, but not below zero.
The Basic Time Delay can be set to either a Definite or Inverse delay. Both types of delay
will work in Forward or Reverse Power Flow. The inverse time delay will follow the curve
in Figure 416.
Inverse Time Example
• Bandcenter 120 V
• Bandwidth 3 V
• Inverse Time Delay Setting 120 s
• ΔV = (Bandwidth/2) = 1.5 V
• Vin = 123 V
Voltage deviation in multiples of ΔV
= [Vin – Bandcenter]/ΔV
= (123 – 120)/1.5
=2
Time delay from Figure 416
= 50% of Inverse Time Delay setting
= 60 sec
TCC300 521
User Manual
Setpoints
GUID-FFEBCFA1-5CC1-4248-B1E0-72D358DDDC64 V1 EN
Figure 416: Inverse Time Delay Curve
7.5.1 Setting Basic Time Delay Timer Characteristic and Type from
the HMI
Profile Settings
Settings" menu.
522 TCC300
User Manual
Setpoints
pushbutton, as necessary, to navigate to the "Timer Characteristic" menu item.
Timer Characteristic
DEFINITE C
6. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons, select the desired Timer Characteristic (DEFINITE
or INVERSE), then press the ENT pushbutton.
7. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as necessary, to navigate to the "Timer Reset"
menu item.
Timer Reset
INTEGRATING C
9. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons, select the desired Timer Reset (INTEGRATING or
INSTANT RESET), then press the ENT pushbutton.
7.5.2 Setting Basic Time Delay Timer Characteristic and Type from
TCC600
TCC300 523
User Manual
Setpoints
dialog screen select the desired User Selectable Time Delay type (Definite or
Inverse).
3. From the "General" section of the Setpoints dialog screen select the desired User
Selectable Time Delay timer type (Integrating or Instant Reset).
524 TCC300
User Manual
Setpoints

screen.


Screen
7.6 Reverse power operation
The importance of the correct operation of the counter extends beyond mere counting
operations. One additional feature of the control is distinct "reverse power" operations
depending on power flow direction. In addition to normal configurations of "block" or
"ignore" during automatic reverse power detection, the control may be configured to
"regulate in reverse direction" or "return to the neutral position." The control includes a
power direction function for detecting the reversal of power flow in the regulator or
transformer. The active power direction is based on the flow of real power and is not
confused by reactive power flow in either direction.
TCC300 525
User Manual
Setpoints
The directional operation of the control will be reversed whenever the power flow reverses
to as little as 2% (4 mA) of the nominal 200 mA rating of the control. For example, to
change from a normal forward power to reverse operation, 4 mA of the real component of
the load current must be detected in the reverse direction. To then revert back to the normal
forward direction operation, 4 mA of the real component must be detected in the forward
direction. This establishes an 8 mA "hysteresis" effect.
Additionally, the control can be "biased" in either the forward or reverse direction
depending on circuit or system configuration. This essentially removes the 2%
requirement from the change to the biased direction. For example, a control biased in the
forward direction will change to the reverse direction as described above. It will require
only that the power flow be in the forward direction to change back to forward operation.
This biasing reduces the "hysteresis" effect to 4 mA from the original 8 mA.
In order for the "regulate in reverse direction" or "return to the neutral position" to
implement properly, two prerequisites are required. The first is Tap Position Knowledge.
Without knowledge of the tap position it would be impossible for the control to run the
tapchanger to the neutral position. The second is source side voltage. Without knowledge
of the source side voltage, it would be impossible to regulate it.
Detecting Reverse Power

Reverse power flow exists whenever the real component of the load current changes
direction from forward and remains until another reversal to forward power flow occurs.
The control reliably determines power direction with as little as 2% of the real component
of the nominal 200 mA load current (4.0 mA). A LED on the front panel will illuminate
whenever the control senses a reverse power condition.
Power Direction Bias Setpoints

Power Direction Bias includes three settings to determine how the control will switch
between forward and reverse power operation. The three settings are None, Forward Bias,
and Reverse Bias.
526 TCC300
User Manual
Setpoints
Table 65: Power Direction Bias settings

Setting Description
None When the Power Direction Bias function is set to
"None", the control applies an 8 mA hysteresis band
with a bandcenter of 0 load current (+4 mA to –4 mA)
to switch between forward and reverse power. The
control will switch from forward power to reverse
power when the load current exceeds –4 mA
(reverse direction). The control will switch from
reverse power to forward power when the load
current exceeds +4 mA (forward direction).
Forward Bias When the Power Direction Bias function is set to
"Forward Bias", the control applies a 0 mA to –4 mA
hysteresis band to switch between forward and
reverse power. The control will switch from reverse
power to forward power when load current is > 0 mA
(forward direction). The control will switch from
forward power to reverse power when the load
current exceeds –4 mA (reverse direction).
Reverse Bias When the Power Direction Bias function is set to
"Reverse Bias", the control applies a 0 mA to +4 mA
hysteresis band to switch between forward and
reverse power. The control will switch from forward
power to reverse power when load current is < 0 mA
(reverse direction). The control will switch from
reverse power to forward power when the load
current exceeds +4 mA (forward direction).
Reverse Power Operation Mode

Upon detection of power reversal, after a 5 second delay, the control will operate in the
selected mode. The operating mode is selected from the following options:
Block – Inhibits automatic tapchange operation. This locks the tapchanger on the tap
position in use at the time reverse power flow is detected. It is the recommended setting
for independent power producers or in situations when reverse power flow is not expected.
The control will revert to normal operation when forward power flow resumes.
Regulate Forward (Ignore) – The control will take no different action than in the forward
direction. It essentially does not use the power direction in the control decisions. This is
the same as a control which does not have power direction knowledge.
Regulate Reverse and Regulate Reverse Measured –The control will detect reverse
power flow and regulate according to reverse power settings as selected in the Setpoint
Menu. With tap position knowledge, the control calculates the source-side potential
without the use of a source side VT. This feature is designed for use with feeder voltage
regulators which continue to operate in a radial mode after system switching causes the
power flow reversal.
TCC300 527
User Manual
Setpoints
For Regulate Reverse the source voltage is calculated by knowing the local voltage, the
load current, and the tap position using a presumed regulator impedance. That impedance
is a function of the tap position. The calculated source voltage is only valid with a 5/8 %
step-voltage regulator.
When Reverse power is detected and the Operation Mode is in "Regulate Reverse
Measured", the control will energize an internal contact that will switch the input to the VT
from Load side to Source side. After a 4 cycle delay, the source side voltage will be
measured, the load voltage at this instant will be displayed as zero. In forward power
direction, the control will switch the input back to the load side voltage.
With the control recognizing reverse power flow, the following occurs:
• The REV PWR LED is illuminated.

• Reverse power setpoints are used.
• Source voltage is calculated in case of Regulate Reverse and measured in case of
Regulate Reverse Measured and motor output commands are reversed. For example,
when the voltage is high, the control raises the tap thereby lowering the voltage and
a lower is indicated on the front panel LEDs.
Return to Neutral – To use this feature, a counter input must be provided, and
KeepTrack™ tap information modes must be enabled.
The Return to Neutral feature will cause the tap position to be driven to neutral when
reverse power is detected. Tap position will be driven to neutral regardless of the voltage
or currents present at the control. Once neutral is reached, the tap position will remain
unchanged as long as reverse power is present. Normal operation will resume when
forward power is detected.
This mode is intended as a safe response to a power reversal on a system which can have
conflicting situations. As described earlier, a radially operating system with reverse power
should be set to "Regulate Reverse Measured" However, if a DG causes a power reversal,
the proper setting is usually "Ignore". In an application where both conditions are possible
and it is not possible for the control to determine the cause of power reversal, the proper
setting of "Return to Neutral" is advised.
Distributed Generation – Distributed Generation allows alternate LDC R and X values

to be applied to the control when reverse power is detected. The factory setting is BLOCK.
This mode is intended for use on distribution systems that have the possibility of power
reversal because of distributed generation (DG) on the feeders. In these applications, the
DG usually does not have the capacity to control the voltage with the more powerful
system intact.
The condition required for DG to control the voltage is the generation and transmission of
large amounts of VArs through the line impedance back towards the system source.
Usually two items prohibit this action:
528 TCC300
User Manual
Setpoints
• The ability of the DG to generate those amounts of VArs.

• The contractual obligations enforced by many utilities that the DG only affect KWs
on the system.
Smart Reverse Power (Auto Determination)

Due to the increased use and larger capacities of Distributed Generation, it is possible for
a regulator to see a reverse power condition requiring more than one reverse power mode
depending on the cause of the reverse power condition; either Distributed Generation
mode or Regulate In Reverse/Regulate in Reverse Measured. The TCC300 provides two
new reverse power modes, "Auto Determination" and "Auto Determination Measured"
which allow the control to intelligently choose which reverse power mode applies at the
time reverse power is sensed.
Auto Determination and Auto Determination Measured – This feature performs the
following sequence when reverse power is detected:
1. Distributed Generation Mode will be applied initially.

2. On the next tap operation, Load Voltage will be measured before and one second after
the tap (defined as 1 second after the operation counter has incremented either due to
a counter input or motor hold). The absolute magnitude value of this difference is
stored internally as the Tap Delta Voltage.
2.1. If the Tap Delta Voltage is greater than 0.4 Vac, the control stays in Distributed
Generation Mode and will behave normally in this mode with no further
measurements of Load Voltage needed.
2.2. If the Tap Delta Voltage is less than or equal to 0.4 Vac, the control increments
an internal counter designed to keep track of how many times the Tap Delta
Voltage is less than 0.4 Vac. The next tap operation will again measure Load
Voltage in the same manner. If the control sees two consecutive Tap Delta
Voltage measurements less than or equal to 0.4 Vac, the control changes from
Distributed Generation Mode to either Regulate Reverse if "Auto
Determination" has been selected, or Regulate Reverse Measured if "Auto
Determination Measured" has been selected.
2.3. If Tap Delta Voltage is greater than 0.4 Vac on the second tap operation, the
control does not increment the internal counter, and stays in Distributed
Generation Mode. The control will then measure Tap Delta Voltage on the next
tap. If that third tap has a Tap Delta Voltage greater than 0.4 Vac, then the
control remains in Distributed Generation Mode and the internal counter is
cleared. If the third tap has a Tap Delta Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 Vac, the
condition meets the requirements of 2b above and the control will respond
accordingly.
3. Once the control has determined which Reverse Power mode to apply using the
method described above, it will operate in that mode as long as Reverse Power is
detected.
TCC300 529
User Manual
Setpoints
TCC600 Reverse Power Vendor Cross Reference

The Reverse Power section of the TCC600 Setpoints screen also contains a link which
displays the "Reverse Power Vendor Cross Reference" table showing Cooper/Siemens
reverse power names and their ABB equivalents.
GUID-F94E7F6F-8790-48D5-8849-51B45512FDBC V1 EN
Figure 420: TCC600 Reverse Power Vendor Cross Reference Table
7.6.1 Setting Reverse Power Operation and Power Direction Bias

Mode from the HMI
Profile Settings
Settings" menu.
pushbutton, as necessary, to navigate to the "Rev Power Operation" menu item.
530 TCC300
User Manual
Setpoints
Rev Power Operation
BLOCK C
6. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons select the desired Reverse Power Operation mode
and press the ENT pushbutton.
• BLOCK
• IGNORE
• REGULATE REVERSE
• RETURN TO NEUTRAL
• REG. R MEASURED SRCC
• DG Mode
• AUTO DETERMINE
• AUTO DETERMINE M
7. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as necessary, to navigate to the "Power Direction
Bias" menu item.
Power Direction Bias
NONE C
9. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons select the desired Power Direction Bias mode
(NONE, FORWARD or REVERSE), then press the ENT pushbutton.
7.6.2 Setting Reverse Power Operation and Power Direction Bias

Mode from TCC600
TCC300 531
User Manual
Setpoints
dialog screen select the desired Power Direction Bias mode (None, Forward or
Reverse).
3. From the "Reverse Power" section of the Setpoints dialog screen select the desired
Reverse Power Operation mode:
• Block
• Regulate Forward (Ignore)
• Regulate Reverse
• Return to Neutral
• Regulate Reverse (Measured)
532 TCC300
User Manual
Setpoints
• Distributed Generation
• Auto Determination
• Auto Determination (Measured)

screen.


Screen
7.7 Power flow settings
Bandcenter
The center of the voltage band is adjustable from 100.0 to 135.0 Vac in 0.1 volt increments
(for example, 120.0 Vac).
TCC300 533
User Manual
Setpoints
Bandwidth
The regulator uses discrete steps and the Bandwidth must have a width that allows at least
one tapchange position where the control remains satisfied. To minimize excessive
operations on the regulator, this bandwidth is usually set to include two or three in-band
tap operation positions.
The range is settable from 1.0 to 10.0 volts in 0.1 volt increments, and 2 volts minimum
is recommended. This setting is the total bandwidth.
7.7.1 Setting Bandcenter and Bandwidth from the HMI
Profile Settings
Settings" menu.
arrow pushbutton, as necessary, to navigate to the "Power Flow Forward" menu
item.
The steps necessary to set Bandcenter Forward are described here.

The steps to set Bandcenter Reverse are similar.
5. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as necessary, to navigate to the "Bandcenter

Fwd" menu item.
Bandcenter Fwd
120.0 Volts C
7. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons enter the desired Bandcenter Fwd value (100.0 to
135.0 in 0.1 Volt increments), then press the ENT pushbutton. The following will be
displayed reflecting the value that was entered.
8. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as necessary, to navigate to the "Bandwidth Fwd"
menu item.
Bandwidth Fwd
534 TCC300
User Manual
Setpoints
2.0 Volts C
10. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons enter the desired Bandwidth Fwd value (1.0 to 10.0
Volts in 0.1 Volt increments), then press the ENT pushbutton.
7.7.2 Setting Bandcenter and Bandwidth from TCC600
TCC300 535
User Manual
Setpoints
2. Select the desired Setpoint Profile, then from the "Forward Power" or "Reverse
Power" section of the Setpoints dialog screen enter the desired Bandcenter value
(100.0 to 135.0 in 0.1 Volt increments).
3. From the "Forward Power" or "Reverse Power" section of the Setpoints dialog
screen enter the desired Bandwidth value (1.0 to 10.0 Volts in 0.1 Volt increments).

screen.


Screen
536 TCC300
User Manual
Setpoints
7.7.3 Setting the Definite or Inverse Delay from the HMI
Profile Settings
Settings" menu.
arrow pushbutton, as necessary, to navigate to the "Power Flow Forward" menu
item.
The steps necessary to set Power Flow, Forward Definite (Inverse)

Delay are described here. The steps to set Power Flow Reverse
Definite (Inverse) Delay are similar.
5. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as necessary, to navigate to the "Definite

(Inverse) Delay Fwd" menu item.
Definite Delay Fwd
30 Sec C

Timer Characteristic Selection display in the Common Settings
menu. Pressing any other pushbutton except ENT will then jump
back to the Definite Delay Fwd (Rev) display.
7. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons, enter the desired Definite (Inverse) Delay Fwd
value (1 to 360 Seconds in 1 Second increments), then press the ENT pushbutton.
7.7.4 Setting the Definite or Inverse Delay from TCC600
TCC300 537
User Manual
Setpoints
2. Select the desired Setpoint Profile, then from the "Forward Power" and/or "Reverse
Power" section of the Setpoints dialog screen enter the desired Definite (Inverse)
Delay Fwd or Rev value (1 to 360 Seconds in 1 Second increments).

screen.
538 TCC300
User Manual
Setpoints


Screen
7.8 VAr bias
This feature is intended for but not restricted to use with distribution feeders which have
switched capacitor banks controlled by ABB Autodaptive® Capacitor Controls.
The use of VAr Bias allows the TCC300 Tapchanger Control to coordinate its operation
with Autodaptive Capacitor Control devices on the distribution system in order to
minimize losses, subsequent voltage variations, and equipment capacity requirements of
transmitting VArs. This function is enabled through TCC600® Communications
Software or from the control HMI.
The VAr Bias feature includes two selectable VAr Bias methods, "Step" and "Linear".
When enabled in either "Step or "Linear" mode, the control will bias the Bandcenter based
on the amount of measured reactive load current.
TCC300 539
User Manual
Setpoints
7.8.1 Step VAr bias method

Table 66: Step VAr Bias method settings
Setting Description
Forward Power Max 3 Phase Cap Bank Size Adjustable from 4 to 12000 KVAr.
Reverse Power Max 3 Phase Cap Bank Size Adjustable from 4 to 12000 KVAr.
Lead % Bank Size Pickup Defines a Lower negative VAr limit in percentage of
the Max Cap Bank size below which the control will
increase the upper band edge by the amount defined
by VAr Bias Voltage Step.
Lag % Bank Size Pickup Defines an Upper positive VAr limit in percentage of
the Max Cap Bank size above which the control will
decrease the lower band edge by the amount
defined by VAr Bias Voltage Step.
VAr Bias Voltage Step Amount by which the control will increase or
decrease the Upper or Lower band edges when
there is a VAr Bias out of band situation.
Max VAr Bias Duration Maximum allowable time in minutes the control will
bias the voltage edge.
When the control determines that the reactive power is lower or greater than the limits
defined by the Lead or Lag % pickup setting, the control will start an inverse VAr Bias
Pickup Trigger timer. After the inverse time expires, the control will either increase or
decrease the effective bandcenter by the amount defined by the VAr Bias Step Voltage
setting depending on the direction of the reactive power. At this moment VAr Bias
becomes active. The use of an inverse timer is to avoid jittering in the VAr Bias detection
and also to provide a faster response as the difference between the Upper or Lower VAr
Bias band edge and the measure VArs increase. For example, suppose the system is highly
inductive (positive VArs) the load voltage will tend to decrease, when VAr Bias is in
effect, the control will automatically reduce the lower band edge and thus the control will
be back in band, allowing the downstream cap controls to operate.
The longest allowable time delay before VAr Bias comes into effect is 10 seconds. The
inverse timer follows the following equation:
Time delay = 10 *(Upper or Lower VAr Limit)/IVAr measured.
Upper VAr limit is defined as Lag % Bank Size Pickup multiply by a third of Max Cap
Bank size.
Lower VAr limit is defined as Lead % Bank Size Pickup multiply by a third of Max Cap
Bank size.
540 TCC300
User Manual
Setpoints
The VAr Bias Pickup trigger timer will instantly reset to ZERO if the reactive power
measurement returns within the allowable band before VAr Bias becomes active.
Once VAr Bias is active, the control will remove the VAr Bias condition for the following
situations.
• When Max VAr Bias Duration is exceeded (see below description). – When reactive
power returns back in band within 90% of the VAr limits set by Lag or Lead % Bank
Size Pickup settings. For example, if the Upper VAr limit is 75 % of 12000 KVAr
bank then the level below which the control will return in band after going out above
the Upper VAr limit is 9*3000/10 = 2700 KVAr. Similarly if the Lower VAr limit is
at -3000 then the in band limit is -2700 KVAr.
The application of both the TCC300 Tapchanger Control and the Autodaptive Capacitor
Control(s) on a circuit provides for an interaction between the devices that provides for
faster response in times of rapidly changing conditions on the distribution system. For
example, if one regulator is serving 6 feeders, with each feeder using 1200 KVAr pole-top
feeder capacitor banks, and if each feeder is correctly compensating to within 400 KVAr,
all feeder bank controls would be considered to be operating correctly. However the
regulator would still be transforming up to 2400 KVAr (six feeders times 400 KVAr) from
the transmission system. The TCC300 Control on the regulator would detect this
condition and affect additional line capacitor operation by making a temporary voltage
level setting change. By effectively lowering its setting (delaying a voltage tap RAISE for
a short time), line capacitor bank control could be biased into operation sooner by the
tapchanger control. This would reduce losses of the circuit, provide a better voltage profile
and reduce the number of tapchanges.
In effect, when enabled user sets VAr Bias setting values at which bandcenter/bandwidth
is shifted to influence downstream Capacitor Control(s) into operation. Shifted
bandcenter/bandwidth returns to prior settings after measured VAr level returns within
band. If Max VAr bias Duration is exceeded, the shifted bandcenter/bandwidth returns to
prior setting and an ALARM is activated if configured to do so. The alarm will also have
corresponding communication events reported. When VAr Bias is active the OSC and
SOE may be triggered if selected.
7.8.1.1 Enabling Step VAr Bias Method from the HMI
Profile Settings
3. Press the Right or Left arrow pushbutton, as necessary, to navigate to the "VAr Bias"
menu.
TCC300 541
User Manual
Setpoints
4. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as necessary, until the "VAr Bias Method" screen
is displayed.
Set VAr Bias Method
disable C
6. Utilizing the Up/Down arrow pushbuttons, select "STEP", then press the ENT
Set VAr Bias Method
STEP
7. Press the Up/Down arrow pushbuttons, as necessary, to navigate to the "Disable on
Rev Pwr" menu item.
Disable on Rev Pwr
disable C
9. Utilizing the Up/Down arrow pushbuttons, select either "Enable or disable", then
• Forward Max Cap Bank Size
• Reverse Max Cap Bank Size
• Lead % Pickup
• Lag % Pickup
• VAr Bias Voltage Step
• Max VAr Bias Time
7.8.1.2 Enabling Step VAr Bias Method from TCC600
542 TCC300
User Manual
Setpoints
2. From the VAr Bias section of the dialog screen select "Step". TCC600 will display
the Step VAr Bias settings.
GUID-9031B92C-17AA-46BF-A9DD-C718F890688D V1 EN
Figure 431: Setpoints Dialog Screen With Step VAr Bias Enabled
3. Enter the desired settings for the following:
TCC300 543
User Manual
Setpoints
• If desired, select "Disable on Reverse Power".

• Enter a Forward Power Maximum 3 Phase Capacitor Bank Size (4 to 12,000
kVAr)
• Enter a Reverse Power Maximum 3 Phase Capacitor Bank Size (4 to 12,000
kVAr)
• Lead % Bank Size Pickup (10 to 100%)
• Lag % Bank Size Pickup (10 to 100%)
• VAr Bias Voltage Step (0.1 to 2.0 V)
• Max VAr Bias Duration (10 to 1440 min)
screen.


Screen
544 TCC300
User Manual
Setpoints
7.8.2 Linear VAr bias method

Table 67: Linear VAr Bias method settings
Setting Description
Current Multiplier Base Value Adjustable from 0 to 32600.
No Voltage Reduction – Linear Voltage Bias (-X) The Linear Voltage Bias (-X) setting defines the
Adjustable from -72 to 0 Volts at 200 mA Reactive
Load.
No Voltage Reduction – Linear Voltage Bias (-X) The Linear Voltage Bias (-X) Limit, limits the total
Limit voltage bias that can affect the control
Bandcenter.Adjustable from -5.0 to 0.0 Volts.
During Voltage Reduction – Linear Voltage Bias (+X) The Linear Voltage Bias (+X) setting defines the
Adjustable from 0 to 72 Volts at 200 mA Reactive
Load.
During Voltage Reduction – Linear Voltage Bias (+X) The Linear Voltage Bias (+X) Limit, limits the total
Limit voltage bias that can affect the control Bandcenter.
Adjustable from 0.0 to 5.0 Volts.
The Linear VAr Bias feature allows a Regulator or LTC Control to coordinate operations
with Capacitor Banks downstream of the Regulator or LTC. The Linear VAr Bias feature
utilizes the reactive load current measurement capability of the TCC300 to adjust the
Bandcenter of the control in order to bias downstream capacitors to operate to maintain a
flat voltage profile.
When enabled the regulator will bias the Bandcenter of the control based on the amount
of measured reactive load current. Additionally, if LDC settings are non-zero values in the
control, they are disabled while Linear VAr Bias is selected. A Linear Voltage Bias (-X)
Setting is created which defines the amount of voltage bias to be applied to the Bandcenter
when at 1 PU reactive current loading. A Linear Voltage Bias (-X) Limit is created which
limits the total voltage bias that can affect the control Bandcenter.
A Max Bias Duration setting is also included that limits the maximum allowable time in
minutes that the control will bias the voltage edge as long as no Voltage Reduction (VR)
is in effect.
When a VR is in effect, the Linear Voltage Bias (+X) and a Linear Voltage Bias (+X)
Limit are used instead of the (-X) Limits to bias the control Bandcenter. In effect, when
enabled the user sets the Linear VAr Bias setting values at which bandcenter/bandwidth
is shifted to influence downstream Capacitor Control(s) into operation.
TCC300 545
User Manual
Setpoints
The shifted bandcenter/bandwidth returns to prior settings after the measured VAr level
returns within band. If Max VAr Bias Duration is exceeded, the shifted bandcenter/
bandwidth returns to prior setting and an ALARM is activated if configured to do so. The
alarm will also have corresponding communication events reported. When VAr Bias is
active the OSC and SOE may be triggered if selected.
7.8.2.1 Enabling Linear VAr Bias Method from the HMI
Profile Settings
3. Press the Right or Left arrow pushbutton, as necessary, to navigate to the "VAr Bias"
menu.
4. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as necessary, until the "VAr Bias Method" screen
is displayed.
Set VAr Bias Method
disable C
6. Utilizing the Up/Down arrow pushbuttons, select "Linear", then press the ENT
Set VAr Bias Method
LINEAR
7. Press the Up/Down arrow pushbuttons, as necessary, to navigate to the "Disable on
Rev Pwr" menu item.
Disable on Rev Pwr
disable C
9. Utilizing the Up/Down arrow pushbuttons, select either "Enable or disable", then
• Current Multiplier Base Value
• Linear Voltage Bias [1] -X
• Linear Voltage Bias -X Limit
• Linear Voltage Bias [1] +X
• Linear Voltage Bias +X Limit
[1] Voltage Bias at 200 mA Reactive Load
546 TCC300
User Manual
Setpoints
7.8.2.2 Enabling Linear VAr Bias Method from TCC600
2. From the VAr Bias section of the dialog screen select "Linear". TCC600 will display
the Linear VAr Bias Settings.
TCC300 547
User Manual
Setpoints
GUID-048D237F-43CD-4AD9-AE34-E622A23E6616 V1 EN
Figure 435: Setpoints Dialog Screen With Linear VAr Bias Enabled
3. Enter the desired settings for the following:

• If desired, select "Disable on Reverse Power".
• Enter a Current Multiplier Base Value (0 to 32600)
• Enter a "No Voltage Reduction" Linear Voltage Bias (-X) setting (-72 to 0
Volts at 200 mA Reactive Load)
• Enter a "No Voltage Reduction" Linear Voltage Bias (-X) Limit setting (-5.0
to 0.0 Volts).
• Enter a "During Voltage Reduction" Linear Voltage Bias (+X) setting (0 to 72
Volts at 200 mA Reactive Load)
• Enter a "During Voltage Reduction" Linear Voltage Bias (+X) Limit setting
(0.0 to 5.0 Volts).
screen.

548 TCC300
User Manual
Setpoints

Screen
TCC300 549
User Manual
550
Installation
Section 8 Installation
8.1 Installation
An adapter panel or a M-2050 Surface Mounting Kit must be used with the TCC300
Tapchanger Control. Each panel adapts the control as a transformer or regulator control
replacement and provides the external connections necessary for operation via terminal
blocks on the rear of the adapter panel.
In lieu of using one of the adapter panels to mount the control, the M‑2050 Surface
Mounting Kit permits surface mounting. The kit consists of two right angle mounting
brackets which bolt to the rear top and bottom of the control. All necessary hardware is
included in the kit. Also included is a 24-pin, in-line female connector with six-foot
pigtails on each pin to facilitate custom connection of the control in original equipment
manufacturers’ applications.
8.2 External connections
Available connectors include:
• One RS‑485
• One Fiber Optic connection
• One RJ-45 (optional)
• One 24-pin blue connector
• One RS-232 DE9S connectors
• In-line, 6-pin connector for the M‑2025B(D) Current Loop Module
• Control Power Backup Input option
• Source Voltage Input
• 1 Auxiliary Output
• 3 Auxiliary Inputs
TCC300 551
User Manual
Installation
Control Power
Top View Backup Input
Ethernet over
Fiber Optic
Fiber Optic (optional)
V-pin RS-485
Connector
XT
(optional)
Fiber Optic
ST Connector
RJ-45 Ethernet RS-232 DE9S
over Copper Front
(optional)
In-Line, 6-Pin
Connector for the
M-2025B(D)
Current Loop Module
24-Pin Blue Connector

for M-2000 Series Source Voltage Input
Bottom View One Aux Output
Adapter Panels or
Three Aux Inputs
direct connection
GUID-8D7A6A0B-17E5-4D1E-A569-464AEA047ECC V1 EN
Figure 438: External Connection Locations
The external connections for the control are made to the 24-pin connector, P2. For
example, if external dry contacts are being used to control the voltage reduction Step #1
function, connections for these contacts may be made between Pin 10 and Pin 18 as shown
in Figure 440. The dry contact inputs for non-sequential input, voltage reduction, motor
seal-in, counter input and neutral detection must be "wetted" by connecting to terminal Pin
10.
These binary inputs must be "wetted" by connection to Pin 10 only–a

nominal 12 Vdc source. If the contacts are connected to a 120 Vac source,
it will result in damage to the control.
552 TCC300
User Manual
Installation
OR CONTACT KEEPTRACK 1R1L/1N INPUT
Note
3
#1
OR CONTACT KEEPTRACK 1R1L/1N INPUT
P3
SOURCE VOLTAGE INPUT 1
AUX OUTPUT 2
AUX INPUT A1 3
OR DVAr2 DISABLE INPUT
AUX INPUT A2 4
AUX INPUT A3 5
GUID-8A8C2683-25B1-4C7E-9CDE-5887825691BF V1 EN
Figure 439: Typical TCC300 Stand-Alone External Connections
1. Motor voltage may be 120 or 240 V to neutral, or 240 V phase-to-

phase.
2. The customer is to provide an earth ground connection to the CT/
VT’s neutral connection, external to the control.
3. To Motor Power Seal-In board.
4. If the TCC300 is configured for the SCAMP pushbutton Auto/
Manual Switch type, then the Self‑Test Alarm relay is NOT
available.
TCC300 553
User Manual
Installation
When an adapter panel is not used, automatic shorting of CT inputs is not

provided by the TCC300/M-2050; the customer must provide a method
for shorting the CT's before the control is disconnected.
554 TCC300
User Manual
Installation
TB1
Non-Sequential / Auto Non-Sequential / Auto Tapchange
1
Tapchange Inhibit Input Inhibit Contact
Voltage Reduction Voltage Reduction

2
Step #2 Input Step #2 Contact
Circulating Current
3
(Return)
To Paralleling
Circulating Current Unit
4
(Polarity)
Tapchanger Raise
5
Output
Tapchanger Lower Motor

6
Output
L R
Voltage Reduction Voltage Reduction
7
Step #1 Input Step #1 Contact
Neutral
Neutral 8 (Grd Stud)
(Motor Return)
Motor Power 120/
9
240 Vac Supply
Regulated Voltage 20, 21 or Voltage In

10
(120 Vac) 22 on T.C. (Reg 120 V)
11
Neutral Light
Neutral Light
Switch
Position
Drag Hands Reset 12
Indicator Reset
Operations Operations
13
Counter Input Counter Switch
Line Current
14
(Polarity) Line
CT
Current
Line Current
15
(Return) CT Shorting
Switch
Motor Power
16
Return
TB2
17
Local/Remote
18
19
Auto Disable
20
Manual Raise 21
Manual Lower 22
Motor Seal-In Input 23
Self-Test Alarm
24
(Return)
Self-Test Alarm
25
(Polarity)
User-Programmable
26
Alarm (Return)
User-Programmable
27
Alarm (Polarity)
+12 Vdc Wetting 28

Supply
GUID-B1AD01CE-F6D7-4C3F-9389-E59E9147C972 V1 EN
Figure 440: Typical Adapter Panel External Connections
TCC300 555
User Manual
Installation
Open CT secondary will result in high voltage at CT terminals. Death,

severe injury or damage to equipment can occur.
Do not operate with CT secondary open. Short circuit or apply burden at

CT secondary during operation.
The communication ports provide remote access to the tapchanger control using the
TCC600® Communications Software.
Pin 1 Voltage Input

This input accepts nominal 120 Vac, 60 Hz (or 50 Hz as ordered) to operate the control's
power supply and voltage sensing input. The acceptable voltage range for proper control
operation is from 90–140 Vac.
Power consumption is less than 8 VA. The input voltage is referenced to line neutral (Pin
3).
Control users may encounter situations where actuating the Drag Hands Reset pushbutton
on one of any of our adapter panels results in the loss of a Voltage Sense fuse. The Drag
Hands reset solenoid is powered from the circuit that powers the control, and provides the
control with sensing voltage. Initially, a 1/4 Ampere fuse was used in this circuit, and most
recently a 1 Ampere fuse was substituted to prevent further loss of the fuse. This
phenomenon is due to the fact that, as solenoids age, they may become sticky due to
mechanical misalignment, hardened grease, or shortened windings.
The adapter panels include a one ampere fuse in the voltage sense circuit. This value
should be adequate for all but the most extreme problems. When a Drag Hands Reset
Solenoid that consistently blows a one amp fuse is encountered, it is recommended that the
customer either remove the solenoid for cleaning and adjustment, or replace it completely.
Pin 2 Load Current Return

This is the non-polarity input to the load current measuring transformer. The companion
polarity input is Pin 4. The line current transformer input is isolated from other pins.
Pin 3 Neutral
This is the return for the Voltage Input (Pin 1), and nominal +12 Vdc "wetting" voltage
(Pin 10).
Pin 4 Load Current Polarity

The line current input range is 0–640 mA (200 mA continuous) with 200 mA representing
the 1.0 per‑unit value. The measured current value is used for line drop compensation and
metering calculation.
556 TCC300
User Manual
Installation
The current input to the TCC300 is rated at 0.2 A continuous, 0.4 A for two
Pin 5 Circulating Current Polarity

The circulating current transformer measures a relative reactive current flow between
transformers in parallel configuration. Maximum anticipated current input is 200 mA.
Pin 6 Circulating Current Return

This is the return path for Pin 5. The circulating current transformer input is isolated from
other pins.
Pin 7 Tapchanger Raise

This switched output connects the tapchanger raise winding to the source of motor power.
When the control calls for a raise, it is capable of switching up to 6 A at 120/240 Vac.
Pin 8 Motor Power Input

The source for powering the tapchanger motor is connected here. It may have a maximum
voltage of 240 Vac.
Pin 9
– Voltage Reduction Step #2
This digital input is typically enabled by connecting it to the nominal +12 Vdc wetting
source (Pin 10), through an external Form "a" dry contact. The amount of voltage
reduction implemented is determined by the setting.
When "Contact KeepTrackTM 1R1L" or "Contact KeepTrack 1N" Tap position

knowledge is selected the Voltage Reduction Step 2 Input is utilized as an "Auxiliary
Lower Contact Input". In the "Contact KeepTrack" method of Tap Position Knowledge,
Voltage Reduction Step 2 is still available through communications.
– Neutral Input Operation
When the parallel configuration mode is set to ΔVAR®2 (KeepTrackTM), the VR Step #2
input becomes the neutral input. This is due to the standard neutral input being used for
ΔVAR2 (Keeptrack) disable input when ΔVAR2 (Keeptrack) configuration is used.
TCC300 557
User Manual
Installation
Pin 10 +12 Vdc Wetting Voltage

This is the output of an unregulated dc power supply internal to the control. It is referenced
to neutral and can supply up to 100 mA. It is used for powering the digital inputs of the
control through external relays. Depending on the voltage supplied to Pin 1 and loading,
its output can vary from +10 to +18 Vdc. It is not fused in the control.
Pins 11 & 12 Operations Counter Inputs 1 and 2
When "Input Selection 1" configuration is set to "Seal-In," the Counter

Input is used as the Switch Status Input and the Seal-In Input will cause the
counter to increment.
This digital input registers the counter contact closure. The pins are isolated from neutral
to permit placing the external contact in series with either the wetting voltage or neutral.
The operation count will increment when Pin 12 is grounded via the transformer or
regulator dry operation count switch.
This contact is needed for using the intertap time delay. Once the contact is opened, the
intertap time delay will begin counting down.
With the "Cam Follower" Operation Counter configuration, the Counter

Input is used for the Cam Follower contact input.
Pin 13 Input 1 - Motor Seal-In/Switch Status Input

When the Input Selection (1) screen in the Configuration menu is set to Seal-In Input, this
input will operate as a seal-in input and Counter Input. In this configuration, the digital
input is referenced to line neutral, but is unique in that it is configured to accept only the
output of the motor seal-in current detection transformer, from the B‑0553 motor seal-in
printed circuit board subassembly. The B‑0553 is a supplemental circuit board used in the
appropriate adapter panels.
When the Input Selection (1) screen in the Configuration menu is set to Switch Status
Input, this input will only operate as a switch status input. All seal-in input functions will
be disabled. In this mode, the switch status on the adapter panel can be read to determine
if it is in Auto or Manual ON/OFF. The status can be read through the seal-in/switch status
data point in the communications protocols.
Pins 14 & 15 Neutral Position Detector Inputs 1 and 2/ΔVAR2 (KeepTrack)

Disable Input
This input will only perform one function, either the Neutral Detect or the
ΔVAR2 (KeepTrack) Disable Input.
558 TCC300
User Manual
Installation
This digital input registers neutral position switch closures on regulators. The pins are
isolated from neutral to permit placement of the external contact in series with either the
wetting voltage or neutral. Normally the wetting supply (Pin 10) will be connected to Pin
14.
When using the ΔVAR2 (KeepTrack) paralleling method, this input becomes the disable
input for ΔVAR2 (KeepTrack). This is used to keep the paralleled devices from running
to their limits (max raise or lower) if they have been un-paralleled for maintenance, etc.
Pin 16 Tapchanger Lower Output

This switched output connects the tapchanger lower winding to the source of motor
power. When the control calls for a lower, it is capable of switching up to 6 A at 120/240
Vac.
Pin 17 Input 2 - Non-Sequential Operation/Auto Tapchange Inhibit/Block

SCADA
– Non-sequential Operation
When the Input Selection (2) screen (in the Configuration menu) is set to NONSEQ
INPUT, non-sequential operation is invoked by momentarily connecting this input to the
nominal +12 Vdc wetting source (Pin 10) through an external Form "a" dry contact. When
this function is enabled, the tapchanger control times out with the Time Delay setting
between every tapchange.
– Auto Tapchange Inhibit
When the Input Selection (2) screen (in the Configuration menu) is set to NONSEQ
INPUT, auto tapchange inhibit is invoked by closing and maintaining a Form "a" dry
contact connected to this input and to the nominal +12 Vdc wetting source (Pin 10). As
long as this contact is closed, the tapchanger will not time out, thereby prohibiting raise
and lower commands.
– SCADA Cutout Input
When the Input Selection (2) screen (in the Configuration menu) is set to SCADA
CUTOUT INPUT, all writes using SCADA will be blocked when the non-sequential input
is present. Any read operations using SCADA will still be allowed regardless of the input
state. When the "SCADA Cutout Input" input mode is selected, all non‑sequential input
functions will be disabled.
Pin 18 Voltage Reduction Step #1

This digital input is typically enabled by connecting it to the nominal +12 Vdc wetting
source (Pin 10) through an external Form "a" dry contact. The amount of voltage reduction
implemented is determined by the setting.
TCC300 559
User Manual
Installation
Enabling both voltage reduction Step #1 and Step #2 inputs

simultaneously will result in the level of voltage reduction as specified on
the Voltage Reduction Step #3 screen of the control.
When "Contact KeepTrackTM 1R1L" or "Contact KeepTrack 1N" Tap position

knowledge is selected the Voltage Reduction Step 1 Input is utilized as an "Auxiliary
Raise Contact Input". In the "Contact KeepTrack" method of Tap Position Knowledge,
Voltage Reduction Step 1 is still available through communications.
Pin 19 Motor Seal-In Disconnect Output

This output connects to the B‑0553 motor seal-in printed circuit board subassembly.
When the seal-in detector input is actuated, this output drives a triac on the B‑0553 motor
seal-in printed circuit board subassembly to temporarily disconnect the motor power to
the control. The B‑0553 is a supplemental circuit board used in the appropriate adapter
panels.
Pins 20 & 22 User-Programmable Alarm

This pair of terminals is a Form "a" alarm relay contact rated for 3 A at 120 Vac, or 100
mA at 120 Vdc. This alarm indicates when any of the programmable alarm conditions are
detected.
Pins 21 and 24 Self-Test Alarm
If the TCC300 is configured for the SCAMP pushbutton Auto/Manual

Switch type, then the Self-Test Alarm relay is NOT available.
This pair of terminals is a held-open Form "b" alarm relay contact rated for 6 A at 120 Vac,
or 100 mA at 120 Vdc. Failure of the power supply or the micro controller results in loss
of power to the alarm relay, allowing the contact to close.
Pin 23 Non-Interruptible Power Supply Input

This input is normally connected to Pin 8, the motor power input. The power to Pin 8 is
interrupted by the motor seal-in process of the B‑0553 motor seal-in printed circuit board.
The purpose of Pin 23 is to provide continuous power to the raise and lower KeepTrackTM
detection circuits. It should be connected ahead of any motor power interruption (for
example, auto/manual, local/remote) of the seal-in circuitry to maintain KeepTrack raise
and lower operation. The motor seal-in function is used in the following adapter panels:
M‑2109, M‑2324 and M‑2355.
FIVE PIN CONNECTOR (Bottom)

Pin 1 Source Voltage Input
560 TCC300
User Manual
Installation
Source Voltage Input when mode of operation is set to "Regulate Reverse with Measured
Source Voltage".
Pin 2 Auxiliary Output
Available Auxiliary Output.
Pin 3 Auxiliary Input A1
When using the ΔVAR2 paralleling method, this input becomes the disable input for
ΔVAR2. This is used to keep the paralleled devices from running to their limits (max raise
or lower) if they have been un-paralleled for maintenance, etc.
Pins 4 and 5, Auxiliary Inputs - A2, A3
Available Auxiliary Inputs.
8.3 Non-sequential operation
Voltage applied through dry contacts to actuate non-sequential input,

voltage reduction inputs, counter contacts and neutral contacts must be
nominal +12 Vdc obtained from Pin 10 of the TCC300 Tapchanger
Control. The use of 120 Vac will result in damage to the TCC300.
The operation of the control can be interrupted during tapchanger operation by applying
the "wetting" voltage of Pin 10 to Pin 17 (timer reset for non-sequential operation input)
on the control through an external contact. This causes the output to de-energize and
re‑initialize the time delay circuit when the reset signal is removed. This function can be
used to cause the LTC transformer, if so equipped, to wait for the unit to time out between
tapchanges.
8.4 Multi-step voltage reduction
Voltage applied through dry contacts to actuate non-sequential input,

voltage reduction inputs, counter contacts and neutral contacts must be
nominal +12 Vdc obtained from Pin 10 of the TCC300 Tapchanger
Control. The use of 120 Vac will result in damage to the control.
On the TCC300 Tapchanger Control, Pin 9 and Pin 18 on connector P2 are used together
to provide up to three levels of voltage reduction. The external connections to achieve
these steps are shown in Table 54. Voltage reduction amounts are set within the TCC300
TCC300 561
User Manual
Installation
Tapchanger Control software. If these voltage reduction steps are instituted by

communications, the contacts are not being used simultaneously.
Table 68: Multi-Step Voltage Reduction External Connections
Voltage Reduction Setpoint: Multiplier Range Apply "Wetting Voltage" from Pin 10 to Pin #
Voltage Reduction Setpoint #1: 0 to 10% Pin 18
Voltage Reduction Setpoint #2: 0 to 10% Pin 9
Voltage Reduction Setpoint #3: 0 to 10% Pins 18 and 9
When Contact KeepTrackTM Tap Position Knowledge is selected Voltage Reduction Step
1 (Pin 18) and Voltage Reduction Step 2 (Pin 9) are assigned as Auxiliary Tap position
inputs.
8.5 LTC backup control
The M‑0329B is a single‑phase, solid‑state backup control that prevents a defective

tapchanger control from running the voltage outside the upper and lower voltage limits.
The Block Raise and Block Lower voltage levels are set by accurately calibrated dials.
Refer to the M‑0329B Instruction Book for details.
The M‑0329B LTC Backup Control or M‑5329 Multi phase Backup Relay are connected
as a two‑terminal device to the voltage transformer.
8.6 Communication ports
The control includes three communication ports, COM1, COM 2, and COM3. COM2
supports RS‑232 or V-pin, RS‑485, and fiber optic lines (ST connector only). COM 3
supports Ethernet using an RJ‑45 connector or Fiber ST.
Selection of specific communication parameters may be made through the COM1 or

COM2 PORT configuration screen or the COM3 Port screen if the optional Ethernet port
is installed. USB is an internal port, and supports only MODBUS® protocol and software
updates. COM1 and COM2 support baud rates from 300 to 115200.
Fiber Optic Interface

The COM1 PORT screen allows the user to select the specific communication equipment
to be used: RS‑485 (2 wire) or Fiber Optics (ST connector).
562 TCC300
User Manual
Installation
The control can be connected to fiber optics in two ways. If Fiber Repeat Switch on the
right side of control (as viewed from the rear) is set to OFF, the fiber interface is set in a
point‑to‑point configuration.
Example: A PC to one control. If Fiber Repeat Switch is set to ON, the control can be
connected in a loop or daisy chain (the TX of one control connected to the RX of the next,
etc.). When connecting the control in this manner through TCC600®, Echo Cancel should
be set to ON. The type of fiber used with these optical transceivers is multi mode fiber. It
was tested with fiber size 62.5/125. A manufacturer of this product is Amphenol
Corporation. A typical part number tested by ABB is 943‑32255‑10030 from Amphenol
Corporation, Lisle, Illinois. This is a dual-fiber with a total of four ST connectors.
943 - X X X XX - X X X X X
Side A S ide B
Cable Type
3 = 3 mm Jacketed Cable Length in Meters
5 = 900 µm Jackete d (e.g., 0001 = 1m)
9 = 900 µm Tight Buffered
Connector Types
2 = FC
Assembly Type 5 = ST
0 = Pigtail 6 = SC Boot Type
1 = Patch Cord (jumper) 1 = Standard
2 = Duplex Patch Cord (jumper) NOTE (for connector types): If 2 = Right Angle, Side A
3 = Duplex Connector Pigtail (SC only) assembly type = 0 (pigtail), 3 = Right Angle, Side B
4 = Duplex Connector Jumper (SC only) connector “type” digits are 4 = Right Angle, Side A & B
identical (i.e., 66=SC pigtail).
If assembly type = 1 (jumper),
Fiber Size use combinations of the above
1 = 50/125 types for each end of the jumper.
2 = 62.5/125 Always use the lower number in
Amphenol Fiber Optic cable the first (A) position (i.e., 11 =
4 = 100/140 P.N. Ordering biconic to biconic; 26 = FC to
Super ST).
GUID-149D664C-5C56-4C49-85E4-9D52D17AEB5C V1 EN
Figure 441: Communication Connections
Ethernet (RJ-45 Interface)

The control includes an optional Ethernet Port (COM3) which is compatible with all
protocols in the control. There are eleven configuration screens in the HMI for setting up
the ethernet port: DHCP Enable, IP Address, Net Mask, Gateway, MODBUS® Port, DNP
Port, Auto Negotiation, Keepalive time, SNTP Enable, SNTP Server Address and Time
Zone.
The IP Address screen is used to set the address used to communicate with the control
(when DHCP is disabled). The IP Net Mask screen is used for multicasting.
The DHCP Mode screen, when enabled, will allow the control to use any available IP
address (which will be shown while booting the Ethernet during control power up. When
TCC300 563
User Manual
Installation
DHCP is disabled, it will cause the control to use the IP address from the IP Address
screen.
RS‑485 Interface (Additional Communication Port)

The MODBUS and DNP3.0 communication protocols were set up to be compatible with
a 2‑wire, half duplex RS‑485 link of the TCC300 COM1.
A port-powered converter made by B & B Electronics of Ottawa, IL (Model 485LP9TB)

was used to test the two‑wire RS‑485 link. This converter is available in commercial and
extended temperature ranges. When connecting the RS‑485, a 120 Ω resistor must be
connected at the last control connector across A/B. The two-wire RS‑485 port assigns Pin
A (+) and Pin B (–). The SH connection on the RS‑485 plug should be connected to the
cable shield. The shield should only be connected on one end of the RS‑485 cable. If more
than one TCC300 control is connected via RS‑485, only one shield/SH connection should
be made. One screen is directly associated with setting an RS‑485 network. COM1 port
should be set to RS‑485. If using TCC600®, under Communications/Setup/Comm Port
menu, RS‑485 should be selected. When selecting RS‑485 transmission lines, there are
cables specifically made for this purpose. These cables have a shunt capacitance of 16 pF
or less per foot, and are usually solid wire. Plenum-rated cabling is recommended. The
RS‑485 connector is designed to hold 12 to 24 AWG wire.
564 TCC300
User Manual
Installation
8.7 Communication cables
GUID-8D058424-9E2B-477D-B2EF-650667C7D59E V1 EN
Figure 442: Null Modem Cable 9-Pin to 9-Pin
TCC300 565
User Manual
Installation
Digital
Tapchanger
Contr ol PC
(DB9P) (DB25S)
DCD 1 1 CG
RX 2 2 TX
TX 3 3 RX
DTR 4 4 RT S
SGND 5 5 CTS
DSR 6 6 DSR
RT S 7 7 SGND
CTS 8 8 DCD
unused 9 9
•
•
•
DTR
•
•
•
GUID-71E8A76E-98B3-4F33-9AB0-0C2471A0963C V1 EN
Figure 443: Null Modem Cable 9-Pin to 25-Pin
8.8 Grounding
Ground the control by connecting a suitably sized wire from the ground stud on the bottom
of the control case, to a solid connection to ground. Do not rely on mounting screws for
grounding.
8.9 Typical LTC connection
Figure 444 illustrates an example of connections for a control with an LTC Transformer
Control adapter panel. This example does not cover all situations. Motor Power and
566 TCC300
User Manual
Installation
sensing voltage can be obtained from a common source or from independent sources
having a nominal 120 Vac output. Normally, this is line‑to‑neutral voltage, although
line‑to‑line voltage can be used if recognition is made of any phase shift between the
voltage and current signals when using line drop compensation, to avoid introducing an
unintentional grounding into the control circuitry that could result in shorting a VT
secondary. It is strongly recommended that a 1:1 ratio isolation transformer of 25 VA or
greater with required voltage accuracy be used between the control and any line-to-line PT
connections. ABB has a suitable isolation transformer available in model M-0362. Please
consult factory for availability.
Load current must be reduced by an appropriate auxiliary transformer to 0.2 A "full scale"
before connecting to the adapter panel currents. Obtain an application guide specific to
your LTC control adapter panel and follow those instructions.
In no case should the line current circuit be interrupted with the regulator
or transformer energized. Do not remove auxiliary current transformers
without shorting the current inputs. Death or severe electrical shock can
occur.
TCC300 B
R
L
GUID-05A26C6D-7F1A-4E76-9958-BF605FDEA8EC V1 EN
Figure 444: TCC300 and LTC Transformer Control Adapter Panel Typical
Connections
TCC300 567
User Manual
Installation
1. Motor voltage may be 120 or 240 V to neutral or 240 V phase to

phase.
2. The customer is to provide earth ground connection to CT/VT's
neutral connection, external to the control.
3. The self-test alarm and user-programmable alarm contacts are shown
in the de-energized state (no voltage applied). The self-test alarm
contacts open after the control passes the internal self-test.
4. The wiring from terminal 7 and 9 may or may not go directly to the
motor. Depending on installation, local codes and standards, the
wiring may go to interposing relay contacts, limit switch, seal-in
circuits, starters contactors, SCADA, test switches etc.
5. To isolate the load current, remove the jumper from TB1‑2 to TB1‑3.
6. For counter operation, connect TB2‑20 to neutral TB1‑3 through an
external dry contact. This connection is required for the intertap time
delay operation.
8.10 Typical regulator connection
Figure 445 illustrates an example of connections for a control with a Regulator Control
adapter panel. This example does not cover all situations. Motor Power and sensing
voltage can be obtained from a common source or from an independent source having a
nominal 120 Vac output. Normally, this is line-to-neutral voltage, although line-to-line
voltage can be used if recognition is made of any phase shift between the voltage and
current signals when using line drop compensation, to avoid introducing an unintentional
grounding into the control circuitry that could result in shorting a VT secondary. It is
strongly recommended that a 1:1 ratio isolation transformer of 25 VA or greater with
required voltage accuracy be used between the control and any line-to-line PT
connections. ABB has a suitable isolation transformer available in model M-0362. Please
consult factory for availability.
Load current must be reduced by an appropriate auxiliary transformer to 0.2 A "full scale"
before connecting to the adapter panel current inputs. Scaling factors may be chosen to
resemble 200 mA, 100 mA, or 5 A current transformers in readouts and current magnitude
settings. It is important that you obtain an application guide on an adapter panel specific
to your regulator application and follow those instructions.
568 TCC300
User Manual
Installation
M-2230
M-2001 TB1
F1
Voltage Input Voltage In Voltage Input
1 1
(Polarity) Fuse (1/4 A) (Polarity)
Load Current
2 2 Neutral
(Return)
CT
Neutral 3 1 5 Line Current

Return
P2-1
6
Load Current
4 2 6
Line Current 5.0 A
(Polarity) (Polarity)
D2 D1
Circulating Current
5 3 9 Line Current 1.0 A
(Polarity) P2-3
7 (Polarity)
Circulating Current 4 Line Current 0.2 A
6 10
(Return) (Polarity)
Tapchanger Raise
7
D3 D4 11
Circulating Current 0.2 A
Output (Polarity)
Motor Power Input 8

Circulating Current 0.2 A
12
(Return)
Voltage Reduction Lower
9 15
Step #2 Input
Contact "Wetting" S1 Raise Motor

10 18
Supply +12 V dc Auto 3
(6 A) Motor Return
Operation Counter
11 OFF
2 19
Input #1 Motor Power Input
Operation Counter
12
Manual 1 20
Input #2 Manual Lower
R1 1k-1 W and Raise
Motor Seal-In Detector
Auto 4
13 21
Input
OFF
5
Neutral Position N/C
14 22 Programmable Alarm
Detector #1 Manual 6
Neutral Position
15 23 Programmable Alarm
Detector #2
Tapchanger Lower
16 29
Output
Non-Sequential
30
Auto Disable
Operation/Auto T.C. 17
Inhibit Input
Voltage Reduction 32
Volt Red #3
18
Step #1 Input
Motor Seal-In D5 D6 33
Volt Red #2
19
Disconnect Output
User-Programmable Volt Red #1

20 34
Alarm
Counter
Self-Test Alarm 21 51 Neutral
User-Programmable
22 60 Delta VAR2 Disable
Alarm
Non-Interruptable
23
Power Supply Input M-2230
Ground Stud
Self-Test Alarm 24
M-2001 Case
Ground Stud
GUID-D4596D9B-DF98-4326-B5D3-324055333160 V1 EN
Figure 445: TCC300 and Regulator Control Adapter Panel Typical Connections
1. The wiring from terminal 15-18 may or may not go directly to the
motor. Depending on installation, local codes and standards, the
wiring may go to interposing relay contacts, limit switch, seal-in
circuits, starters contactors, SCADA, test switches etc.
2. The self-test alarm and user-programmable alarm contacts are shown
in the de-energized state (no voltage applied). The self-test alarm
contacts open after the control passes the internal self‑test; the user-
programmable alarm contacts close when an alarm is recognized.
3. If the TCC300 is configured for the SCAMP pushbutton Auto/
Manual Switch type, then the Self‑Test Alarm Relay is not available.
TCC300 569
User Manual
Installation
8.11 Control power backup input connection
The Control Power Backup Input option is designed to sustain communication port
operation in the event of the loss of AC control power. In the event of a loss of AC input
power to the control, the option permits uninterrupted operation of the control by
supplying +12 Vdc to the control. In addition, the control retains functionality with the
exception of the actual operation of the tapchanger mechanism.
When the AC input voltage drops below approximately 85 Vrms, the Control Power
Backup Input will activate and all automatic tapchange operations will then be suspended.
If Motor Power is available, manual tapchanges may be initiated.
When the control is being powered from the Control Power Backup Input, it will continue
to read any input voltage present.
The control retains full functionality, and if the control's Motor Power remains energized
then Raise and Lower commands are possible. Fiber-Optic port operation is maintained.
All communication ports, data-logging, status monitoring, configuration, and setpoint
capability are also maintained.
The Control Power Backup Input option is installed at the factory, and is wired through the
two-pin connector located on the top rear of the control.
ABB offers two Control Power Backup supplies for use with the TCC300 when the
Control Power Backup Input option is purchased. The M‑2026 AC-DC Control Power
Backup Supply is a fused, surge protected and reverse polarity protected AC‑DC Control
Power Supply that accepts an AC or DC input (21 to 32, 42 to 60 and 105 to 145 V) and
outputs regulated +12 Vdc at up to 1.5 Amp.
The M‑2027 Control Power Backup Supply - AC Only is a fused and surge protected
Control Power Backup Supply that will accept an AC input range of 105 to 140 Vac, 50/60
Hz and output +12 Vdc to 1 A.
Both the M‑2026 and M‑2027 are housed in non-weathertight enclosures and are
equipped with screw terminal blocks for both input and output connections.
Use of Non-ABB converters to provide +12 V to the Control Power

Backup Input may compromise system integrity due to a lack of adequate
protection of the power converter. For reliability of the TCC300, the
power converter must meet certain requirements.
570 TCC300
User Manual
Installation
Table 69: Requirements for the power converter

Description Value
Temperature –40° C to + 80° C
IEC 60068‑2‑1 Cold, –40° C for 96 hours
IEC 60068‑2‑2 Dry Heat, +80° C for 96 hours
IEC 60068‑2‑3 Damp Heat, +40° C @ 95% RH for 96
hours
Transient Protection High Voltage – All input and output terminals will
withstand 1500 Vac rms to chassis or instrument
ground for one minute with a leakage current not to
exceed 25 mA, for all terminals to ground. Input and
output circuits are electrically isolated from each
other, from other circuits and from ground.
Surge Withstand Capability IEEE C37.90.1‑2002 2,500 Vpk-pk Oscillatory 4,000
Vpk Fast Transient Burst
IEEE C37.90.1-1989 2,500 Vpk-pk Oscillatory 5,000
Vpk Fast Transient
Radiated Electromagnetic Withstand Capability All units are protected against electromagnetic
radiated interference from portable communications
transceivers.
Electrostatic Discharge Test EN 60255‑22‑2‑1997 (EN61000‑4‑2)
Class 4 (8 Kv) – Point Contact Discharge, (15 Kv) –
Air Discharge
Fast Transient Disturbance Test EN 60255‑22‑4‑2002 (EN61000‑4‑4)
Class A (4 Kv, 2.5 kHz)
TCC300 571
User Manual
Installation
Facility AC-DC Source

Facility AC Source
21 to 32 V, 42 to 60 V,
105-140 Vac
or 105 to 145 V
M-2026 AC-DC M-2027 Control

Control Power Power Backup
Backup Supply Supply AC to
DC Only
+12 V
B-1021 Control Backup

Power Supply cable for use
with M-2026 or M-2027
Backup Power Supplies.
B-0920 Control Backup

Power Supply cable for use
with Backup Power Supply
units other than M-2026 or
M-2027.
GUID-6915DDBA-A7D1-4268-8815-62E2576711A9 V1 EN
Figure 446: Typical Control Power Backup Connection for TCC300
572 TCC300
User Manual
Installation
The B-1021 harness includes the

J2/P2 Adapter for connection to
TCC300 controls which (only)
utilize the two pin backup power
Input on the top of the control.
J2 P2
B-1021 Harness
TCC300
12 Vdc from 6 FT.
ABB M-2026 A P1
+
or M-2027 B -
Backup Power C
Supplies
J1
P1 connects to TCC300 -
M-6200
+
controls that include the
backup power option and
utilize the six pin Current P1 PIN
Loop Input on the bottom LOCATIONS 6 3
5 2
of the control for backup 4 1 The B-1021 harness includes the J1
power input. Adapter for connection to M-6200
terminals TB2-11and TB2-12.
N/C 4 GND CHASSIS
DRAIN C
GND 6 GND
BLK B
+12V 5 +12V
WHT A
P1 LUG
GUID-04123F4A-279E-418C-88F4-052DD92615FF V1 EN
Figure 447: Control Power Backup Input Cable Assembly
8.12 Installation of TCC600 Communications Software and

establishment of initial local communications
See Installing TCC600 and Initial local communications using direct USB connection for
detailed instructions.
For additional information, see Communication.
TCC300 573
User Manual
574
Testing
Section 9 Testing
9.1 Set-up procedure
Equipment List
• 0 – 200 mA current supply with phase angle settings of 0° to +90°

• 90 – 145 Vac voltage source at 60 Hz
• High impedance true RMS voltmeter with accuracy on ac of at least ±0.2% of reading
• Accurate stop watch
Procedure
1. Make electrical connections as shown in Figure 448.
See Appendix A for the locations of screens within the software.
There is a one-second delay between the out-of-band condition and

panel LED indication.
2. Enter initial settings.
Table 70: Initial settings

Function Initial setting
Bandcenter 120.0 V
Bandwidth 2.0 V
LDC Resistance 0.0 V
LDC Reactance 0.0 V
Paralleling Circulating Current Method
Block Raise 135.0 V
TCC300 575
User Manual
Testing
Function Initial setting

Block Lower 105.0 V
Deadband 2.0 V
Time Delay 5.0 Seconds
GUID-CCF91932-8052-433D-A17B-3CFC741ABFE0 V1 EN
Figure 448: External Connections for Test Procedure
9.2 Bench-testing
Do not reverse the ground and hot wires when connecting an external
source.
576 TCC300
User Manual
Testing
1. Apply 120 Vac from power source.

2. Increase voltage to 121.2. The LOWER LED should illuminate.
3. Decrease voltage to 118.8. The RAISE LED should illuminate.
4. Set the input voltage to 120.0 Vac. Wait for RAISE and LOWER LEDs to
extinguish.
5. Increase voltage to 122.0 Vac, then start timing when voltage passes 121.0 V.
6. Stop timing when the lamp connected to the LOWER output illuminates (should be
approximately 5 seconds).
7. Resistance
7.1. Apply a 100.0 mA in-phase current to Pin 4 (load current-polarity) and Pin 2
(load current-return) of the P2 connector.
7.2. Set S1 to LDC and S2 to IL.
7.3. Set LDC Resistance to 24.0 V. The RAISE LED should illuminate.
7.4. Increase the input voltage to 132.0 Vac. The RAISE and LOWER LEDs
should be extinguished.
7.5. Set the LDC Resistance to –24.0 V. The LOWER LED should light.
7.6. Decrease the input voltage to 108.0 Vac. Both RAISE and LOWER LEDs
should extinguish.
7.7. Set the LDC Resistance to 0.0 V.
7.8. Decrease the input voltage to 120 Vac.
8. Reactance
8.1. Apply 100.0 mA 90° leading current to Pin 4 (load current-polarity) and Pin 2
(load current-return) of the P2 connector.
8.2. Set S1 to LDC and S2 to IL.
8.3. Set LDC Reactance to 24.0 V. The LOWER LED should illuminate.
8.4. Decrease the input voltage to 108.0 Vac. The RAISE and LOWER LEDs
should be extinguished.
8.5. Set LDC Reactance to –24.0 V; the RAISE LED should illuminate.
8.6. Increase input voltage to 132.0 Vac. Both RAISE and LOWER LEDs should
be extinguished.
8.7. Set the LDC Reactance to 0.0 V.
8.8. Decrease the input voltage to 120 Vac.
9. Voltage Reduction
9.1. Set Voltage Reduction Step #1 to 2.5% (default setting).
9.2. Close S5 to enable Voltage Reduction Step #1. The LOWER LED should
illuminate.
9.3. Decrease the voltage to 117.0 Vac. The LOWER LED should be extinguished.
9.4. Open S5 and decrease the input voltage to 120.0 V.
9.5. Set Voltage Reduction Step #2 to 5% (default setting).
TCC300 577
User Manual
Testing
9.6. Close S3 to enable Voltage Reduction step #2. The LOWER LED should
illuminate.
9.7. Decrease voltage to 114.0 Vac. The LOWER LED should extinguish.
9.8. Open S3 and decrease the input voltage to 120.0 Vac.
10. Paralleling
10.1. Apply 100.0 mA 90° leading current to Pin 5 (circulating current-polarity) and
Pin 6 (circulating current-return) of the P2 connector.
10.2. Set S1 to CIRC and S2 to IP. The LOWER LED should illuminate.
10.3. Decrease the voltage to 108.0 Vac. Both RAISE and LOWER LEDs should be
extinguished.
10.4. Set S1 to OFF.
11. Counter
11.1. Set the TCC300 Tapchanger Control to display the Operations Count screen
for the Total Operations Counter.
11.2. Verify counter operation by depressing S4 wired to Pin 11 and Pin 12 (counter
in).
11.3. The operations counter should increment.
12. Block Raise/Block Lower/Deadband
12.1. Set Block Raise to 126.0 V.
12.2. Set Block Lower to 114.0 V.
12.3. Set the unit to display the Bias Voltage screen.
12.4. Press ENT.
12.5. Increase voltage to 126.5 V. BR should be displayed on the screen.
12.6. Increase voltage to 128.5 V. FL is displayed on the screen.
12.7. Decrease voltage to 113.5 V. BL is displayed on the screen.
—Bench Test Complete—
9.3 Starting check-out procedure
All ABB units are fully calibrated at the factory. There is no need to
recalibrate the units before initial installation.
Follow the steps below to apply power.
1. Remove any external connection between Pin 1 (voltage input) and Pin 8 (motor
power input).
2. Using a voltmeter, ensure that the voltage applied to Pin 1 is nominal 120 Vac with
respect to Pin 3 (neutral).
578 TCC300
User Manual
Testing
Do not reverse the ground and hot wires when connecting an

external source.
3. Apply motor auxiliary voltage to Pin 8 (motor power input) and Pin 3 (neutral).
4. Verify that the motor runs in the proper direction when conditions of sensed voltage
result in activation of Raise and Lower outputs.
In no case should the load current circuit be interrupted with the

regulator or transformer energized.
Do not remove auxiliary current transformers without shorting the

current inputs. Death or severe electrical shock can occur.
5. Temporarily place a shorting device across the LDC‑CT secondary to short the line
drop compensator circuit, and place another shorting device to short the circulating
current paralleling output, for the load current check.
TCC300
GUID-F089369B-3201-4640-AD12-8D5EABD63406 V1 EN
Figure 449: Setup for Current Checkout Procedure
Pin numbers indicated above are accurate for the M‑2050B

Mounting Kit only; check the Application Guide of the specific
adapter panel used for proper pin numbers.
6. Insert an ammeter between the polarity input and Pin 4.

7. Open the load current shorting device and with a known load on the transformer or
regulator, measure the current in the load current circuit to ensure that this current is
correct for 0.2 A full load.
TCC300 579
User Manual
Testing
The current input to the control is rated at 0.2 A continuous, 0.4 A for
two hours, and 4.0 A for 1 second.
8. Replace the shorting device across the load current input and remove the ammeter.
9. Reconnect polarity to the unit and remove both jumpers. The Line Drop
Compensator will be activated. Correct CT polarity can be checked by simply
incorporating sufficient +R compensation. The regulator should time out and run so
as to raise the output voltage.
9.4 Performing operational test
1. Set VT Ratio Correction = 0 V; CT/VT phasing = 0° from the appropriate screen in

the software.
2. Return to the Local Voltage screen.
3. Apply 120.0 Vac to Pin 1 (hot) and Pin 3 (neutral) of the adapter panel.
4. Verify local voltage = input voltage ±0.3 V.
5. Apply 100.0 mA in-phase current to Pin 4 (load current-polarity) and Pin 2 (load
current-return).
6. Verify Control Load I =100 mA and Power Factor =1.0 ±0.02 from the appropriate
software screens.
7. Apply 100.0 mA 90° leading current to Pin 5 (circulating current-polarity) and Pin
6 (circulating current-return).
8. Verify Control Circ I = 100.0 mA ±2 mA.
9. Verify the Up, Down and ENT pushbuttons function properly.
10. De-energize the current source.
—Checkout Procedure Complete—
9.5 Performing in-service test
1. Set the TCC300 Tapchanger Control to display the Bias Voltage screen.
2. Press ENT.
3. Use the Up and Down push buttons to cause RAISE and LOWER outputs.
If either output is blocked, verify that the unit is not at the maximum tap position.
4. Press ENT to return to the Local Voltage screen.
—In-Service Test Complete—
580 TCC300
User Manual
Testing
9.6 Testing bias voltage
The Bias Voltage Status/Test Mode feature permits entering a bias voltage for simulating
the raising or lowering of the sensed input voltage. This exercises the control as if the input
voltage were being changed. The contacts actually operate.
This feature is valuable in the rapid determination of operating quantities present to

influence the normal operation of the control. Items that will block operations or change
setpoints are described here and illustrated by LEDs on the face of the control.
The Test Mode/Status screen displays control status information that includes:
• Output Status
• Band Status
• Runback/Blocking Status
• Voltage Reduction Status
This feature automatically resets on exit or in 15 minutes if not exited.
Calibration/Test
3. Press the Down arrow pushbutton as necessary to navigate to the "Bias Voltage
Status Test Mode" menu item.
4. Press the ENT pushbutton. The unit will display the following:
Bias Voltage 0.0
-- XXX.X --
The upper line of the display will initially indicate "0.0" bias volts.
The second line will display the sequence of parameters. By increasing/decreasing
the applied bias voltage the control will respond based on the settings entered into
the control.
TCC300 581
User Manual
Testing
LL = Line Current Limit

TL = Tap Limit Block Lower
FL = Runback
TR = Tap Limit Block Raise
BL = Limit Block Lower
-- = None
BR = Limit Block Raise
-- = None
__ XXX.X __ __ __ __
SRB = Seal-in Failure Block Raise
SLB = Seal-in Failure Block Lower
R = Tap Raise
SBK = Seal-in Failure Block Raise and Lower
L = Tap Lower
IBK = Low Current Block
-- = No Raise/Lower
NBK = Nonsequential Block
CBK = Comm Block
RBK = Reverse Power Block
HI = Band Status High
SCO = SCADA Cut Out
LO = Band Status Low
VR1 = Voltage Reduction #1
-- = In Band
DL = Delta VAr 2 Current
Limit/Block
-- = None
GUID-24220E6D-1B6D-4C8E-9BDD-2D4A6DBEECAB V1 EN
Figure 450: Bias Voltage Test Index
9.7 Testing control front panel LEDs
Calibration/Test
3. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as necessary, to navigate to the LED Scroll Test
menu item.
LED Scroll Test
Test in Progress...
5. The control will illuminate each of the eight LEDs. To stop the LED test press the
EXIT pushbutton.
582 TCC300
User Manual
Testing
9.8 Testing control inputs
Calibration/Test
3. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as necessary, to navigate to the Input Test menu
item.
Input Test ← →
vr1 vr2 ns c n l r t
5. Determine the inputs to be tested and the corresponding position (from left to right)
in the input test screen.
• vr1, Voltage Reduction #1
• vr2, Voltage Reduction #2
• ns, Non-Sequential Input
• c, Operations Counter Contact
• n, Neutral Light Switch
• l, Lower Status
• r, Raise Status
• t, Current Loop Input
• a1, Aux Input 1
• a2, Aux Input 2
• a3, Aux Input 3
• ms, Motor Sealin
As each input is activ ated the corresponding indicator will change from lower case
to upper case to indicate that the control has read the input.
6. Verify that the control is in a configuration that supports input testing, then proceed
as follows based on control status:
• If the control is not connected to field connections, then utilize Figure 448 to
connect test equipment and test the desired inputs.
• If the control is connected to field connections, then determine the necessary
test method(s) for testing the desired input.
Draghands, Lower and Raise status can be tested by utilizing the corresponding front
panel switches.
7. When all input testing has been completed, restore the control back to pre-test
conditions.
TCC300 583
User Manual
Testing
9.9 Testing control outputs
Calibration/Test
3. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as necessary, to navigate to the Output Test menu
item.
alarm contact
0000000
The cursor will be located under the far right zero which corresponds to the control
"Alarm Contact". Positions 2 through 7 are:
• Position 2, Raise Contact
• Position 3, Lower Contact
• Position 4, Source Contact
• Position 5, Aux Output 1
• Position 6, Seal-In Output
• Position 7, Deadman Output
5. To test output contacts proceed as follows for the desired output:
5.1. Verify that the control is in a configuration that supports output contact testing.
5.2. Utilizing the Up/Down arrow pushbutton for the desired output contact set the
value to "1". The contact output will be active. Verify that the desired output
is activated.
5.3. Utilizing the Up/Down arrow pushbutton for the desired output contact set the
value to "0". The contact output will be deactivated. Verify that the desired
output is deactivated.
5.4. Repeat for the remaining outputs.
9.10 Testing front panel push buttons
584 TCC300
User Manual
Testing
Calibration/Test
3. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as necessary, to navigate to the Button Input Test
menu item.
Button Input Test
Press A Key...
5. Test the desired pushbutton by pressing and holding the pushbutton. The display will
identify the pushbutton if it is working correctly.
9.11 Delta VAr peer to peer paralleling checkout procedure
9.11.1 Performing two transformer verification
1. Verify that the individual controls to be included in the Peer to Peer configuration
have been tested in the independent mode of operation.
2. Verify that Peer to Peer (P2P) DeltaVar has been configured in each control and they
are ready to be tested.
3. Place all the transformers to be paralleled in Manual mode to keep them from
responding to tap change requests.
4. Place all the transformers to be paralleled on the same tap position so that the
regulated voltage is near the band center setting.
5. For this verification, assume that the following system conditions exist:
• All the transformers are the same.
• The high side sources are all connected together.
• There is only one high side source for the paralleled transformers.
6. If the high side sources are connected together, then verify that the DeltaVar current
in all the transformers is near zero.
7. If the high side sources are not connected together, then it may be necessary to adjust
the tap positions to obtain a zero DVAR current, or the minimum value possible.
Record the difference in the tap positions, for example Transformer 1 may be two
taps higher then Transformer 2.
Write down the Tap Position Difference.
8. Manually raise Transformer 1, one or two taps.

9. Manually lower Transformer 2, one or two taps, then observe the following:
TCC300 585
User Manual
Testing
• The regulated voltage should still be in band near the center of the band width.
• The DVAR current on Transformer 1 should be lagging
• The DVAR current on Transformer 2 should be leading
• The DVAR current on Transformers 1 and 2 should have the same magnitude
10. Verify that Transformer 1 is calling for a lower and Transformer 2 is calling for a
raise.
11. If both transformers are not calling for a tap change operation, then manually
increase the tap position difference between the transformers by raising Transformer
1, one tap and lowering Transformer 2 one tap until both controls are calling for the
correct operation.
This keeps the regulated voltage near the center of the bandcenter setting and
therefore any operations by the controls will be caused by the DVAR current.
12. Simultaneously place both transformers into Automatic operation and observe
where the transformers stop initiating tap changes.
The transformers should be on the same tap or one tap part, with the controls not
calling for any operations. If the high side is not connected then the tap positions
should be the same number of taps apart as noted above.
13. Place Transformer 1 and Transformer 2 in Manual.
14. Raise or Lower either Transformer 1 or Transformer 2 by one tap to generate some
DVAR current.
The transformer with the higher voltage (typically the higher tap) will have the
lagging DVAR current and the other transformer will have the same magnitude but
will indicate a leading DVAR current. If the load is not evenly distributed between
the transformers, then the voltage on the transformer with the larger load may
decrease and the control may call for a raise. The voltage on the transformer with the
smaller load may increase and its control may call for a lower.
15. Open the Tie Breaker between Transformer 1 and Transformer 2 and verify that the
controls are not calling for any tap change operations.
The load current does not have to be the same when the Tie Breaker opens and the
voltage may change based on the loading of the transformers.
16. Verify that the DVAR current is at or near zero.
17. If necessary, manually initiate tap change operations to bring the voltage back into
band.
18. Manually place the transformers to the same tap position (or the same difference as
noted above).
19. Close the Tie Breaker between Transformer 1 and Transformer 2 and verify that the
DVAR current in all transformers is at or near zero.
Assuming all the transformers are the same and the high side sources are all
connected together, only one high side source for the paralleled transformers. If the
high side is not connected together then may need to adjust the tap positions to get
zero DVAR current or the minimum value possible.
20. Manually Lower Transformer 1, one or two taps.
21. Manually Raise Transformer 2, one or two taps.
The regulated voltage should still be in band near the center of the band width.
586 TCC300
User Manual
Testing
22. Verify that the DVAR current on Transformer 1 is Leading and that the DVAR
current on Transformer 2 is Lagging with the same magnitude.
23. Raise or Lower either Transformer 1 or Transformer 2 so they are one tap apart to
generate some DVAR current.
Lagging DVAR current and the other transformer will have the same magnitude but
will Leading DVAR current.
Since Transformer 2 will be supplying all the load, its voltage may
decrease. Transformer 1 voltage may increase since it has no load (if
its PT is between the breaker and the transformer).
24. Open the Low Side Breaker for Transformer 1 and verify that the controls are not
calling for any tap change operations.
The load current on Transformer 2 should be doubled and Transformer 1 load should
be at or near zero.
band.
noted above).
28. Close the Low Side Breaker for Transformer 1 and verify that the DVAR current in
all the transformers is at or near zero.
29. Raise or Lower either Transformer 1 or Transformer 2 by one tap to generate some
DVAR current.
Lagging DVAR current and the other transformer will have the same magnitude but
will Leading DVAR current. Since Transformer 1 will be supplying all the load, its
voltage may decrease. Transformer 2 voltage may increase since it has no load (if its
PT is between the breaker and the transformer).
The load current on Transformer 1 should be doubled and Transformer 2 load should
be zero.
band.
noted above).
34. Close the Low Side Breaker for Transformer 2 and verify the DVAR current in all
the transformers is at or near zero.
—Test complete.—
TCC300 587
User Manual
Testing
Place the desired settings on the controls and set all controls to Automatic.
9.11.2 Performing three transformer verification
1. Verify that the individual controls to be included in the Peer to Peer configuration
have been tested in the independent mode of operation.
2. Verify that Peer to Peer (P2P) DeltaVar has been configured in each control and they
are ready to be tested.
3. Place all the transformers to be paralleled in Manual mode to keep them from
responding to tap change requests.
4. Place all the transformers to be paralleled on the same tap position so that the
regulated voltage is near the band center setting.
5. For this verification, assume that the following system conditions exist:
• All the transformers are the same.
• The high side sources are all connected together.
• There is only one high side source for the paralleled transformers.
6. If the high side sources are connected together, then verify that the DeltaVar current
in all the transformers is near zero.
7. If the high side sources are not connected together, then it may be necessary to adjust
the tap positions to obtain a zero DVAR current, or the minimum value possible.
Record the difference in the tap positions, for example Transformer 1 may be two
taps higher then Transformer 2 with Transformer 3 one tap lower than Transformer
2.
Write down the Tap Position Difference.
8. Manually raise Transformer 1, one or two taps.

9. Manually lower Transformer 2 and 3, one or two taps, then observe the following:
• The regulated voltage should still be in band near the center of the band width.
• The DVAR current on Transformer 1 should lagging
• The DVAR current on Transformers 2 and 3 should be leading
• The DVAR current on Transformer 1 will have twice the magnitude of
Transformers 2 and 3
• The DVAR current on Transformers 2 and 3 should both have the same
magnitude
10. Verify that Transformer 1 is calling for a lower and Transformers 2 and 3 are calling
for a raise.
11. If all transformers are not calling for a tap change operation, then manually increase
the tap position difference between the transformers by raising Transformer 1, one
588 TCC300
User Manual
Testing
tap and lowering Transformers 2 and 3 one tap until all controls are calling for the
correct operation.
This keeps the regulated voltage near the center of the bandcenter setting and
therefore any operations by the controls will be caused by the DVAR current.
12. Simultaneously place all transformers into Automatic operation and observe where
the transformers stop initiating tap changes.
The transformers should be on the same tap or one tap part, with the controls not
calling for any operations. If the high side is not connected then the tap positions
should be the same number of taps apart as noted above.
13. Place Transformers 1, 2 and 3 in Manual.
14. Raise Transformer 1, one tap to generate some DVAR current.
The transformer with the high voltage (typically the higher tap) will have the lagging
DVAR current and the other two transformers will have the same magnitude but will
indicate a leading DVAR current.
If the load is not evenly distributed between the transformers, then

the voltage on the transformer with the larger load may decrease and
the control may call for a raise. The voltage on the transformer with
the smaller load may increase and its control may call for a lower.
15. Open the Tie Breaker between Transformer 1 and Transformer 2 with Transformer
3 still connected to Transformer 2.
16. Verify that the controls are not calling for any tap change operations.
The load current does not ha ve to be the same when the Tie Breaker opens and the
17. Verify that Transformer 1 DVAR current is at or near zero.
band.
19. Verify that Transformer 2 and 3 DVAR current is at or near zero (because they are
on the same tap position).
20. Raise Transformer 2, one tap and verify the following:
• DVAR current on Transformer 2 is lagging
• Transformers 3 DVAR current is leading
• The magnitude of the DVAR Current on Transformer 2 and 3 should be the
same
• Transformer 1 DVAR current should be at or near zero
21. Manually place all transformers to the same tap position (or the same difference as
noted above).
22. Close the Tie Breaker between Transformer 1 and Transformer 2 and verify that the
DVAR current in all transformers is at or near zero.
Assuming all the transformers are the same tap and the high side sources are all
TCC300 589
User Manual
Testing
high side is not connected together then may need to adjust the tap positions to get
zero DVAR current or the minimum value possible.
24. Manually Raise Transformers 1 and 2, one or two taps.
25. Verify the following:
• The DVAR current on Transformer 3 is Leading
• The DVAR current on Transformers 1 and 2 is Lagging
If the load is not evenly distributed between the transformers, then the voltage on the
transformer with the larger load may decrease and the control may call for a raise.
The voltage on the transformer with the smaller load may increase and its control
may call for a lower.
26. Open the Tie Breaker between Transformer 2 and Transformer 3 with Transformer
1 still connected to Transformer 2.
27. Verify that the controls are not calling for any tap change operations.
The load current does not ha ve to be the same when the Tie Breaker opens and the
28. Verify that Transformer 3 DVAR current is at or near zero.
band.
30. Verify that Transformer 1 and 2 DVAR current is at or near zero (because they are
on the same tap position).
31. Raise Transformer 2, one tap and verify the following:
• DVAR current on Transformer 2 is lagging
• Transformers 1 DVAR current is leading
• The magnitude of the DVAR Current on Transformer 1 and 2 should be the
same
• Transformer 3 DVAR current should be at or near zero
noted above).
33. Close the Tie Breaker between Transformer 2 and Transformer 3.
34. Verify that the DVAR current in all the transformers is at or near zero.
high side is not connected together then it may be necessary to adjust the tap
positions to achieve zero DVAR current or the minimum value possible.
590 TCC300
User Manual
Testing
• The DVAR current on Transformer 1 is Leading

• The DVAR current on Transformers 2 and 3 is Lagging
Transformers 2 and 3, and they should both have the same magnitude.
• The DVAR current on Transformers 2 and 3 should have the same magnitude.
Since Transformers 2 and 3 will be supplying all the load, their voltage may
decrease. Transformer 1 voltage may increase since it has no load (if its PT is
between the breaker and the transformer).
The load current on Transformers 2 and 3 should have changed from one third to one
half and Transformer 1 load should be at or near zero.
39. Verify that the DVAR current on Transformer 1 is at or near zero.
band.
41. Manually raise Transformer 2, one tap.
• The DVAR current on Transformer 2 is lagging
• The DVAR current on Transformer 3 is leading
• The DVAR current on Transformers 2 and 3 have the same magnitude
• The DVAR current on Transformer 1 should be at or near zero
noted above).
• The DVAR current on Transformers 1 and 3 is lagging
TCC300 591
User Manual
Testing
band.
noted above).
• The DVAR current on Transformers 1 and 2 is lagging
band.
592 TCC300
User Manual
Testing

noted above).
—Test complete.—
Place the desired settings on the controls and set all controls to Automatic.
TCC300 593
User Manual
594
Appendix A HMI
Section 10 Appendix A HMI
10.1 HMI menu flow
At any menu screen, press EXIT to go to the Menu header. Press the left
or right arrow push button to move sideways to the adjacent Menu header.
TCC300 595
User Manual
Appendix A HMI
COMMUNICATION UTILITIES MONITOR SETPOINTS CONFIGURATION

CNFG UTIL COMM MNTR UTIL SETP MNTR CNFG SETP COMM
Status Motor Current Harmonics Tap Information Metering Present Demand Demand History Energy Metering
Watt Hours Fwd

Press ENT to view Peak RMS Curr Voltage % THD Tap Position/Cal Load Voltage Demand Interval Demand Interval Watt Hours Fwd E
E
Tapchanger Status x.x mA (x.x) T x.x % DISABLE xxx.x Volts xx Min xx Min x kWh
x kWh
Press ENT to view Avg RMS Curr Current % THD Drag Hands E Meter Out Voltage Demand Load Voltage Min Load Voltage E Lagging VAr Hours E
Alarm Status x.x mA (xx.x) T xx.x % L= 0 N R= 0 N xxx.x Volts xxx.x Volts x.x Volts x kVArh
Press ENT to view Profile Duration Press ENT to view Definite Timer Source Voltage Demand Pri. Current Max Load Voltage E Watt Hours Rev E
Input Status xxx.x ms(xxx.x) T Voltage Harmonics Raise xxs Lower xxs Disabled xxx.x Amps xxx.x Volts xx kWh
Press ENT to view Peak Motor Current E Press ENT to view Intertap Timer Load Current Demand Pri. Watts Max Pri.Current E Leading VAr Hours E
Output Status x.x mA Current Harmonic x % x.x mA LEAD/LAG x.xx MW xxx.x Amps xx kVArh
Operation Counter Circulating Current Demand Pri. VArs Max Primary Watts E Press ENT to reset
0 x.x mA LEAD/LAG x.xx MVArs x.xx MW Energy Metering
If DVAr enabled
Resettable Counter E DVar Current Demand Pri. VA Max Primary VArs E Press ENT to perform
0 x.x mA LEAD/LAG x.xx MVA x.xx MVAr Master Reset
Neutral Sw Counter Compensated Voltage Max Primary VA E

x xxx.x Volts x.xx MVA
Lower Counter Primary Voltage PF @ Max VA E

x x.xx kV x.xxx PF
Raise Counter Primary Src Voltage Press ENT to reset

x Disabled Demand History
Press ENT to view Primary Current Press ENT to perform

specific Tap Stats xxx.x Amps Master Reset
Press ENT to clear Primary Watts

Tap Statistics x.xx MW
RTN Success Counter Primary VArs

00000 x.xx MVArs
RTN Status Primary VA

DISABLED x.xx MVA
Count to RTN Active Power Factor

00000 x.xxx LEAD/LAG
Frequency
xx.x Hz
GUID-51E8890C-FA2F-4A04-99BE-424E46278EF8 V1 EN
Figure 451: Monitor Menu Flow
596 TCC300
User Manual
Appendix A HMI

Active Setpoint Profile UTIL SETP MNTR CNFG SETP COMM CNFG UTIL COMM MNTR
or Setpoint Profile
Selected for Editing
Limits 1 VAr Bias 1 Profile Settings Common Settings 1 Power Flow Fwd 1 Power Flow Reverse 1 Voltage Reduction 1
Block Raise Voltage Set VAr Bias Method Set VAr Bias Method Active Profile LDC Selection Bandcenter Fwd Bandcenter Rev Standard VR
xxx.x Volts disable(Step/Linear) Linear Profile :1 RX xxx.x Volts xxx.x Volts ENABLE
Runback Deadband VAr Bias Method Disable on Rev Pwr Profile to Edit Timer Characteristic Bandwidth Fwd Bandwidth Rev VRed Turnoff Timer
x.x Volts Step disable Profile :1 DEFINITE x.x Volts x.x Volts 0 Min
With LDC R,X With LDC R,X

Block Lower Voltage Edit Profile 1 Name Timer Reset Smart VR
xxx.x Volts Disable on Rev Pwr Curr Mult Base Value "Empty" INTEGRATING LDC R Fwd LDC R Fwd disable
disable 0 x Volts x Volts
Runup Deadband Repeats for Rev Power Operation Save VR at Power Off
x.x Volts Fwd Max Cap Bnk Size Linear V Bias -X Profiles 2-4 BLOCK * LDC X Fwd LDC X Fwd DON"T SAVE
12000 KVAr 0 Volts x Volts x Volts
Runup Enable/Disable Power Direction Bias Reduction Step 1 %

disable NONE With LDC Z With LDC Z 2.5
Rev Max Cap Bnk Size Normlzd Lin V Bias -X
12000 KVAr x.x Volts LDC Z Fwd LDC Z Fwd
x Volts x Volts
Current Block Limit Reduction Step 2 %
xxx mA 5.0
Lead % Pickup Linear V Bias -X Lmt
75 0.0 Volts Definite (Inverse) Definite (Inverse)
Delay Fwd Delay Fwd
Reduction Step 3 %
xx Sec xx Sec
7.5
Lag % Pickup Linear V Bias +X
75 0 Volts
VAr Bias Volt Step Normlzd Lin V Bias +X

1.0 Volts x.x Volts
* Power Flow Reverse setting screens are only available when the
"Reverse Power Operation" selection under "Common Settings" is
Max VAR Bias Time Linear V Bias +X Lmt selected to either REGULATE REVERSE, REG. R MEASURED SRC,
300 mins 0.0 Volts DISTRIBUTED GENERATION, AUTO DETERMINE or AUTO
DETERMINE MEASURED. If Distributed Generation is selected, then
only LDC values can be set.
Selecting BLOCK, IGNORE or RETURN TO NEUTRAL disables the
Power Flow Reverse setting screens.
GUID-352AFD46-AA92-4E54-AA62-270F071679DF V1 EN
Figure 452: Setpoints Menu Flow
TCC300 597
User Manual
Appendix A HMI
UTILITIES MONITOR SETPOINTS CONFIGURATION COMMUNICATION

COMM MNTR UTIL SETP MNTR CNFG SETP COMM CNFG UTIL
Nameplate Run Through Neutral Remote Voltage Bias Tapchanger Type Tap Settings
CT Multiplier Enable/Disable Enable/Disable Tapchanger Type Tap Position/Cal

6000 X disable disable LTC DISABLE
Regulator Type Load VT Config Reset RTN Succ Ctr RVB HB Timer Regulator Vendor Tap Information
TYPE A LINE_TO_GROUND Press ENT to begin 5 Secs Default disable
Output Selection Aux Curr Transformer Max Allowed Taps RVB Scale Factor Tap Limits
CONTINUOUS 200 mA 4 1.0 disable/ENABLE
Tap Limits ENABLED

Output Pulse CT/Load VT Phasing Taps Between Runs Rev RVB Scale Factor
X.X Sec x Deg 1000 1.0 Tap Block Raise
xx
Low Current Block Load VT Multiplier Max Load Current

disable 60.0 X 50 mA Tap Block Lower
xx
Load VT Correction Max RTN Standby Ops

Auto/Man Sw Type Auto/Man Sw Type x.x Volts 20 Highest Tap
NONE/TOGGLE SCAMP SWITCH 16
Not settable unless an
external source of Tap
CT/Source VT Phasing Position is selected
Comm Block Auto Scamp Init Pwrup x Deg Lowest Tap
DON'T SAVE AUTO MODE –16
Source VT Multiplier
60.0 x Intertap Delay
Fast Volt Recovery x Sec
disable
Source VT Correction
x.x Volts Seal-in Fail Block
Fast Volt R Setting ENABLE
x.x V
Norm. VT. Multiplier
x.xx Op Counter Config
1 X / 2 X/
COUNT WINDOW/
Power Display Option CAM FOLLOWER
SINGLE_PHASE
Cooper Quick Drive

disable
Cam Follower
disable
Op Ctr = Count Window Op Ctr = 1X/2X
Counter Time Window X Mode Delay

0.5 Sec xx ms
Op Counter Preset
Raise Counter Preset XXXXXX
XXXXXX
Ntrl Counter Preset

Maximum Tap Wear XXXXXX
999999
Lower Counter Preset

IndTapWear Alrm Set XXXXXX
100 %
GUID-88C46EC3-240F-4120-BB76-E882B180A504 V1 EN
Figure 453: Configuration Menu Flow (1 of 3)
598 TCC300
User Manual
Appendix A HMI
Paralleling Programmable Alarm System Clock
Paralleling Type Prog Alarm Function Set Date and Time

DISABLE –<0000000000000000 08/26/13 15:41:29
Auto/Man Switch Type set to SCAMP

Paralleling Type Paralleling Type Paralleling Type Paralleling Type Daylight Savings
PEER2PEER DELTAVAR MASTER/FOLLOWER DELTA VAR #1 Prog Alarm Function disable
DELTA VAR #2
NORMAL/AS DEADMAN OUT
or
DELTA VAR #2 (KT)
P2P Dvar Sensitivity MASTER/FOLLOWER Paralleling Type
x.x NONE CIRCULATING I Op Count Signal Alrm
0
DVAR2 Sensitivity
Paralleling Address x.x
DVAR2 Reac I Lmt
xxx.x mA xx Clear Sealin Alarm
Ready Press ENTER
DVAR2 Reac I Lmt
Topology Num. Devices xxx mA
Single Bus x Clr Low Current Blk
Ready Press ENTER
DVAR2 I Ratio
T.P.R. Timeout x.xx
Paralleling Address
xx xxxxx ms Clr RTN Fail To Opr
Ready Press ENTER
Num. Devices Breaker Option

x xxxxxx
P2P Update Speed Tap Difference

xxxxx x
Load Side Brk Config Clear Lockout Alarm

Not Used Ready Press ENTER
Right Tie Brk Config

Not Used
Left Tie Brk Config

Not Used
MVA Rating
x.x
I Multi Correction
xxx %
Clear Lockout Alarm

Ready Press ENTER
GUID-3FD8A543-9A81-4631-92BA-3460367360E6 V1 EN
TCC300 599
User Manual
Appendix A HMI
Input Selection Mtr Current Profile CBEMA Setup Harmonics Setup Data Logging
Input Selection 1 Peak RMS % Change Use TCC600 For V 2-16 Har. Alarm Data Log Select
SWITCH STATUS xxx CBEMA in SOE or OSC 011101111111111 111111111111111
Input Selection 2 Average RMS % Change Normal Voltage V 17-31 Har. Alarm Data Log Interval
NONSEQ INPUT xxx xxx.x Volts 000000000000001 5 mins
Input Selection 3 Duration % Change Event 1 V Alarm Threshold Press ENT to clear
VOLTAGE RED 2 xxx ENABLE 1.0 % Data Log Records
Init. Motor Current Event1 Sag Pickup I 2-16 Har. Alarm

Press ENT to reset xx % 011101011111111
Event1 Sag Dropout I 17-31 Har. Alarm

xx % 000000000000001
Event1 Sag Min Dur I Alarm Threshold

1 cycles (xx ms) 10 %
Repeats for Min I Thresh. Enable

Events 2 thru 4 ENABLE
Min I Thresh. ENABLED

Clear All Counters
Ready Press ENTER Min Fund I Threshold
20 mA

10 s
GUID-9403DBE9-7645-4977-8E1C-C7FB65F738D8 V1 EN
600 TCC300
User Manual
Appendix A HMI

UTIL SETP MNTR CNFG SETP COMM CNFG UTIL COMM MNTR
If Memory Card is present, the first menu

displayed under Communication is the
Memory Card menu, otherwise the
Memory Card menu is not displayed.
Ethernet HMI Bluetooth RS232 Comm Settings Memory Card
DHCP Enable Set LCD Contrast: E Bluetooth Enable Protocol Comm1 Port Type Load Setpoints
ENABLE ************ ENABLE MODBUS RS485 Press ENT to begin
IP Address User Line 1 E Bluetooth Reset Baud Rate Comm2 Port Type Save Setpoints
0.0.0.0 ABB Ready Press ENTER 115200 RS232 Press ENT to begin
Net Mask User Line 2 E Bluetooth Protocol Parity Comm Protocol Save Datalog
0.0.0.0 TCC300 MODBUS NONE DNP3.0 Press ENT to begin
Gateway Level 1 Access Code Authentication Stop Bits DNP Configuration Save seq. of events
0.0.0.0 Press ENT to change disable TWO STOPBITS M2001D DNP DEFAULT Press ENT to begin
Enter Modbus Port Level 2 Access Code Friendly Name Sync Time CID File ID Save oscillograph
502 Press ENT to change TCC300 50 mS M2001D DEFAULT Press ENT to begin
Enter DNP Port Clear Osc Records Bluetooth Pass Reset Src Addr Validation Clone save
20000 Ready Press ENTER Ready Press ENTER disable Press ENT to begin
Auto Negotiation Oscillograph Message Control BT Device Substation Address Clone load
ENABLE ENABLE XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX DNP x Press ENT to begin
Keepalive time Bluetooth Mode Feeder Address Load DNP Config

7200 sec MODE0 DNP x Press ENT to begin
SNTP Enable Comm Address Save DNP Config

disable DNP 1 Mdbus 1 Press ENT to begin
SNTP Server Address Baud Rate Save Metering Data

0.0.0.0 9600 Press ENT to begin
Time Zone GMT Parity Firmware Update

–5 Hr NONE Press ENT to begin
If IEC 61850 is purchased

Stop Bits
ONE STOPBIT Load IEC config
Press ENT to begin
Sync Time
2 mS Save IEC Config
Press ENT to begin
Output Pulse
1.5 Sec SD Quick Capture
Press ENT to begin
Comm Access Security

disable
Comm Access timeout

60 sec
TX Delay
10 ms
Heartbeat Option
Disabled
GUID-502456F9-B294-4A3E-83AD-F2DA03C813A1 V1 EN
Figure 456: Communication Menu Flow
TCC300 601
User Manual
Appendix A HMI
SETPOINTS CONFIGURATION COMMUNICATION UTILITIES MONITOR

MNTR CNFG SETP COMM CNFG UTIL COMM MNTR UTIL SETP
About Calibration/Test
Serial Number Bias Voltage

xxxxx Status/Test Mode
Firmware Version Mtr RMS Coefficient Load Voltage

D-0214VXX.XX.XX 8192 X XXX.X Volts
EE Checksum Circ Cal. Coefficien Voltage Offset

XXXXXX 32767 X X
Last Loaded File CRC Circ Sin Coefficient Volt Cal Coefficient
XXX 0 X 32767 X
Hardware Number Circ Cos Coefficient Volt RMS Coefficient

1 8192 X 32762 X
LED Scroll Test Control Load I

Press ENT to begin x.x mA Lag/Lead
Input Test Curr Cal Coefficient

Press ENT to Begin 32767 X
Output Test Power Factor

Press ENT to test X.XXX Lag/Lead
Button Input Test I Sin Coefficient

Change Src Input I Cos Coefficient

press ENTER. 8192 X
Watchdog resets: X Motor Current

Total resets: X x.xx mA
Clear reset counters Mtr Cal. Coefficient

Press ENT to begin 8192 X
X1 Duration Mtr Sin Coefficient

0 ms, Avg: 0 ms 0 X
Alarm Activity Mtr Cos Coefficient

GUID-7CF86E0C-1481-498C-835F-423EE4466D6D V1 EN
Figure 457: Utilities Menu Flow
602 TCC300
User Manual
Appendix A HMI
10.2 HMI Screen Review
10.2.1 Monitor
10.2.1.1 Metering
Load Voltage
XXX.X Volts
Displays the real-time measured value of voltage at the regulator or the transformer,
including the voltage reduction if applicable and any corrections made using the user-
selected VT correction voltage.
Meter Out Voltage
XXX.X Volts
Displays the measured voltage at the terminals of the TCC300 without any software
modifications. Used as the base for normalizing voltage.
Source Voltage
XXX.X V (Calculated/Measured/disabled)
• Calculated – Displays the real-time calculated source voltage-only applicable in

regulator control applications and includes any corrections made using the user-
• Measured – Displays the real-time measured source voltage when Reverse Power is
detected and Reverse Power Operation is "Regulate Rev Measured".
Load Current
x.x mA LEAD/LAG
Displays the real-time measured value of load current related to the scaling factor Current
Transformer of 200 mA.
Circulating Current
x.x mA LEAD/LAG
Displays the representable value of circulating current, if the control is used with
M-0115A Parallel Balancing Module or equivalent. Displays the value of DVAr Current
when DVAr Paralleling method is enabled.
TCC300 603
User Manual
Appendix A HMI
Compensated Voltage
xxx.x Volts
Displays the calculated voltage at the "load center", based on load current and the LDC
settings.
Primary Voltage
X.XX kV
Displays the calculated primary voltage based on the user-selected voltage multiplier and
measured secondary voltage.
Primary Src Voltage
X.XX kV (or disabled)
Displays Primary Source Voltage based on the user-selected Source VT Correction.
Primary Current
XXX.X Amps
Displays the calculated primary current based on the user-selected current multiplier and
Primary Watts
X.XX MW
Displays the calculated primary quantity based on the user-selected multipliers and
measured secondary voltage and current.
Primary VArs
X.XX MVArs
Primary VA
X.XX MVA
Power Factor
604 TCC300
User Manual
Appendix A HMI
X.XXX LEAD/LAG
Displays the real-time calculated value of power factor.
Frequency
XX.X Hz
Displays the line frequency.
10.2.1.2 Present Demand
Demand Interval
XX Min
Toggles between 5, 10, 15, 30 and 60 minute interval with a factory setting of 15 minutes.
The time interval is the amount of time it takes for a thermal meter to indicate 90% of a
change of load.
Demand Load Voltage
XXX.X Volts
Displays the real-time measured value of voltage at the regulator or transformer. This
value continuously averaged over consecutive 32-second intervals.
Demand Pri. Current
XXX.X Amps
Displays the calculated primary demand current based on the user-selected current
multiplier and measured secondary current.
Demand Pri. Watts
X.XX MW
Displays the demand value based on the user‑selected voltage and current multipliers or
secondary voltage and current.
Demand Pri. VArs
X.XX MVArs
Displays the demand value based on the user‑selected voltage and current multipliers and
Demand Pri. VA
TCC300 605
User Manual
Appendix A HMI
X.XX MVA
Displays the demand value based on the user-selected voltage and current multipliers and
10.2.1.3 Demand History
Demand Interval
XX Min
Toggles between 5, 10, 15, 30 and 60 minute interval with a factory setting of 15 minutes.
The time interval is the amount of time it takes for a thermal meter to indicate 90% of a
change of load.
Min Load Voltage E
X.X Volts
Displays minimum local voltage at the regulator or transformer. Bottom line toggles
between Date & Time/Volts.
Max Load Voltage E
XXX.X Volts
Displays maximum local voltage at the regulator or transformer. Bottom line toggles
between Date & Time/Volts.
Max Pri. Current E
XXX.X Amps
Displays maximum primary current. Bottom line toggles between Date & Time/Amps.
Max Primary Watts E
X.XX MW
Displays maximum Watts. Bottom line toggles between Date & Time/W.
Max Primary VArs E
X.XX MVAr
Displays maximum VAr. Bottom line toggles between Date & Time/VAr.
Max Primary VA E
606 TCC300
User Manual
Appendix A HMI
X.XX MVA
Displays maximum VA. Bottom line toggles between Date & Time/VA.
Max Primary VA E
PF @ Max VA
Displays power factor at time of maximum VA. Resets automatically when MAX VA
screen, below, is reset.
Press ENT to reset
Demand History
Press ENT to perform
Master Reset
10.2.1.4 Energy Metering
Watt Hours Fwd E
XX.XXX kWh
Displays total forward WHr. Bottom line toggles between Date & Time/WHR.
Lagging VAr Hours E
XX.XXX kVArh
Displays total forward VArHr. Bottom line toggles between Date & Time/VArHr.
Watt Hours Rev E
X kWh
Displays total reverse WHr. Bottom line toggles between Date & Time/WHr.
Leading VAr Hours E
X kVArh
Displays total reverse VArHr. Bottom line toggles between Date & Time/VArHr.
Press ENT to reset
Energy Metering
Press ENT to perform
TCC300 607
User Manual
Appendix A HMI
Master Reset
10.2.1.5 Status
Press ENT to view
Tapchanger Status
TAP BDS PWR BLK VRD
1 OK fwd --- Off
• TAP Tap Position [1]

• BDS Band Status (Lo, Hi, OK)
• PWR Power Direction (Fwd, Rev)
• BLK Blocks in Effect
• VRD Voltage Reduction (Off, 1, 2, 3)
Press ENT to view
Alarm Status
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
• A = Block Raise Tap

• B = Block Lower Tap
• C = Block Raise Voltage
• D = Block Lower Voltage
• E = Voltage Reduction
• F = Power Direction
• G = Current Limit
• H = Comm Block
• I = LDC/LDZ
• J = Abnormal Tap
• K = VAr Bias Lag
• L = VAr Bias Lead
• M = Backup Fail (If purchased)
• N (M [2]) = DVar2 Over Curr (If purchased)
• O (N [5] /M [3]) = Seal-in Failure
• P (O [5] /N [3] ) = Low Current Blk
[1] In order to verify Neutral Tap Position, when the tap position is "0", but no neutral input is detected, the Tap Position screen will display "- - -"
instead of "0".
[2] These parameters will decrement by 1 letter if Backup Power (M) is not purchased.
[3] These parameters will decrement by 2 letters if Backup Power (M) and DVAr2 (N) are not purchased.
608 TCC300
User Manual
Appendix A HMI
• Q (P [5] /O [3] ) = RTN Fail

• R (Q [5] /P [3] ) = Ind Tap Wear
• S (R [5] /Q [3] ) = Op Count Signal
• T (S [5] /R [3] ) = Tap Changer Fail
Alarm Status Key
• 1 Alarm Enabled/Condition Met

• 0 Alarm Enabled/Condition Not Met
• X Alarm Disabled/Condition Met
• - Alarm Disabled/Condition Not Met
Press ENT to view
Input Status
C NS VR TC KT N MS
00 00 – – 0 RL 0 0
• C = Counter Contact
• NS = Non-Sequential Input
• VR = Voltage Reduction Inputs 1 and 2
• TC = Tap Connection
• KT = Keeptrack Lower and Raise Input
• N = Neutral Tap Position MS = Motor Seal-In
Key
• 1 = True (on)
• 0 = False (off)
Press ENT to view
Output Status
RAISE LOWER ALARM
1 0 0
• RAISE Raise Contact

• LOWER Lower Contact
• ALARM Alarm Contact
Key
TCC300 609
User Manual
Appendix A HMI
• 1 = True (on)
• 0 = False (off)
10.2.1.6 Motor Current
Peak RMS Curr
X.X mA (X.X) T
Displays the Peak RMS Current of the last operation (profile). Also displays the average
Peak RMS Current from the Training Mode (x.x). If a "T" is present, the Training Mode
is active.
Avg RMS Curr
X.X mA (XX.X) T
Displays the Average RMS Current of the last operation (profile). Also displays the
average of the Average RMS Current from the Training Mode (x.x). If a "T" is present, the
Training Mode is active.
Profile Duration
XXXXX.X ms (XXXX.X) T
Displays the Profile Duration of the last operation (profile). Also displays the average of
the Profile Duration from the Training Mode (x.x). If a "T" is present, the Training Mode
is active.
Peak Motor Current E
X.X mA
Displays the Peak Motor Current recorded. This parameter is the highest Peak Motor
Current recorded by the control. This parameter is independent of the Peak RMS Current
in the Motor Current Profile.
10.2.1.7 Harmonics
Voltage % THD
X.X %
Displays the percent of Voltage THD.
Current % THD
610 TCC300
User Manual
Appendix A HMI
XX.X %
Displays the percent of Current THD.
Press ENT to view
Voltage Harmonics
Allows the user to view individual Voltage Harmonic Values (2-31).
Press ENT to view
Current Harmonic
Allows the user to view individual Current Harmonic Values (2-31).
10.2.1.8 Tap Information
Tap Position/Cal
DISABLE
Displays the tap position of the tapchanger. Recognizes tapchanges commanded via
manual, automatic or external (SCADA) means, if tap position is not disabled. The tap
position can be calibrated by selecting ENT, then setting the tap position using the Up /
Down pushbuttons and selecting ENT to confirm the new tap position.
neutral input is detected, the Tap Position screen will display "- - -" instead
of "0".
Drag Hands E
L= 0 N R= 0 N
Displays minimum and maximum values of tap position since reset.
Definite Timer
Raise= xxs Lower= xxs
Displays the status of the raise and lower timers (Definite or Inverse).
Intertap Timer
X %
Displays the status of the Intertap Timer.
TCC300 611
User Manual
Appendix A HMI
Operation Counter
Records the total number of raise and lower operations. The operation counter will
advance based on the Operation Counter Configuration, as set by user. This counter is not
resettable, but can be preset to any value between 0 and 999,999.
Resettable Counter E
Records the total number of raise and lower operations as does the total operations
counter, discussed above. This counter is reset by pressing ENT at this screen. This
counter can be used to monitor the number of tapchanges since the last time it was
checked.
Neutral Sw Counter
The Neutral Switch Counter is updated each time the neutral input is detected. Neutral
Switch Counter can also preset to any value. The Neutral Switch Counter is a software
counter that is stored in non‑volatile memory and has a maximum value of 1,000,000.
Lower Counter
Records the number of Lower operations, can be Preset/Reset in Configuration/Tap

Settings.
Raise Counter
Records the number of Raise operations, can be Preset/Reset in Configuration/Tap

Settings.
Press ENT to view
specific Tap Stats
Tap Tap Number
0 0 0.0 A
612 TCC300
User Manual
Appendix A HMI
• TAP = Tap Position

• TAP Number = The number of tapchanges and the Accumulated Primary Current for
each individual tap position on the Tapchanger control.
Press ENT to clear
Tap Statistics
Press ENT to confirm clearing tap statistics.
RTN Success Counter
xxxxx
The RTN counter increments after each successful operation of the Run Through Neutral
feature.
RTN Status
Disabled/Enabled
Displays the status of the Run Through Neutral Feature.
Count to RTN Active
xxxxx
Displays the number of counter operations since the operations between runs setting was
set, or since the feature was enabled. The counter will reset to zero if the feature is enabled
and successfully runs through neutral.
10.2.2 Setpoints
10.2.2.1 Profile Settings
Active Profile
Profile: 1
Selects the Active Profile (1, 2, 3 or 4).
Profile to Edit
Profile: 1
Selects the Setpoint Profile to be edited (1, 2, 3 or 4).
Edit Profile 1 Name (2,3 or 4)
TCC300 613
User Manual
Appendix A HMI
"Empty"
Assigns a profile name of up to 16 standard alphanumeric characters. Alpha characters

may be either upper or lower case.
10.2.2.2 Common Settings
LDC Selection
RX
Selects Line Drop Compensation Resistance/Reactance or Z.
Timer Characteristic
DEFINITE
Sets control timer for Definite or Inverse time. There are four setpoints associated with
this selection: Time Delay F/R, and Inverse Time F/R.
Timer Reset
INTEGRATING
Toggles between integrating timer and instantaneous reset (INST_RESET) timer upon
voltage return to in-band condition.
Rev Power Operation
BLOCK
Toggles between eight modes of operation:
• BLOCK – to inhibit automatic tapchange operation (Factory Setting)

• REGULATE REVERSE/ REG. R MEASURED SRC – to detect a reverse power
condition and regulate according to reverse power settings
• RETURN TO NEUTRAL – to drive the tap position to Neutral
• IGNORE – continue unit action as though Forward Power Flow continued to exist
• DG Mode (Distributed Generation) – when distribution systems have the possibility
of power reversal to control voltage
• Auto Determine/Auto Determine M – to allow the control to intelligently choose
which reverse power mode applies at the time reverse power is sensed, either
Distributed Generation mode or Regulate In Reverse/Regulate in Reverse Measured
Power Direction Bias
NONE
614 TCC300
User Manual
Appendix A HMI
Allows one of three methods to be used for the control to switch between forward/reverse
power operation. The three settings are None, Forward Bias, and Reverse Bias.
10.2.2.3 Power Flow Forward
Bandcenter Fwd
XXX.X Volts
Forward power bandcenter is adjustable from 100.0 V to 135.0 V in 0.1 V increments with
a factory setting of 120.0 V.
Bandwidth Fwd
X.X Volts
Forward power bandwidth is adjustable from 1.0 V to 10.0 V in 0.1 V increments with a
factory setting of 2.0 V.
LDC RES-REAC
LDC R Fwd ← →
X Volts
Forward power Line Drop Compensation resistance is adjustable from -72 V to +72 V in
1 V increments with a factory setting of 0 V.
LDC X Fwd
X Volts
Forward power Line Drop Compensation reactance is adjustable from -72 V to +72 V in
1 V increments with a factory setting of 0 V.
LDC-Z
LDC-Z Fwd ← →
X Volts
Adjustable from 0 to 72 volts in 1 volt increments.
DEFINITE DELAY
Definite Delay Fwd ← →
XX Sec
TCC300 615
User Manual
Appendix A HMI
Forward power time delay for a tapchange is adjustable from 1 sec. to 360 sec. in 1 second
increments with a factory setting of 30 sec.
INVERSE DELAY
Inverse Delay Fwd ← →
XX Sec
Forward power inverse delay for a tapchange is adjustable from 1 sec. to 360 sec. in 1
second increments with a factory setting of 30 sec.
10.2.2.4 Power Flow Reverse
Bandcenter Rev
XXX.X Volts
Reverse power bandcenter is adjustable from 100.0 V to 135.0 V in 0.1 V increments with
a factory setting of 120.0 V.
Bandwidth Rev
X.X Volts
Reverse power bandwidth is adjustable from 1.0 V to 10.0 V in 0.1 V increments with a
factory setting of 2.0 V.
LDC RES-REAC
LDC R Rev ← →
X Volts
Reverse power Line Drop Compensation resistance is adjustable from -72 V to +72 V in
1 V increments, with a factory setting of 0 V.
LDC X Rev
X Volts
Reverse power Line Drop Compensation reactance is adjustable from -72 V to +72 V in
1 V increments, with a factory setting of 0 V.
LDC-Z
LDC-Z Rev ← →
X Volts
616 TCC300
User Manual
Appendix A HMI
Adjustable from 0 to 72 volts in 1 volt increments.
DEFINITE DELAY
Definite Delay Rev ← →
XX Sec
Reverse power Definite delay for a tapchange is adjustable from 1 sec. to 360 sec. in 1
INVERSE DELAY
Inverse Delay Rev ← →
XX Sec
Reverse power inverse delay for a tapchange is adjustable from 1 sec. to 360 sec. in 1
10.2.2.5 Voltage Reduction
Standard VR
ENABLE
Enable or disable the Standard Voltage Reduction feature.
VRed Turnoff Timer
0 min
The Voltage Reduction feature can be turned off after a time period of 1 to 999 minutes.
A setting of zero disables the Voltage Reduction Turnoff Timer.
Smart VR
disable
Enable or disable Smart Voltage Reduction. Smart Voltage Reduction, when enabled,
lowers voltage to between the Bandcenter setting and the lower band edge instead of
stopping at the upper band edge. It also disablesVAr Bias if it is in effect.
Save VR at Power Off
DON'T SAVE
Allows any Voltage Reduction command communicated to the control to be saved or not
saved at power down.
TCC300 617
User Manual
Appendix A HMI
Reduction Step 1 %
2.5
Voltage reduction can be achieved by contact or communication methods. First of three

independent steps of voltage reduction adjustable from 0% to 10% in 0.1% increments of
the bandcenter setpoint. Factory setting is 2.5%.
Reduction Step 2 %
5.0
Voltage reduction can be achieved by contact or communication methods. Second voltage

reduction step. Factory setting is 5.0%.
Reduction Step 3 %
7.5
Voltage reduction can be achieved by contact or communication methods. Third voltage

reduction step. Factory setting is 7.5%.
10.2.2.6 Limits
Block Raise Voltage
XXX.X Volts
Overvoltage limit is adjustable from 95.0 V to 135.0 V in 0.1 V increments with a factory
setting of 128.0 V. The Block Raise setpoint should always be set above the Block Lower
setpoint and above the upper band limit (the bandcenter plus one-half of the bandwidth)
for the control to operate. All automatic Raise/Lower tap operations are blocked, when
input voltage is less than 85.0 Vdc.
Runback DeadBand
X.X Volts
Runback Deadband is adjustable from 1.0 V to 4.0 V in 0.1 V increments with a factory
setting of 2.0 V.
Block Lower Voltage
XXX.X Volts
Undervoltage limit is adjustable from 95.0 V to 135.0 V in 0.1 V increments with a factory
setting of 114.0 V. The Block Lower setpoint should always be set below the Block Raise
setpoint and below the lower band limit (the bandcenter minus one-half of the bandwidth)
618 TCC300
User Manual
Appendix A HMI
for the control to operate. All automatic Raise/Lower tap operations are blocked, when
input voltage is less than 85.0 Vdc.
Runup Deadband
X.X Volts
Runup Deadband is adjustable from 1.0 V to 4.0 V in 0.1 V increments with a factory
setting of 2.0 V.
disable
Enables or disabled the Voltage Runup feature.
Current Block Limit
XXX mA
Current Block Limit is adjustable from 50 mA to 640 mA in 1 mA increments with a

factory setting of 640 mA with hysteresis of 5 mA. If the value of the current exceeds the
Current Block Limit setpoint, the unit will not permit automatic control.
10.2.2.7 VAr Bias
Set VAr Bias Method
disable
Enables either "Step" or "Linear" VAr Bias method or disables the VAr Bias feature.
10.2.3 VAr Bias
10.2.3.1 VAr Bias (Step)
Disable on Rev Pwr
disable
Allows Step VAr Bias to be disabled in the reverse power mode.
Fwd Max Cap Bank Size
12000 KVAr
Sets the largest capacitor bank size in the forward mode from 4 to 12,000 KVAr.
TCC300 619
User Manual
Appendix A HMI
Rev Max Cap Bank Size
12000 KVAr
Sets the largest capacitor bank size in the reverse mode from 4 to 12,000 KVAr.
Lead % Pickup
75
Defines a Lower negative VAr limit in percentage of the Max Cap Bank size below which
the control will increase the upper band edge by the amount defined by VAr Bias Voltage
Step.
Lag % Pickup
75
Defines an Upper positive VAr limit in percentage of the Max Cap Bank size above which
the control will decrease the lower band edge by the amount defined by VAr Bias Voltage
Step.
VAr Bias Volt Step
1.0 Volts
Amount by which the control will increase or decrease the Upper or Lower band edges
when there is a VAr Bias out of band situation.
Max VAR Bias Time
300 mins
Maximum allowable time in minutes the control will bias the voltage edge.
10.2.3.2 VAr Bias (Linear)
Disable on Rev Pwr
disable
Allows Linear VAr Bias to be disabled in the reverse power mode.
Curr Mult Base Value
Allows the Current Multiplier Base Value to be set between 0 and 32600.
620 TCC300
User Manual
Appendix A HMI
Linear V Bias -X
0 Volts
The "No Voltage Reduction" Linear Voltage Bias (-X) setting defines the amount of
voltage bias to be applied to the Bandcenter when at 1 PU reactive current loading.
Adjustable from -72 to 0 Volts at 200mA Reactive Load.
Normlzd Lin V Bias -X
x.x Volts
The Normalized Linear VAr Bias -X Volts display allows the user to observe the
Normalized Linear VAr Bias -X setting as a result of the Normalizing value entered in
Configuration.
Linear V Bias -X Lmt
0.0 Volts
The "No Voltage Reduction" Linear Voltage Bias (-X) Limit, limits the total voltage bias
that can affect the control Bandcenter. Adjustable from -5.0 to 0.0.
Linear V Bias +X
0 Volts
The "During Voltage Reduction" Linear Voltage Bias (+X) setting defines the amount of
voltage bias to be applied to the Bandcenter when at 1 PU reactive current loading.
Adjustable from 0 to 72 Volts at 200mA Reactive Load.
Normlzd Lin V Bias +X
x.x Volts
The Normalized Linear VAr Bias +X Volts display allows the user to observe the
Normalized Linear VAr Bias +X setting as a result of the Normalizing value entered in
Configuration.
Linear V Bias +X Lmt
0.0 Volts
The "During Voltage Reduction" Linear Voltage Bias (+X) Limit, limits the total voltage
bias that can affect the control Bandcenter. Adjustable from 0.0 to 5.0 Volts.
TCC300 621
User Manual
Appendix A HMI
10.2.4 Configuration
10.2.4.1 Tapchanger Type
These screens display the Tapchanger settings as selected by the user in

TCC600 and are for information purposes only. The settings may not be
changed in the HMI.
Tapchanger Type
LTC
Regulator Vendor
Default
10.2.4.2 Tap Settings
Tap Position/Cal
DISABLE
Allows input of known tap position to calibrate the unit tap position. This function is
disabled when Tap Information is disabled.
neutral input is detected, the Tap Position screen will display "- - -" instead
of "0".
Tap Information
disable
Toggles between ten modes of operation: XFMR External #3, XFMR External #2, XFMR
External #1, Reg External #3, Reg External #2, Reg External #1, Contact KeepTrack™
1R1L, Contact KeepTrack 1N, Internal KeepTrack™ and Disable.
Tap Limits
disable
Allows the tap position limits to be enabled/disabled. When enabled, the following Tap
Block Raise and Lower setting screens will appear.
Tap Block Raise
622 TCC300
User Manual
Appendix A HMI
XX
When enabled the Tap Block Raise Limit is adjustable from –12 to +16 which includes a
neutral tap position. Default setting is 16.
Tap Block Lower
XX
When enabled the Tap Block Lower Limit is adjustable from –16 to +12. Default setting
is –16.
Highest Tap
XX
Not settable unless an external source of Tap Position is selected. Selects the range of a
specific tapchanger (0 to 33 Taps).
Lowest Tap
XX
Not settable unless an external source of Tap Position is selected. Selects the range of a
specific tapchanger (–33 to +29 Taps).
Intertap Delay
XX sec
Adjustable from 0 to 60 Seconds in 1.0 second increments with a factory setting of 0

seconds.
Seal-in Fail Block
ENABLE
When enabled the operation of the tapchanger is blocked when the control determines that
a Motor Seal-in Failure has occurred.
Op Counter Config
1 X
Selects the contact operation sequence that will cause the software counter to increment
by one. Open/close/open (1X), open/close or close/open contact operation (2X). The
Count Window mode registers any activity as a valid input within the count window time
setting. The Cam Follower setting is used when a Cam Follower contact input is wired into
TCC300 623
User Manual
Appendix A HMI
the Counter contact input of the TCC300. The counter will increment when the counter
input sees the cam follower open and then close.
Cooper Quick Drive
disable
Enable this setting when using a Cooper Quick Drive regulator. For Cooper Spring Drive
and Direct Drive, this setting should be disabled.
Cam Follower
disable
Enables or disables the Cam Follower feature.
X Mode Delay
XX ms
When the control is using 1X or 2X Mode counter contact detection method, the X Mode
Delay setting in milliseconds can be used to delay the detection of the NEUTRAL position
switch.
Counter Time Window
0.5 Sec
When the control is using Count Window Mode counter contact detection method, the
counter time window may be set from 0.0 to 60.5 Seconds with a default setting of 0.5.
Op Counter Preset
XXXXXX
The counter cannot be reset, but can be preset to any value up to 999,999 in the Tap
Settings menu.
Ntrl Counter Preset
XXXXXX
Preset the Neutral Counter to any value up to 999,999.
Lower Counter Preset
XXXXXX
Either preset or reset the lower counter.
624 TCC300
User Manual
Appendix A HMI
Raise Counter Preset
XXXXXX
Either preset or reset the raise counter.
Maximum Tap Wear
999999
Set a value from 1 to 999,999 for the maximum number of times the regulator has been on
each tap before an alarm occurs.
IndTapWear Alrm Set
100 %
A percentage setting with a range from 1 to 200% which is used in conjunction with the
Maximum Tap Wear setting to determine when the Individual Tap Wear Alarm is
triggered. Default setting is 100%.
10.2.4.3 Paralleling
Paralleling Type
DISABLE
Toggles between seven modes of operation, if purchased: Circulating I, DVAR1,

DVAR2, DVAR2 + KeepTrack™, Master/Follower, Delta VAr Peer to Peer, and Disable.
Factory setting is Disable.
DVAR2
DVAR2 Sensitivity
XX
(DVAr2 and DVAr2 KT) Provides a method to control how much the voltage bandcenter
is shifted relative to the delta VArs present between the circulating current input and the
load current input. The settings for this screen are –4.0 to +4.0 in 0.1 increments, which
correspond to a sensitivity of 0.5 to 2 times as sensitive (i.e., –4.0 = .5, –2.0 = .75, 0 = 1.00,
2.0 = 1.50, 4.0 = 2.00). The default setting is 0.0, for a sensitivity of 1.
DVAR2 Reac I Lmt
XX mA
(DVAr2 and DVAr2 KT) Provides a method to set a reactive current (VArs) limit between
the circulating current input and the load current input. If the reactive current reaches this
TCC300 625
User Manual
Appendix A HMI
setpoint, the operation of the TCC300 will be blocked, and the alarm output function will
be activated, if enabled. The settings for this screen are 5 mA to 200 mA in 1 mA
increments.
DVAR2 I Ratio
X.XX
(DVAr2 and DVAr2 KT) Provides a method to adjust the sensitivity to the circulating
current input versus the load current input. When the setting is 0.50, the control will be
0.50 times as sensitive to the VArs from the circulating current versus the load current
input. At 1.00, the control will be equally sensitive to both current inputs. At 2.00, the
control will be 2.00 times as sensitive to the VArs from circulating current input versus the
load current input. The settings for this screen are 0.50 to 2.00 in 0.01 increments. The
default setting is 1.00 to obtain equally sensitive current inputs.
Master/Follower
Master/Follower
None (Master,Follower)
Determines the controls status in the Master/Follower paralleling scheme. A "None"

setting allows the control to be removed from the scheme.
Paralleling Address
XX
The Paralleling Address is the unique address for each device in the network. (1-16).
Num. Devices
The number of total devices that are in the paralleling scheme (maximum of 16 inclusive
of the master).
T.P.R. Timeout
XXXXXX ms
The Tap Position Response Timeout is the period (1000-60000 ms) that the Master waits
following a tapchange and subsequent message sent to followers to make the same
tapchange that when expired will initiate a lockout if all followers have not issued
messages to the master confirming the follower tapchange.
Breaker Option
626 TCC300
User Manual
Appendix A HMI
XXXXXX
The Breaker Option setting includes Line Breaker Status, Right Tie Breaker Status and
Left Tie Breaker Status in the Master/Follower scheme. Breaker Polarity (Negative/
Positive) is also able to be set.
0 0 0 0 0 0
Line Breaker: 0 = Not Selected
1 = Selected
Line Breaker Polarity: 0 = Positive

1 = Negative
Right Tie Breaker: 0 = Not Selected

1 = Selected
Right Tie Breaker Polarity: 0 = Positive

1 = Negative
Left Tie Breaker: 0 = Not Selected

1 = Selected
Left Tie Breaker Polarity: 0 = Positive

1 = Negative
GUID-9C334936-9B1B-4198-801C-38FFA2F1DE89 V1 EN
Figure 458: Master/Follower Breaker Option Settings
Tap Difference
The Tap Difference setting is the number of tap positions between the Master and
Follower tap positions that when exceeded will result in lockout of the control.
Clear Lockout Alarm
Ready Press ENTER
Allows reset of Lockout Alarm from the control front panel.
Delta VAr Peer to Peer

P2P DVar Sensitivity
0.0
Scales the control's reaction to changes in Reactive Circulating Current (Irc). The
following data demonstrates the linear relationship between the Sensitivity setting and the
% Multiplier (Range -4.0 to +4.0).
TCC300 627
User Manual
Appendix A HMI
• - 4.0 = Irc • 50 %
• - 2.0 = Irc • 75 %
• 0.0 = Irc • 100 %
• +2.0 = Irc • 150 %
• +4.0 = Irc • 200 %
DVAR2 Reac I Lmt
200.0 mA
The Reactive Circulating Current Limit is the maximum Delta VAr value allowed for
bandcenter adjustment. Range and units are dependent on the CT installed in the unit:
Table 71:
CT Rating Range Units
200 mA 5...200 mA
1A 0.02...1.00 A
5A 0.1...5.0 A
Topology
SINGLE BUS
Single Bus, Ring Bus or Double Bus topologies may be selected.
Paralleling Address
16
The unique address for each device (Range 1 – 16).
The Initiator Paralleling Address must be the highest address in the network. All Non-
Initiator addresses must be a value less than the Initiator.
The control's position in the paralleling network is determined by its paralleling address.
Position 1 should be assigned a paralleling address of 1, Position 2 a paralleling address
of 2 and so on, in an ascending order.
Num. Devices
The total number of devices in the paralleling scheme (maximum 16).
P2P Update Speed
628 TCC300
User Manual
Appendix A HMI
1000
The time period allocated to read all the paralleled units' relevant data, make the necessary
calculations and disseminate paralleling driven updates to the system (Range 1000 to
10000).
Load Side Brk Config
Not Used
Can be set to Not Used, 52a (positive polarity), or 52b (negative polarity).
Right Tie Brk Config
Not Used
Left Tie Brk Config
Not Used
MVA Rating
1.0
The MVA rating of the transformer (Range 1.0 to 1000.0).
I Multi Correction
xxx %
A scaling factor to compensate Delta Vars Calculation, if the CT value is not in the ratio
to the MVA rating (Range 20 to 500 %).
Clear Lockout Alarm
Ready Press ENTER
Allows reset of lockout alarm at control front panel.
10.2.4.4 Programmable Alarm
Prog Alarm Function
–<0000000000000000
TCC300 629
User Manual
Appendix A HMI
Provides alarm for one or more of the following user-selected conditions: Communication
Block, Block Raise Limit exceeded, Block Lower Limit exceeded, Voltage Reduction
(any step) invoked, Reverse Power Flow condition detected, Line Limit Current
exceeded, Tap Block Raise in effect, Tap Block Lower in effect, LDC/LDZ in effect,
Abnormal Tap Position detected, VAr Bias Lag exceeded, VAr Bias Lead exceeded,
Backup Power fail detected (if purchased), Tap Wear Limit exceeded, Operation Count
Limit exceeded, RTN Fail to Operate and Tap Changer Failure detected. Factory setting
is Disable. (Bottom line of display indicates available alarms.)
630 TCC300
User Manual
Appendix A HMI
All Disabled Prog Alarm Function

(factory Setting) 0000000000000000
Prog Alarm Function

1111111111111111 All Enabled
––––––––––––––––
Communication Block (in effect)
COMMUNICATION BLOCK Block Raise Voltage Limit (exceeded)
MNTR Block Lower Voltage Limit (exceeded)
0000000000000001 C
Voltage Reduction (any step) (invoked)
Reverse Power Flow (condition detected)
In "Change Mode" continue pressing Line Current Limit (exceeded)
LEFT to access Programmable Tap Block Raise (in effect)
Alarm Relay II screen Tap Block Lower (in effect)
LDC/LDZ (in effect)
TAP CHANGER FAILURE Abnormal Tap (condition detected)
1– C VAr Bias Lag (limit exceeded)
Var Bias Lead (limit exceeded)
Backup Power Fail (if purchased)
Tap Changer Failure (detected)
RTN Fail To Operate (condition detected)
Individual Tap Wear Limit (exceeded)
Op Count Limit (exceeded)
Programmable Alarm
CNFG
Prog Alarm Function

0000000000000000
Press ENT to enter change mode UTIL

ENT Flashing "Underline" and
"C" indicates change mode
Alarm condition displayed on top communication block
line is based on the digit that is 0 disables alarm condition
underlined on the bottom line 0000000000000000 C 1 enables alarm condition
Use LEFT or RIGHT to navigate to SETP CNFG Use UP or DOWN to select 0 or 1

desired Alarm Condition
COMMUNICATION BLOCK
MNTR
0000000000000001 C Press ENT to exit change
mode and save settings
block raise voltage UTIL

0000000000000001 C ENT
GUID-7564914D-E554-4966-8BCB-D75C77AAEDEB V1 EN
Figure 459: Programmable Alarm Function Programming
Op Count Signal Alrm
When the resettable operations counter matches the Op Count Signal Alarm Setting, the
control will display a message that the Op Count Signal Alarm Setting has been exceeded.
TCC300 631
User Manual
Appendix A HMI
Clear Sealin Alarm
Ready Press ENTER
Reset the Motor Seal-In Alarm when the motor hold input has been restored.
Clr Low Current Blk
Ready Press ENTER
Clear the Low Current Block Alarm and Block. Alarm and Block occurs when the control
determines that load current is less than 4 mA and Tap Delta Voltage is less than .4 Vac.
Clr RTN Fail To Opr
Ready Press ENTER
Clear the Run Through Neutral Failure to Operate Alarm.
10.2.4.5 System Clock
Set Date and Time
03/26/07 15:41:29
Displays and allows resetting of the time and date. Press ENT to set date; change mode
indicated by "C". Used in conjunction with drag hands memories where the date/time
stamp will be recorded for each drag hand quantity.
Daylight Savings
disable
Enable or disable Daylight Savings time adjustment.
10.2.4.6 Input Selection
Input Selection 1
SWITCH STATUS
Allows the Input Selection 1 to be used as a seal‑in input or a switch status input. When
the Switch Status input mode is selected, all Seal‑In input functions will be disabled
(Section 5.2, Configuration). The factory setting is Switch Status. A Switch Status setting
is also required for "Contact KeepTrack™ 1R1L" and "Contact KeepTrack 1N" methods
of tap knowledge.
Input Selection 2
632 TCC300
User Manual
Appendix A HMI
NONSEQ INPUT
Allows the non-sequential input to be used as the Non-Sequential Input or as a SCADA

Cutout input. When SCADA Cutout is selected, all nonsequential functions are disabled.
Factory setting is Non-Sequential.
Input Selection 3
VOLTAGE RED 2
Allows VR2 Input to be used as an Aux Status Input that can be read via DNP or
MODBUS®.
10.2.4.7 Mtr Current Profile
Peak RMS % Change
xxx
Setting for Peak RMS current programmable from 110% to 200% of the stored Peak RMS
current to activate an alarm.
Average RMS % Change
xxx
Setting for Average RMS current programmable from 110% to 200% of the stored
Average RMS current to activate an alarm.
Duration % Change
xxx
Setting for Duration current programmable from 110% to 200% of the stored Duration
current to activate an alarm.
Init. Motor Current
Press ENT to reset.
Reset all Motor Current Profiles and initiate the "Training Mode".
10.2.4.8 CBEMA Setup
Normal Voltage
xxx.x Volts
TCC300 633
User Manual
Appendix A HMI
This parameter establishes the target voltage around which the Event settings determine
"Sag" or "Swell" conditions.
Event 1 (2, 3, 4)
ENABLE
Enables/Disables CBEMA Event 1, 2, 3 or 4.
Event 1 (2, 3, 4) Sag (Swell) Pickup
xx %
When pickup is set to less than 100% it operates as a Sag (undervoltage), greater than
100% it operates as a Swell (overvoltage).
Event 1 (2, 3, 4) Sag (Swell) Dropout
xx %
Sag Dropout is always set greater than Sag Pickup. Swell Dropout is fixed at 100%.
Event 1 (2, 3, 4) Sag (Swell) Min Dur
1 cycles (xx ms)
Establishes the minimum duration that Sag or Swell condition exists before an Event is
registered.
Clear All Counters
Ready Press ENTER
Clears all CBEMA Event Counters.
10.2.4.9 Harmonics Setup
V 2-16 Har. Alarm
011101111111111
Selects active harmonics for voltage alarm 2-16.
V 17-31 Har. Alarm
000000000000001
Selects active harmonics for voltage alarm 17-31.
634 TCC300
User Manual
Appendix A HMI
V Alarm Threshold
1.0 %
Selects Harmonic Voltage Alarm Threshold value.
I 2-16 Har. Alarm
011101011111111
Selects active harmonics for current alarm 2-16.
I 17-31 Har. Alarm
000000000000001
Selects active harmonics for current alarm 17-31.
I Alarm Threshold
10 %
Provides Current Alarm Threshold value input.
Min I Thresh. Enable
ENABLE
Enables/Disables Minimum Current Threshold feature.
Min Fund I Threshold
20 mA
Establishes minimum fundamental Current Threshold for Current Harmonics 0 to 200

mA.
10 s
Allows Harmonic Alarm Delay setting which is applicable to both Voltage and Current
Threshold settings.
10.2.4.10 Data Logging
Data Log Select
11111111111111
TCC300 635
User Manual
Appendix A HMI
Position From Right
1. Local Voltage
2. Compensated Voltage
3. Line Current
4. Load VA
5. Load W
6. Load VAr
7. Power Factor
8. Line Frequency
9. Tap Position
10. Source Voltage
11. Primary Current
12. Circulating/DVAr Current
13. Operation Count
14. Meter Out Voltage
Key
• 1 = Enabled for Logging

• 0 = Logging Disabled
Data Log Interval
5 mins
Press ENT to clear
Data Log Records
10.2.4.11 Nameplate
CT Multiplier
6000 X
Adjustable from 1 to 32600 in 1 increments with a factory setting of 6000. User selection
must include knowledge of CT ratio, from primary rating to 0.2 A rating of control.
Load VT Config
LINE_TO_GROUND
VT configuration toggles between Line-to-Line and Line-to-Ground with a factory setting

of Line-to-Ground.
636 TCC300
User Manual
Appendix A HMI
Aux Curr Transformer
200 mA
hours, and 4.0 A for one second.
Selection of display current can be made to be either 200 mA, 1 A or 5 A. This screen
allows load and circulating current displays to be viewed on 200 mA, 1A [4] or 5A [5]
scales. Line Limit I settings also affected.
CT/LOAD VT Phasing
0 Deg
CT/VT phasing correction is adjustable from 0° to 330° in 30° increments with a factory
setting of 0°. This setting will advance the current phasor by the indicated value.
Load VT. Multiplier
60.0 X
Adjustable from 0.1 to 3260.0 in 0.1 increments with a factory setting of 60.0. User
selection must include knowledge of VT ratio, sensing VT ratio correction.
Load VT Correction
0.0 Volts
VT ratio correction is adjustable from –15 V to +15 V in 0.1 V increments with a factory
setting of 0 V.
CT/Source VT Phasing
0 Deg
CT/VT phasing correction is adjustable from 0° to 330° in 30° increments with a factory
setting of 0°. This setting will advance the current phasor by the indicated value.
Source VT. Multiplier
60.0 X
Adjustable from 0.1 to 3260.0 in 0.1 increments with a factory setting of 60.0. User
selection must include knowledge of Source VT Ratio and sensing Source VT Ratio
correction.
[4] 1 A or 5 A displayed values are calculated from the actual 200 mA connected current.
TCC300 637
User Manual
Appendix A HMI
Source VT Correction
0.0 Volts
VT ratio correction is adjustable from –15 V to +15 V in 0.1 V increments with a factory
setting of 0 V.
Norm. VT. Multiplier
1.00
Normalizing Voltage Multiplier 0.80 to 1.20 times the Compensating Voltage.
Power Display Option
SINGLE_PHASE
Toggles between two modes of operation: Single‑Phase – based on measured inputs, and
Three‑Phase – based on measured inputs and presumed balanced system. Factory setting
is single-phase.
Regulator Type
TYPE A
Allows the regulator type to be selected as Type A or B for correct source voltage
calculation. Factory setting is Type A.
Output Selection
CONTINUOUS
Allows choice of output at tapchanger Raise/Lower output terminal. Choices are

continuous or pulsed. For continuous, the control must wait to be in band or counter input
valid for output to become disabled. For pulsed, an adjustable pulse width will be applied
to the output triacs of 0.2 to 12 seconds.
Output Pulse
1.5 Sec
Adjustable from 0.2 to 12 seconds in 0.1 second increments. Factory set at 1.5 seconds.
Low Current Block
disable
638 TCC300
User Manual
Appendix A HMI
Enables and disables the Low Current Block and Alarm feature. When enabled allows the
control to determine when load current is less than 4 mA and Tap Delta Voltage is less
than .4 Vac to block regulation and initiate the Low Current Block alarm.
Auto/Man Sw Type
NONE
Allows the Auto/Man switch type on the adapter panel to be set to toggle, SCAMP or
NONE. NONE is used when no Auto/Manual switch exists.
Comm Block Auto
DON'T SAVE
If Auto/Manual Switch Type is set to "None" or "Toggle" allows the state of the "Block
Auto Operation" communication command to be saved or not saved when power has been
lost.
SCAMP Init Pwrup
AUTO MODE/LAST SAVE
If Auto/Manual Switch Type is set to "SCAMP" allows the control to initialize the
SCAMP status in either "Auto Mode" or the "Last Save" position.
Fast Volt Recovery
disable
Enable or Disable Fast Voltage Recovery on the Control.
Fast Volt R Setting
x.x V
The Fast Voltage Recovery setting range is from 1.0 to 15.0 volts outside the normal band
edges in 0.1 V increments.
10.2.4.12 Run Through Neutral
Enable/Disable
disable
Enables and Disables the Run Through Neutral Feature.
Reset RTN Succ Ctr
TCC300 639
User Manual
Appendix A HMI
Press ENT to begin
Resets the Run Through Neutral Success Counter.
Max Allowed Taps
The Maximum Allowed Taps Setting (3 to 7) determines the maximum number of taps
that can be taken to swipe the reversing switch.
Taps Between Runs
xxxxx
This setting (10 to 10000) establishes the number of taps that must be taken before the Run
Through Neutral Feature is activated.
Max Load Current
xx mA
Establishes the Maximum Measured Load current value (1 to 200 mA) that Load Current
must be less than to allow the Run Through Neutral feature to activate.
Max RTN Standby Ops
xxxxx
The Maximum RTN Standby Operations setting (1 to 10000) is the number of Tap
Operations that when exceeded initiates the "RTN Fail to Operate" alarm.
10.2.4.13 Remote Voltage Bias
Enable/Disable
disable
Enables and Disables the Remote Voltage Bias Feature.
RVB HB Timer
xxx
The Remote Voltage Bias Heartbeat Timer setting (2 to 120 sec) is the period that upon
receiving the remote voltage value the voltage bias is applied to the Bandcenter. If no
remote voltage value is received and the timer times out the control will revert to existing
settings.
640 TCC300
User Manual
Appendix A HMI
RVB Scale Factor
xxx.x
The Forward RVB Scale Factor (0.1 to 100.0) is the scale factor applied to the raw remote
voltage value obtained through communications.
Rev RVB Scale Factor
xxx.x
The Reverse RVB Scale Factor (0.1 to 100.0) is the scale factor applied to the raw remote
voltage value obtained through communications.
10.2.5 Communication
10.2.5.1 Comm Settings
Comm1 Port Type
RS485
TCC300 COM Port can be selected for two different configurations: RS‑485 or Fiber
Optics.
Comm2 Port Type
RS232
TCC300 COM Port can be selected for two different configurations: RS‑232 or Bluetooth.
Comm Protocol
DNP3.0
Allows selection between standard protocols, DNP 3.0 or MODBUS®.
DNP Configuration
TCC300 DNP DEFAULT
Displays the current DNP configuration. If no DNP configuration is present, then "File
does not exist" will be displayed.
CID File ID
TCC300 DEFAULT
TCC300 641
User Manual
Appendix A HMI
Displays the current CID File name (up to 20 characters) loaded on the control.
Src Addr Validation
disable
Enables or Disables Source Address Validation in the DNP3.0 protocol.
Substation Address
DNP x
The Substation Address is utilized to set a specific communication identification for

network addressing. If set to zero the address is not in effect. The address can be set from
1 to 65519.
Feeder Address
DNP x
The Feeder Address is utilized to set a specific communication identification for network
addressing. If set to zero the address is not in effect. The address can be set from 1 to
65519.
Comm Address
DNP 1 Mdbus 1
Configures a three-digit numerical address, from 1 to 200, for remote communications.

The factory setting is 1.
Baud Rate
9600
Selects baud rate for COM1, located on the top of the control.
Parity
NONE
None, odd or even parity is available.
Stop Bits
ONE STOPBIT
One or two stop bits are available.
Sync Time
642 TCC300
User Manual
Appendix A HMI
2 mS
This time delay improves robust operation when communication lines are intermittent.
Communication dead-sync time is the time that the control will wait from the last received
character and continue without attempting to resynchronize. Factory setting is 2 msec;
range is 0-32000 msec.
Output Pulse
1.5 Sec
Adjustable from 0.2 to 12 seconds in 0.1 second increments. Factory set at 1.5 seconds.
Comm Access Security
disable
When enabled, establishes Level Access security for MODBUS® communications

regardless of physical connection.
Comm Access Timeout
60 sec
Establishes the duration at which time communications will be closed with the control
when no communication activity is sensed.
TX Delay
10 ms
Delay transmission of a response of a Serial Bus (RS-232, RS 485 or Fiber Optic).
Heartbeat Option
Disabled
Toggles between five modes of operation: LTC (DNP), Regulator (DNP), Profile
Switching (DNP), Profile Switching (GOOSE) and Disabled.
10.2.5.2 Memory Card
Load Setpoints
Press ENT to begin
Load setpoint files (Unit or Master) from a Smart Flash SD Card into the unit.
Save Setpoints
TCC300 643
User Manual
Appendix A HMI
Press ENT to begin
Save setpoint files (Unit or Master) to a Smart Flash SD Card from the unit.
Save Datalog
Press ENT to begin
Save data log files to a Smart Flash SD Card from the unit.
Save seq. of events
Press ENT to begin
Save Sequence of Events files to a Smart Flash SD Card from the unit.
Save oscillograph
Press ENT to begin
Save Oscillograph files to a Smart Flash SD Card from the unit.
Clone save
Press ENT to begin
Save the entire control settings to a Smart Flash SD Card with the exception of the serial
number.
Clone load
Press ENT to begin
Load a clone file on to a control to duplicate settings. Does not overwrite serial number of
the target control.
Load DNP Config
Press ENT to begin
Load DNP configuration files from a Smart Flash SD Card into the unit.
Save DNP Config
Press ENT to begin
Save DNP configuration files to a Smart Flash SD Card from the unit.
Save Metering Data
644 TCC300
User Manual
Appendix A HMI
Press ENT to begin
Save all metering data to a Smart Flash SD Card.
Firmware Update
Press ENT to begin
Update the unit firmware.
Load IEC Config
Press ENT to begin
Load IEC Configuration files (*.cid) when IEC 61850 protocol has been purchased.
Save IEC Config
Press ENT to begin
Save IEC Configuration files (*.cid) when IEC 61850 protocol has been purchased.
SD Quick Capture
Press ENT to begin
Provides the means (in one step) to initiate a save of the following data files to the inserted
SD Card (if they exist on the control).
• Control Clone
• Data Logging
• Oscillography
• DNP Map
• Multi-user Access Code
• Multi-user Access Code Log
10.2.5.3 Ethernet
DHCP Enable
ENABLE
Allows DHCP Protocol to be enabled or disabled.
IP Address
0.0.0.0
TCC300 645
User Manual
Appendix A HMI
Either displays the assigned IP Address when DHCP is enabled or allows the IP Address
to be manually assigned.
Net Mask
0.0.0.0
Either displays the assigned Net Mask when DHCP is enabled or allows the Net Mask to
be manually assigned.
Gateway
0.0.0.0
Either displays the assigned Gateway when DHCP is enabled or allows the Gateway to be
manually assigned.
Enter MODBUS Port
502
Allows the MODBUS® port ID to be set. Default value is "502".
Enter DNP Port
20000
Allows the DNP port ID to be set. Default value is "20000".
Auto Negotiation
ENABLE
Set the Ethernet Port to a fixed speed of 100 mbps.
Keepalive time
7200 sec
The Keepalive Time feature applies only to the Ethernet connection. If no communication
activity is detected on a previously open Ethernet socket longer than the timeout setting
the control will close the socket and make it available for connection. The setting range is
from 1 to 50,000 seconds.
SNTP Enable
disable
Enables the SNTP (Simple Network Time protocol) to allow Network Time
Synchronization.
646 TCC300
User Manual
Appendix A HMI
SNTP Server Address
0.0.0.0
Enter the IP Address of the network server.
Time Zone GMT
-5 Hr
Select the Time Zone that the control resides in.
10.2.5.4 HMI
Set LCD Contrast: E
Allows contrast to be adjusted from +10 (lightest) to –10 (darkest). Factory setting is 0,
which provides a neutral contrast.
User Line 1 E
ABB
Allows input of 20 ASCII characters to configure a unit locator or description. If not

configured, a row of 15 asterisks will appear in top row of User Line #1 screen.
User Line 2 E
TCC300
Allows input of 20 ASCII characters to configure a unit locator or description. If not

configured, a row of 15 asterisks will appear in bottom row of User Line #2 screen.
Level 1 Access Code
Press ENT to change
Configures a six-digit alpha/numerical Access Code for Level 1. Factory setting is 000000
(disabled).
Level 2 Access Code
Press ENT to change
Configures a six-digit alpha/numerical Access Code for Level 2. Factory setting is

222222.
Clear Osc Records
TCC300 647
User Manual
Appendix A HMI
Ready Press ENTER
Clear Oscillograph records from the HMI.
Oscillograph Message
ENABLE
Feature enables or disables the OSC Triggered Message to be scrolled on the unit display
when an OSC record is available.
10.2.5.5 Bluetooth
Bluetooth Enable
ENABLE
Enables or disables the Bluetooth® feature when installed on the control.
Bluetooth Reset
Ready Press ENTER
Reset the Bluetooth Module to "ABB" factory default settings.
Bluetooth Protocol
MODBUS
Select either MODBUS® or DNP3.0 protocol.
Authentication
disable
Enables or disables Authentication and provides the means to enter a Pass Key when set
(1 to 16 characters).
Friendly Name
TCC300
Name the unit (maximum of 32 characters).
Bluetooth Pass Reset
Ready Press ENTER
648 TCC300
User Manual
Appendix A HMI
The Bluetooth Passkey can be reset to default conditions (no Passkey and Authentication
Disabled) if necessary.
Control BT Device
XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX
Displays the Bluetooth MAC address of the control.
Bluetooth Mode
MODE0
The Bluetooth mode can be set to Mode0 in which the control is discoverable and
connectable to any client station, or Mode1 in which the control is non‑discoverable but
is connectable to any client station that knows the control Bluetooth device address.
10.2.5.6 RS232
Protocol
MODBUS
Select between standard protocols: DNP3.0 or MODBUS.
Baud Rate
115200
Selects Baud Rate for the RS232 port.
Parity
NONE
None, odd or even parity is available.
Stop Bits
TWO STOPBITS
One or Two Stop Bits are available.
Sync Time
50 mS
This time delay improves robust operation when communication lines are intermittent.
Communication dead-sync time is the time that the control will wait from the last received
TCC300 649
User Manual
Appendix A HMI
character and continue without attempting to resynchronize. Factory setting is 50 msec;

range is 0-32000 msec.
10.2.6 Utilities
10.2.6.1 Calibration-Test
Bias Voltage
Status/Test Mode
When ENT is pressed, the control status can be checked, and a bias test voltage can be
entered to test the control’s automatic operation.
Load Voltage
XXX.X Volts
Displays the real-time measured value of voltage at the regulator or the transformer,
including the voltage reduction if applicable and any corrections made using the user-
Voltage Offset
Voltage calibration count offset from ADC reference value. [5]
Volt Cal Coefficient
32767 X
Voltage calibration factor. [5]
Volt RMS Coefficient
32762 X
Voltage RMS calibration factor. [5]
Control Load I
x.x mA Lag
Displays the real-time measured value of load current related to the scaling factor Current
Transformer of 200 mA, 1 A or 5A.
[5] Requires Level 3 Access to change.
650 TCC300
User Manual
Appendix A HMI
Curr Cal Coefficient
32767 X
Current calibration factor. [5]
Power Factor
X.XXX Lag
Displays the real-time Power Factor value.
I Sin Coefficient
0 X
Current Sine Coefficient calibration factor. [5]
I Cos Coefficient
8192 X
Displays the PF Factor Cosine correction factor as determined by Autocal. Can also be
manually set. However, ABB does not recommend manual setting of this parameter.
Motor Current
x.xx mA
Displays the real-time measured value of motor current.
Mtr Cal. Coefficient
8192 X
Motor Calibration Coefficient calibration factor. [5]
Mtr Sin Coefficient
0 X
Motor Sine Coefficient calibration factor. [5]
Mtr Cos Coefficient
8192 X
Motor Cosine Coefficient calibration factor. [5]
Mtr RMS Coefficient
TCC300 651
User Manual
Appendix A HMI
8192 X
Motor RMS calibration factor. [5]
Cir Cal. Coefficien
32767 X
Circulating Current calibration factor. [5]
Circ Sin Coefficient
0 X
Circulating Current Sine Coefficient calibration factor. [5]
Circ Cos Coefficient
8192 X
Circulating Current Cosine Coeffiecient calibration factor. [5]
LED Scroll Test
Press ENT to begin
Momentarily illuminates each LED on the control panel. Push EXIT to stop.
Input Test
Press ENT to Begin
Test all external inputs to the control.
Output Test
Press ENT to test
Test all outputs from the control.
Button Input Test
Press ENT to Begin
Verify proper operation of each front panel pushbutton from the HMI.
Change Src Input
press ENTER.
652 TCC300
User Manual
Appendix A HMI
Pressing Enter will cause the source side PT voltage to be measured instead of being
calculated. The second line on the LCD screen will display: Measured XXXXX V
Pressing Enter will toggle to the calculated source side voltage and the second line on the
LCD screen will display: Calculated XXXX V
Watchdog resets: X
Total resets: X
Displays the total number of watchdog resets and total resets which include Power down
and watchdog resets.
Clear reset counters
Press ENT to begin
Clears Watchdog Resets and Total Resets counters.
X1 Duration
X1 Duration
When the Operation Counter is configured as X1, the X1 duration is the instantaneous
measure of the X1 pulse generated by the counter contact switch. It also displays the
average X1 pulse duration over the last 8 tap operations. The user can use this
measurement to set the X mode Delay.
When the Operation Counter is configured as X2, the X1 Duration will always display
ZERO since this is not applicable to X2 mode of Operation.
Alarm Activity
Press ENT to Begin
The Alarm Activity feature provides the means to display all active screen messages that
are active on the control.
10.2.6.2 About
Serial Number
XXXXX
Displays the unit serial number.
Firmware Version
D-0214VXX.XX.XX
TCC300 653
User Manual
Appendix A HMI
Displays the firmware version that is loaded onto the control.
EE Checksum
XXXXXX
Displays EE Prom Checksum value.
Last Loaded File CRC
XXX
Displays the CRC of the Last Loaded Settings file.
Hardware Number
The Hardware Number is used for identifying the control hardware type.
• 1 = Pre 180 V Version of TCC300 hardware.

• 3 = 180 V Version of TCC300 hardware.
654 TCC300
User Manual
Appendix B Setpoint, Configuration and Communication Record Forms
Section 11 Appendix B Setpoint, Configuration and

Communication Record Forms
Default settings are indicated by brackets [ ].
Default selections are indicated by .
11.1 Setpoints
PROFILE 1 to 4 [1] (_______________)

General
Line Drop Compensation R, X [R, X] Z
Definite Time
Time Delay Selection Inverse Time
[Definite Time]
Integrating
Basic Timer Type Instant Reset
[Integrating]
Power Direction Bias None [None] Forward Reverse
Voltage Reduction (VR)

Step 1 0.0 to 10.0 (%) of Bandcenter Setpoint [2.5] (_______________)
Standard Voltage Reduction Disable Enable [Enable]
Smart Voltage Reduction Disable [Disable] Enable
Com VR Turnoff Timer 0 to 999 (Min) [0] (_______________)

Don't Save [Don't
Save VR at Power Off Save
Save]
TCC300 655
User Manual
Limit and Runback/Runup

Block Raise 95.0 to 135.0 (V) [128.0] (_______________)
Block Lower 95.0 to 135.0 (V) [114.0] (_______________)
Runback Deadband 1.0 to 4.0 (V) [2.0] (_______________)
Runup Deadband 1.0 to 4.0 (V) [2.0] (_______________)
Runup Disable [Disable] Enable
Current Limit 50 to 640 (mA) [640] (_______________)
Forward Power
Band Center 100.0 to 135.0 (V) [120.0] (_______________)
Band Width 1.0 to 10.0 (V) [2.0] (_______________)
Definite Time 1 to 360 (sec) [30] (_______________)
LDC-Z 0 to 72 (V) [0] (_______________)
LDC Resistance -72 to +72 (V) [0] (_______________)
LDC Reactance -72 to +72 (V) [0] (_______________)
Reverse Power
Regulate Forward
Operation Block [Block]
(Ignore)
Regulate Reverse Return to Neutral
Regulate Reverse Distributed

(Measured) Generation
Auto Determination
Auto Determination
(Measured)
Band Center 100.0 to 135.0 (V [120.0] (_______________)
Band Width 1.0 to 10.0 (V) [2.0] (_______________)
Definite Time 1 to 360 (sec) [30] (_______________)
LDC-Z 0 to 72 (V) [0] (_______________)
LDC Resistance -72 to +72 (V) [0] (_______________)
LDC Reactance -72 to +72 (V) [0] (_______________)
VAr Bias
VAr Bias Method Disable [Disable] Step Linear
Disable on Reverse Power Disable [Disable] Enable
VAr Bias Step:

656 TCC300
User Manual
Fwd Power Max 3 Ph Cap Bank Size 4 to 12000 (KVAr) [12000] (_______________)
Rev Power Max 3 Ph Cap Bank Size 4 to 12000 (KVAr) [12000] (_______________)
Lead % Bank Size Pickup 10 to 100% [75] (_______________)
Lag % Bank Size Pickup 10 to 100% [75] (_______________)
VAr Bias Voltage Step 0.1 to 2.0 (V) [1.0] (_______________)
Max VAr Bias Duration 10 to 1440 (min) [300] (_______________)
VAr Bias Linear:
Current Multiplier Base Value 0 to 32600 [20000] (_______________)
Primary Current Multiplier (_______________)
No Voltage Reduction:
Linear Voltage Bias (-X) - -72 to 0 (V) [-10] (_______________)
Normalized Linear Voltage Bias (-X) (_______________)
Linear Voltage Bias (-X) Limit - -5.0 to 0.0 (V) [-1.0] (_______________)
During Voltage Reduction:
Linear Voltage Bias (+X) 0 to 72 (V) [10] (_______________)
Normalized Linear Voltage Bias (+X) (_______________)
Linear Voltage Bias (+X) Limit 0.0 to 5.0 (V) [1.0] (_______________)
11.2 Configuration
Primary
Voltage Multiplier 0.1 to 3260.0 (X) [60.0] (_______________)
Voltage Source Multiplier 0.1 to 3260.0 (X) [60.0] (_______________)
Current Multiplier 1 to 32600 (X) [6000] (_______________)
Single Phase
Primary Power Display Three Phase
[Single Phase]
VT/CT Load
Normalizing Voltage Multiplier 0.80 to 1.20 (X) [1.00] (_______________)
VT Correction -15.0 to +15.0 (V) [0.0] (_______________)
CT/VT Phasing 0 degree [0 degree] 30 degrees
60 degrees 90 degrees
TCC300 657
User Manual
Aux Current Transformer Units Display 200 mA [200 mA] 1 Amp 5 Amp
Line to Ground [Line

VT Configuration Line to Line
to Ground]
VT/CT Source
VT Source Correction -15.0 to +15.0 (V) [0.0] (_______________)
CT/VT Source Phasing 0 degree [0 degree] 30 degrees
Raise/Lower Output Contacts

Continuous
Pulsed
[Continuous]
Pulse Width 0.2 to 12.0 (sec) [1.5] (_______________)
Motor Current Settings

Peak Rms Current 110 to 200 (%) [110] (_______________)
Average Rms Current 110 to 200 (%) [110] (_______________)
Average Duration 110 to 200 (%) [110] (_______________)
Program Alarm Relay Mode
Normal [Normal] Deadman Out
Low Current Block
Disable [Disable] Enable
658 TCC300
User Manual
Input Selection 1 must be set to "Switch Status" if Tap Position

Knowledge is to be selected to either "Contact KeepTrackTM 1R1L" or
"Contact KeepTrack 1N".
Inputs and Switch

Switch Status
Input Selection 1 Seal-In Input
[Switch Status]
Non-sequential
Input Selection 2 SCADA Cutout
[Non-sequential]
Input Selection 3 VR2 [VR2] Aux
Auto/Man Switch Type None [None] Toggle SCAMP
Regulator
Type A [Type A] Type B
Remote Voltage Bias (RVB)
RVB Scale Factor 0.1 to 100.0 [1.0] (_______________)

RVB Heartbeat Timer 2 to 120 (sec) [5] (_______________)
Reverse RVB Scale Factor 0.1 to 100.0 [1.0] (_______________)
Run Through Neutral (RTN)
Maximum Allowed Taps 3 to 7 [4] (_______________)

Tap Operations Between Runs 10 to 10000 [1000] (_______________)
Maximum Load Current 1 to 200 (mA) [50] (_______________)
Max RTN Standby Operations 1 to 10000 [20] (_______________)
Fast Voltage Recovery
Fast Voltage Recovery 1.0 to 15.0 (V) [5.0] (_______________)
TCC300 659
User Manual
Save Comm Block at Power Off

Don't Save [Don't
Save
Save]
SCAMP Initialize on Power Up

Auto Mode [Auto
Last Save
Mode]
Paralleling
Paralleling Type Disable [Disable] Circ. Current
DVAr 1 DVAr 2
DVAr 2 (Keep
Master/Follower
Track)
DVAr2/DVAr2 (KeepTrack) Settings

Sensitivity -4.0 to 4.0 [0.0] (_______________)
Cir. Current Limit (Reactive) 5 to 200 (mA) [200] (_______________)
Input Ratio (Load/parallel) 0.50 to 2.0 [1.00] (_______________)
Master/Follower Settings
Master/Follower Configuration None [None] Follower Master
Paralleling Address 1 to 16 [16] (_______________)

Number of Devices 2 to 16 [2] (_______________)
Tap Difference 2 to 8 [2] (_______________)
Tap Pos. Response Timeout 1000 to 60000 ms [60000] (_______________)
Not in Use [Not in
Line Breaker In Use
Use]
Positive Polarity
Negative Polarity
[Positive Polarity]
Not in Use [Not in
Right Tie Breaker In Use
Use]
Positive Polarity
Negative Polarity
[Positive Polarity]
Not in Use [Not in
Left Tie Breaker In Use
Use]
Positive Polarity
Negative Polarity
[Positive Polarity]
660 TCC300
User Manual
Delta VAr Peer to Peer Settings

Sensitivity -4.0 to 4.0 [0.0] (_______________)
Circ. Current Limit (Reactive) 5 to 200 (mA) [200] (_______________)
Number of Devices 2 to 16 [2] (_______________)
Paralleling Address 1 to 16 [1] (_______________)
Peer to Peer Update Speed 1000 to 10000 [1000] (_______________)
MVA Rating 1.0 to 1000.0 [1.0] (_______________)
P2P Current Mult. Correction 20 to 500 (%) [100] (_______________)
Topology Single Bus/ Ring Bus/Double Bus [Single Bus] (_______________)
Not Used [Not Used]
Load Side Breaker 52A (Positive Polarity) (_______________)
52B (Negative Polarity)
Not Used [Not Used]
Right Tie Breaker 52A (Positive Polarity) (_______________)
Not Used [Not Used]
Left Tie Breaker 52A (Positive Polarity) (_______________)
11.3 Tap settings
General
Regulate Internal
Tap Information Disabled [Disable]
(KeepTrackTM)
Reg external #1 Reg external #2
XFMR external #1 XFMR external #2
XFMR external #3 Reg external #3
Contact Keep Track Contact Keep Track

1R1L 1N
Intertap Delay 0 to 60 (sec) [0] (_______________)
Tap Limits
Disabled [Disable] Enable
Block Raise 12 Lower to 16 Raise [16] (_______________)

Block Lower 16 Lower to 12 Raise [-16] (_______________)
Highest Tap 0 Neutral to 33 Raise [16] (_______________)
Lowest Tap 33 Lower to 29 Raise [-16] (_______________)
TCC300 661
User Manual
Operation Counter
Configuration X1 [X1] X2 Count Window Cam Follower
Cooper Quick Drive Disable [Disable] Enable
X Mode Delay 0 to 3000 (mS) [10] (_______________)

Count Window 0.5 to 60.5 (sec) [0.5] (_______________)
Preset 0 to 999999 [0] (_______________)
Alarm Limit 0 to 999999 [0] (_______________)
Neutral Counter 0 to 999999 [0] (_______________)
Block Automatic Operation on Motor Seal-in Failure
Motor Seal-in Failure Block Disabled Enable [Enable]
Tap Statistics
Maximum Tap Wear 1 to 65534 [65534] (_______________)
Individual Tap Wear Alarm 1 to 200% [100%] (_______________)
Set to match actual tap position as read on the physical tap position
indicator. In order to verify Neutral Tap Position, when the tap position is
"0", but no neutral input is detected, the Tap Position screen of the
TCC300 will display "- - -" instead of "0". When reading the tap position
via comms (Modbus and DNP) a value of 32767 will be returned when the
tap position is "0", but no neutral input is detected, otherwise a "0" will be
returned.
Tap Calibration
Tap Position -16 to +16 (Neutral) [0] (_______________)
Tap Calibrate Yes No [No] (_______________)
662 TCC300
User Manual
11.4 Alarms
Programmable Alarm Relay
Comm Block Max VAr Bias Duration - LEAD Reverse Power
Block Raise (Tap) Max VAr Bias Duration - LAG Block Lower (Volt)
Block Lower (Tap) Individual Tap Wear Abnormal Tap Position
Block Raise (Volt) LDC/LDZ Backup Power Fail
Voltage Reduction Line Current Limit RTN Fail to Operate
Op Count Signal Tap Changer Failure
11.5 Wakeup screens
Load Voltage Operation Counter Maximum Primary Watts
Source Voltage Resettable Operation Counter Minimum Primary VArs
Load Current Demand Load Voltage Maximum Primary VArs
Circulating/DVAr Current Demand Primary Current Minimum Primary VA
Compensated Voltage Demand Primary Watts Maximum Primary VA
Primary Voltage Demand Primary VArs Power Factor @Minimum VA
Primary Current Demand Primary VA Power Factor @Maximum VA
Primary Watts Energy Metering Watt Hrs Fwd Lag Power Factor
Primary VArs Energy Metering Watt Hrs Rev Lead Power Factor
Primary VA Energy Metering VAr Hrs Lag Peak Motor Current
Power Factor Energy Metering VAr Hrs Lead Normalizing Voltage
Frequency Minimum Load Voltage Meter Out Voltage
Voltage % THD Maximum Load Voltage Min Source Voltage
Current % THD Minimum Primary Current Max Source Voltage
Tap Position Maximum Primary Current Time and Date
Tap Drag Hands Minimum Primary Watts
TCC300 663
User Manual
11.6 Data logging
Logging Timer
Data Log Interval 0 to 120 (minute) [5] (_______________)
Duration [451 Day 09:20:00] (______________________________)
11.7 Harmonics setup
Voltage Harmonics Selection
2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th 8th 9th
10th 11th 12th 13th 14th 15th 16th 17th
18th 19th 20th 21st 22nd 23rd 24th 25th
26th 27th 28th 29th 30th 31st
Voltage Alarm Threshold V Percent 0.0 to 30.0 % [1.0] (_______________)
Current Harmonics Selection
2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th 8th 9th
10th 11th 12th 13th 14th 15th 16th 17th
18th 19th 20th 21st 22nd 23rd 24th 25th
26th 27th 28th 29th 30th 31st
Current Alarm Threshold I Percent 0 to 100 % [10] (_______________)
Minimum Fundamental Current Threshold Disable Enable [Enable]
Min Current Threshold 0 to 200.0 mA [20.0] (_______________)

Harmonic Alarm Delay 1 to 10 Sec. [10] (_______________)
664 TCC300
User Manual
11.8 Oscillograph setup
Number of Partitions 1 to 16 [5] (_______________)

Samples/Cycle 16, 32, 64 [32] (_______________)
Post Trigger Delay 5 to 95 % [50] (_______________)
Front Panel Message Enable [Enable] Disable
Pickup
Raise Contact Lower Contact VR Contact 1 VR Contact 2
Force Lower (Runback) Raise Tap Limit Lower Tap Limit Low Band
High Band Low Voltage Limit High Voltage Limit Auto Inhibit
Non Sequential Reverse Power Peak Motor Current Avg. Motor Curent
Motor Current Duration Voltage Harmonics Current Harmonics CBEMA 1
CBEMA 2 CBEMA 3 CBEMA 4 VAr Bias Active
Sealin Fail Alarm Active Sealin Fail Low Blk Act. Sealin Fail Raise Blk Act. Low Current Blk Act.
Motor Seal-in Input Neutral Input Counter Input Op Count Signal
Individual Tap Wear Alarm
Dropout
Non Sequential Reverse Power Voltage Harmonics Current Harmonics
CBEMA 1 CBEMA 2 CBEMA 3 CBEMA 4
VAr Bias Active Sealin Fail Alarm Act. Sealin Fail Low Blk Act. Sealin Fail Raise Blk Act.
Low Current Blk Act. Motor Seal-in Input Neutral Input Counter Input
Op Count Signal
Individual Tap Wear Alarm
TCC300 665
User Manual
11.9 Sequence of events setup
OR Gate Setup
Pickup (Edge Sensitive)
Motor Current Duration Voltage Harmonics Current Harmonics CBEMA Event 1
CBEMA Event 2 CBEMA Event 3 CBEMA Event 4 VAr Bias Active
HMI Active Individual Tap Wear Alarm
Dropout (Edge Sensitive)
CBEMA Event 1 CBEMA Event 2 CBEMA Event 3 CBEMA Event 4
Op Count Signal
AND Gate Setup
666 TCC300
User Manual
Pickup (Level Sensitive)
Motor Current Duration Voltage Harmonics Current Harmonics CBEMA Event 1
CBEMA Event 2 CBEMA Event 3 CBEMA Event 4 VAr Bias Active
Dropout (Level Sensitive)
CBEMA Event 1 CBEMA Event 2 CBEMA Event 3 CBEMA Event 4
Op Count Signal
SOE Final Gate OR [OR] And
11.10 CBEMA settings
Normal Voltage 100.0 to 130.0 V [120.0] (_______________)
CBEMA Event 1 Disable Enable [Enable]
Sag/Swell/Swell Pickup 50 to 130% [70] (_______________)

TCC300 667
User Manual
Sag/Swell Dropout 71 to 130% [95] (_______________)

Sag/Swell Minimum Duration 1 to 60 Cycles [1] (_______________)
Disable Enable [Enable]



11.11 Comm settings
RS485/Fiber
Comm Port Type RS485 [RS485] Fiber
Protocol DNP3 [DNP3] MODBUS®
Baud Rate 300 600
1200 2400
4800 9600 [9600]
19200 38400
57600 115200
Parity NONE [NONE] EVEN ODD
Stop Bit 1 [1] 2
Sync Time 1 to 5000 [2] max 5000 ms (_______________)

Tx Delay 1 to 50 [10] max 50 ms (_______________)
668 TCC300
User Manual
Serial RS232
MODBUS
Protocol DNP3
[MODBUS]
Baud Rate 300 600
1200 2400
4800 9600
19200 38400
57600 115200 [115200]
Parity NONE [NONE] EVEN ODD
Stop Bit 1 2 [2]
Sync Time 1 to 5000 [50] max 5000 ms (_______________)
Ethernet
Auto Negotiation Disable Enable [Enable]
DHCP Protocol Disable Enable [Enable]
IP Address [0.0.0.0] (_______________)

Net Mask [0.0.0.0] (_______________)
Gateway [0.0.0.0] (_______________)
Keepalive Time 1 to 50,000 (Sec) [7200] (_______________)
Port
MODBUS® Port 0 to 65,535 [502] (_______________)
DNP3.0 Port 0 to 65,535 [20000] (_______________)
Network Time Synchronization
SNTP Disable [Disable] Enable
SNTP Server Name (_______________)

SNTP Server Address [X.X.X.X] (_______________)
Time Zone [GMT -5 Hr] (_______________)
Change Communication Address

Communication Address
DNP Address 1 to 65519 [1] (_______________)
Modbus Address (_______________)
Substation
TCC300 669
User Manual
DNP Address 0 to 65519 [0] (_______________)

Feeder
DNP Address 0 to 65519 [0] (_______________)
Communication Access Security

Communication Access and Timeout
Communication Access Disable [Disable] Enable
Communication Access Timeout 1 to 50,000 (max 50,000 sec) [60] (_______________)
SCADA Heartbeat Setting
Heartbeat (Failsafe) DNP Option Disabled [Disabled] LTC (DNP)
Profile Switching
Regulator (DNP)
(DNP)
Profile Switching
(GOOSE)
Bluetooth®
MODBUS®
Protocol DNP3
[MODBUS]
Bluetooth Mode Mode 0 [Mode 0] Mode 1
Friendly Name [TCC300] (______________________________)

Bluetooth Enable
Bluetooth Disable
[Enable]
Disable
Enable
Authentication
Authentication
[disable]
Bluetooth Passkey (______________________________)
Bluetooth Device Address (______________________________)
670 TCC300
User Manual
Appendix C DNP Configuration Editor
Section 12 Appendix C DNP Configuration Editor
12.1 DNP Configuration Editor
The DNP Configuration Editor includes several features and functions.
Variations
The variation of an object gives a different representation of the same data point, such as
the size of the object or whether or not the object has flag information. Accordingly, the
Variations section will configure listed objects with the desired and supported variations.
Master Address used for Unsolicited responses and/or Source Address

Validation
This address will be used as the address to send unsolicited responses and/or Source
Address Validation.
Modem Unsolicit Setting

Applies to RS-232 interface connected to an Ethernet Modem. TCP/IP and UDP/IP
unsolicit settings are used when DNP is being deployed over an Ethernet network. The
setting elements are described below:
• Allow Unsolicit: Determines whether unsolicited null responses will be sent when
session comes online. If enabled, subsequent unsolicited responses will be enabled
through function code 0×14 (Enable unsolicited responses) and disabled through
function code 0×15 (Disable unsolicited responses). If "Allow Unsolicit" is disabled,
then function codes 0×14 and 0×15 will be responded to with an error.
• Class 1 Max Delay (Sec): If unsolicited responses are enabled, this parameter
specifies the maximum amount of time after an event in the corresponding class is
received before an unsolicited response will be generated.
• Class 1 Max Events: If unsolicited responses are enabled, the parameter specifies the
maximum number of events in the corresponding class to be allowed before an
unsolicited response will be generated.
• Class 2 Max Delay (Sec): If unsolicited responses are enabled, this parameter
specifies the maximum amount of time after an event in the corresponding class is
received before an unsolicited response will be generated.
• Class 2 Max Events: If unsolicited responses are enabled, the parameter specifies the
maximum number of events in the corresponding class to be allowed before an
unsolicited response will be generated.
TCC300 671
User Manual
Choosing Points
The Available Points window is populated when a DNP source file is opened. The
selection of points from the Binary Inputs, Analog Inputs, Binary/Control Outputs and
Analog Outputs tabs can be accomplished by either individually selecting, dragging and
dropping points in the Selected Points window or utilizing the "Copy All" feature. The
Copy All feature only copies the points in the open tab to the Selected Points window. The
"Remove All" feature removes all the points displayed in the Selected Points window for
the tab that is open.
Ordering Selected Points

Selected points can be reordered to match the users SCADA, RTU or Master setup by
selecting, dragging and dropping the desired point within the Selected Points window.
Adding Dummy Points

The purpose of the Dummy Point is to allow the user to match other device DNP maps that
contain points that are not supported in the control. This feature allows the user to
communicate with the TCC300 control when it is connected to an RTU that contains other
brands of controls and eliminates the need to re-configure the RTU or the other controls.
To insert a Dummy point, select "Insert Dummy". The Dummy Point will be inserted at
the end of the Selected Points list. To move the Dummy Point, select, drag and drop the
point at the desired location in the Selected Points list. The Dummy point will assume the
Index Position and the remaining Selected Points will be modified to accommodate the
Dummy Point.
Insert Offset
This allows an offset to be created in the DNP map without the point number being
transmitted, thus providing the ability to construct a DNP profile that has non-consecutive
point numbers within a group.
Additional Mask Values

Four new mask categories have been added.
672 TCC300
User Manual
• CLASS_NONE: If a point is defined as CLASS_ NONE, then it will not be sent

during any CLASS polling although the point is present in the DNP map. The only
mean to access this point is by querying the point individually.
• CLASS_ONE_NOTCLASS0: If a point is defined as CLASS_ONE_NOTCLASS0,
it will be present in a CLASS 1 poll but not an integrity CLASS 0 poll.
• CLASS_TWO_NOTCLASS0: If a point is defined as
CLASS_TWO_NOTCLASS0, it will be present in a CLASS 2 poll but not an
integrity CLASS 0 poll.
• CLASS_THREE_NOTCLASS0: If a point is defined as
CLASS_THREE_NOTCLASS0, it will be present in a CLASS 3 poll but not an
integrity CLASS 0 poll.
Editing Binary Input Points

The Binary Input "Value" and "Mask" values can be edited by double left clicking on the
desired point Value or Mask elements. The default value for Value is TRUE, which means
that the point will return a High or True when the item being monitored is active in the
control. It can be changed to "FALSE" to match a SCADA Master if necessary. The
"Mask" value defaults to "CLASS ONE" and defines what polling class type the point is
mapped to. The Mask value can also be set to CLASS TWO, CLASS THREE, CLASS
NONE, CLASS ONE NOT CLASS 0, CLASS TWO NOT CLASS 0 or CLASS THREE
NOT CLASS 0 by double left clicking on the desired point Mask element.
Editing Analog Input Points

The Analog Input "Deadband" and "Mask" values can be edited by double left clicking on
the desired point Deadband or Mask elements. The Deadband can be set to define when
the point will report by exception under the class type in the Mask setting. When the point
change exceeds the deadband value, it will initiate a report by exception to the master. The
"Mask" value defaults to "CLASS TWO" and defines what polling class type the point is
mapped to. The Mask value can also be set to CLASS ONE, CLASS THREE, CLASS
NONE, CLASS ONE NOT CLASS 0, CLASS TWO NOT CLASS 0 or CLASS THREE
NOT CLASS 0 by double left clicking on the desired point Mask element.
Editing Binary/Control Output Points

The Binary/Control Output Point "Crob", "Mask" and "Inverse" values can be edited by
double left clicking on the desired point Crob, Mask or Inverse elements. The Crob
(Control Relay Output Block) setting is used to define what control method will be used
to operate the point. The possible settings for "Crob" are listed below:
• Latch On
• Latch Off
• Latch OnOff
• Latch OnOff_TC
• Pulse On
• Pulse Off
TCC300 673
User Manual
• Pulse OnOff
• Pulse OnOff_TC
• Paired Close
• Paired Trip
• Paired TripClose
The "Mask" value defaults to "CLASS ZERO" and defines what polling class type the
point is mapped to. The Mask value can also be set to CLASS NONE by double left
clicking on the desired point Mask element.
Inverse defines whether the command to be sent would be inverted, meaning that when
TRUE is selected, sending a Trip, Close, etc will have the opposite effect. This was
implemented due to variations seen in RTU manufacturer’s implementation of direct
control with DNP to allow full compatibility the widest possible number of RTU’s.
The Binary/Control Outputs Tab includes a help selection. When selected TCC600 will
launch two pdf documents which provide an explanation of each individual Binary point
with respect to different CROB.
Editing Analog Output Points

The Analog Output "Mask" value can be edited by double left clicking on the desired point
Mask element. The "Mask" value defaults to "CLASS ZERO" and defines what polling
class type the point is mapped to. The Mask value can also be set to CLASS NONE by
double left clicking on the desired point Mask element.
Editing Counters
The Counters "Mask" value can be edited by double left clicking on the desired point
Mask element. The "Mask" value defaults to "CLASS THREE" and defines what polling
class type the point is mapped to. The Mask value can also be set to CLASS ONE, CLASS
TWO, CLASS NONE, CLASS ONE NOT CLASS 0, CLASS TWO NOT CLASS 0 or
CLASS THREE NOT CLASS 0 by double left clicking on the desired point Mask
element.
For security reason, DNP Security tab will only be active when TCC600
is connected to a control with an Access Code of Level 2, otherwise it will
be grayed out.
DNP Security
DNP authentication is now available and can be independently enabled in the DNP
security tab for either serial or Ethernet (both TCP or UDP) interfaces.
674 TCC300
User Manual
The concepts of the Hashed Message Authentication Code (HMAC) and challenge-
response as defined in the DNP3 specification for Secure Authenticate Version 2.0
document is employed.
When authentication is enabled, the following settings should be selected:
• HMAC Algorithm and Update key

• Challenge Response timeout
• Duration of session key
• Aggressive Mode
• Critical Request Function Codes
Before TCC600® allows a user to change the Update key, the user has to
enter the old update key.
GUID-7C5B6EAC-2631-430D-8A13-964935CA4EBB V1 EN
Figure 460: Configure Update Keys and Critical Request Function Codes Dialog
Screen
HMAC Algorithm and Update Key

The HMAC algorithm is either SHA1 (4 OCT) or SHA1 (10 OCT). An Update key is
necessary to provide secure SESSION key negotiation. Once a SESSION key is obtained
any subsequent challenge/ response session will employ that session key. The Update key
can be up to 32 hex characters (0123456789ABCDF) (128 bits).
TCC300 675
User Manual
Challenge Response Timeout

The range is from 0-100 seconds. This is the response time within which the control is
expecting a response to a challenge.
Duration of Session Key

This duration must be configured in minutes (0-100) and in count 0-65535. This duration
represents the maximum time or the maximum number of challenges a particular session
key is used before key negotiation is again performed.
Aggressive Mode
Full challenge/response exchanges increase the number messages in the protocol, which
affects throughput performance. Therefore, DNP Secure Authentication provides an
aggressive mode in which the data from a single challenge can be used to authenticate
many subsequent messages. The sender of the critical message includes the HMAC at the
end of the critical message without having to be challenged. At least one challenge must
occur, however, before aggressive mode can be used.
Critical Request Function Codes

This represents the function codes that will require authentication if selected. If none is
selected, authentication will not be performed on any function code although
authentication has been enabled.
Example of DNP Configuration Editor Use

The following sequence of steps provides an example of utilizing the DNP Configuration
Editor.
1. From the TCC600® Main Screen select Utility/DNP Configuration Editor.

TCC600 will display the DNP Configuration Editor dialog screen.
676 TCC300
User Manual
GUID-B874B54E-A407-40AE-85C1-067D6AC561D7 V1 EN
Figure 461: DNP Configuration Editor Dialog Screen
2. Select Load Template/TCC300 Default from the DNP Configurator menu bar. The
Binary Inputs tab is displayed. The Available Points list for each DNP Points Group
tab will also be populated.
3. Select the Binary Input points you wish to include in the DNP map by selecting Copy
All or dragging the desired point(s) to the Selected Points window.
4. Edit the Selected Points for each tab as necessary to match your SCADA, RTU or
Master setup.
5. Select Save File from the DNP Configurator menu bar. TCC600 will display a Save
As dialog screen with a *.xml file extension.
6. Name the file and then select Save.
7. If TCC600 is connected to the target control then the Send to Control menu feature
can be used as follows:
7.1. Select Send to Control. TCC600 will display the "Authentication Key
generated successfully".
TCC300 677
User Manual
Figure 462: Authentication Key Generated Successfully Confirmation

Screen
7.2. Select OK. TCC600 will display the "Open File" dialog screen with a *.xml file
extension.
7.3. Select the file to be opened, then select Open. TCC600 will initiate the file
transfer as indicated by the "Send" dialog screen, followed by a "DNP Upload"
GUID-E6F3EEED-BA47-4AC6-82EE-1ACEB7A63330 V1 EN
Figure 463: Send Dialog Screen
GUID-EEE054A1-CA8F-494B-8905-3BCC32C42C8F V1 EN
Figure 464: DNP Upload Confirmation Screen
678 TCC300
User Manual
INVERSE CROB
GUID-A7D6A9FB-1882-48C7-A90E-8ECDD4EE41EB V1 EN
Figure 465: Inverse CROB
TCC300 679
User Manual
GUID-24D583FA-4F96-4EA4-B6A9-4345AF4684E2 V1 EN
Figure 466: Individual Binary Points and Different CROB
680 TCC300
User Manual
Appendix D IEC 61850 Configuration Editor
Section 13 Appendix D IEC 61850 Configuration Editor
13.1 IEC 61850 Configuration Editor
The IEC 61850 Configuration Editor includes the following features and functions:
CID IP Address
The IP Address of the Server (control). Setting the proper IP Address to match the control
IP Address, will enable a CLIENT software to establish a connection to the control.
File Revision
The file revision allows 0-99 different revisions of the CID file.
Buffered and UnBuffered Control Blocks

The user is able to choose 2 Buffered Report Control Blocks and 2 UnBuffered Report
Control Blocks.
Buffered Report Control Block

The events caused by trigger options such as data change, data update, quality change will
generate reports immediately. Events not transmitted are buffered to a practical limit for
later transmission. Events are not lost due to loss of connection or transport flow
constraints.
UnBuffered Report Control Block

The events caused by trigger options such as data change, data update, quality change will
generate reports immediately on a best effort basis. The reports are not guaranteed to be
delivered if there is loss of connection or if the connection is slow.
RptEna (Report Enable/Disable)

Enables or Disables the report.
RptID (Report Identifier)

The Report Identifier will be the client specified report identifier of the buffered report
control block or unbuffered control block that caused the generation of the report.
Having no rptID in the Report Control Block of the CID file will fail validation in Schema
1.4 (as rptID is required) and passes validation for Schema 3.0.
TCC300 681
User Manual
GUID-0C7881A1-4E0D-4661-9807-4070B67217BF V1 EN
Figure 467: IEC 61850 Configuration Editor Reporting Metering Dataset Dialog
Screen
682 TCC300
User Manual
GUID-540639DC-734D-45B7-ACAC-9B00C7A1A9D5 V1 EN
Figure 468: IEC 61850 Configuration Editor Reporting Status Dataset Dialog Screen
Reporting Trigger Options – (for both Unbuffered and Buffered report

control blocks)
Schema 1.4 does not support General Interrogation. Schema 3.0 does
support General Interrogation.
GUID-4D93A983-857E-4D9C-99AA-FA0DBB94B2BF V1 EN
Figure 469: Report Trigger Options Dialog Screen
• Data Change/Data Update – For measurements, if the value of the data attribute
exceeds (either lower or higher) the deadband value the report is generated. For
status, if the value of the data attributes changes, the report is generated.
• Data Update – is treated the same as Data Change.
• Quality Change – For any measurement or status, the source is a PROCESS. The
settings are SUBSTITUTED values.
If system error or checksum error is detected, the validity are questionable and inaccurate.
If self test fails, then validity is Invalid. Good means there is no abnormal condition of the
TCC300 683
User Manual
acquisition function or the source. If a value is out of range outofrange is set. Badreference
is set when ever error 8198 (voltage reference error) is detected.
Supported Quality bits are:
• Good
• Invalid
• Questionable
• Out of Range
• Bad Reference
• Inaccurate
• Integrity – For the integrity time period, set in seconds, a snapshot of the dataset with
values of the data attributes is reported. If the integrity time period is set to zero, No
integrity reports are generated.
• General Interrogation (GI) – As soon as GI value is set to true, a snapshot of the
dataset with values of the data attributes is reported and GI is immediately set to false.
Supported in Schema 3.0
BufTm (in Seconds)

Specifies the time in seconds that cause buffering of events caused by trigger options such
as data change, data update, quality change. BufTm of 0 is supported.
Configuration Revision
Contains the count of the number of times that the configuration in the dataset has changed
either due to deletion or addition or reordering of members in the dataset. The user must
keep track of this number.
Buffer Overflow is not supported in Schema 1.4.
GUID-8D5F1E21-5288-4E4E-A149-D517B8CC2669 V1 EN
Figure 470: Option Fields For Buffered Report Control Block
684 TCC300
User Manual
GUID-F4C167C8-4C2D-4AF2-B684-3CFE2D8D43CD V1 EN
Figure 471: Option Fields For Unbuffered Report Control Block
INTEGRITY and Buffer Time
Integrity report
time
DC2
DC2 DC4
DC5
DC1 DC1 DC5

Report(DC1, DC2) DC3 DC3
Report(DC2, DC3, DC4, DC5)
time
BufTm BufTm
Integrity time
Complete Report Sent Complete Report Sent

Integrity Timer Resets Integrity Timer Resets
GUID-0ADE72C2-BEE9-4B37-A53B-86046C384893 V1 EN
Figure 472: Integrity and Buffer Time
Sequence Number
The Sequence Number is included in the report if the "Sequence Number" bit is set to true.
This value is incremented for every report generated. The first report generated as soon as
Report Enable is set to true will have the sequence number as zero. The sequence number
will rollover to zero at its maximum value.
TCC300 685
User Manual
TimeStamp
A Time Stamp is included in the report if the "TimeStamp" bit is set to true. This parameter
tells the time at which the report was generated.
DataSet
Data Set is included in the report if the "DataSet" bit is set to true. The dataset reference
shall be included in the report and derived from the member of the dataset.
ReasonCode
A Reason Code is included in the report if the "ReasonCode" bit is set to true. The report
will contain the trigger option that is responsible for generation of the report.
DataReference
Data Reference is included in the report if the "DataReference" bit is set to true. It shall
contain the Functional Constraint Data (FCD) of the data attribute values included in the
report.
EntryID
An Entry ID is included in the report if the "EntryID" bit is set to true. This parameter
represents OCTET string which is used to identify the sequence of events in a buffered
report control block.
Configuration Revision
It is included in the report if the "Configuration Revision" bit is set to true. This parameter
shall contain the corresponding attribute ConfRev of the referenced BRCB.
Buffer Overflow
The Buffer Overflow is included in the report if the "Buffer Overflow" bit is set to true. It
indicates to the client that a buffer overflow has occurred. The buffered report control
block will set this bit in the first report after the events that occurred after the overflow. The
second report will have it set to zero again.
GOOSE (Generic Object Oriented Substation Events)

GOOSE data is directly transmitted on a publisher - subscriber mechanism bases on
multicast MAC addresses. Since it is a connectionless network layer protocol, in order to
guarantee message delivery, a retransmission scheme is employed.
GOOSE Message Retransmission Timing After Initial GOOSE Message

1. Retransmit after 2 ms with TAL = 2
686 TCC300
User Manual

And so on until a maximum of 65535/2 ms after which it repeats at a fixed interval of

32765 ms.
GOOSE Publisher
The user can configure up to 5 generic goose control blocks. All the GOOSE publishers
should have the different mac addresses. The user can select a total of 16 data attributes for
each dataset referenced in the goose control block. The Trigger options can be periodic or
data change or both.
The user can also select the trigger options for any member in the dataset. The available
periodic change for which the goose can be generated is 250 ms - 5000000 ms.
GOOSE Subscriber
The user can configure up to 2 generic goose control blocks. All the GOOSE subscribers
should have different mac addresses. The user can select a total of 255 data attributes for
each dataset referenced in the goose control block. In the 255 attributes one has to be a
command. The list of commands supported include:
• Operation Counter Reset

• Drag Hands Reset
• Block Auto Via Comm
• Tap Position
• Tap Change
• Clear Motor Seal-In Alarm
• Clear Master Follower LockOut Alarm
The user publishing the goose message should configure the appropriate command and its
appropriate position in the dataset and configure the remaining data attributes
GsSubscOfs (Offset) in the dataset referenced in the goose subscription control block.
GOOSE Parameters (Publisher/Subscriber)

DSRef
Contains the object reference of the members of the dataset whose members of the dataset
will be transmitted.
TCC300 687
User Manual
CBRef
Contains the reference of the goose control block.
GoID
Contains the identifier of the logical device in which the goose control block is located.
CfgRev
Contains the count of the number of times that the configuration in the dataset has changed
either due to deletion or addition or reordering of members in the dataset.
AppID
The Application Identifier (APPID) is used to select ISO/IEC 8802-3 frames containing
sampled value messages and to distinguish the application association. Since the TCC300
does not publish or subscribe to sample value, the value of AppID is limited to 0-0x3FFF.
Validation
The configurator validates against Schema 1.4 or Schema 3.0. The Schema drop down
menu allows the user to select either Schema 1.4 and 3.0. Each file saved is validated
against the appropriate Schema.
GUID-E7A82324-B089-4A4B-ADE3-B6D98CF6FD66 V1 EN
Figure 473: IEC 61850 Configuration Editor Schema Selection Dialog Screen
688 TCC300
User Manual
GUID-E5EDCB24-DE05-43C2-B1D5-B7B769AB927F V1 EN
Figure 474: IEC 61850 Configuration Editor GOOSE Publisher Dialog Screen
TCC300 689
User Manual
GUID-80671264-1579-4A49-863A-2F5433FAE314 V1 EN
Figure 475: IEC 61850 Configuration Editor GOOSE Subscriber Dialog Screen
The "Validate" selection on the IEC 61850 Configuration Editor Dialog Screen will
validate any CID file against Schema 1.4 or Schema 3.0.
GUID-A923C81F-A8CD-489B-97B3-9AFE2D718005 V1 EN
Figure 476: IEC 61850 Configuration Editor Dialog Screen
690 TCC300
User Manual
Appendix E Self-test error codes
Section 14 Appendix E Self-test error codes
14.1 Self-test error codes
Table 72: Error codes

Error code Description
8100 ERROR_EE_WR_BYTE This code is displayed when:
• Writing to EEPROM takes more than 10 ms

• OS failed to lock eeprom_semaphore
• No ack from eeprom while it’s being accessed
8101 ERROR_EE_WR_WORD This code is displayed when:

8102 ERROR_EE_WR_LONG This code is displayed when:

8103 ERROR_EE_RD_BYTE This code is displayed when:
8104 ERROR_EE_RD_WORD This code is displayed when:
8105 ERROR_EE_RD_LONG This code is displayed when:
8106 ERROR_EE_WR_OUT_OF_MEM Error code indicates that the buffer used for
temporary storage of the eeprom data before it is
actually written is full.
8107 ERROR_EE_WR_MSG_CREATE Error code indicates that eeprom write command
message creation has failed (possibly too many
writes were done prior to it and buffer got full).
8108 ERROR_EE_WR_PAGE This code is displayed when:
• Page Writing to EEPROM takes more than 10

ms
TCC300 691
User Manual

8109 ERROR_EE_RD_PAGE This code is displayed when:
8198 ERROR_VREF Reference voltage error

2200 ERROR_SDCARD_SPI_TIMEOUT Error code indicates that OS has failed to lock the spi
semaphore.
2300 ERROR_DAT_REC_CURRUPT Error code indicates that data logging record is
corrupted (this error code appears when data log
records are being retrieved via communication or
being saved to sd card).
2301 ERROR_DAT_REC_STORE Error code indicates that verification of data log
record stored in flash has failed.
2302 ERROR_DAT_REC_BUFF_OVERFLOW Error code indicates that temporary data log buffer
allocated in ram is full and no more records can be
saved.
2351 ERROR_SOE_REC_STORE Error code indicates that verification of SOE record
stored in flash has failed.
2352 ERROR_SOE_RECSIZE_UNDEF Error code indicates that number of SOE events per
flash page is not defined (error appears immediately
during boot up process if code is not properly
configured).
2353 ERROR_SOE_TEMPREC_ERROR SOE temp buffer is not big enough (error appears
immediately during boot up process if code is not
properly configured).
2354 ERROR_SOE_REC_PER_PAGE_ ERROR Incorrect number of SOE events per flash page (error
appears immediately during boot up process if code
is not properly configured).
2355 ERROR_SOE_RECSIZE_ERROR Not enough space to store temp SOE events in one
page (error appears immediately during boot up
process if code is not properly configured).
2356 ERROR_SOE_TOTLEN_ERROR Not enough space to store all the events in the flash
section allocated for SOE storage (error appears
2401 ERROR_FLASH_WRONG_PG_SIZE Flash page size in the configuration table is not valid
(error appears immediately during boot up process if
code is not properly configured).
2402 ERROR_FLASH_ACCESS_TIMEOUT The response for get flash id command was never
received (error appears immediately during boot up
process if code is not properly configured).
2403 ERROR_FLASH_CFG_MISSING Flash chip installed on the board is not supported in
configuration table (error appears immediately
configured).
2404 ERROR_FLASH_WRONG_CFG_FLG Flash configuration flag is not valid (error appears
692 TCC300
User Manual

2405 ERROR_FLASH_SECTION_MISSING The requested flash section ID is not defined in the
configured).
2406 ERROR_FLASH_SECTION_RANGE The requested read/write address in particular
section of flash is exceeding the section’s size.
2407 ERROR_FLASH_SECTION_OUT_OF_ MEM Not enough space for particular section in the flash
configured).
2408 ERROR_FLASH_CONFIG Error occurs during firmware update if the program
flash is not set to 1024 bytes.
2409 ERROR_FLASH_OUT_OF_MEMORY Error occurs during firmware update if there is not
enough space in RAM for firmware storage.
2500 ERROR_FFS_OUT_OF_MEM_INIT There is not enough space in flash file system table
to hold particular file (error appears immediately
configured).
2501 ERROR_RECEIVE_FAILED Error occurs during firmware update if received
firmware file doesn’t pass certain checks (file length,
crc error).
2502 ERROR_PROGRAM_FLASH Error occurs during firmware update if verification of
programmed flash fails.
2503 ERROR_ACCESSING_FLASH Error occurs if during the firmware update flash
memory was accessed by another process.
2600 ERROR_TERM_FLASH_BUFF_ERR Error occurs in the terminal mode if the allocated
temp ram buffer can’t fit one page of flash memory.
2700 ERROR_XML_SP_OUT_OF_MEM Error occurs during setpoint file or password file xml
parsing if there is not enough space in ram for parser.
2710 ERROR_TAP_STAT_SIZE Tap statistic structure has incorrect size.
2800 ERROR_XML_DNPCFG_OUT_OF_ MEM Error occurs during dnp config file xml parsing if there
is not enough space in ram for parser.
9020 ERROR_UNAUTH_PROG_FL_ACCESS 9000 Error occurs if unauthorized read/write access from/
to program flash memory is detected (during normal
operation).
TCC300 693
User Manual
694
Appendix F Remote Ethernet file update utility
Section 15 Appendix F Remote Ethernet file update

utility
15.1 Remote Ethernet file update (REFU) utility
The REFU Utility is a stand alone PC application. The REFU Utility utilizes a file transfer
algorithm that ABB has implemented in the TCC300 firmware for transferring such files
as DNP device map files. The REFU Utility is capable of operation behind any secure
firewall or within any IT security policy imposed by a local administrator.
GUID-F8047708-1460-415C-A53F-A3E29D378EC0 V1 EN
Figure 477: Remote Ethernet File Update Utility Program Icon
15.2 Remote Ethernet firmware update
The Remote Ethernet Firmware Update element of the Remote Ethernet File Update
(REFU) Utility application allows the user to remotely update one or more control's
firmware to a new version, utilizing an ethernet connection.
TCC300 695
User Manual
GUID-E375AA47-312F-438C-864B-576D837C5B94 V1 EN
Figure 478: Remote Ethernet File Update Utility Program Icon
15.3 Remote Ethernet file update and cyber security
To comply with Cyber security requirements, the REFU Utility will prompt for a
password when launched. The default password is "BecoUpdate". This password is user
settable (alphanumeric and special characters) upon launching the program for the first
time and can also be changed from the File/Password menu.
Due to the sensitive nature of this utility, it is highly recommended not to distribute this
application to unauthorized users. Therefore, this application will not be available for
download from the ABB website. Furthermore, it is only available upon written request
from authorized personnel.
696 TCC300
User Manual
The Remote Ethernet Firmware Update application utilizes a special firmware update file
created by ABB that contains both the firmware version number in encrypted form and the
regular firmware file with the ".bot" extension and a version filter (optional). The
firmware update file format has an extension of ".upd". If the version filter is not included,
the application will not perform a version check prior to sending the firmware to the
control.
Additional features that apply to both Firmware and Data File modes:
• The user can select for each control, which file(s) to be updated by selecting the
appropriate check boxes.
• The utility can automatically generate consecutive IP Addresses, given a start IP
Address and the number of controls in that IP Address range. It is important to note
that the serial number verification by the utility is not performed when this feature is
used.
15.4 Updating Ethernet firmware remotely
These instructions describe the steps necessary to accomplish a remote

firmware update utilizing the user interface provided by the Remote
Ethernet File Update Utility. The actual dialog between the REFU Utility
and the Control is described in detail in the Firmware Update Sequence
section of this Appendix.
To remotely update the firmware of a control or a series of controls on an ethernet network

proceed as follows:
1. Verify that the following conditions exist:

• The Remote Ethernet File Update (REFU) Utility is installed and running on
a PC with access to the target ethernet network.
• A ".upd" file created by ABB that contains the firmware to be updated is
available.
2. Launch the Remote Ethernet File Update (REFU) Utility. The REFU dialog screen
will be displayed.
TCC300 697
User Manual
Figure 479: Remote Ethernet File Update Utility (Firmware File) Dialog Screen
3. Select "Firmware File".

4. Select "Choose File". The utility will prompt for the desired ".upd" file and location.
5. Select the ".upd" file. The utility will:
• Populate the "Firmware File" field with the path/file name
• Open the selected file and retrieve and decrypt the version information and
populate the "File Version" field with the firmware version
6. Enter the IP Address and the Serial Number of the control to be updated.
7. Select "Add". The information will be added to the list of controls to be updated.
Repeat Step 6 for any other controls to be updated.
The user can create a list of controls that will have their firmware updated. This list
can be saved if desired and can be retrieved for use at a later date. The list of controls
and their associated information (except for the "Update to Version") is stored in an
encrypted format.
698 TCC300
User Manual
8. From the Settings dropdown menu select the number of "Retries" to be attempted if
there is any failure to update the firmware on any control.
The maximum number of retries is 10. The default number of retries is 3. The range
is from 0 to 10.
9. Select the controls to be updated.
10. Select either "Update Selected" or "Update All" to start the update sequence.
The REFU Utility will start the update sequence for each control. The sequence is
described in detail in the Firmware Update Sequence described below.
Firmware Update Sequence Summary
1. The REFU Utility opens a TCP connection on port 62000.

2. The REFU Utility initiates the Authentication session by sending an encrypted hash
signature.
3. The Control verifies the received encrypted hash string.
4. If the Control can not verify the received encrypted hash string, then the connection
is automatically closed by the Control.
5. If the received hash string verification is successful, then the Control goes into the
programming mode.
6. The REFU Utility will then query the Control for the firmware version installed on
the Control and if selected, the serial number of the Control.
7. The REFU Utility will compare the installed firmware version received from the
Control, and if selected, the serial number to the REFU Utility internal serial number
and version filter, and continue as follows:
• If the installed firmware version is found to be a firmware version that does not
support remote ethernet firmware update, and/or if selected, the serial number
does not match, then after the selected number of attempts have also failed then
the REFU Utility will close the connection.
• If the comparison is successful, then update procedure continues.
8. The REFU Utility starts the file upload to the control.
9. When the file is completely uploaded to the Control, the control will verify the digital
signature of the firmware.
10. Based on the results of the verification, the control will proceed as follows:
• If the digital signature verification is unsuccessful, then the Control will send
the appropriate error message to the REFU Utility and terminate the update
session.
• If the digital signature verification is successful, then the programming
sequence will continue.
11. Prior to programming the flash, the following steps are taken:
TCC300 699
User Manual
11.1. A block of all automatic and remote operations is activated, leaving the Control
state unchanged.
11.2. All ongoing operations are terminated.
11.3. All setpoints and calibration data is backed up into internal data flash memory.
The update process, from erasing the Program Flash to complete

reprogramming takes approximately 15 seconds. Any error or loss of
power after the flash has been erased will be fatal to the control.
12. The flash programming is initiated as follows:

12.1. The entire Program Flash is erased.
12.2. The new firmware is burned into the program flash.
If for any reason the erasing or programming of the Program Flash is unsuccessful,
then the Control will terminate the update process and return to normal program
execution without rebooting.
The Control will also notify the REFU Utility by sending the appropriate error
message when queried. This type of error can result in the Program Flash not being
completely programmed. Therefore, the user should retry to update the firmware
again. A power loss in this condition will result in the Control not being able to reboot
properly.
13. When the burning of the firmware into the program flash has been completed, the
Control will Reboot.
14. When the Control has completed the reboot process, the Control will commence
normal operation subject to the previously saved setpoints and calibration data.
15. After the Control has completed its rebooting process the REFU Utility will reopen
a TCP connection on port 62000 and query for the firmware version number.
16. If the queried version number does not match the programmed version number, the
REFU Utility application will notify the user of the status of the process and allow the
user to repeat the update if desired.
17. If the queried version number matches the programmed version number, the
programming process has been successful.
15.5 Updating data file remotely
To remotely update selected data files of a control or a series of controls on an ethernet

network proceed as follows:
1. Verify that the following conditions exist:
700 TCC300
User Manual
• The Remote Ethernet File Update (REFU) Utility is installed and running on
a PC with access to the target ethernet network.
• The desired "DNP Configuration" file is available.
"User Access" and "IPsec Policy" files are not supported at this time.
2. Launch the Remote Ethernet File Update (REFU) Utility. The REFU dialog screen
will be displayed.
Figure 480: Remote Ethernet File Update Utility (Firmware File) Dialog Screen
3. Select "Data File". The REFU Data File dialog screen will be displayed.
TCC300 701
User Manual
GUID-7AEB4B87-0310-4AA6-9E25-424DC96615C7 V1 EN
Figure 481: Remote Ethernet File Update Utility (Data File) Dialog Screen
4. Select "Choose File" for the file(s) to be updated. The utility will prompt for the
desired file location and file name.
5. Select the desired file. The utility will populate the "DNP Configuration" field with
the path/file name.
6. Enter the IP Address and the Serial Number of the control to be updated.
7. Select "Add". The information will be added to the list of controls to be updated.
Repeat Step 6 for any other controls to be updated.
The user can create a list of controls that will have their data files updated. This list
can be saved if desired and can be retrieved for use at a later date. The list of controls
and their associated information (except for the "Update to Version") is stored in an
encrypted format.
8. From the Settings dropdown menu select the number of "Retries" to be attempted if
there is any failure to update the data files on any control.
The maximum number of retries is 10. The default number of retries is 3. The range
is from 0 to 10.
9. Select the controls to be updated.
10. Select the desired file types to be updated on each individual control.
11. Select either "Update Selected" or "Update All" to start the update sequence.
702 TCC300
User Manual
The REFU Utility will start the update sequence for each control. The sequence is
described in detail in the File Update Sequence described below.
File Update Sequence Summary
1. The REFU Utility opens a TCP connection on port 62000.

2. The authentication sequence is started with the control. The authentication sequence
is similar to the firmware update authentication.
• If the authentication sequence fails, then the connection is automatically closed
by the Control.
• If the authentication sequence is successful, then the Control starts the update
procedure.
3. The REFU Utility starts the file upload.
4. File transfer is complete.
TCC300 703
User Manual
704
Glossary
Section 16 Glossary
ANSI American National Standards Institute

CID Configured IED description
COMTRADE Common format for transient data exchange for power systems.
Defined by the IEEE Standard.
EMC Electromagnetic compatibility
HMI Human-machine interface
IEC 61850 International standard for substation communication and
modeling
LTC 1. Local time clock
2. Load tap changer
SCADA Supervision, control and data acquisition
SD Secure digital
TCC300 705
User Manual
—
ABB Distribution Solutions
Distribution Automation
P.O. Box 699
FI-65101 VAASA, Finland
Phone +358 10 22 11
ABB Inc.
655 Century Point
Lake Mary, FL 32746, USA
Phone +1-800-222 1946
www.abb.com/mediumvoltage
www.abb.com/substationautomation
1VAC388793-MB B
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved.

Tcc300 Ansi User 1vac388793-Mb Enb

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Tcc300 Ansi User 1vac388793-Mb Enb

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Tcc300 Ansi User 1vac388793-Mb Enb

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

—

Digital Tapchanger Control

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Section 2 TCC300 overview................................................................21

Clearing oscillograph records from the HMI................................. 44

Resetting individual demand history or energy metering values

Saving clone to a smart flash SD card....................................... 100

Section 4 TCC600............................................................................. 121

Convert Datalog File to CSV Format.......................................... 241

Section 5 System setup.....................................................................255

SCAMP initialize on power up......................................................... 288

Section 6 Configuration..................................................................... 323

Op Count Signal Alarm....................................................................333

Setting Load and/or Source VT Correction Factors from

Fast voltage recovery...................................................................... 396

Initializing Tap Position When Motor Direct Drive KeepTrack

Section 7 Setpoints........................................................................... 489

Selecting a setpoint profile for editing from TCC600.................. 491

Setting Reverse Power Operation and Power Direction Bias

Section 8 Installation......................................................................... 551

Testing control outputs......................................................................... 584

Section 10 Appendix A HMI................................................................ 595

Section 11 Appendix B Setpoint, Configuration and Communication

Section 12 Appendix C DNP Configuration Editor.............................. 671

Section 13 Appendix D IEC 61850 Configuration Editor..................... 681

Section 14 Appendix E Self-test error codes.......................................691

Section 15 Appendix F Remote Ethernet file update utility................. 695

Updating data file remotely................................................................... 700

Section 16 Glossary............................................................................ 705

1.1 This manual

1.2 Intended audience

1.3 Product documentation

1.3.1 Document revision history

Download the latest documents from the ABB Web site

1.4 Symbols and conventions

The caution icon indicates important information or warning related to the

1.4.2 Document conventions

Section 2 TCC300 overview

The TCC300 Digital Tapchanger Control is a microprocessor-based transformer and step-

Backup Power Real-Time

Bus I/O RAM

Line Current Display

USB Port RS-232 Port

SD Card Optional Bluetooth

Figure 1: Functional Diagram

Three Tapchanger operation counters are provided:

2.2 Adapter panel or surface mounting kit

Figure 2: Typical Adapter Panel Mounting

2.3.1 TCC600 Communications Software

2.3.2 Optional communication ports

2.3.3 M‑2025B(D) Current Loop Interface Modules

programmed number of tap positions depending on the tapchanger mechanism being

2.3.4 Backup relay

2.3.5 M‑2026 AC-DC control power backup supply

2.3.6 M‑2027 control power backup supply for AC only

2.3.7 B-0920 control power backup harness

2.3.8 M-2948 tap position sensor

3.1 Front panel controls and indicators

3.1.1 Display and push buttons

Figure 3: Front Panel